ChaseDream

标题: 俺的GMAT家 [打印本页]

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-5 17:30
标题: 俺的GMAT家
我觉得呀，必须要一个地方能汇总我的所有东西。天天东一榔头西一棒子的，东西都丢了。


资料汇贴

http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/thread-519351-1-1.html

机经汇总贴。


http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Math/thread-420286-1-1.html

ＧＷＤ　阅读笔记

http://forum.chasedream.com/archiver/GMAT_RC/thread-275383-3.html

学习经验
http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/thread-739174-1-1.html?extparms=ThreadCatalogID%3d25%26page%3d1
开始的时候，我很不喜欢看到安静呀，大道至简呀这样的说法的，觉得这些都是自己的心里感受。但这baby的心经真不错的。比如，阅读比语法重要，比如 逻辑参考资料使用。比如，学习SC的时候最好不要采用case这样的方法，就是一个题，追踪一个题，会有很多的总结出来。






56. The fewer restrictions there are on the advertising of legal services, the more lawyers there are who advertise their services, and the lawyers who advertise a specific service usually charge less for that service than the lawyers who do not advertise.  Therefore,  if the state removes any of its current restrictions, such as the one against advertisements that do not specify fee arrangements, overall consumer legal costs will be lower than if the state retains its current restrictions.
If the statements above are true, which of the following must be true?
(A) Some lawyers who now advertise will charge more  for specific services if they do not have to specify fee arrangements in the advertisements.
(B) More consumers will use  legal services if there are fewer restrictions on the advertising of legal services.
(C) If the restriction against advertisements that do not specify fee arrangements is removed, more lawyers will advertise their services.
(D) If more lawyers advertise lower prices for specific services, some lawyers who do not advertise will also charge less than they currently charge  for those services.
(E) If the only restrictions on the advertising of legal services were those that apply to every type  of advertising, most lawyers would advertise their services.

这题我做对了。估计是第一次，还是分类好。虽然我读题干的时候，我就觉得不成立，但是板着自己说要假设这个成立。所以A不对。后来选一个更像答案的答案就对了。但是还是不知道所以然。

OG Reasoning What conclusion can logically be drawn? The argument sets up an inverse proportion: the fewer the number of restrictions on ads, the greater the number of lawyers who advertise. This is true of all restrictions and all lawyers. Therefore, removing any one restriction necessarily increases the number of lawyers who advertise。

所以这个就是看第一句了。不用关心 the main conclusion .

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-11 15:10
Corporate response appears to have been substantial. According to figures collected in 1977, the total of corporate contracts with minority businesses rose from $77 million in 1972 to $1.1 billion in 1977. The projected total of corporate contracts with minority businesses for the early 1980’s is estimated to be over 53 billion per year with no letup anticipated in the next decade. Promising as it is for minority businesses, this increased patronage poses dangers for them, too. （这里是转折的意思吧, promising 这里被提前了，正常语序是 as it is promising for minority businesses,）First, minority firms risk expanding too fast and overextending themselves financially, since most are small concerns and, unlike large businesses, they often need to make substantial investments in new plants, staff, equipment, and the like in order to perform work subcontracted to them. If, thereafter, their subcontracts are for some reason reduced, such firms can face potentially crippling fixed expenses. （The world of corporate purchasing can be frustrating for small entrepreneurs who get requests for elaborate formal estimates and bids. Both consume valuable time and resources, and a small company’s efforts must soon result in orders, or both the morale and the financial health of the business will suffer.）（这里什么意思呀）

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-12 06:42
Yet there are also many ways our social statistics underestimate the degree of labor-market-related hardship. The unemployment counts exclude the millions of fully employed workers whose wages are so low that their families remain in poverty. Low wages and repeated or prolonged unemployment frequently interact to undermine the capacity for self-support. Since the number experiencing joblessness at some time during the year is several times the number unemployed in any month, those who suffer as a result of forced idleness can equal or exceed average annual unemployment, even though only a minority of the jobless in any month really suffer. For every person counted in the monthly unemployment tallies, there is another working part-time because of the inability to find full-time work, or else outside the labor force but wanting a job. Finally, income transfers in our country have always focused on the elderly, disabled, and dependent, neglecting the needs of the working poor, so that the dramatic expansion of cash and in-kind transfers does not necessarily mean that those failing in the labor market are adequately protected.

8.The conclusion stated in lines 33-39 about the number of people who suffer as a result of forced idleness depends primarily on the point that
(A) in times of high unemployment, there are some people who do not remain unemployed for long
(B) the capacity for self-support depends on receiving moderate-to-high wages
(C) those in forced idleness include, besides the unemployed, both underemployed part-time workers and those not actively seeking work
(D) at different times during the year, different people are unemployed
(E) many of those who are affected by unemployment are dependents of unemployed workers

这里是个逻辑题，我又做错了。

premise: For every person counted in the monthly unemployment tallies, there is another working part-time because of the inability to find full-time work, or else outside the labor force but wanting a job.
Conclusion: those who suffer as a result of forced idleness can equal or exceed average annnual unemployment.

Curbing government spending has been demonstrated to raise the value of a
country's currency over time. However, many economists no longer recommend
this policy. A currency of lesser value causes a country's exports to be
more cornpetitlye in the international market, encouraging domestic industries
and making the economy more attractive to foreign investment.
The statements above most strongly support which of the following
inferences
(A) Limited government spending can also lead to a reduction in the
national deficit.
(6) Curbing government spending can make a country's exports less
competitive.
(C) Many economists now recommend higher levels of government
spending.
(0) An increase in the value of a currency will result in reduced government
spending.
(E) Competitive exports indicate a-weak currency.
我对C的理解是错的。

2. Antarctic Meteorite
A detailed lab analysis of a meteorite recently discovered in Antarctica revealed that
the meteorite has geological characteristics common to the planet Mars. To date, scientists
have not found these characteristics anywhere other than on Mars. Using a
technique called "acid-etching," scientists found that the meteorite contained fossilized
remains of single-cell life forms.
The statements above, if true, best support which of the following as a conclusion?
(A) The fossilized remains indicate that life exists on Mars.
(B) The scientists have evidence to support a hypothesis that the meteorite came
from Mars.
(C) The meteorite represents a substantial step forward in human knowledge of the
development of life in the solar system.
(D) Undiscovered meteorites currently exist in Antarctica.
(E) "Acid-etching" is necessary to confirm the existence of fossilized remains in
meteorites.
This argument states that the fossilized remains of single cell life forms were found in-a meteorite
with geological characteristics unique to Mars. We should seek to eliminate answer choices that go
beyond the premises or are too extreme.
(A) This answer choice concludes too much by saying that there is presently life on Mars. This
answer is too extreme to be supported by the argument. For example, it is possible that the fossils
represent a form of life that has since died out on Mars.
(B) CORRECT. The passage states that the meteorites have geological characteristics currently only
known to exist on the planet Mars.
我怎讲就选了A。 时态呀。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-12 13:51
The Republicans in Congress will for understandable political reasons do everything they can to prevent the economy from improving before, and possibly after, the election, because they are committed to the position that Obama is responsible for the high unemployment rate.

这个部分倒装，我这是第三遍看出来的。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-12 15:07
（未解决）
When drive-ins were at the height of their popularity in the late 1950s, some 4,000 existed in the United States, but today there are less than one-quarter that many
A. there are less than one-quarter that many
B. there are fewer than one-quarter as many
C. there are fewer than one-quarter of that amount
D. the number is less than one-quarter the amount
E. it is less than one-quarter of that amount
A的问题 that的指代问题
变成 there are fewer than one-quarter that many 这样写行不行呀。

又来一个题

young adults used cocaine in 1979, doubling those reported in the 1977 survey.
(A) doubling those reported in the 1977 survey
(B) to double the number the 1977 survey reported
(C) twice those the 1977 survey reported
(D) twice as much as those reported in the 1977 survey
(E) twice the number reported in the 1977 survey

E

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-13 11:51
The ratings agency projects China's economy will grow around 8% this year, with the U.S. economy picking up strength in the second half of 2012 with about 2% growth.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-13 19:34
Vacations naturally took a hit during the Great Recession, giving rise to the staycation around 2008-09.

真被这个hit气的跳脚，什么呀。 原来hit是打，击的意思，但是这几天我被训练一看hit 就是movie, 就是成功。结果，这里还是原来的老意思。 我气。。。。。。。。。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-13 19:49
今天的阅读，我做了多久呀，久的我真不好意说了。

难句
A Brooklyn-based startup company called Loosecubes facilitates connections between people looking for space in which to camp out for a day or two and organizations that have space to share.

So when we decide to take a trip, we often like to go big or stay home. And research definitely shows that spending money on experiences like vacations can boost happiness much more than simply buying a bunch of stuff. But it’s often best to trade time for intensity when going on a trip. Research has shown that sometimes the richer the experience, even if it’s not as long as we’d like, is often more fulfilling.

Many of us lament the dramatic contrast between our vacations and the faster pace of our work lives, but are generally remiss to change because of feelings of career vulnerability or weakness that we fear it could project.
it 指什么

Casual seating areas are incorporated into many contemporary work settings to give people space to think.

Vacations naturally took a hit during the Great Recession, giving rise to the staycation around 2008-09.

Time one： we need to slow down and the reason why we feel our working pace is fast.
Time 2: According to the research, slow down means to establish a balance between mindfull works and mindfree works.
Time 3: two methords: schedule an interrupted time for yourself; taking the time to walk to a different corner of the buildings(The benefits are do some excercise, meeting some colleague who may provide your a different perspective, meeting different colleague will also strength the prefessional relationship.).
Time 4: another two methords: break out; "cowork" with other strangers
Time 5: U.S. will spend less on vocation and the author suggest not to take a longer trip.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-14 08:38
风静静的签名 如果单词不认识，句子读不懂，文章看不懂，那还谈什么GMAT，我现在很depressed！！怎么办，读啊，往死里读！！！
每天保证3个小时的阅读！！！

我很喜欢这个签名，很正视问题。我也是给阅读的时间少了。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-18 18:22
我发现一个问题，must be true 这样的题，越是复杂越是不仅仅关注最后的结论，往往开始的地方会有generalization的

56. The fewer restrictions there are on the advertising of legal services, the more lawyers there are who advertise their services, and the lawyers who
advertise a specific service usually charge less for that service than the lawyers who do not advertise.  Therefore,  if the state removes any of its
current restrictions, such as the one against advertisements that do not specify fee arrangements, overall consumer legal costs will be lower than if the
state retains its current restrictions.
If the statements above are true, which of the following must be true?
(A) Some lawyers who now advertise will charge more  for specific services if they do not have to specify fee arrangements in the advertisements.
(B) More consumers will use  legal services if there are fewer restrictions on the advertising of legal services.
(C) If the restriction against advertisements that do not specify fee arrangements is removed, more lawyers will advertise their services.
(D) If more lawyers advertise lower prices for specific services, some lawyers who do not advertise will also charge less than they currently charge  for
those services.
(E) If the only restrictions on the advertising of legal services were those that apply to every type  of advertising, most lawyers would advertise their
services.
Premise: the state removes any of its surrent restrictions, such as the one against advertisement that do not specify fee arrangements,
Conclusion: overall legal cose will be lower than
This final conclusion is worong. I should not pay attention to

12 Large national budget deficits do not cause large trade deficits.  If they did, countries with the largest budget deficits would also have the largest
trade deficits. In fact, when deficit figures are adjusted so that different countries are reliably comparable to each other, there is no such correlation.

If the statements above are all true, which of the following can properly be inferred on the basis of them?
(Al Countries with large national budget deficits tend to restrict foreign trade.
(8l Reliable comparisons of the deficit figures of one country with those of another are impossible.
(Cl Reducing a country's national budget deficit will not necessarily result in a lowering of any trade deficit that country may have.  
(0) When countries are ordered from largest to smallest in terms of population , the smallest countries generally have the smallest budget and trade
deficits.
(El  Countries with the largest trade deficits never have similarly large national budget deficits.

Large national budget deficits do not cause large trade deficits.  If they did, countries with the largest budget deficits would also have the largest
trade deficits.
Conclusion ：Reducing a country's national budget deficit will not necessarily result in a lowering of any trade deficit that country may have.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-18 18:58
A moderate fever stimulates the activity of the body’s disease-fighting white blood cells and also inhibits the growth of many strains of disease-causing bacteria.

这个地方是连字符呀，

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-19 19:26
weaken 题怎么这么多的D，
main conclusion 的题 怎么这么多的C

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-19 19:34
30 . Robot satellites relay important communications and identify weather patterns. Because the satellites can be repaired only in orbit, astronauts are needed to epair them. Without repairs, the satellites would eventually malfunction. Therefore, space flights carrying astronauts must continue.
Which of the following, if true, would most seriously weaken the argument above
(A) Satellites falling from orbit because of malfunctions burn up in the atmosphere.
(B) Although satellites are indispensable in the identification of weather patterns, weather forecasters also make some use of computer projections to identify weather patterns.
(C) The government , responding to public pressure,has decided to cut the budget for space flights and put more money into social welfare programs.
(D) Repair of satellites requires heavy equipment, which adds to the amount of fuel needed to lift a spaceship carrying astronauts into orbit.
(E) Technical obsolescence of robot satellites makes repairing them more costly and less practical than sending new, improved satellites into orbit.

Premise: Because the satellites can be repaired in orbit, astronauts are needed
Conclusion: space flights carrying astronauts must continue.

我不知道人家是怎么强调的，但是被大牛洗礼后终于看到了这两个词。

A magazine published an article proclaiming that one canget a promotion
by playing golf with one's boss. Kevin concludes that the bestway for him to
get promoted is to take golf lessons and join his boss's country club.

这两个题犯的逻辑错误是一样的。 都是在有多种可能达到一种结果的时候， 把其中一种可能的路径说成了唯一的路径。

---

作者: jeffery2541    时间: 2012-7-20 08:53
加油！！！

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-20 09:49

加油！！！

-- by 会员 jeffery2541 (2012/7/20 8:53:13)

恩恩

---

作者: 风静静    时间: 2012-7-20 23:05

风静静的签名 如果单词不认识，句子读不懂，文章看不懂，那还谈什么GMAT，我现在很depressed！！怎么办，读啊，往死里读！！！
每天保证3个小时的阅读！！！

我很喜欢这个签名，很正视问题。我也是给阅读的时间少了。

-- by 会员 女王的肥皂 (2012/7/14 8:38:18)

今天听某位CDer说这里有写到我~~来看看~~突然觉得很开心····嘻嘻~~~明天我要加倍努力看书~~一起加油哦~~

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-21 08:05
加油呀。

风静静的签名 如果单词不认识，句子读不懂，文章看不懂，那还谈什么GMAT，我现在很depressed！！怎么办，读啊，往死里读！！！
每天保证3个小时的阅读！！！

我很喜欢这个签名，很正视问题。我也是给阅读的时间少了。

-- by 会员 女王的肥皂 (2012/7/14 8:38:18)

今天听某位CDer说这里有写到我~~来看看~~突然觉得很开心····嘻嘻~~~明天我要加倍努力看书~~一起加油哦~~

-- by 会员 风静静 (2012/7/20 23:05:41)

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-30 10:41
victorian prudery rendered all experience that was uniquely feminine unprintable

表示我对这句话的愤慨

---

作者: 晨依Jacqueline    时间: 2012-7-30 12:26
感觉这个形式很好哎
以后我也要丰富自己的日记 也要这么有营养~
加油啦~~

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-30 13:41

感觉这个形式很好哎
以后我也要丰富自己的日记 也要这么有营养~
加油啦~~

-- by 会员 晨依Jacqueline (2012/7/30 12:26:39)

但是我三天打鱼两天晒网的本质也暴露出来了。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-30 18:39
Although the discount stores in Goreville’s central shopping district are expected to close within five years as a result of competition from a SpendLess discount department store that just opened, those locations will not stay vacant for long. In the five years since the opening of Colson’s, a non-discount department store, a new store has opened at the location of every store in the shopping district that closed because it could not compete with Colson’s.

每次看到这个就各种抓狂。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-7-31 19:41
别人的总结，直接搬过来了。



今天在看Manhattan第六章，对介词短语的修饰问题疑惑了很久，后来查询，思考颇多，与大家分享我的收获。
介词短语修饰问题：
在做看Manhattan的时候明白，介词短语可以做一下成分。
1） noun modifier：就近修饰。GMAT大多数的介词短语是作为noun modifier就近修饰前面的名词。Manhattan举例：ON the couch. the cat took a nap.
The cat ON the couch took a nap.
2） verb modifier：修饰主句的动词，逻辑主语是谓语动词的主语。Manhattan举例：
ON Mondays, I walk to the store.
I walk to the store ON Mondays.

但我对介词短语何时是noun modifier，何时是verb modifier产生了不少疑惑。因为不论属于哪种都可以放到名词前也可以放到名词后。放到名词前面还好说，放到后面就会疑惑了，到底是修饰的句子还是名词？
OG 18题
18. Plants are more efficient at acquiring carbon than are fungi, in the form of carbon dioxide, and converting it to energy-rich sugars.
(A) Plants are more efficient at acquiring carbon than are fungi,
(B) Plants are more efficient at acquiring carbon than fungi,
(C) Plants are more efficient than fungi at acquiring carbon,
(D) Plants, more efficient than fungi at acquiring carbon,
(E) Plants acquire carbon more efficiently than fungi,
A,B,E选项解释都说in the form of carbon dioxide就近修饰fungi，修饰错误。我就困惑了，为什么不能算做是verb modifier修饰前面的动词呢？什么情况才是做verb modifier，什么时候做noun modifier?
查了很多帖子，总结如下：
1：大多数是就近修饰名词。做noun modifier.
2：如果是做verb modifier，介词短语就是作状语，大多数的题目都是将介词短语放在句首的。因为一旦放在一个名词后面后面很容易出现修饰歧义。
3：但是最终判断的标准是要看逻辑意思，比如上题，in the…修饰verb，其主语为plants是否合理？明显是不合理的。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-1 08:28
Recent years have brought minority-owned businesses in the United States unprecedented opportunities - as well as new and significant risks. Civil rights activists have long argued that one of the principal reasons why Blacks, Hispanics, and other minority groups have difficulty establishing themselves in business is that they lack access to the sizable orders and subcontracts that are generated by large companies. Now Congress, in apparent agreement, has required by law that businesses awarded federal contracts of more than $500,000 do their best to find minority subcontractors and record their efforts to do so on forms filed with the government. Indeed, some federal and local agencies have gone so far as to set specific percentage goals for apportioning parts of public works contracts to minority enterprises.
Corporate response appears to have been substantial. According to figures collected in 1977, the total of corporate contracts with minority businesses rose from $77 million in 1972 to $1.1 billion in 1977. The projected total of corporate contracts with minority businesses for the early 1980's is estimated to be over 53 billion per year with no letup anticipated in the next decade. Promising as it is for minority businesses, this increased patronage poses dangers for them, too.First, minority firms risk expanding too fast and overextending themselves financially, since most are small concerns and, unlike large businesses, they often need to make substantial investments in new plants, staff, equipment, and the like in order to perform work subcontracted to them. If, thereafter, their subcontracts are for some reason reduced, such firms can face potentially crippling fixed expenses. The world of corporate purchasing can be frustrating for small entrepreneurs who get requests for elaborate formal estimates and bids. Both consume valuable time and resources, and a small company's efforts must soon result in orders, or both the morale and the financial health of the business will suffer.
A second risk is that White-owned companies may seek to cash in on the increasing apportionments through formation of joint ventures with minority-owned concerns. Of course, in many instances there are legitimate reasons for joint ventures; clearly, White and minority enterprises can team up to acquire business that neither could acquire alone. But civil rights groups and minority business owners have complained to Congress about minorities being set up as “fronts (a person, group, or thing used to mask the identity or true character or activity of the actual controlling agent)” with White backing, rather than being accepted as full partners in legitimate joint ventures.
Third, a minority enterprise that secures the business of one large corporate customer often runs the danger of becoming-and remaining-dependent. Even in the best of circumstances, fierce competition from larger, more established companies makes it difficult for small concerns to broaden their customer bases: when such firms have nearly guaranteed orders from a single corporate benefactor, they may truly have to struggle against complacency arising from their current success.

2.The passage supplies information that would answer which of the following questions?
(A) What federal agencies have set percentage goals for the use of minority-owned businesses in public works contracts?
(B) To which government agencies must businesses awarded federal contracts report their efforts to find minority subcontractors?
(C) How widespread is the use of minority-owned concerns as “fronts” by White backers seeking to obtain subcontracts?
(D) How many more minority-owned businesses were there in 1977 than in 1972?（E）
(E) What is one set of conditions under which a small business might find itself financially overextended?

这个答案我在文中找不到答案呀。 If, thereafter, their subcontracts are for some reason reduced, such firms can face potentially crippling fixed expenses. 是这句吗？

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-1 11:45
Since Would War II considerable advances have been made in the area of health-care services. These include better access to health care (particularly for the poor and minorities), improvements in physical plants, and increased numbers of physicians and other health personnel. All have played a part in the recent improvement in life expectancy. But there is mounting criticism of the large remaining gaps in access, unbridled cost inflation, the further fragmentation of service, excessive indulgence in wasteful high-technology “gadgeteering,” and a breakdown in doctor-patient relationships. In recent years proposed panaceas and new programs, small and large, have proliferated at a feverish pace and disappointments multiply at almost the same rate. This has led to an increased pessimism—“everything has been tried and nothing works”—which sometimes borders on cynicism or even nihilism.
It is true that the automatic “pass through” of rapidly spiraling costs to government and insurance carriers, which was set in a publicized environment of “the richest nation in the world,” produced for a time a sense of unlimited resources and allowed to develop a mood whereby every practitioner and institution could “do his own thing” without undue concern for the “Medical Commons.” The practice of full-cost reimbursement encouraged capital investment and now the industry is overcapitalized. Many cities have hundreds of excess hospital beds; hospitals have proliferated a superabundance of high-technology equipment; and structural ostentation and luxury were the order of the day. In any given day, one-fourth of all community beds are vacant; expensive equipment is underused or, worse, used unnecessarily. Capital investment brings rapidly rising operating costs.
Yet, in part, this pessimism derives from expecting too much of health care. It must be realized that care is, for most people, a painful experience, often accompanied by fear and unwelcome results. Although there is vast room for improvement, health care will always retain some unpleasantness and frustration. Moreover, the capacities of medical science are limited. Humpty Dumpty cannot always be put back together again. Too many physicians are reluctant to admit their limitations to patients; too many patients and families are unwilling to accept such realities. Nor is it true that everything has been tried and nothing works, as shown by the prepaid group practice plans of the Kaiser Foundation and at Puget Sound. In the main, however, such undertakings have been drowned by a veritable flood of public and private moneyswhich have supported and encouraged the continuation of conventional practices and subsidized their shortcomings on a massive, almost unrestricted scale. Except for the most idealistic and de
dicated, there were no incentives to seek change or to practice self-restraint or frugality. In this atmosphere, it is not fair to condemn as failures all attempted experiments; it may be more accurate to say many never had a fair trial.

表蓝这话什么意思？回来再看

1. The author implies that the Kaiser Foundation and Puget Sound plans differed from other plans by
(A) encouraging capital investment
(B) requiring physicians to treat the poor
(C) providing incentives for cost control
(D) employing only dedicated and idealistic doctors
(E) relying primarily on public funding
2. The author mentions all of the following as consequences of full-cost reimbursement EXCEPT
(A) rising operating costs
(B) underused hospital facilities
(C) overcapitalization
(D) overreliance on expensive equipment
(E) lack of services for minorities
3. The tone of the passage can best be described as
(A) light-hearted and amused
(B) objective but concerned
(C) detached and unconcerned
(D) cautious but sincere
(E) enthusiastic and enlightened
4. According to the author, the “pessimism” mentioned at line 35 is partly attributable to the fact that
(A) there has been little real improvement in health-care services
(B) expectations about health-care services are sometimes unrealistic
(C) large segments of the population find it impossible to get access to health-care services
(D) advances in technology have made health care service unaffordable
(E) doctors are now less concerned with patient care
5. The author cites the prepaid plans in lines 46-48 as
(A) counterexamples to the claim that nothing has worked
(B) examples of health-care plans that were over-funded
(C) evidence that health-care services are fragmented
(D) proof of the theory that no plan has been successful
(E) experiments that yielded disappointing results
6. It can be inferred that the sentence “Humpty Dumpty cannot always be put back together again” means that
(A) the cost of health-care services will not decline
(B) some people should not become doctors
(C) medical care is not really essential to good health
(D) illness is often unpleasant and even painful
(E) medical science cannot cure every ill
7. With which of the following descriptions of the system for the delivery of health-care services would the author most likely agree?
(A) It is biased in favor of doctors and against patients.
(B) It is highly fragmented and completely ineffective
(C) It has not embraced new technology rapidly enough
(D) It is generally effective but can be improved
(E) It discourages people from seeking medical care
8. Which of the following best describes the logical structure of the selection?
(A) The third paragraph is intended as a refutation of the first and second paragraphs.
(B) The second and third paragraphs explain and put into perspective the points made in the first paragraph.
(C) The second and third paragraphs explain and put into perspective the points made in the first paragraph.
(D) The first paragraph describes a problem, and the second and third paragraphs present two horns of a dilemma.
(E) The first paragraph describes a problem, the second its causes, and the third a possible solution.
9. The author’s primary concern is to
(A) criticize physicians and health-care administrators for investing in techno¬logically advanced equipment
(B) examine some problems affecting delivery of health-care services and assess their severity
(C) defend the medical community from charges that health-care has not improved since World War II
(D) analyze the reasons for the health-care industry’s inability to provide quality care to all segments of the population
(E) describe the peculiar economic features of the health-care industry that are the causes of spiraling medical costs
Highlight to see answers: 1. C 2. E 3. B 4. B 5. A 6. E 7. D 8. C 9. B

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-1 15:17
due¹
due¹W1S1/dju? US du?/adj
1【expected】
2【owed】
3【money】
4 in due course
5【proper】
6 with (all) due respect[Date: 1200-1300; Language: Old French;Origin: deu 'owed', past participle of devoir 'to owe', from Latin debere; DEBT]
【EXPECTED】 [not before noun]
expected to happen or arrive at a particular time
due to do sth
　The team are due to fly to Italy next month.
　His new book is due to be published next year.
due in/on/at
　She's pregnant and the baby's due in April.
　The final results of the experiment are due on December 9.
　I'm due at his office at 4.30.
due for
　The car is due for its annual service again.
due back
　When are the library books due back?
→due date
【OWED】
owed to someone either as a debt or because they have a right to it
　Any money due you will be sent by cheque through the post.
due to
　Thanks are due to all those who took part.
【MONEY】
if an amount of money is due, it must be paid at a particular time
　The next income tax payment is due on 31 January.
in due course
at some time in the future when it is the right time, but not before
　Further details will be announced in due course.
【PROPER】 [only before noun]formal
proper or suitable
　He was banned for six months for driving without due care and attention.
due regard/consideration
　We want the best for each individual child with due regard for the interests of the other children.（我把这里的with phrase 看成each individual children的修饰语）
with (all) due respect （with due respect to sb, 出于对sb的尊重； with my all due respect，恕我直言）
spoken used when you disagree with someone or criticize them in a polite way
　Dad, with all due respect, was not a very good husband.
→duly, due to

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-1 17:14
我是在做傻事吗？没办法，我不背成这样子，我自己很难舒服的。


NOTE ON USAGE 用法:
1.When speaking about who or what remains from an original total, we use the rest or (more formal) remainder
    Some boys stay on after school; the rest/remainder (of them) go home. 放学後总有些男孩子不走, 其余的人回家.
    The rest/remainder of the time was spent swimming. 剩下的时间用来游泳.
2. If something has been partly used or destroyed, we use remains or remnants. Of food left-overs is often used
    The remains/remnants/left-overs of the meal (ie the bits of food left uneaten) were fed to the dog. 剩饭喂狗了.
3. Remains is also used of old buildings or dead bodies
   the remains of an old castle 古堡的废墟
   human remains 人的遗体.
4.A relic is a historical object and reminder of the past.  
5.A residue is what is left after a process, especially a chemical one, has taken place.  
    There is a green residue in the bottom of the test tube. 试管底部有绿色的沉淀.
6. In a mathematical calculation the remainder (in arithmetic) or the balance (in accounting) is the amount left after subtraction or division. 在数学计算中remainder指（算术中的）差数或余数, balance指（会计学中的）余额或差额.
7.vestige n 遗迹(这个遗迹更多是制度上的，不像relic)；退化器官 Most people have curiously rejected Confucianism, butthe vestige of old order remains
8. surplusn/adj.amount left over after one has used all that one needs; amount by which money received is greater than money spent 剩余（额）; 过剩; 盈余; 顺差: Surpluses of food can be sold for cash. 多余的食物可卖钱. * We have a trade surplus of 400 million. 我们有4亿英镑的贸易顺差

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-2 16:01
话说不是背单词， 我会注意 radiate 和 irradiate 的区别吗 ？ 让我死吧，死吧。

Radiation is emitted from something and travels from its point of origin to somewhere else.
When radiation hits something else (and is therefore stopped) the thing that has been hit is said to have been irradiated.

Thus a sunbather is undergoing irradiation by radiation emitted by the sun.

似乎挺简单的呀，这都是什么词典呀，我看半天都是一个意思。

Microwave irradiations are considered unequivocally to produce "thermal effects."

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-3 09:52
第三天，后遗症就出来了。 听听力，也没有反应了。 不知道说的是啥了。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-3 19:07
stringent/strict(反义词 lenient) person : 严格是那种你必须听我的（obey）严格，就像老师对学生；家长对孩子
stringent economy: 银根紧缩的经济
strict: in the strictest sense of the word 严格意义上讲

Severe /stern person: 我觉得翻译成严肃比较好，是指那种酷酷的，不讲感情，没有多少友爱精神的人。

Severe （核心意思：极）
Strict  （核心意思：遵守）

rigorous: 准确的，精确的
               a rigorous analysis of defense needs
              the rigorous standards required by the college
rigid（反义词flexible）: 僵化的
             rigid and authoritarian methords.

austere: 简朴的，清教徒般的。

stringent
/ ?str?nd??nt; ˋstr?nd??nt/ adj
(of a law, rule, etc) that must be obeyed; strict or severe （指法律﹑ 规则等）必须遵守的, 严格的, 严厉的: a stringent ban onsmoking 禁止吸烟的严格规定.
(of financial conditions) difficult because there is not enough money （指财务状况）因缺钱而困难的, 银根紧的: a stringent economic climate 窘迫的经济情势. > stringency / -ns?; -ns?/ n : in these days of financial stringency 在银根收缩的这段日子里. stringently adv: The regulations must be stringently observed. 这些规则必须严格遵守。

severe
se·vere
W2S3/s??v?? US -?v?r/adj1【very serious】
2【weather】
3【punishment】
4【criticism】
5【difficult】
6【person】
7【plain】

[Date: 1500-1600; Language: French;Origin: sévère, from Latin severus]
【VERY SERIOUS】
severe problems, injuries, illnesses etc are very bad or very serious
　His injuries were quite severe.
　She's suffering from severe depression.
　The US faces severe economic problems.
　The storm caused severe damage.
【WEATHER】
severe weather is very bad and very extreme, and very hot, dry, cold etc
【PUNISHMENT】
a severe punishment is very strict or extreme
　Drug smugglers can expect severe penalties.
【CRITICISM】
severe criticism is very extreme and shows that you think someone has done something very badly
　The president came under severe criticism for his handling of the crisis.
【DIFFICULT】
very difficult and needing a lot of effort and skill
　The negotiations will be a severe test of his abilities.
【PERSON】
someone who is severe behaves in a way that does not seem friendly or sympathetic, and is very strict or disapproving
= stern
　His slightly severe expression softened.
【PLAIN】
very plain with little or no decoration
　a rather severe red-brick building


strict


strict
S3/str?kt/adj comparativestrictersuperlativestrictest
[Date: 1400-1500; Language: Latin;Origin: strictus, past participle of stringere; STRINGENT]
expecting people to obey rules or to do what you say
≠ lenient
　a strict teacher
strict about
　This company is very strict about punctuality.
strict with
　The Stuarts are very strict with their children.
a strict order or rule is one that must be obeyed
　You had strict instructions not to tell anybody.
　There are strict limits on presidential campaign contributions.
　He's under strict orders from his doctor to quit smoking.
　I'm telling you this in the strictest confidence (=it must be kept completely secret) .
[usually before noun]
exact and correct, often in a way that seems unreasonable
　Amy was attractive, although not beautiful in the strictest sense of the word .
obeying all the rules of a religion or set of principles
　He was raised a strict Catholic.
　a strict vegetarian

rigid
ri·gid /?r?d??d/ adj
[Date: 1400-1500; Language: Latin; Origin: rigidus, from rigere 'to be stiff']
rigid methods, systems etc are very strict and difficult to change
≠ flexible
　rigid and authoritarian methods of education
someone who behaves in a rigid way is very unwilling to change their ideas or behaviour
≠ flexible
　rigid adherence to old-fashioned ideas
　She maintained rigid control over her emotional and sexual life.
stiff and not moving or bending
≠ flexible
　rigid plastic

rigorous
rig·or·ous /?r?g?r?s/ adj
careful, thorough, and exact
　a rigorous analysis of defence needs
　the rigorous standards required by the college
very severe or strict
　rigorous army training


austere
aus·tere /???st??, ?- US ???st?r/ adj
[Date: 1300-1400; Language: Latin;Origin: austerus, from Greek austeros 'severe']
plain and simple and without any decoration
　the church's austere simplicity
someone who is austere is very strict and serious - used to show disapproval
　Her father is a very austere man.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-4 12:44
一小时争取过完旧单词

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-7 21:47
NOTE ON USAGE 用法: There are a number of verbs which describe abnormal ways of walking. 有几个动词可用以表示不正常的行走方式.
1.Shuffle and shamble indicate moving without lifting the feet completely off the ground. *shuffle和shamble均指行走时脚不完全离开地面.
Shuffle suggests a slow, tired movement; shamble may be faster and more careless
The queue of prisoners shuffled towards the door. 那队囚犯拖着沉重的步子向门口蹭去.
The beggar shambled past us. 那个乞丐脚蹭着地从我们身旁走过.
2.Stagger and stumble suggest unsteady or uncontrolledmovement.
   A person staggers when carrying a heavy load or when drunk.  We stumble when we hit our feet against unseen objects.
stumble and tumble have similar meanings for the patterns of walking. But in some context, stumble may suggest some mistakes of reading or speaking.  
I hope I do not stumble over any of the long words.
3.Waddle is used humorously to describe someone swaying from side to side like a duck because of fatness or while carrying heavy bags.
4.Hobble and limp describe the uneven movement of someone whose legs are injured.Limp is used especially when only one leg is damaged or stiff. *limp专用以指单腿受伤或强直.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-9 14:44
再和自己说一遍，多看科技文章，多看科技文章。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-9 19:12
1. Your diligence examplifies the characterics of a good employee.
2. He was usually exonerated from any blame.
3. Lack the expertise to question medical decisions.
4. Bill expired in his sleep after a long illness.
5. Members are united by explicit bonds of love.
6. Explusion of the military adviser
7. The installment will extend over a period of 3 years.
8. Extinguish the empire altogether.
9. Elections are necessary for the sustenance of democracy.
10.American Indian poetry is always fully woven into the fabirc of ordinary life.
11.The function of capital market is to facilitate an exchange of funds among all participants.
12. use faculty of observation
13. Even during the war, I kept faith in government.
14. fetch for unprecedented prices.
15. file complaint/divorce.
16. legislative assembly
17. a flat rate per $1000
18. smell and taste sensation
19. people are friendly, environment is safe, and the arts are flourish.
20. Extinct volcano

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-10 10:24
1.A specail news report preempted the scheduled program.
2. She lay there inert.
3. Expedient: helping you to do sth qickly and effectively although sometimes in a way that is not morally right.
  This solution is plitically expedient but may cause long-term problems.
  Secientific archeological expendition
3. Most lands suitable for farming have been already exploited.
4. exlore the way of reducing costs. unexplored(未调查过的)
5. Animals have a natural instinct for survival.
6. A glass of orange squash.
  There is any sustenance in a glass of orange squash.
7. extract ink from recycle newspaper. extracted(萃取的)
8. This information is extraneous to the matter in hand.
  Irrelevant= extraneuous, extrinsic.
  relevant= pertiment
  extraneous sound(外来的，杂音) extrinsic fact(非本质的 instrinsic, 非本质问题)
9. a fervent appeal for world peace (believing or feeling something very strongly and sincerely)
  a ardent supporter of free trade. (showing strong positive feelings about an activity and determination to succeed at it)
  strenuous and arduous 费力气的。 strenuous/ardent physical fitness program
10. exhuastive= through=complete

factorization fatality fracture faction filament unferrous metal(竟然是有色金属的意思)

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-10 14:40
demonstrate a clear relationship between the motivation to prove that co-workers are saying bad things about you and an increase in paranoia, suspicious behavior of your own and peer rejection.
The best strategy for dealing with such types is often to avoid prolonged or in-depth interactions with them whenever possible.
But if your first thought when reading about the study’s finding was more cynical — i.e., But what if someone really is trying to undermine me? — you just might be the sucker at the table. 条件从句的地方一定要按照语法来，不要自己语感下发挥。
Just because you’re paranoid doesn’t mean someone’s not out to get you. It means they may be out to get you because you’re paranoid!
so the best strategy for dealing with potential workplace “frenemies” is to give them the benefit of the doubt, even if it feels like you’re exposing yourself to harm.
And there is also a stream of research that shows that when people do something bad to others, they are highly motivated to rationalize it. One way to do this is to assign more negative attributes to people whom they harm as a way of making the harm-doer feel like the person deserved it.”神呀，这句子
spotlight effect
there’s a good chance that the harm you may incur by failing to be as “vigilant” (a.k.a. paranoid) as you might otherwise be will pale in comparison with the benefits you’ll garner when your colleagues slowly start to realize you’re not such a sneaky gossip after all. 有些时候不关注细节了，我更能知道这个句话是什么意思了。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-10 14:45
我忽然想起这个场景：

图书馆里一个学姐冷哈哈的拿着杯子看英文杂志。 管理员过来说了什么，打击到她。结果人家一走，她自己对自己说，我一定会出去（出国）的。

不知道怎么回事，读文章的时候，回想到这个场景。

再次发挥我天马行空的思维，就是要多读英文文章。文章读多了，一定会会考过的。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-14 14:52
Woodrow Wilson was referring to the liberal idea of the economic market when he said that the free enterprise system is the most efficient economic system. Maximum freedom means maximum productiveness; our “openness” is to be the measure of our stability.（这句话我觉得这个文章的核心）Fascination with this ideal has made Americans defy the “Old World” categories of settled possessiveness versus unsettling deprivation, the cupidity of retention versus the cupidity of seizure, a “status quo” defended or attacked. （2）（前面是旧世界，或英国世界，后者是新世界，或美国世界。）The United States, it was believed, had no status quo ante. Our only “station” was the turning of a stationary wheel, spinning faster and faster. We did not base our system on property but opportunity—which meant we based it not on stability but on mobility. The more things changed, that is, the more rapidly the wheel turned, the steadier we would be. The conventional picture of class politics is composed of the Haves, who want a stability to keep what they have, and the Have-Nots, who want a touch of instability and change in which to scramble for the things they have not. But Americans imagined a condition in which speculators, self-makers, runners are always using the new opportunities given by our land. These economic leaders (front-runners) would thus be mainly agents of change. The nonstarters were considered the ones who wanted stability, a strong refereeto give them some position in the race, a regulative hand to calm manic speculation; an authority that can call things to a halt, begin things again from compensatory staggered “starting lines.”
“Reform” in America has been sterilebecause it can imagine no change except through the extension of this metaphor of a race, wider inclusion of competitors, “a piece of the action,” as it were, for the disenfranchised.（4）（5） There is no attempt to call off the race. Since our only stability is change, America seems not to honor the quiet work that achieves social interdependence and stability. There is, in our legends（7）, no heroism of the office clerk, no stable industrial work force of the people who actually make the system work. There is no pride in being an employee (Wilson asked for a return to the time when everyone was an employer). There has been no boasting about our social workers—they are merely signs of the system’s failure, of opportunity denied or not taken, of things to be eliminated. We have no pride in our growing interdependence, in the fact that our system can serve others, that we are able to help those in need; empty boasts from the past make us ashamed of our present achievements, make us try to forget or deny them, move away from them. There is no honor but in the Wonderland race we must all run, all trying to win, none winning in the end (for there is no end)（6）.

这个文章典型的开始解释一个观点，之后反对这个观点。
从实际意义上，这个观点对不对，我没有办法评价。就像一个人的成功，人都会说是自己努力的结果。我也很疑惑。
自由=生产力。原来没有注意的这种说法。

错： 1， 4， 6， 9
我觉得1和9 应该放在一起解决，
错了这么多，错吧。
像是作者不是在指责美国的经济体系的竞争性太强，而是指责美国经济只强调竞争，没有变化。


1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) criticize the inflexibility of American economic mythology
(B) contrast “Old World” and “New World” economic ideologies
(C) challenge the integrity of traditional political leaders
(D) champion those Americans whom the author deems to be neglected
(E) suggest a substitute for the traditional metaphor of a race
主旨题 我忽然觉得 第二段第一句能很好揭示这个问题。 “Reform” was sterilize.

2. According to the passage, “Old World” values were based on
(A) ability
(B) property
(C) family connections
(D) guild hierarchies
(E) education

3. In the context of the author’s discussion of regulating change, which of the following could be most probably regarded as a “strong referee” (line 30) in the United States?
(A) A school principal
(B) A political theorist
(C) A federal court judge
(D) A social worker
(E) A government inspector
这题，我在文中没有找到答案。答案是我猜的。没想到我猜对了。理论家的用处就是你和人家吵架的时候，能给你一个论据。

4. The author sets off the word “Reform” (line 35) with quotation marks in order to
(A) emphasize its departure from the concept of settled possessiveness
(B) show his support for a systematic program of change
(C) underscore the flexibility and even amorphousness of United States society
(D) indicate that the term was one of Wilson’s favorites
(E) assert that reform in the United States has not been fundamental
第二遍：我真不知道BE的区别，难道是因为sterile 这个词的含义我还是不明白？
Refrom
Reform has been sterile.
看来是我读错了。

5. It can be inferred from the passage that the author most probably thinks that giving the disenfranchised “a piece of the action” (line 38) is
(A) a compassionate, if misdirected, legislative measure
(B) an example of Americans’ resistance to profound social change
(C) an innovative program for genuine social reform
(D) a monument to the efforts of industrial reformers
(E) a surprisingly “Old World” remedy for social ills

6. Which of the following metaphors could the author most appropriately use to summarize his own assessment of the American economic system (lines 35-60)?
(A) A windmill
(B) A waterfall
(C) A treadmill
(D) A gyroscope
(E) A bellows
同样，这里我也找不到位置，按照感觉，随便选的答案。我第一次选的D
全完最后一句。

7. It can be inferred from the passage that Woodrow Wilson’s ideas about the economic market
(A) encouraged those who “make the system work” (lines 45-46)
(B) perpetuated traditional legends about America
(C) revealed the prejudices of a man born wealthy
(D) foreshadowed the stock market crash of 1929
(E) began a tradition of presidential proclamations on economics

8. The passage contains information that would answer which of the following questions?
I. What techniques have industrialists used to manipulate a free market?
II. In what ways are “New World” and “Old World” economic policies similar?
III. Has economic policy in the United States tended to reward independent action?
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) III only
(D) I and II only
(E) II and III only
推论

9. Which of the following best expresses the author’s main point?
(A) Americans’ pride in their jobs continues to give them stamina today.
(B) The absence of a status quo ante has undermined United States economic structure.
(C) The free enterprise system has been only a useless concept in the United States.
(D) The myth of the American free enterprise system is seriously flawed.
(E) Fascination with the ideal of “openness” has made Americans a progressive people.
DE 不是很好分，但是我想全文讨论的是一种价值观的东西，应该不是市场，所以就选E吧。


Woodrow Wilson was referring to the liberal idea of the economic market when he said that the free enterprise system is the most efficient economic system. Maximum freedom means maximum productiveness; our “openness” is to be the measure of our stability. Fascination with this ideal has made Americans defy the “Old World” categories of settled possessiveness versus unsettling deprivation, the cupidity of retention versus the cupidity of seizure, a “status quo” defended or attacked. The United States, it was believed, had no status quo ante. Our only “station” was the turning of a stationary wheel, spinning faster and faster. We did not base our system on property but opportunity—which meant we based it not on stability but on mobility. The more things changed, that is, the more rapidly the wheel turned, the steadier we would be. The conventional picture of class politics is composed of the Haves, who want a stability to keep what they have, and the Have-Nots, who want a touch of (a touch of: 有一点) instability and change in which to scramble for (scramble for: v.争夺, 勉强拼凑) the things they have not. But Americans imagined a condition in which speculators, self-makers, runners are always using the new opportunities given by our land. These economic leaders (front-runners) would thus be mainly agents of change. The nonstarters were considered the ones who wanted stability, a strong referee to give them some position in the race, a regulative hand to calm manic speculation; an authority that can call things to a halt, begin things again from compensatory staggered “starting lines.”

“Reform” in America has been sterile because it can imagine no change except through the extension of this metaphor of a race, wider inclusion of competitors, “a piece of the action,” as it were, for the disenfranchised. There is no attempt to call off the race. Since our only stability is change, America seems not to honor the quiet work that achieves social interdependence and stability. There is, in our legends, no heroism of the office clerk (office clerk: n.职员), no stable industrial work force of the people who actually make the system work. There is no pride in being an employee (Wilson asked for a return to the time when everyone was an employer). There has been no boasting about our social workers—they are merely signs of the system’s failure, of opportunity denied or not taken, of things to be eliminated. We have no pride in our growing interdependence, in the fact that our system can serve others, that we are able to help those in need; empty boasts from the past make us ashamed of our present achievements, make us try to forget or deny them, move away from them. There is no honor but in the Wonderland (wonderland: n.仙境, 奇境)race we must all run, all trying to win, none winning in the end (for there is no end).

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) criticize the inflexibility of American economic mythology

(B) contrast “Old World” and “New World” economic ideologies

(C) challenge the integrity of traditional political leaders

(D) champion those Americans whom the author deems to be neglected（A）

(E) suggest a substitute for the traditional metaphor of a race

2.According to the passage, “Old World” values were based on

(A) ability

(B) property

(C) family connections

(D) guild hierarchies（B）

(E) education

3.In the context of the author’s discussion of regulating change, which of the following could be most probably regarded as a “strong referee” (line 30) in the United States?

(A) A school principal

(B) A political theorist

(C) A federal court judge

(D) A social worker（C）

(E) A government inspector

4.The author sets off (set off: to set apart: make distinct or outstanding) the word “Reform” (line 35) with quotation marks in order to

(A) emphasize its departure from the concept of settled possessiveness

(B) show his support for a systematic program of change

(C) underscore the flexibility and even amorphousness of United States society

(D) indicate that the term was one of Wilson’s favorites（E）

(E) assert that reform in the United States has not been fundamental

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the author most probably thinks that giving the disenfranchised “a piece of the action” (line 38) is

(A) a compassionate, if misdirected, legislative measure

(B) an example of Americans’ resistance to profound social change

(C) an innovative program for genuine social reform

(D) a monument to the efforts of industrial reformers（B）

(E) a surprisingly “Old World” remedy for social ills

6.Which of the following metaphors could the author most appropriately use to summarize his own assessment of the American economic system (lines 35-60)?

(A) A windmill

(B) A waterfall

(C) A treadmill

(D) A gyroscope（C）

(E) A bellows

7.It can be inferred from the passage that Woodrow Wilson’s ideas about the economic market

(A) encouraged those who “make the system work” (lines 45-46)

(B) perpetuated traditional legends about America

(C) revealed the prejudices of a man born wealthy

(D) foreshadowed the stock market crash of 1929（B）

(E) began a tradition of presidential proclamations on economics

8.The passage contains information that would answer which of the following questions?

I.What techniques have industrialists used to manipulate a free market?

II.In what ways are “New World” and “Old World” economic policies similar?

III.Has economic policy in the United States tended to reward independent action?

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) III only

(D) I and II only（C）

(E) II and III only

9.Which of the following best expresses the author’s main point?

(A) Americans’ pride in their jobs continues to give them stamina today.

(B) The absence of a status quo ante has undermined United States economic structure.

(C) The free enterprise system has been only a useless concept in the United States.

(D) The myth of the American free enterprise system is seriously flawed.（D）

(E) Fascination with the ideal of “openness” has made Americans a progressive people.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-14 17:39
No very satisfactory account of the mechanism that caused the formation of the ocean basins has yet been given. The traditional view supposes that the upper mantle of the earth behaves as a liquid when it is subjected to small forces for long periods and that differences in temperature under oceans and continents are sufficient to produce convection in the mantle of the earth with rising convection currents under the mid-ocean ridges and sinking currents under the continents. Theoretically, this convection would carry the continental plates along as though they were on a conveyor belt and would provide the forces needed to produce the split that occurs along the ridge. This view may be correct: it has the advantage that the currents are driven by temperature differences that themselves depend on the position of the continents. Such a back-coupling, in which the position of the moving plate has an impact on the forces that move it, could produce complicated and varying motions.
On the other hand, the theory is implausible because convection does not normally occur along lines, and it certainly does not occur along lines broken by frequent offsets or changes in direction, as the ridge is. Also it is difficult to see how the theory applies to the plate between the Mid-Atlantic Ridge and the ridge in the Indian Ocean. This plate is growing on both sides, and since there is no intermediate trench, the two ridges must be moving apart. It would be odd if the rising convection currents kept exact pace with them. （这个地方的反驳没看懂。这个板块因为两边是山脊，板块可以两边高的呀。没有海沟，这两个山脊向两边跑？）An alternative theory is that the sinking part of the plate, which is denser than the hotter surrounding mantle, pulls the rest of the plate after it. Again it is difficult to see how this applies to the ridge in the South Atlantic, where neither the African nor the American plate has a sinking part.
Another possibility is that the sinking plate cools the neighboring mantle and produces convection currents that move the plates. This last theory is attractive because it gives some hope of explaining the enclosed seas, such as the Sea of Japan. These seas have a typical oceanic floor, except that the floor is overlaid by several kilometers of sediment. Their floors have probably been sinking for long periods. It seems possible that a sinking current of cooled mantle material on the upper side of the plate might be the cause of such deep basins. The enclosed seas are an important feature of the earth’s surface, and seriously require explanation because, in addition to the enclosed seas that are developing at present behind island arcs, there are a number of older ones of possibly similar origin, such as the Gulf of Mexico, the Black Sea, and perhaps the North Sea.

没想到。我以为科技文好懂呢？这个比上篇看得头疼多了。
这篇总结真不会写。真没有看懂

传统观点：地幔呈液体状。因为温度的不同，海中山脊地幔上升，陆地地幔下降。（我觉得这样理论只能解释大陆坡接海洋的地方）
第二种观点：就是形成洋盆的地方比别的地方重，所以形成洋盆。但是，有两个板块却没有凹陷的地方。
第三种观点：下沉部分的地幔温度低，形成对流。

Ocean trench: 海沟，不再是什么沟渠了。
Island arcs:  专业名词

错： 2

1. According to the traditional view of the origin of the ocean basins, which of the following is sufficient to move the continental plates?
(A) Increases in sedimentation on ocean floors
(B) Spreading of ocean trenches
(C) Movement of mid-ocean ridges
(D) Sinking of ocean basins
(E) Differences in temperature under oceans and continents
细节题，表黑那句和后面的句子，主语宾语缓缓就出来了。

2. It can be inferred from the passage that, of the following, the deepest sediments would be found in the
(A) Indian Ocean
(B) Black Sea
(C) Mid-Atlantic
(D) South Atlantic
(E) Pacific
哪来的东西，难道是日本海？
我只能对着答案倒退，日本海不属于太平洋？日本海和黑海类似。

3. The author refers to a “conveyor belt” in line 13 in order to
(A) illustrate the effects of convection in the mantle
(B) show how temperature differences depend on the positions of the continents
(C) demonstrate the linear nature of the Mid-Atlantic Ridge
(D) describe the complicated motions made possible by back-coupling
(E) account for the rising currents under certain mid-ocean ridges
细节题

3. The author regards the traditional view of the origin of the oceans with
(A) slight apprehension
(B) absolute indifference
(C) indignant anger
(D) complete disbelief
(E) guarded skepticism
给出的肯定的部分，也给出了否定的部分，guarded。
注意这个题干的说法： origin of the oceans.

4. According to the passage, which of the following are separated by a plate that is growing on both sides?
(A) The Pacific Ocean and the Sea of Japan
(B) The South Atlantic Ridge and the North Sea Ridge
(C) The Gulf of Mexico and the South Atlantic Ridge
(D) The Mid-Atlantic Ridge and the Indian Ocean Ridge
(E) The Black Sea and the Sea of Japan
就按照字面瞎理解吧

5. Which of the following, if it could be demonstrated, would most support the traditional view of ocean formation?
(A) Convection usually occurs along lines.
(B) The upper mantle behaves as a dense solid.
(C) Sedimentation occurs at a constant rate.
(D) Sinking plates cool the mantle.
(E) Island arcs surround enclosed seas.
推论题：反驳不成立，就是支持traditional view

6. According to the passage, the floor of the Black Sea can best be compared to a
(A) rapidly moving conveyor belt
(B) slowly settling foundation
(C) rapidly expanding balloon
(D) violently erupting volcano
(E) slowly eroding mountain
细节题，跑前面去了

7. Which of the following titles would best describe the content of the passage?
(A) A Description of the Oceans of the World
(B) Several Theories of Ocean Basin Formation
(C) The Traditional View of the Oceans
(D) Convection and Ocean Currents
(E) Temperature Differences among the Oceans of the World
主旨题

在现在完成时的句子中，already常用于肯定句，yet常用于否定句和疑问句，但yet还有其他用法。
1.yet用在否定或疑问句中，表示“尚，还是，仍然，依然”的意思。一般常出现在完成时态中，位于句尾。 例如： Have you got the ticket yet?你买到票了吗？She hasn’t read the book yet.他还没有读过那本书。
若句子的谓语表现为强调性，还可以用在一般现在时或一般过去时中。例如：Are the apples ripe yet？苹果成熟了吗?They had not finished their homeword yet.那时作业还没做完呢。Her mother isn’t back yet .她妈妈还没回来。
already也可以用在疑问句中，但只表示期待一个肯定的回答或惊异。例如：Have you seen the film already?你已经看过这部电影了？Is it four o’clock already?就到四点钟了？
2.在主句中wonder(从句是whether或if引导)，not think(suppose, believe)等引导的宾语从句复合句中，一般否定意义实际上是在从句中，这时仍然用yet。
例如：I don’t think they have agreed with us yet.我认为我们尚未取得一致的看法。I wonder whether /if he has yet talked about it with you.我不知道他已同你谈过那件事没有。
3.yet还可用在肯定句中，有以下几种情况：
（1）表示惊叹或感慨。
例如：Be thankful you are yet alive.你该为了你仍然活着而感恩。
This problem is yet more difficult than you imagined .这个问题比你原来想象的还难得多呢。
（2）表示判断或推测。
例如：The enemy may win yet if we relax our efforts.如果我们不努力，敌人迟早会获胜的。
（3）表示“还要，再，更”的递进语义。（这时用still更为常见。）
例如：We must practise yet more often.我们还得更加经常练习。
（4）yet可作连词，意为“可是，然而，却……”。
例如：My room is small ,yet very comfortable.我的房间虽小，但很舒适。You can draw a good horse in five minutes ,yet you kept me waiting for a year?你能在五分钟内画一匹好马，然而你让我等了一年。
y et和and连用也可产生转折语气，更口语化些。例如：She’s vain and foolish ,and yet people like her .她自负愚蠢，然而人们喜欢她。
　 yet与not连用起一种重迭否定的作用，意为“也不，仍不”。例如：We are not yet.我们还没准备好。He did not come ,not yet telephone.他人不来，电话也不打。

No very satisfactory account of the mechanism that caused the formation of the ocean basins has yet been given. The traditional view supposes that the upper mantle of the earth behaves as a liquid when it is subjected to small forces for long periods and that differences in temperature under oceans and continents are sufficient to produce convection in the mantle of the earth with rising convection currents under the mid-ocean ridges and sinking currents under the continents. Theoretically, this convection would carry the continental plates along as though they were on a conveyor belt (conveyor belt: n. 传送带) and would provide the forces needed to produce the split that occurs along the ridge. This view may be correct: it has the advantage that the currents are driven by temperature differences that themselves depend on the position of the continents. Such a back-coupling, in which the position of the moving plate has an impact on the forces that move it, could produce complicated and varying motions.

On the other hand, the theory is implausible because convection does not normally occur along lines, and it certainly does not occur along lines broken by frequent offsets (an abrupt bend in an object by which one part is turned aside out of line)or changes in direction, as the ridge is. Also it is difficult to see how the theory applies to the plate between the Mid-Atlantic Ridge and the ridge in the Indian Ocean. This plate is growing on both sides, and since there is no intermediate trench, the two ridges must be moving apart. It would be odd if the rising convection currents kept exact pace with them. An alternative theory is that the sinking part of the plate, which is denser than the hotter surrounding mantle, pulls the rest of the plate after it. Again it is difficult to see how this applies to the ridge in the South Atlantic, where neither the African nor the American plate has a sinking part.

Another possibility is that the sinking plate cools the neighboring mantle and produces convection currents that move the plates. This last theory is attractive because it gives some hope of explaining the enclosed seas, such as the Sea of Japan. These seas have a typical oceanic floor, except that the floor is overlaid by several kilometers of sediment. Their floors have probably been sinking for long periods. It seems possible that a sinking current of cooled mantle material on the upper side of the plate might be the cause of such deep basins. The enclosed seas are an important feature of the earth’s surface, and seriously require explanation because, in addition to the enclosed seas that are developing at present behind island arcs, there are a number of older ones of possibly similar origin, such as the Gulf of Mexico, the Black Sea, and perhaps the North Sea.

1.According to the traditional view of the origin of the ocean basins, which of the following is sufficient to move the continental plates?

(A) Increases in sedimentation on ocean floors

(B) Spreading of ocean trenches

(C) Movement of mid-ocean ridges

(D) Sinking of ocean basins（E）

(E) Differences in temperature under oceans and continents

2.It can be inferred from the passage that, of the following, the deepest sediments would be found in the

(A) Indian Ocean

(B) Black Sea

(C) Mid-Atlantic

(D) South Atlantic（B）

(E) Pacific

3.The author refers to a “conveyor belt” in line 13 in order to

(A) illustrate the effects of convection in the mantle

(B) show how temperature differences depend on the positions of the continents

(C) demonstrate the linear nature of the Mid-Atlantic Ridge

(D) describe the complicated motions made possible by back-coupling（A）

(E) account for the rising currents under certain mid-ocean ridges

3.The author regards the traditional view of the origin of the oceans with

(A) slight apprehension

(B) absolute indifference

(C) indignant anger

(D) complete disbelief（E）

(E) guarded skepticism

4.According to the passage, which of the following are separated by a plate that is growing on both sides?

(A) The Pacific Ocean and the Sea of Japan

(B) The South Atlantic Ridge and the North Sea Ridge

(C) The Gulf of Mexico and the South Atlantic Ridge

(D) The Mid-Atlantic Ridge and the Indian Ocean Ridge（D）

(E) The Black Sea and the Sea of Japan

5.Which of the following, if it could be demonstrated, would most support the traditional view of ocean formation?

(A) Convection usually occurs along lines.

(B) The upper mantle behaves as a dense solid.

(C) Sedimentation occurs at a constant rate.

(D) Sinking plates cool the mantle.（A）

(E) Island arcs surround enclosed seas.

6.According to the passage, the floor of the Black Sea can best be compared to a

(A) rapidly moving conveyor belt

(B) slowly settling foundation

(C) rapidly expanding balloon

(D) violently erupting volcano（B）

(E) slowly eroding mountain

7.Which of the following titles would best describe the content of the passage?

(A) A Description of the Oceans of the World

(B) Several Theories of Ocean Basin Formation

(C) The Traditional View of the Oceans

(D) Convection and Ocean Currents（B）

(E) Temperature Differences among the Oceans of the World

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-14 18:32
How many really suffer as a result of labor market problems? This is one of the most critical yet contentious social policy questions. In many ways, our social statistics exaggerate the degree of hardship. Unemployment does not have the same dire consequences today as it did in the 1930’s when most of the unemployed were primary breadwinners, when income and earnings were usually much closer to the margin of subsistence, and when there were no countervailing social programs for those failing in the labor market. Increasing affluence, the rise of families with more than one wage earner, the growing predominance of secondary earners among the unemployed, and improved social welfare protection have unquestionably mitigated the consequences of joblessness. Earnings and income data also overstate the dimensions of hardship. Among the millions with hourly earnings at or below the minimum wage level, the overwhelming majority are from multiple-earner, relatively affluent families. Most of those counted by the poverty statistics are elderly or handicapped or have family responsibilities which keep them out of the labor force, so the poverty statistics are by no means an accurate indicator of labor market pathologies.（本段主旨，上面那两个是分论点）
Yet there are also many ways our social statistics underestimate the degree of labor-market-related hardship. The unemployment counts exclude the millions of fully employed workers whose wages are so low that their families remain in poverty.Low wages and repeated or prolonged unemployment frequently interact to undermine the capacity for self-support. Since the number experiencing joblessness at some time during the year is several times the number unemployed in any month, those who suffer as a result of forced idleness can equal or exceed average annual unemployment, even though only a minority of the jobless in any month really suffer. For every person counted in the monthly unemployment tallies, there is another working part-time because of the inability to find full-time work, or else outside the labor force but wanting a job.（这句话是对上句结论的解释） Finally, income transfers in our country have always focused on the elderly, disabled, and dependent, neglecting the needs of the working poor, so that the dramatic expansion of cash and in-kind transfers does not necessarily mean that those failing in the labor market are adequately protected.
As a result of such contradictory evidence, it is uncertain whether those suffering seriously as a result of labor market problems number in the hundreds of thousands or the tens of millions, and, hence, whether high levels of joblessness can be tolerated or must be countered by job creation and economic stimulus. There is only one area of agreement in this debate—that the existing poverty, employment, and earnings statistics are inadequate for one their primary applications, measuring the consequences of labor market problems.（文章最后结论）

这个文章结构很好看，开始说统计数字夸张了经济问题，之后说统计数字又溜掉那些经济问题。最后结论是，统计数字不能准确反映经济问题。
错误 2 8 9
对8 不是很理解。

1. Which of the following is the principal topic of the passage?
(A) What causes labor market pathologies that result in suffering
(B) Why income measures are imprecise in measuring degrees of poverty
(C) Which of the currently used statistical procedures are the best for estimating the incidence of hardship that is due to unemployment
(D) Where the areas of agreement are among poverty, employment, and earnings figures
(E) How social statistics give an unclear picture of the degree of hardship caused by low wages and insufficient employment opportunities
主旨题

2. The author uses “labor market problems” in lines 1-2 to refer to which of the following?
(A) The overall causes of poverty
(B) Deficiencies in the training of the work force
(C) Trade relationships among producers of goods
(D) Shortages of jobs providing adequate income
(E) Strikes and inadequate supplies of labor
细节题。不能确定位置，但是跟poverty 相关的，选A
我只看到了poverty， 没有看到causes. the overall cause of the poverty 这个是很大的社会问题，不能仅限于经济领域了。
shortage of jobs, poverty.

3. The author contrasts the 1930’s with the present in order to show that
(A) more people were unemployed in the 1930’s
(B) unemployment now has less severe effects
(C) social programs are more needed now
(D) there now is a greater proportion of elderly and handicapped people among those in poverty
(E) poverty has increased since the 1930’s
第二句表黑转换一下就出来了。

4. Which of the following proposals best responds to the issues raised by the author?
(A) Innovative programs using multiple approaches should be set up to reduce the level of unemployment.
(B) A compromise should be found between the positions of those who view joblessness as an evil greater than economic control and those who hold the opposite view.
(C) New statistical indices should be developed to measure the degree to which unemployment and inadequately paid employment cause suffering.
(D) Consideration should be given to the ways in which statistics can act as partial causes of the phenomena that they purport to measure.
(E) The labor force should be restructured so that it corresponds to the range of job vacancies.
作者最后说的是统计数字不能反映经济问题。

5. The author’s purpose in citing those who are repeatedly unemployed during a twelve-month period is most probably to show that
(A) there are several factors that cause the payment of low wages to some members of the labor force
(B) unemployment statistics can underestimate the hardship resulting from joblessness
(C) recurrent inadequacies in the labor market can exist and can cause hardships for individual workers
(D) a majority of those who are jobless at any one time to not suffer severe hardship
(E) there are fewer individuals who are without jobs at some time during a year than would be expected on the basis of monthly unemployment figures
repeated unemployed 出现在第二段第一论据里面，支持第二段论据。

6. The author states that the mitigating effect of social programs involving income transfers on the income level of low-income people is often not felt by
(A) the employed poor
(B) dependent children in single-earner families
(C) workers who become disabled
(D) retired workers
(E) full-time workers who become unemployed
这里有迷惑性。AE，但是句子明确有天the working poor.

7. According to the passage, one factor that causes unemployment and earnings figures to overpredict the amount of economic hardship is the
(A) recurrence of periods of unemployment for a group of low-wage workers
(B) possibility that earnings may be received from more than one job per worker
(C) fact that unemployment counts do not include those who work for low wages and remain poor
(D) establishment of a system of record-keeping that makes it possible to compile poverty statistics
(E) prevalence, among low-wage workers and the unemployed, of members of families in which others are employed
细节题

8. The conclusion stated in lines 33-39 about the number of people who suffer as a result of forced idleness depends primarily on the point that
(A) in times of high unemployment, there are some people who do not remain unemployed for long
(B) the capacity for self-support depends on receiving moderate-to-high wages
(C) those in forced idleness include, besides the unemployed, both underemployed part-time workers and those not actively seeking work
(D) at different times during the year, different people are unemployed
(E) many of those who are affected by unemployment are dependents of unemployed workers
这个结论是：forced idleness 是平均数字的几倍。表蓝部分就是答案。
我错哪里了。

9. Which of the following, if true, is the best criticism of the author’s argument concerning why poverty statistics cannot properly be used to show the effects of problems in the labor market?
(A) A short-term increase in the number of those in poverty can indicate a shortage of jobs because the basic number of those unable to accept employment remains approximately constant.
(B) For those who are in poverty as a result of joblessness, there are social programs available that provide a minimum standard of living.
(C) Poverty statistics do not consistently agree with earnings statistics, when each is taken as a measure of hardship resulting from unemployment.
(D) The elderly and handicapped categories include many who previously were employed in the labor market.
(E) Since the labor market is global in nature, poor workers in one country are competing with poor workers in another with respect to the level of wages and the existence of jobs.
推论题。
我第一次做的时候真不知道，什么poverty statsitics这个论据和文章什么关系，想着也许有着我有没看懂的地方，就选了一个很学术的答案。
现在看看，基于作者说统计数字不能反映经济问题这个结论。A还是有利证明了统计数字在其他情况不变的情况下还是有用处的。

How many really suffer as a result of labor market problems? This is one of the most critical yet contentious social policy questions. In many ways, our social statistics exaggerate the degree of hardship. Unemployment does not have the same dire consequences today as it did in the 1930’s when most of the unemployed were primary breadwinners, when income and earnings were usually much closer to the margin of subsistence, and when there were no countervailing social programs for those failing in the labor market. Increasing affluence, the rise of families with more than one wage earner, the growing predominance of secondary earners among the unemployed, and improved social welfare protection have unquestionably mitigated the consequences of joblessness. Earnings and income data also overstate the dimensions of hardship. Among the millions with hourly earnings at or below the minimum wage level, the overwhelming majority are from multiple-earner, relatively affluent families. Most of those counted by the poverty statistics are elderly or handicapped or have family responsibilities which keep them out of the labor force, so the poverty statistics are by no means an accurate indicator of labor market pathologies.

Yet there are also many ways our social statistics underestimate the degree of labor-market-related hardship. The unemployment counts exclude the millions of fully employed workers whose wages are so low that their families remain in poverty. Low wages and repeated or prolonged unemployment frequently interact to undermine the capacity for self-support. Since the number experiencing joblessness at some time during the year is several times the number unemployed in any month, those who suffer as a result of forced idleness can equal or exceed average annual unemployment, even though only a minority of the jobless in any month really suffer. For every person counted in the monthly unemployment tallies, there is another working part-time because of the inability to find full-time work, or else outside the labor force but wanting a job. Finally, income transfers in our country have always focused on the elderly, disabled, and dependent, neglecting the needs of the working poor, so that the dramatic expansion of cash and in-kind transfers does not necessarily mean that those failing in the labor market are adequately protected.

As a result of such contradictory evidence, it is uncertain whether those suffering seriously as a result of labor market problems number in the hundreds of thousands or the tens of millions, and, hence, whether high levels of joblessness can be tolerated or must be countered by job creation and economic stimulus. There is only one area of agreement in this debate—that the existing poverty, employment, and earnings statistics are inadequate for one their primary applications, measuring the consequences of labor market problems.

1.Which of the following is the principal topic of the passage?

(A) What causes labor market pathologies that result in suffering

(B) Why income measures are imprecise in measuring degrees of poverty

(C) Which of the currently used statistical procedures are the best for estimating the incidence of hardship that is due to unemployment

(D) Where the areas of agreement are among poverty, employment, and earnings figures（E）

(E) How social statistics give an unclear picture of the degree of hardship caused by low wages and insufficient employment opportunities

2.The author uses “labor market problems” in lines 1-2 to refer to which of the following?

(A) The overall causes of poverty

(B) Deficiencies in the training of the work force

(C) Trade relationships among producers of goods

(D) Shortages of jobs providing adequate income（D）

(E) Strikes and inadequate supplies of labor

3.The author contrasts the 1930’s with the present in order to show that

(A) more people were unemployed in the 1930’s

(B) unemployment now has less severe effects

(C) social programs are more needed now

(D) there now is a greater proportion of elderly and handicapped people among those in poverty（B）

(E) poverty has increased since the 1930’s

4.Which of the following proposals best responds to the issues raised by the author?

(A) Innovative programs using multiple approaches should be set up to reduce the level of unemployment.

(B) A compromise should be found between the positions of those who view joblessness as an evil greater than economic control and those who hold the opposite view.

(C) New statistical indices should be developed to measure the degree to which unemployment and inadequately paid employment cause suffering.

(D) Consideration should be given to the ways in which statistics can act as partial causes of the phenomena that they purport to measure.（C）

(E) The labor force should be restructured so that it corresponds to the range of job vacancies.

5.The author’s purpose in citing those who are repeatedly unemployed during a twelve-month period is most probably to show that

(A) there are several factors that cause the payment of low wages to some members of the labor force

(B) unemployment statistics can underestimate the hardship resulting from joblessness

(C) recurrent inadequacies in the labor market can exist and can cause hardships for individual workers

(D) a majority of those who are jobless at any one time to not suffer severe hardship（B）

(E) there are fewer individuals who are without jobs at some time during a year than would be expected on the basis of monthly unemployment figures

6.The author states that the mitigating effect of social programs involving income transfers on the income level of low-income people is often not felt by

(A) the employed poor

(B) dependent children in single-earner families

(C) workers who become disabled

(D) retired workers（A）

(E) full-time workers who become unemployed

7.According to the passage, one factor that causes unemployment and earnings figures to overpredict the amount of economic hardship is the

(A) recurrence of periods of unemployment for a group of low-wage workers

(B) possibility that earnings may be received from more than one job per worker

(C) fact that unemployment counts do not include those who work for low wages and remain poor

(D) establishment of a system of record-keeping that makes it possible to compile poverty statistics（E）

(E) prevalence, among low-wage workers and the unemployed, of members of families in which others are employed

8.The conclusion stated in lines 33-39 about the number of people who suffer as a result of forced idleness depends primarily on the point that

(A) in times of high unemployment, there are some people who do not remain unemployed for long

(B) the capacity for self-support depends on receiving moderate-to-high wages

(C) those in forced idleness include, besides the unemployed, both underemployed part-time workers and those not actively seeking work

(D) at different times during the year, different people are unemployed（D）

(E) many of those who are affected by unemployment are dependents of unemployed workers

9.Which of the following, if true, is the best criticism of the author’s argument concerning why poverty statistics cannot properly be used to show the effects of problems in the labor market?

(A) A short-term increase in the number of those in poverty can indicate a shortage of jobs because the basic number of those unable to accept employment remains approximately constant.

(B) For those who are in poverty as a result of joblessness, there are social programs available that provide a minimum standard of living.

(C) Poverty statistics do not consistently agree with earnings statistics, when each is taken as a measure of hardship resulting from unemployment.

(D) The elderly and handicapped categories include many who previously were employed in the labor market.（A）

(E) Since the labor market is global in nature, poor workers in one country are competing with poor workers in another with respect to the level of wages and the existence of jobs.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-17 17:00
1. obscure 2adj. 2v.
  an obscure village/poet 名不见经传的
  an obscure theory
 The clouds obscured the moon. 遮住，不容易看见
2. The main theme of the book is obscured by frequent digression
3. The role of U.S. Navy is threatened by permanent eclipse.
effective 有效果的，efficient 有效率的
4. The general thesis was eleborated on in details elsewhere in the passage.
5. to eliminate the ranks and salary grades that classify employees.
6. They hatred political privilege and wanted freedom from an elite-dominated state.
7. Egyptians are credited for having pioneered embalming methords.
8. to embellish the story by no means.
9. The new democratis value system was not immediately embraced by the society as a whole.
10. emulate the success of someone
11. Most business were transacted over the phone.
12. The themes in her poetry is universal, encompassing much of the human conditions.
13. 12 identical sets of encyclopedia
14. She picked up her second gold medal with ridiculous ease.
15. A drizzle from the faucet
16. The children were dazzled by his charm.
17. The descending rock is more liable to fracture.
18. 18 junior ministors are inducted into the government.
electric blanket, 电的属相的，electrical work/engineering, 不是电的属性的

20. enlist the help of someone.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-17 18:01
In the eighteenth century, Japan’s feudal overlords, from the shogun to the humblest samurai, found themselves under financial stress. In part, this stress can be attributed to the overlords’ failure to adjust to a rapidly expanding economy, but the stress was also due to factors beyond the overlords’ control. Concentration of the samurai in castle-towns had acted as a stimulus to trade. Commercial efficiency, in turn, had put temptations in the way of buyers. Since most samurai had been reduced to idleness by years of peace, encouraged to engage in scholarship and martial exercises or to perform administrative tasks that took little time, it is not surprising that their tastes and habits grew expensive. Overlords’ income, despite the increase in rice production among their tenant farmers, failed to keep pace with their expenses.Althoughshortfalls in overlords’ income resulted almost as much from laxity among their tax collectors (the nearly inevitable outcome of hereditary office-holding) as from their higher standards of living, a misfortune like a fire or flood, bringing an increase in expenses or a drop in revenue, could put a domain in debt to the city rice-brokers who handled its finances. Once in debt, neither the individual samurai nor the shogun himself found it easy to recover.
It was difficult for individual samurai overlords to increase their income because the amount of rice that farmers could be made to pay in taxes was not unlimited, and since the income of Japan’s central government consisted in part of taxes collected by the shogun from his huge domain, the government too was constrained. Therefore, the Tokugawa shoguns began to look to other sources for revenue. Cash profits from government-owned mines were already on the decline because the most easily worked deposits of silver and gold had been exhausted, although debasement of the coinage had compensated for the loss. Opening up new farmland was a possibility, but most of what was suitable had already been exploited and further reclamation was technically unfeasible. Direct taxation of the samurai themselves would be politically dangerous. This left the shoguns only commerce as a potential source of government income.
Most of the country’s wealth, or so it seemed, was finding its way into the hands of city merchants. It appeared reasonable that they should contribute part of that revenue to ease the shogun’s burden of financing the state. A means of obtaining such revenue was soon found by levying forced loans, known as goyo-kin; although these were not taxes in the strict sense, since they were irregular in timing and arbitrary in amount, they were high in yield. Unfortunately, they pushed up prices. Thus, regrettably, the Tokugawa shoguns’ search for solvency for the government made it increasingly difficult for individual Japanese who lived on fixed stipends to make ends meet.

第一段说，日本S面临财政危机，有些因素自己控制不了的：武士花费越来越多，水灾，火灾的发生。
第二段说，对于最高统治者来说，解决资金来源就剩下 商业这一条
第三段说，最高统治者的方法向商业借债，但是却造成通货膨胀。

错误：2 推理题


1. The passage is most probably an excerpt from
(A) an economic history of Japan
(B) the memoirs of a samurai warrior
(C) a modern novel about eighteenth-century Japan
(D) an essay contrasting Japanese feudalism with its Western counterpart
(E) an introduction to a collection of Japanese folktales

2. Which of the following financial situations is most analogous to the financial situation in which Japan’s Tokugawa shoguns found themselves in the eighteenth century?
(A) A small business borrows heavily to invest in new equipment, but is able to pay off its debt early when it is awarded a lucrative government contract.
(B) Fire destroys a small business, but insurance covers the cost of rebuilding.
(C) A small business is turned down for a loan at a local bank because the owners have no credit history.
(D) A small business has to struggle to meet operating expenses when its profits decrease.
(E) A small business is able to cut back sharply on spending through greater commercial efficiency and thereby compensate for a loss of revenue.

3. Which of the following best describes the attitude of the author toward the samurai discussed in lines 11-16?
(A) Warmly approving
(B) Mildly sympathetic
(C) Bitterly disappointed
(D) Harshly disdainful
(E) Profoundly shocked
总是还是在做事情

4. According to the passage, the major reason for the financial problems experienced by Japan’s feudal overlords in the eighteenth century was that
(A) spending had outdistanced income
(B) trade had fallen off
(C) profits from mining had declined
(D) the coinage had been sharply debased
(E) the samurai had concentrated in castle-towns
就是入不敷出了

5. The passage implies that individual samurai did not find it easy to recover from debt for which of the following reasons?
(A) Agricultural production had increased.
(B) Taxes were irregular in timing and arbitrary in amount.
(C) The Japanese government had failed to adjust to the needs of a changing economy.
(D) The domains of samurai overlords were becoming smaller and poorer as government revenues increased.
(E) There was a limit to the amount in taxes that farmers could be made to pay.
我第一次看错题了，再看一遍的时候看对了

6. The passage suggests that, in eighteenth-century Japan, the office of tax collector
(A) was a source of personal profit to the officeholder
(B) was regarded with derision by many Japanese
(C) remained within families
(D) existed only in castle-towns
(E) took up most of the officeholder’s time
细节题 表蓝although 这里

7. Which of the following could best be substituted for the word “This” in line 47 without changing the meaning of the passage?
(A) The search of Japan’s Tokugawa shoguns for solvency
(B) The importance of commerce in feudal Japan
(C) The unfairness of the tax structure in eighteenth century Japan
(D) The difficulty of increasing government income by other means
(E) The difficulty experienced by both individual samurai and the shogun himself in extricating themselves from debt
AD比较，我觉得D更好一些

8. The passage implies that which of the following was the primary reason why the Tokugawa shoguns turned to city merchants for help in financing the state?
(A) A series of costly wars had depleted the national treasury.
(B) Most of the country’s wealth appeared to be in city merchants’ hands.
(C) Japan had suffered a series of economic reversals due to natural disasters such as floods.
(D) The merchants were already heavily indebted to the shoguns.
(E) Further reclamation of land would not have been economically advantageous.
第三段第一句话。

9. According to the passage, the actions of the Tokugawa shoguns in their search for solvency for the government were regrettable because those actions
(A) raised the cost of living by pushing up prices
(B) resulted in the exhaustion of the most easily worked deposits of silver and gold
(C) were far lower in yield than had originally been anticipated
(D) did not succeed in reducing government spending
(E) acted as a deterrent to trade
第三段最后一句话。

1.The passage is most probably an excerpt from

(A) an economic history of Japan

(B) the memoirs of a samurai warrior

(C) a modern novel about eighteenth-century Japan

(D) an essay contrasting Japanese feudalism with its Western counterpart（A）

(E) an introduction to a collection of Japanese folktales

2.Which of the following financial situations is most analogous to the financial situation in which Japan’s Tokugawa shoguns found themselves in the eighteenth century?

(A) A small business borrows heavily to invest in new equipment, but is able to pay off its debt early when it is awarded a lucrative government contract.

(B) Fire destroys a small business, but insurance covers the cost of rebuilding.

(C) A small business is turned down for a loan at a local bank because the owners have no credit history.

(D) A small business has to struggle to meet operating expenses when its profits decrease.（D）

(E) A small business is able to cut back sharply on spending through greater commercial efficiency and thereby compensate for a loss of revenue.

3.Which of the following best describes the attitude of the author toward the samurai discussed in lines 11-16?

(A) Warmly approving

(B) Mildly sympathetic

(C) Bitterly disappointed

(D) Harshly disdainful（B）

(E) Profoundly shocked

4.According to the passage, the major reason for the financial problems experienced by Japan’s feudal overlords in the eighteenth century was that

(A) spending had outdistanced income

(B) trade had fallen off

(C) profits from mining had declined

(D) the coinage had been sharply debased（A）

(E) the samurai had concentrated in castle-towns

5.The passage implies that individual samurai did not find it easy to recover from debt for which of the following reasons?

(A) Agricultural production had increased.

(B) Taxes were irregular in timing and arbitrary in amount.

(C) The Japanese government had failed to adjust to the needs of a changing economy.

(D) The domains of samurai overlords were becoming smaller and poorer as government revenues increased.（E）

(E) There was a limit to the amount in taxes that farmers could be made to pay.

6.The passage suggests that, in eighteenth-century Japan, the office of tax collector

(A) was a source of personal profit to the officeholder

(B) was regarded with derision by many Japanese

(C) remained within families

(D) existed only in castle-towns（C）

(E) took up most of the officeholder’s time

7.Which of the following could best be substituted for the word “This” in line 47 without changing the meaning of the passage?

(A) The search of Japan’s Tokugawa shoguns for solvency

(B) The importance of commerce in feudal Japan

(C) The unfairness of the tax structure in eighteenth century Japan

(D) The difficulty of increasing government income by other means（D）

(E) The difficulty experienced by both individual samurai and the shogun himself in extricating themselves from debt

8.The passage implies that which of the following was the primary reason why the Tokugawa shoguns turned to city merchants for help in financing the state?

(A) A series of costly wars had depleted the national treasury.

(B) Most of the country’s wealth appeared to be in city merchants’ hands.

(C) Japan had suffered a series of economic reversals due to natural disasters such as floods.

(D) The merchants were already heavily indebted to the shoguns.（B）

(E) Further reclamation of land would not have been economically advantageous.

9.According to the passage, the actions of the Tokugawa shoguns in their search for solvency for the government were regrettable because those actions

(A) raised the cost of living by pushing up prices

(B) resulted in the exhaustion of the most easily worked deposits of silver and gold

(C) were far lower in yield than had originally been anticipated

(D) did not succeed in reducing government spending（A）

(E) acted as a deterrent to trade

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-17 18:43

Between the eighth and eleventh centuries A. D., the Byzantine Empire staged an almost unparalleled economic and cultural revival, a recovery that is all the more striking because it followed a long period of severe internal decline. By the early eighth century, the empire had lost roughly two-thirds of the territory it had possessed in the year 600, and its remaining area was being raided by Arabs and Bulgarians, who at times threatened to take Constantinople and extinguish the empire altogether. The wealth of the state and its subjects was greatly diminished, and artistic and literary production had virtually ceased. By the early eleventh century, however, the empire had regained almost half of its lost possessions, its new frontiers were secure, and its influence extended far beyond its borders. The economy had recovered, the treasury was full, and art and scholarship had advanced.
To consider the Byzantine military, cultural, and economic advances as differentiated aspects of a single phenomenon is reasonable. After all, these three forms of progress have gone together in a number of states and civilizations. Rome under Augustus and fifth-century Athens provide the most obvious examples in antiquity. Moreover, an examination of the apparent sequential connections among military, economic, and cultural forms of progress might help explain the dynamics of historical change.
The common explanation of these apparent connections in the case of Byzantium would run like this: when the empire had turned back enemy raids on its own territory and had begun to raid and conquer enemy territory, Byzantine resources naturally expanded and more money became available to patronize art and literature. Therefore, Byzantine military achievements led to economic advances, which in turn led to cultural revival.
No doubt this hypothetical pattern did apply at times during the course of the recovery. Yet it is not clear that military advances invariably came first, economic advances second, and intellectual advances third. In the 860’s the Byzantine Empire began to recover from Arab incursions so that by 872 the military balance with the Abbasid Caliphate had been permanently altered in the empire’s favor. The beginning of the empire’s economic revival, however, can be placed between 810 and 830. Finally, the Byzantine revival of learning appears to have begun even earlier. A number of notable scholars and writers appeared by 788 and, by the last decade of the eighth century, a cultural revival was in full bloom, a revival that lasted until the fall of Constantinople in 1453. Thus the commonly expected order of military revival followed by economic and then by cultural recovery was reversed in Byzantium. In fact, the revival of Byzantine learning may itself have influenced the subsequent economic and military expansion.

不知怎么回事，写的总结没有了。不写了

这个篇怎么回事，错这么多
2 4 5 6
真是的，我把 600年当成了6世纪，不是的，是7世纪。我的天呢，我这个常识呀。
主要 是2这个题

1. Which of the following best states the central idea of the passage?
(A) The Byzantine Empire was a unique case in which the usual order of military and economic revival preceding cultural revival was reversed.
(B) The economic, cultural, and military revival in the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries was similar in its order to the sequence of revivals in Augustan Rome and fifth century Athens.
(C) After 810 Byzantine economic recovery spurred a military and, later, cultural expansion that lasted until 1453.
(D) The eighth-century revival of Byzantine learning is an inexplicable phenomenon, and its economic and military precursors have yet to be discovered.
(E) The revival of the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries shows cultural rebirth preceding economic and military revival, the reverse of the commonly accepted order of progress.
2. The primary purpose of the second paragraph is which of the following?
(A) To establish the uniqueness of the Byzantine revival
(B) To show that Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens are examples of cultural, economic, and military expansion against which all subsequent cases must be measured
(C) To suggest that cultural, economic, and military advances have tended to be closely interrelated in different societies
(D) To argue that, while the revivals of Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens were similar, they are unrelated to other historical examples
(E) To indicate that, wherever possible, historians should seek to make comparisons with the earliest chronological examples of revival
E 是有些偏呀。不是呼吁历史学家做什么

3. It can be inferred from the passage that by the eleventh century the Byzantine military forces
(A) had reached their peak and begun to decline
(B) had eliminated the Bulgarian army
(C) were comparable in size to the army of Rome under Augustus
(D) were strong enough to withstand the Abbasid Caliphate’s military forces
(E) had achieved control of Byzantine governmental structures
这题看半天，我知道是第一段最后一句。但是还是不能确定，后想secure the border line， 是不是能和D同意转换。

4. It can be inferred from the passage that the Byzantine Empire sustained significant territorial losses
(A) in 600
(B) during the seventh century
(C) a century after the cultural achievements of the Byzantine Empire had been lost
(D) soon after the revival of Byzantine learning
(E) in the century after 873
我没有回去看，人家说的是，600年的时候国家土地是1， 但是800多年的时候，土地就只有原来的1/3了。所以，7世纪经历了很大的土地流失。

5. In the third paragraph, the author most probably provides an explanation of the apparent connections among economic, military, and cultural development in order to
(A) suggest that the process of revival in Byzantium accords with this model
(B) set up an order of events that is then shown to be not generally applicable to the case of Byzantium
(C) cast aspersions on traditional historical scholarship about Byzantium
(D) suggest that Byzantium represents a case for which no historical precedent exists
(E) argue that military conquest is the paramount element in the growth of empires
自己选对了，但是点错选项了。


6. Which of the following does the author mention as crucial evidence concerning the manner in which the Byzantine revival began?
(A) The Byzantine military revival of the 860’s led to economic and cultural advances.
(B) The Byzantine cultural revival lasted until 1453.
(C) The Byzantine economic recovery began in the 900’s.
(D) The revival of Byzantine learning began toward the end of the eighth century.
(E) By the early eleventh century the Byzantine Empire had regained much of its lost territory.
我开始想答案应给给一个世间说文化最早是在什么时候复兴的，但是没有。我就选文化复兴持续多长时间吧。
这个题 我原来的想法是对的，但是我没有注意一个常识： the end of eight century, 是什么时候？ 788年。

7. According to the author, “The common explanation” (line 28) of connections between economic, military, and cultural development is
(A) revolutionary and too new to have been applied to the history of the Byzantine Empire
(B) reasonable, but an antiquated theory of the nature of progress
(C) not applicable to the Byzantine revival as a whole, but does perhaps accurately describe limited periods during the revival
(D) equally applicable to the Byzantine case as a whole and to the history of military, economic, and cultural advances in ancient Greece and Rome
(E) essentially not helpful, because military, economic, and cultural advances are part of a single phenomenon

Passage 7 (7/63)
Between the eighth and eleventh centuries A. D., the Byzantine Empire staged (to produce or cause to happen for public view or public effect “stage a track meet” “stage a hunger strike”)an almost unparalleled economic and cultural revival, a recovery that is all the more striking because it followed a long period of severe internal decline. By the early eighth century, the empire had lost roughly two-thirds of the territory it had possessed in the year 600, and its remaining area was being raided by Arabs and Bulgarians, who at times (at times: adv.有时, 不时)threatened to take Constantinople and extinguish the empire altogether. The wealth of the state and its subjects was greatly diminished, and artistic and literary production had virtually ceased. By the early eleventh century, however, the empire had regained almost half of its lost possessions, its new frontiers were secure, and its influence extended far beyond its borders. The economy had recovered, the treasury was full, and art and scholarship had advanced.

To consider the Byzantine military, cultural, and economic advances as differentiated aspects of a single phenomenon is reasonable. After all, these three forms of progress have gone together in a number of states and civilizations. Rome under Augustus and fifth-century Athens provide the most obvious examples in antiquity. Moreover, an examination of the apparent sequential connections among military, economic, and cultural forms of progress might help explain the dynamics of historical change.

The common explanation of these apparent connections in the case of Byzantium would run like this: when the empire had turned back enemy raids on its own territory and had begun to raid and conquer enemy territory, Byzantine resources naturally expanded and more money became available to patronize art and literature. Therefore, Byzantine military achievements led to economic advances, which in turn led to cultural revival.

No doubt this hypothetical pattern did apply at times during the course of the recovery. Yet it is not clear that military advances invariably came first, economic advances second, and intellectual advances third. In the 860’s the Byzantine Empire began to recover from Arab incursions so that by 872 the military balance with the Abbasid Caliphate had been permanently altered in the empire’s favor. The beginning of the empire’s economic revival, however, can be placed between 810 and 830. Finally, the Byzantine revival of learning appears to have begun even earlier. A number of notable scholars and writers appeared by 788 and, by the last decade of the eighth century, a cultural revival was in full bloom (in full bloom: adv.开着花), a revival that lasted until the fall of Constantinople in 1453. Thus the commonly expected order of military revival followed by economic and then by cultural recovery was reversed in Byzantium. In fact, the revival of Byzantine learning may itself have influenced the subsequent economic and military expansion.

1.Which of the following best states the central idea of the passage?

(A) The Byzantine Empire was a unique case in which the usual order of military and economic revival preceding cultural revival was reversed.

(B) The economic, cultural, and military revival in the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries was similar in its order to the sequence of revivals in Augustan Rome and fifth century Athens.

(C) After 810 Byzantine economic recovery spurred a military and, later, cultural expansion that lasted until 1453.

(D) The eighth-century revival of Byzantine learning is an inexplicable phenomenon, and its economic and military precursors have yet to be discovered.（E）

(E) The revival of the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries shows cultural rebirth preceding economic and military revival, the reverse of the commonly accepted order of progress.

2.The primary purpose of the second paragraph is which of the following?

(A) To establish the uniqueness of the Byzantine revival

(B) To show that Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens are examples of cultural, economic, and military expansion against which all subsequent cases must be measured

(C) To suggest that cultural, economic, and military advances have tended to be closely interrelated in different societies

(D) To argue that, while the revivals of Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens were similar, they are unrelated to other historical examples（C）

(E) To indicate that, wherever possible, historians should seek to make comparisons with the earliest chronological examples of revival

3.It can be inferred from the passage that by the eleventh century the Byzantine military forces

(A) had reached their peak and begun to decline

(B) had eliminated the Bulgarian army

(C) were comparable in size to the army of Rome under Augustus

(D) were strong enough to withstand the Abbasid Caliphate’s military forces（D）

(E) had achieved control of Byzantine governmental structures

4.It can be inferred from the passage that the Byzantine Empire sustained significant territorial losses

(A) in 600

(B) during the seventh century

(C) a century after the cultural achievements of the Byzantine Empire had been lost

(D) soon after the revival of Byzantine learning（B）

(E) in the century after 873

5.In the third paragraph, the author most probably provides an explanation of the apparent connections among economic, military, and cultural development in order to

(A) suggest that the process of revival in Byzantium accords with this model

(B) set up an order of events that is then shown to be not generally applicable to the case of Byzantium

(C) cast aspersions on traditional historical scholarship about Byzantium

(D) suggest that Byzantium represents a case for which no historical precedent exists（B）

(E) argue that military conquest is the paramount element in the growth of empires

6.Which of the following does the author mention as crucial evidence concerning the manner in which the Byzantine revival began?

(A) The Byzantine military revival of the 860’s led to economic and cultural advances.

(B) The Byzantine cultural revival lasted until 1453.

(C) The Byzantine economic recovery began in the 900’s.

(D) The revival of Byzantine learning began toward the end of the eighth century.（D）

(E) By the early eleventh century the Byzantine Empire had regained much of its lost territory.

7.According to the author, “The common explanation” (line 28) of connections between economic, military, and cultural development is

(A) revolutionary and too new to have been applied to the history of the Byzantine Empire

(B) reasonable, but an antiquated theory of the nature of progress

(C) not applicable to the Byzantine revival as a whole, but does perhaps accurately describe limited periods during the revival

(D) equally applicable to the Byzantine case as a whole and to the history of military, economic, and cultural advances in ancient Greece and Rome（C）

(E) essentially not helpful, because military, economic, and cultural advances are part of a single phenomenon





Passage 7 (7/63)
Between the eighth and eleventh centuries A. D., the Byzantine Empire staged (to produce or cause to happen for public view or public effect “stage a track meet” “stage a hunger strike”)an almost unparalleled economic and cultural revival, a recovery that is all the more striking because it followed a long period of severe internal decline. By the early eighth century, the empire had lost roughly two-thirds of the territory it had possessed in the year 600, and its remaining area was being raided by Arabs and Bulgarians, who at times (at times: adv.有时, 不时)threatened to take Constantinople and extinguish the empire altogether. The wealth of the state and its subjects was greatly diminished, and artistic and literary production had virtually ceased. By the early eleventh century, however, the empire had regained almost half of its lost possessions, its new frontiers were secure, and its influence extended far beyond its borders. The economy had recovered, the treasury was full, and art and scholarship had advanced.

To consider the Byzantine military, cultural, and economic advances as differentiated aspects of a single phenomenon is reasonable. After all, these three forms of progress have gone together in a number of states and civilizations. Rome under Augustus and fifth-century Athens provide the most obvious examples in antiquity. Moreover, an examination of the apparent sequential connections among military, economic, and cultural forms of progress might help explain the dynamics of historical change.

The common explanation of these apparent connections in the case of Byzantium would run like this: when the empire had turned back enemy raids on its own territory and had begun to raid and conquer enemy territory, Byzantine resources naturally expanded and more money became available to patronize art and literature. Therefore, Byzantine military achievements led to economic advances, which in turn led to cultural revival.

No doubt this hypothetical pattern did apply at times during the course of the recovery. Yet it is not clear that military advances invariably came first, economic advances second, and intellectual advances third. In the 860’s the Byzantine Empire began to recover from Arab incursions so that by 872 the military balance with the Abbasid Caliphate had been permanently altered in the empire’s favor. The beginning of the empire’s economic revival, however, can be placed between 810 and 830. Finally, the Byzantine revival of learning appears to have begun even earlier. A number of notable scholars and writers appeared by 788 and, by the last decade of the eighth century, a cultural revival was in full bloom (in full bloom: adv.开着花), a revival that lasted until the fall of Constantinople in 1453. Thus the commonly expected order of military revival followed by economic and then by cultural recovery was reversed in Byzantium. In fact, the revival of Byzantine learning may itself have influenced the subsequent economic and military expansion.

1.Which of the following best states the central idea of the passage?

(A) The Byzantine Empire was a unique case in which the usual order of military and economic revival preceding cultural revival was reversed.

(B) The economic, cultural, and military revival in the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries was similar in its order to the sequence of revivals in Augustan Rome and fifth century Athens.

(C) After 810 Byzantine economic recovery spurred a military and, later, cultural expansion that lasted until 1453.

(D) The eighth-century revival of Byzantine learning is an inexplicable phenomenon, and its economic and military precursors have yet to be discovered.（E）

(E) The revival of the Byzantine Empire between the eighth and eleventh centuries shows cultural rebirth preceding economic and military revival, the reverse of the commonly accepted order of progress.

2.The primary purpose of the second paragraph is which of the following?

(A) To establish the uniqueness of the Byzantine revival

(B) To show that Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens are examples of cultural, economic, and military expansion against which all subsequent cases must be measured

(C) To suggest that cultural, economic, and military advances have tended to be closely interrelated in different societies

(D) To argue that, while the revivals of Augustan Rome and fifth-century Athens were similar, they are unrelated to other historical examples（C）

(E) To indicate that, wherever possible, historians should seek to make comparisons with the earliest chronological examples of revival

3.It can be inferred from the passage that by the eleventh century the Byzantine military forces

(A) had reached their peak and begun to decline

(B) had eliminated the Bulgarian army

(C) were comparable in size to the army of Rome under Augustus

(D) were strong enough to withstand the Abbasid Caliphate’s military forces（D）

(E) had achieved control of Byzantine governmental structures

4.It can be inferred from the passage that the Byzantine Empire sustained significant territorial losses

(A) in 600

(B) during the seventh century

(C) a century after the cultural achievements of the Byzantine Empire had been lost

(D) soon after the revival of Byzantine learning（B）

(E) in the century after 873

5.In the third paragraph, the author most probably provides an explanation of the apparent connections among economic, military, and cultural development in order to

(A) suggest that the process of revival in Byzantium accords with this model

(B) set up an order of events that is then shown to be not generally applicable to the case of Byzantium

(C) cast aspersions on traditional historical scholarship about Byzantium

(D) suggest that Byzantium represents a case for which no historical precedent exists（B）

(E) argue that military conquest is the paramount element in the growth of empires

6.Which of the following does the author mention as crucial evidence concerning the manner in which the Byzantine revival began?

(A) The Byzantine military revival of the 860’s led to economic and cultural advances.

(B) The Byzantine cultural revival lasted until 1453.

(C) The Byzantine economic recovery began in the 900’s.

(D) The revival of Byzantine learning began toward the end of the eighth century.（D）

(E) By the early eleventh century the Byzantine Empire had regained much of its lost territory.

7.According to the author, “The common explanation” (line 28) of connections between economic, military, and cultural development is

(A) revolutionary and too new to have been applied to the history of the Byzantine Empire

(B) reasonable, but an antiquated theory of the nature of progress

(C) not applicable to the Byzantine revival as a whole, but does perhaps accurately describe limited periods during the revival

(D) equally applicable to the Byzantine case as a whole and to the history of military, economic, and cultural advances in ancient Greece and Rome（C）

(E) essentially not helpful, because military, economic, and cultural advances are part of a single phenomenon

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-17 21:55
Virtually everything astronomers known about objects outside the solar system is based on the detection of photons—quanta of electromagnetic radiation. Yet there is another form of radiation that permeates the universe: neutrinos. With (as its name implies) no electric charge, and negligible mass, the neutrino interacts with other particles so rarely that a neutrino can cross the entire universe, even traversing substantial aggregations of matter, without being absorbed or even deflected. Neutrinos can thus escape from regions of space where light and other kinds of electromagnetic radiation are blocked by matter. Furthermore, neutrinos carry with them information（这里我看了几遍，后来才明白是倒装） about the site and circumstances of their production: therefore, the detection of cosmic neutrinos could provide new information about a wide variety of cosmic phenomena and about the history of the universe.
But how can scientists detect a particle that interacts so infrequently with other matter? Twenty-five years passed between Pauli’s hypothesis that the neutrino existed and its actual detection: since then virtually all research with neutrinos has been with neutrinos created artificially in large particle accelerators and studied under neutrino microscopes. But a neutrino telescope, capable of detecting cosmic neutrinos, is difficult to construct. No aratus can detect neutrinos unless it is extremely massive, because great mass is synonymous with huge numbers of nucleons (neutrons and protons), and the more massive the detector, the greater the probability of one of its nucleon’s reacting with a neutrino. In addition, the apparatus must be sufficiently shielded from the interfering effects of other particles.
Fortunately, a group of astrophysicists has proposed a means of detecting cosmic neutrinos by harnessing the mass of the ocean. Named DUMAND, for Deep Underwater Muon and Neutrino Detector, the project calls for placing an array of light sensors at a depth of five kilometers under the ocean surface. The detecting medium is the seawater itself: when a neutrino interacts with a particle in an atom of seawater, the result is a of electrically charged particles and a flash of light that can be detected by the sensors. The five kilometers of seawater above the sensors will shield them from the interfering effects of other high-energy particles raining down through the atmosphere.
The strongest motivation for the DUMAND project is that it will exploit an important source of information about the universe. The extension of astronomy from visible light to radio waves to x-rays and gamma rays never failed to lead to the discovery of unusual objects such as radio galaxies, quasars, and pulsars. Each of these discoveries came as a surprise. Neutrino astronomy will doubtless bring its own share of surprises.

刚刚在想，我做类比的题都是错的，总是找不到，文中例子的要旨。
photons
我不知道，别人是怎么读这三个of 的，反正我看这三个of的顺序是不一样的。等等，我想读错了，quanta of electromagnetic radiation是photons的同位语。这个破折号。
第一段里很多的， thus 和 therefore，但是一个论点，注意最后一个therefore.
第一段，neutrinos，有两个好处：1 可以穿越光子不能穿越的地方；2 穿越的时候，记录下穿越地方的信息。
第二段，建一个neutrinos望远镜的困难： 1.要足够的大；2 要排除其他粒子的干扰。
第三段，解决方法， 在海下5公里的地方，放置光感应设备
第四段，这样做的目的意义，就是为了可以发现新的天文现象。

错误： 5 9
           5 重点

1. Which of the following titles best summarizes the passage as a whole?
(A) At the Threshold of Neutrino Astronomy
(B) Neutrinos and the History of the Universe
(C) The Creation and Study of Neutrinos
(D) The DUMAND System and How It Works
(E) The Properties of the Neutrino
主旨题

2. With which of the following statements regarding neutrino astronomy would the author be most likely to agree?
(A) Neutrino astronomy will supersede all present forms of astronomy.
(B) Neutrino astronomy will be abandoned if the DUMAND project fails.
(C) Neutrino astronomy can be expected to lead to major breakthroughs in astronomy.
(D) Neutrino astronomy will disclose phenomena that will be more surprising than past discoveries.
(E) Neutrino astronomy will always be characterized by a large time lag between hypothesis and experimental confirmation.
最后一段，有这样的说法

3. In the last paragraph, the author describes the development of astronomy in order to
(A) suggest that the potential findings of neutrino astronomy can be seen as part of a series of astronomical successes
(B) illustrate the role of surprise in scientific discovery
(C) demonstrate the effectiveness of the DUMAND apparatus in detecting neutrinos
(D) name some cosmic phenomena that neutrino astronomy will illuminate
(E) contrast the motivation of earlier astronomers with that of the astrophysicists working on the DUMAND project
E肯定不对，不是要对比前任和现在这个项目间的动机

4. According to the passage, one advantage that neutrinos have for studies in astronomy is that they
(A) have been detected for the last twenty-five years
(B) possess a variable electric charge
(C) are usually extremely massive
(D) carry information about their history with them
(E) are very similar to other electromagnetic particles
文中第一段中，关于neutrino两点优点中的一个

5. According to the passage, the primary use of the apparatus mentioned in lines 24-32 would be to
(A) increase the mass of a neutrino
(B) interpret the information neutrinos carry with them
(C) study the internal structure of a neutrino
(D) see neutrinos in distant regions of space
(E) detect the presence of cosmic neutrinos
这题很绕

6. The passage states that interactions between neutrinos and other matter are
(A) rare
(B) artificial
(C) undetectable
(D) unpredictable
(E) hazardous
有好几处都提到了

7. The passage mentions which of the following as a reason that neutrinos are hard to detect?
(A) Their pervasiveness in the universe
(B) Their ability to escape from different regions of space
(C) Their inability to penetrate dense matter
(D) The similarity of their structure to that of nucleons
(E) The infrequency of their interaction with other matter


8. According to the passage, the interaction of a neutrino with other matter can produce
(A) particles that are neutral and massive
(B) a form of radiation that permeates the universe
(C) inaccurate information about the site and circumstances of the neutrino’s production
(D) charged particles and light
(E) a situation in which light and other forms of electromagnetic radiation are blocked
第三段里的细节题

9. According to the passage, one of the methods used to establish the properties of neutrinos was
(A) detection of photons
(B) observation of the interaction of neutrinos with gamma rays
(C) observation of neutrinos that were artificially created
(D) measurement of neutrinos that interacted with particles of seawater
(E) experiments with electromagnetic radiation
这个叫推论题吗？不是很确定。
我是不是没注意看题干呢， 文中说，原来的研究主要指集中在制造neutrino, 和研究neutrino的构造，C

Virtually everything astronomers known about objects outside the solar system is based on the detection of photons—quanta of electromagnetic radiation. Yet there is another form of radiation that permeates the universe: neutrinos. With (as its name implies) no electric charge, and negligible mass, the neutrino interacts with other particles so rarely that a neutrino can cross the entire universe, even traversing substantial aggregations of matter, without being absorbed or even deflected. Neutrinos can thus escape from regions of space where light and other kinds of electromagnetic radiation are blocked by matter. Furthermore, neutrinos carry with them information about the site and circumstances of their production: therefore, the detection of cosmic neutrinos could provide new information about a wide variety of cosmic phenomena and about the history of the universe.

But how can scientists detect a particle that interacts so infrequently with other matter? Twenty-five years passed between Pauli’s hypothesis that the neutrino existed and its actual detection: since then virtually all research with neutrinos has been with neutrinos created artificially in large particle accelerators and studied under neutrino microscopes. But a neutrino telescope, capable of detecting cosmic neutrinos, is difficult to construct. No apparatus can detect neutrinos unless it is extremely massive, because great mass is synonymous with huge numbers of nucleons (neutrons and protons), and the more massive the detector, the greater the probability of one of its nucleon’s reacting with a neutrino. In addition, the apparatus must be sufficiently shielded from the interfering effects of other particles.

Fortunately, a group of astrophysicists has proposed a means of detecting cosmic neutrinos by harnessing the mass of the ocean. Named DUMAND, for Deep Underwater Muon (muon: n. μ介子) and Neutrino Detector, the project calls for placing an array of light sensors at a depth of five kilometers under the ocean surface. The detecting medium is the seawater itself: when a neutrino interacts with a particle in an atom of seawater, the result is a cascade of electrically charged particles and a flash of light that can be detected by the sensors. The five kilometers of seawater above the sensors will shield them from the interfering effects of other high-energy particles raining down through the atmosphere.

The strongest motivation for the DUMAND project is that it will exploit an important source of information about the universe. The extension of astronomy from visible light to radio waves to x-rays and gamma rays never failed to lead to the discovery of unusual objects such as radio galaxies, quasars, and pulsars. Each of these discoveries came as a surprise. Neutrino astronomy will doubtless bring its own share of surprises.

1.Which of the following titles best summarizes the passage as a whole?

(A) At the Threshold of Neutrino Astronomy

(B) Neutrinos and the History of the Universe

(C) The Creation and Study of Neutrinos

(D) The DUMAND System and How It Works（A）

(E) The Properties of the Neutrino

2.With which of the following statements regarding neutrino astronomy would the author be most likely to agree?

(A) Neutrino astronomy will supersede all present forms of astronomy.

(B) Neutrino astronomy will be abandoned if the DUMAND project fails.

(C) Neutrino astronomy can be expected to lead to major breakthroughs in astronomy.

(D) Neutrino astronomy will disclose phenomena that will be more surprising than past discoveries.（C）

(E) Neutrino astronomy will always be characterized by a large time lag between hypothesis and experimental confirmation.

3.In the last paragraph, the author describes the development of astronomy in order to

(A) suggest that the potential findings of neutrino astronomy can be seen as part of a series of astronomical successes

(B) illustrate the role of surprise in scientific discovery

(C) demonstrate the effectiveness of the DUMAND apparatus in detecting neutrinos

(D) name some cosmic phenomena that neutrino astronomy will illuminate（A）

(E) contrast the motivation of earlier astronomers with that of the astrophysicists working on the DUMAND project

4.According to the passage, one advantage that neutrinos have for studies in astronomy is that they

(A) have been detected for the last twenty-five years

(B) possess a variable electric charge

(C) are usually extremely massive

(D) carry information about their history with them（D）

(E) are very similar to other electromagnetic particles

5.According to the passage, the primary use of the apparatus mentioned in lines 24-32 would be to

(A) increase the mass of a neutrino

(B) interpret the information neutrinos carry with them

(C) study the internal structure of a neutrino

(D) see neutrinos in distant regions of space（E）

(E) detect the presence of cosmic neutrinos

6.The passage states that interactions between neutrinos and other matter are

(A) rare

(B) artificial

(C) undetectable

(D) unpredictable（A）

(E) hazardous

7.The passage mentions which of the following as a reason that neutrinos are hard to detect?

(A) Their pervasiveness in the universe

(B) Their ability to escape from different regions of space

(C) Their inability to penetrate dense matter

(D) The similarity of their structure to that of nucleons（E）

(E) The infrequency of their interaction with other matter

8.According to the passage, the interaction of a neutrino with other matter can produce

(A) particles that are neutral and massive

(B) a form of radiation that permeates the universe

(C) inaccurate information about the site and circumstances of the neutrino’s production

(D) charged particles and light（D）

(E) a situation in which light and other forms of electromagnetic radiation are blocked

9.According to the passage, one of the methods used to establish the properties of neutrinos was

(A) detection of photons

(B) observation of the interaction of neutrinos with gamma rays

(C) observation of neutrinos that were artificially created

(D) measurement of neutrinos that interacted with particles of seawater（C）

(E) experiments with electromagnetic radiation





Virtually everything astronomers known about objects outside the solar system is based on the detection of photons—quanta of electromagnetic radiation. Yet there is another form of radiation that permeates the universe: neutrinos. With (as its name implies) no electric charge, and negligible mass, the neutrino interacts with other particles so rarely that a neutrino can cross the entire universe, even traversing substantial aggregations of matter, without being absorbed or even deflected. Neutrinos can thus escape from regions of space where light and other kinds of electromagnetic radiation are blocked by matter. Furthermore, neutrinos carry with them information about the site and circumstances of their production: therefore, the detection of cosmic neutrinos could provide new information about a wide variety of cosmic phenomena and about the history of the universe.

But how can scientists detect a particle that interacts so infrequently with other matter? Twenty-five years passed between Pauli’s hypothesis that the neutrino existed and its actual detection: since then virtually all research with neutrinos has been with neutrinos created artificially in large particle accelerators and studied under neutrino microscopes. But a neutrino telescope, capable of detecting cosmic neutrinos, is difficult to construct. No apparatus can detect neutrinos unless it is extremely massive, because great mass is synonymous with huge numbers of nucleons (neutrons and protons), and the more massive the detector, the greater the probability of one of its nucleon’s reacting with a neutrino. In addition, the apparatus must be sufficiently shielded from the interfering effects of other particles.

Fortunately, a group of astrophysicists has proposed a means of detecting cosmic neutrinos by harnessing the mass of the ocean. Named DUMAND, for Deep Underwater Muon (muon: n. μ介子) and Neutrino Detector, the project calls for placing an array of light sensors at a depth of five kilometers under the ocean surface. The detecting medium is the seawater itself: when a neutrino interacts with a particle in an atom of seawater, the result is a cascade of electrically charged particles and a flash of light that can be detected by the sensors. The five kilometers of seawater above the sensors will shield them from the interfering effects of other high-energy particles raining down through the atmosphere.

The strongest motivation for the DUMAND project is that it will exploit an important source of information about the universe. The extension of astronomy from visible light to radio waves to x-rays and gamma rays never failed to lead to the discovery of unusual objects such as radio galaxies, quasars, and pulsars. Each of these discoveries came as a surprise. Neutrino astronomy will doubtless bring its own share of surprises.

1.Which of the following titles best summarizes the passage as a whole?

(A) At the Threshold of Neutrino Astronomy

(B) Neutrinos and the History of the Universe

(C) The Creation and Study of Neutrinos

(D) The DUMAND System and How It Works（A）

(E) The Properties of the Neutrino

2.With which of the following statements regarding neutrino astronomy would the author be most likely to agree?

(A) Neutrino astronomy will supersede all present forms of astronomy.

(B) Neutrino astronomy will be abandoned if the DUMAND project fails.

(C) Neutrino astronomy can be expected to lead to major breakthroughs in astronomy.

(D) Neutrino astronomy will disclose phenomena that will be more surprising than past discoveries.（C）

(E) Neutrino astronomy will always be characterized by a large time lag between hypothesis and experimental confirmation.

3.In the last paragraph, the author describes the development of astronomy in order to

(A) suggest that the potential findings of neutrino astronomy can be seen as part of a series of astronomical successes

(B) illustrate the role of surprise in scientific discovery

(C) demonstrate the effectiveness of the DUMAND apparatus in detecting neutrinos

(D) name some cosmic phenomena that neutrino astronomy will illuminate（A）

(E) contrast the motivation of earlier astronomers with that of the astrophysicists working on the DUMAND project

4.According to the passage, one advantage that neutrinos have for studies in astronomy is that they

(A) have been detected for the last twenty-five years

(B) possess a variable electric charge

(C) are usually extremely massive

(D) carry information about their history with them（D）

(E) are very similar to other electromagnetic particles

5.According to the passage, the primary use of the apparatus mentioned in lines 24-32 would be to

(A) increase the mass of a neutrino

(B) interpret the information neutrinos carry with them

(C) study the internal structure of a neutrino

(D) see neutrinos in distant regions of space（E）

(E) detect the presence of cosmic neutrinos

6.The passage states that interactions between neutrinos and other matter are

(A) rare

(B) artificial

(C) undetectable

(D) unpredictable（A）

(E) hazardous

7.The passage mentions which of the following as a reason that neutrinos are hard to detect?

(A) Their pervasiveness in the universe

(B) Their ability to escape from different regions of space

(C) Their inability to penetrate dense matter

(D) The similarity of their structure to that of nucleons（E）

(E) The infrequency of their interaction with other matter

8.According to the passage, the interaction of a neutrino with other matter can produce

(A) particles that are neutral and massive

(B) a form of radiation that permeates the universe

(C) inaccurate information about the site and circumstances of the neutrino’s production

(D) charged particles and light（D）

(E) a situation in which light and other forms of electromagnetic radiation are blocked

9.According to the passage, one of the methods used to establish the properties of neutrinos was

(A) detection of photons

(B) observation of the interaction of neutrinos with gamma rays

(C) observation of neutrinos that were artificially created

(D) measurement of neutrinos that interacted with particles of seawater（C）

(E) experiments with electromagnetic radiation

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-17 22:20
Most economists in the United States seem captivated by the spell of the free market. Consequently, nothing seems good or normal that does not accord with the requirements of the free market. A price that is determined by the seller or, for that matter, established by anyone other than the aggregate of consumers seems pernicious. Accordingly, it requires a major act of will to think of price-fixing (the determination of prices by the seller) as both “normal” and having a valuable economic function. In fact, price-fixing is normal in all industrialized societies because the industrial system itself provides, as an effortless consequence of its own development, the price-fixing that it requires. Modern industrial planning requires and rewards great size. Hence, a comparatively small number of large firms will be competing for the same group of consumers. That each large firm will act with consideration of its own needs and thus avoid selling its products for more than its competitors charge is commonly recognized by advocates of free-market economic theories.But each large firm will also act with full consideration of the needs that it has in common with the other large firms competing for the same customers. Each large firm will thus avoid significant price-cutting, because price-cutting would be prejudicial to the common interest in a stable demand for products. Most economists do not see price-fixing when it occurs because they expect it to be brought about by a number of explicit agreements among large firms; it is not.
Moreover, those economists who argue that allowing the free market to operate without interference is the most efficient method of establishing prices have not considered the economies ofnon-socialist countries other than the United states. These economies employ intentional price-fixing, usually in an overt fashion. Formal price-fixing by cartel and informal price-fixing by agreements covering the members of an industry are commonplace. Were there something peculiarly efficient about the free market and inefficient about price-fixing, the countries that have avoided the first and used the second would have suffered drastically in their economic development. There is no indication that they have.
Socialist industry also works within a framework of controlled prices. In the early 1970’s, the Soviet Union began to give firms and industries some of the flexibility in adjusting prices that a more informal evolution has accorded the capitalist system. Economists in the United States have hailed the change as a return to the free market. But Soviet firms are no more subject to prices established by a free market over which they exercise little influence than are capitalist firms; rather, Soviet firms have been given the power to fix prices.

黑体表示是关键字，或这个词汇的意思有问题，不认识，认识但是这里用法特殊，或是我觉得我明白，其实我不明白.
              比如这个prejudicial 我就我觉得我明白。偏见吗？再查词典就傻了。producing bad effects on sth.
表蓝表示句子难理解
表黑表示文中逻辑。

for that matter, 而且
开始那句话我表蓝的，后来想想应该表黑，应该是作者自己的一个论点。这个的逻辑很常见，就是提出一个大众的观点，之后提出一个自己的观点，而且自己的观点还和大众的观点是不一样的。
我又一个发现，一和自己的认知相差很大的时候，我就容易读不明白。
第二个表蓝，我是被这么多的动词，以及这么多的层级打败了。这个也是论点

第一段， 关于价格控制油两点：1 价格控制经济中一个自然现象；2价格控制作用，就整个市场来说，有一个稳定的需求。大多数经济学家没有看懂价格控制，是因为他们觉得只有一个清晰的协议，才算价格控制。
第二段，没有事实表明，不是自由经济就一定是efficient, 价格管制就是一定是无效的。（efficient, 还是 effective, 呵呵，自己的无用功还是有些用处的。）
第三段，额。我要改自己上段总结了。说：苏联从计划经济转向自由经济

第二段 非社会主义国家也使用价格管制
第三段，社会主义国家使用价格管制。

错误 123
这次，错误都找出来了

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) refute the theory that the free market plays a useful role in the development of industrialized societies
(B) suggest methods by which economists and members of the government of the United States can recognize and combat price-fixing by large firms
(C) show that in industrialized societies price-fixing and the operation of the free market are not only compatible but also mutually beneficial
(D) explain the various ways in which industrialized societies can fix prices in order to stabilize the free market
(E) argue that price-fixing, in one form or another, is an inevitable part of and benefit to the economy of any industrialized society
我知道是反驳，但是反驳的对象不对，答案就是不对的。不是反驳，自由经济在发达国家发展中起到重要作用
第二次选C


2. The passage provides information that would answer which of the following questions about price-fixing?
I. What are some of the ways in which prices can be fixed?
II. For what products is price-fixing likely to be more profitable that the operation of the free market?
III.Is price-fixing more common in socialist industrialized societies or in non-socialist industrialized societies?
(A) I only
(B) III only
(C) I and II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III
2肯定是没有的，3肯定是有的
第二段，第三段回答了3
第三句话什么意思? 我是不是看错了  ： 价格控制是在社会主义发达国家更普遍，还是在非社会主义发达国家更普遍？
1我是不是能解读为： 有些是协议性的价格控制，有些没有协议的价格控制。


3. The author’s attitude toward “Most economists in the United States”(line 1) can best be described as
(A) spiteful and envious
(B) scornful and denunciatory
(C) critical and condescending
(D) ambivalent but deferential
(E) uncertain but interested
我看前两句，应该是表明了作者的态度了， nothing seems good 不是嘲讽的，谴责的，D
还是错了，什么是condescending, 我的背单词的时候理解错了，原来作者这样就叫condescending呀，自己觉得自己比别人正确的，不是那种高高在上的感觉。
behaving as though you think you are better, more intelligent, or more important than other people - used to show disapproval
　Professor Hutter's manner is extremely condescending.

4. It can be inferred from the author’s argument that a price fixed by the seller “seems pernicious” (line 7) because
(A) people do not have confidence in large firms
(B) people do not expect the government to regulate prices
(C) most economists believe that consumers as a group should determine prices
(D) most economists associate fixed prices with communist and socialist economies
(E) most economists believe that no one group should determine prices
题干没哟明白

5. The suggestion in the passage that price-fixing in industrialized societies is normal arises from the author’s statement that price-fixing is
(A) a profitable result of economic development
(B) an inevitable result of the industrial system
(C) the result of a number of carefully organized decisions
(D) a phenomenon common to industrialized and non-industrialized societies
(E) a phenomenon best achieved cooperatively by government and industry
我记得文中有个 effortless, 这里应该是同意翻写

6. According to the author, price-fixing in non-socialist countries is often
(A) accidental but productive
(B) illegal but useful
(C) legal and innovative
(D) traditional and rigid
(E) intentional and widespread
文中有个commonplace

7. According to the author, what is the result of the Soviet Union’s change in economic policy in the 1970’s?
(A) Soviet firms show greater profit.
(B) Soviet firms have less control over the free market.
(C) Soviet firms are able to adjust to technological advances.
(D) Soviet firms have some authority to fix prices.
(E) Soviet firms are more responsive to the free market.
这个在第三段，后面部分。我险些就不看了。

8. With which of the following statements regarding the behavior of large firms in industrialized societies would the author be most likely to agree?
(A) The directors of large firms will continue to anticipate the demand for products.
(B) The directors of large firms are less interested in achieving a predictable level of profit than in achieving a large profit.
(C) The directors of large firms will strive to reduce the costs of their products.
(D) Many directors of large firms believe that the government should establish the prices that will be charged for products.
(E) Many directors of large firms believe that the price charged for products is likely to increase annually.
对于这些大公司来说，稳定的需求才是最重要的。

9. In the passage, the author is primarily concerned with
(A) predicting the consequences of a practice
(B) criticizing a point of view
(C) calling attention to recent discoveries
(D) proposing a topic for research
(E) summarizing conflicting opinions
我觉得这个题和1重复了。

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) refute the theory that the free market plays a useful role in the development of industrialized societies

(B) suggest methods by which economists and members of the government of the United States can recognize and combat price-fixing by large firms

(C) show that in industrialized societies price-fixing and the operation of the free market are not only compatible but also mutually beneficial

(D) explain the various ways in which industrialized societies can fix prices in order to stabilize the free market（E）

(E) argue that price-fixing, in one form or another, is an inevitable part of and benefit to the economy of any industrialized society

2.The passage provides information that would answer which of the following questions about price-fixing?

I.What are some of the ways in which prices can be fixed?

II.For what products is price-fixing likely to be more profitable that the operation of the free market?

III.Is price-fixing more common in socialist industrialized societies or in non-socialist industrialized societies?

(A) I only

(B) III only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（A）

(E) I, II, and III

3.The author’s attitude toward “Most economists in the United States”(line 1) can best be described as

(A) spiteful and envious

(B) scornful and denunciatory

(C) critical and condescending

(D) ambivalent but deferential（C）

(E) uncertain but interested

4.It can be inferred from the author’s argument that a price fixed by the seller “seems pernicious” (line 7) because

(A) people do not have confidence in large firms

(B) people do not expect the government to regulate prices

(C) most economists believe that consumers as a group should determine prices

(D) most economists associate fixed prices with communist and socialist economies（C）

(E) most economists believe that no one group should determine prices

5.The suggestion in the passage that price-fixing in industrialized societies is normal arises from the author’s statement that price-fixing is

(A) a profitable result of economic development

(B) an inevitable result of the industrial system

(C) the result of a number of carefully organized decisions

(D) a phenomenon common to industrialized and non-industrialized societies（B）

(E) a phenomenon best achieved cooperatively by government and industry

6.According to the author, price-fixing in non-socialist countries is often

(A) accidental but productive

(B) illegal but useful

(C) legal and innovative

(D) traditional and rigid（E）

(E) intentional and widespread

7.According to the author, what is the result of the Soviet Union’s change in economic policy in the 1970’s?

(A) Soviet firms show greater profit.

(B) Soviet firms have less control over the free market.

(C) Soviet firms are able to adjust to technological advances.

(D) Soviet firms have some authority to fix prices.（D）

(E) Soviet firms are more responsive to the free market.

8.With which of the following statements regarding the behavior of large firms in industrialized societies would the author be most likely to agree?

(A) The directors of large firms will continue to anticipate the demand for products.

(B) The directors of large firms are less interested in achieving a predictable level of profit than in achieving a large profit.

(C) The directors of large firms will strive to reduce the costs of their products.

(D) Many directors of large firms believe that the government should establish the prices that will be charged for products.（A）

(E) Many directors of large firms believe that the price charged for products is likely to increase annually.

9.In the passage, the author is primarily concerned with

(A) predicting the consequences of a practice

(B) criticizing a point of view

(C) calling attention to recent discoveries

(D) proposing a topic for research（B）

(E) summarizing conflicting opinions





1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) refute the theory that the free market plays a useful role in the development of industrialized societies

(B) suggest methods by which economists and members of the government of the United States can recognize and combat price-fixing by large firms

(C) show that in industrialized societies price-fixing and the operation of the free market are not only compatible but also mutually beneficial

(D) explain the various ways in which industrialized societies can fix prices in order to stabilize the free market（E）

(E) argue that price-fixing, in one form or another, is an inevitable part of and benefit to the economy of any industrialized society

2.The passage provides information that would answer which of the following questions about price-fixing?

I.What are some of the ways in which prices can be fixed?

II.For what products is price-fixing likely to be more profitable that the operation of the free market?

III.Is price-fixing more common in socialist industrialized societies or in non-socialist industrialized societies?

(A) I only

(B) III only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（A）

(E) I, II, and III

3.The author’s attitude toward “Most economists in the United States”(line 1) can best be described as

(A) spiteful and envious

(B) scornful and denunciatory

(C) critical and condescending

(D) ambivalent but deferential（C）

(E) uncertain but interested

4.It can be inferred from the author’s argument that a price fixed by the seller “seems pernicious” (line 7) because

(A) people do not have confidence in large firms

(B) people do not expect the government to regulate prices

(C) most economists believe that consumers as a group should determine prices

(D) most economists associate fixed prices with communist and socialist economies（C）

(E) most economists believe that no one group should determine prices

5.The suggestion in the passage that price-fixing in industrialized societies is normal arises from the author’s statement that price-fixing is

(A) a profitable result of economic development

(B) an inevitable result of the industrial system

(C) the result of a number of carefully organized decisions

(D) a phenomenon common to industrialized and non-industrialized societies（B）

(E) a phenomenon best achieved cooperatively by government and industry

6.According to the author, price-fixing in non-socialist countries is often

(A) accidental but productive

(B) illegal but useful

(C) legal and innovative

(D) traditional and rigid（E）

(E) intentional and widespread

7.According to the author, what is the result of the Soviet Union’s change in economic policy in the 1970’s?

(A) Soviet firms show greater profit.

(B) Soviet firms have less control over the free market.

(C) Soviet firms are able to adjust to technological advances.

(D) Soviet firms have some authority to fix prices.（D）

(E) Soviet firms are more responsive to the free market.

8.With which of the following statements regarding the behavior of large firms in industrialized societies would the author be most likely to agree?

(A) The directors of large firms will continue to anticipate the demand for products.

(B) The directors of large firms are less interested in achieving a predictable level of profit than in achieving a large profit.

(C) The directors of large firms will strive to reduce the costs of their products.

(D) Many directors of large firms believe that the government should establish the prices that will be charged for products.（A）

(E) Many directors of large firms believe that the price charged for products is likely to increase annually.

9.In the passage, the author is primarily concerned with

(A) predicting the consequences of a practice

(B) criticizing a point of view

(C) calling attention to recent discoveries

(D) proposing a topic for research（B）

(E) summarizing conflicting opinions

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 11:55
Caffeine, the stimulant in coffee, has been called “the most widely used psychoactive substance on Earth.” Snyder, Daly and Bruns have recently proposed that caffeine affect behavior by countering the activity in the human brain of a naturally occurring chemical called adenosine.Adenosine normally depresses neuron firing in many areas of the brain. It apparently does this by inhibiting the release of neurotransmitters, chemicals that carry nerve impulses from one neuron to the next.（这里像是不用储存在大脑的，对文中逻辑没有影响） Like many other agents that affect neuron firing, adenosine must first bind to specific receptors on neuronal membranes. There are at least two classes of these receptors, which have been designated A1 and A2. Snyder et al propose that caffeine, which is structurally similar to adenosine, is able to bind to both types of receptors, which prevents adenosine from attaching there and allows the neurons to fire more readily than they otherwise would.
For many years, caffeine’s effects have been attributed to its inhibition of the production of phosphodiesterase, an enzyme that breaks down the chemical called cyclic AMP. A number of neurotransmitters exert their effects by first increasing cyclic AMP concentrations in target neurons. Therefore, prolonged periods at the elevated concentrations, as might be brought about by a phosphodiesterase inhibitor, could lead to a greater amount of neuron firing and, consequently, to behavioral stimulation. But Snyder et al point out thatthe caffeine concentrations needed to inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase in the brain are much higher than those that produce stimulation. Moreover, other compounds that block phosphodiesterase’s activity are not stimulants.
To buttress their case that caffeine acts instead by preventing adenosine binding, Snyder et al compared the stimulatory effects of a series of caffeine derivatives with their ability to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in the brains of mice. “In general,” they reported, “the ability of the compounds to compete at the receptors correlates with their ability to stimulate locomotion in the mouse; i.e., the higher their capacity to bind at the receptors, the higher their ability to stimulate locomotion.” Theophylline, a close structural relative of caffeine and the major stimulant in tea, was one of the most effective compounds in both regards.
There were some apparent exceptions to the general correlation observed between adenosine-receptor binding and stimulation. One of these was a compound called 3-isobutyl-1-methylxanthine (IBMX), which bound very well but actually depressed mouse locomotion. Snyder et al suggests that this is not a major stumbling block to their hypothesis. The problem is that the compound has mixed effects in the brain, a not unusual occurrence with psychoactive drugs. Even caffeine, which is generally known only for its stimulatory effects, displays this property, depressing mouse locomotion at very low concentrations and stimulating it at higher ones.

Counter： to do something in order to prevent something bad from happening or to reduce its bad effects
这个该死的神经学的东西，

第一段， caffine绑定在receptor上， 这样就起到防止adenosine 并在receptor上，从而达到刺激的作用。
第二段，一个传统观点。但是这些研究家反对 1 caffine 抑制P的浓度要比产生兴奋效果的浓度大很多；2 其他抑制P的物质不是兴奋剂。
第三段， 就是表黑那句，不翻译了
第四段， 面对例外，给出的理由是， 两种现象都是存在的。


1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) discuss a plan for investigation of a phenomenon that is not yet fully understood
(B) present two explanations of a phenomenon and reconcile the differences between them
(C) summarize two theories and suggest a third theory that overcomes the problems encountered in the first two
(D) describe an alternative hypothesis and provide evidence and arguments that support it
(E) challenge the validity of a theory by exposing the inconsistencies and contradictions in it
主旨题

2. Which of the following, if true, would most weaken the theory proposed by Snyder et al?
(A) At very low concentrations in the human brain, both caffeine and theophylline tend to have depressive rather than stimulatory effects on human behavior.
(B) The ability of caffeine derivatives at very low concentrations to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in mouse brains correlates well with their ability to stimulate mouse locomotion at these low concentrations.
(C) The concentration of cyclic AMP in target neurons in the human brain that leads to increased neuron firing can be produced by several different phosphodiesterase inhibitors in addition to caffeine.
(D) The concentration of caffeine required to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in the human brain is much greater than the concentration that produces behavioral stimulation in humans.
(E) The concentration of IBMX required to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in mouse brains is much smaller than the concentration that stimulates locomotion in the mouse.
我觉得以己之矛攻击之盾的作法，最邪恶。拿S反对别人的理由反对他自己。

3. According so Snyder et al, caffeine differs from adenosine in that caffeine
(A) stimulates behavior in the mouse and in humans, whereas adenosine stimulates behavior in humans only
(B) has mixed effects in the brain, whereas adenosine has only a stimulatory effect
(C) increases cyclic AMP concentrations in target neurons, whereas adenosine decreases such concentrations
(D) permits release of neurotransmitters when it is bound to adenosine receptors, whereas adenosine inhibits such release
(E) inhibits both neuron firing and the production of phosphodiesterase when there is a sufficient concentration in the brain, whereas adenosine inhibits only neuron firing
这里应该是我话横线的地方。

4. In response to experimental results concerning IBMX, Snyder et al contended that it is not uncommon for psychoactive drugs to have
(A) mixed effects in the brain
(B) inhibitory effects on enzymes in the brain
(C) close structural relationships with caffeine
(D) depressive effects on mouse locomotion
(E) the ability to dislodge caffeine from receptors in the brain


5. The passage suggests that Snyder et al believe that if the older theory concerning caffeine’s effects were correct, which of the following would have to be the case?
I. All neurotransmitters would increase the short-term concentration of cyclic AMP in target neurons.
II. Substances other than caffeine that inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase would be stimulants.
III. All concentration levels of caffeine that are high enough to produce stimulation would also inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase.
(A) I only
(B) I and II only
(C) I and III only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III
我就是基于自己的总结吧

6. According to Snyder et al, all of the following compounds can bind to specific receptors in the brain EXCEPT
(A) IBMX
(B) caffeine
(C) adenosine
(D) theophylline
(E) phosphodiesterase


7. Snyder et al suggest that caffeine’s ability to bind to A1 and A2 receptors can be at least partially attributed to which of the following?
(A) The chemical relationship between caffeine and phosphodiesterase
(B) The structural relationship between caffeine and adenosine
(C) The structural similarity between caffeine and neurotransmitters
(D) The ability of caffeine to stimulate behavior
(E) The natural occurrence of caffeine and adenosine in the brain
细节题

8. The author quotes Snyder et al in lines 38-43 most probably in order to
(A) reveal some of the assumptions underlying their theory
(B) summarize a major finding of their experiments
(C) point out that their experiments were limited to the mouse
(D) indicate that their experiments resulted only in general correlations
(E) refute the objections made by supporters of the older theory


9. The last paragraph of the passage performs which of the following functions?
(A) Describes a disconfirming experimental result and reports the explanation given by Snyder et al in an attempt to reconcile this result with their theory.
(B) Specifies the basis for the correlation observed by Snyder et al and presents an explanation in an attempt to make the correlation consistent with the operation of psychoactive drugs other than caffeine.
(C) Elaborates the description of the correlation observed by Snyder et al and suggests an additional explanation in an attempt to make the correlation consistent with the older theory.
(D) Reports inconsistent experimental data and describes the method Snyder et al will use to reanalyze this data.
(E) Provides an example of the hypothesis proposed by Snyder et al and relates this example to caffeine’s properties.

Caffeine, the stimulant in coffee, has been called “the most widely used psychoactive substance on Earth.” Snyder, Daly and Bruns have recently proposed that caffeine affect behavior by countering the activity in the human brain of a naturally occurring chemical called adenosine. Adenosine normally depresses neuron firing in many areas of the brain. It apparently does this by inhibiting the release of neurotransmitters, chemicals that carry nerve impulses from one neuron to the next. Like many other agents that affect neuron firing, adenosine must first bind to specific receptors on neuronal membranes. There are at least two classes of these receptors, which have been designated A₁ and A₂. Snyder et al (et al: abbr. (Lat) 以及其他人，等人) propose that caffeine, which is structurally similar to adenosine, is able to bind to both types of receptors, which prevents adenosine from attaching there and allows the neurons to fire more readily than they otherwise would.

For many years, caffeine’s effects have been attributed to its inhibition of the production of phosphodiesterase, an enzyme that breaks down the chemical called cyclic AMP. A number of neurotransmitters exert their effects by first increasing cyclic AMP concentrations in target neurons. Therefore, prolonged periods at the elevated concentrations, as might be brought about by a phosphodiesterase inhibitor, could lead to a greater amount of neuron firing and, consequently, to behavioral stimulation. But Snyder et al point out that the caffeine concentrations needed to inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase in the brain are much higher than those that produce stimulation. Moreover, other compounds that block phosphodiesterase’s activity are not stimulants.

To buttress their case that caffeine acts instead by preventing adenosine binding, Snyder et al compared the stimulatory effects of a series of caffeine derivatives with their ability to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in the brains of mice. “In general,” they reported, “the ability of the compounds to compete at the receptors correlates with their ability to stimulate locomotion in the mouse; i.e., the higher their capacity to bind at the receptors, the higher their ability to stimulate locomotion.” Theophylline, a close structural relative of caffeine and the major stimulant in tea, was one of the most effective compounds in both regards.

There were some apparent exceptions to the general correlation observed between adenosine-receptor binding and stimulation. One of these was a compound called 3-isobutyl-1-methylxanthine (IBMX), which bound very well but actually depressed mouse locomotion. Snyder et al suggests that this is not a major stumbling block (stumbling block: n.障碍物, 绊脚石) to their hypothesis. The problem is that the compound has mixed effects in the brain, a not unusual occurrence with psychoactive drugs. Even caffeine, which is generally known only for its stimulatory effects, displays this property, depressing mouse locomotion at very low concentrations and stimulating it at higher ones.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) discuss a plan for investigation of a phenomenon that is not yet fully understood

(B) present two explanations of a phenomenon and reconcile the differences between them

(C) summarize two theories and suggest a third theory that overcomes the problems encountered in the first two

(D) describe an alternative hypothesis and provide evidence and arguments that support it（D）

(E) challenge the validity of a theory by exposing the inconsistencies and contradictions in it

2.Which of the following, if true, would most weaken the theory proposed by Snyder et al?

(A) At very low concentrations in the human brain, both caffeine and theophylline tend to have depressive rather than stimulatory effects on human behavior.

(B) The ability of caffeine derivatives at very low concentrations to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in mouse brains correlates well with their ability to stimulate mouse locomotion at these low concentrations.

(C) The concentration of cyclic AMP in target neurons in the human brain that leads to increased neuron firing can be produced by several different phosphodiesterase inhibitors in addition to caffeine.

(D) The concentration of caffeine required to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in the human brain is much greater than the concentration that produces behavioral stimulation in humans.（D）

(E) The concentration of IBMX required to dislodge adenosine from its receptors in mouse brains is much smaller than the concentration that stimulates locomotion in the mouse.

3.According so Snyder et al, caffeine differs from adenosine in that caffeine

(A) stimulates behavior in the mouse and in humans, whereas adenosine stimulates behavior in humans only

(B) has mixed effects in the brain, whereas adenosine has only a stimulatory effect

(C) increases cyclic AMP concentrations in target neurons, whereas adenosine decreases such concentrations

(D) permits release of neurotransmitters when it is bound to adenosine receptors, whereas adenosine inhibits such release（D）

(E) inhibits both neuron firing and the production of phosphodiesterase when there is a sufficient concentration in the brain, whereas adenosine inhibits only neuron firing

4.In response to experimental results concerning IBMX, Snyder et al contended that it is not uncommon for psychoactive drugs to have

(A) mixed effects in the brain

(B) inhibitory effects on enzymes in the brain

(C) close structural relationships with caffeine

(D) depressive effects on mouse locomotion（A）

(E) the ability to dislodge caffeine from receptors in the brain

5.The passage suggests that Snyder et al believe that if the older theory concerning caffeine’s effects were correct, which of the following would have to be the case?

I.All neurotransmitters would increase the short-term concentration of cyclic AMP in target neurons.

II.Substances other than caffeine that inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase would be stimulants.

III.All concentration levels of caffeine that are high enough to produce stimulation would also inhibit the production of phosphodiesterase.

(A) I only

(B) I and II only

(C) I and III only

(D) II and III only（D）

(E) I, II, and III

6.According to Snyder et al, all of the following compounds can bind to specific receptors in the brain EXCEPT

(A) IBMX

(B) caffeine

(C) adenosine

(D) theophylline（E）

(E) phosphodiesterase

7.Snyder et al suggest that caffeine’s ability to bind to A₁ and A₂ receptors can be at least partially attributed to which of the following?

(A) The chemical relationship between caffeine and phosphodiesterase

(B) The structural relationship between caffeine and adenosine

(C) The structural similarity between caffeine and neurotransmitters

(D) The ability of caffeine to stimulate behavior（B）

(E) The natural occurrence of caffeine and adenosine in the brain

8.The author quotes Snyder et al in lines 38-43 most probably in order to

(A) reveal some of the assumptions underlying their theory

(B) summarize a major finding of their experiments

(C) point out that their experiments were limited to the mouse

(D) indicate that their experiments resulted only in general correlations（B）

(E) refute the objections made by supporters of the older theory

9.The last paragraph of the passage performs which of the following functions?

(A) Describes a disconfirming experimental result and reports the explanation given by Snyder et al in an attempt to reconcile this result with their theory.

(B) Specifies the basis for the correlation observed by Snyder et al and presents an explanation in an attempt to make the correlation consistent with the operation of psychoactive drugs other than caffeine.

(C) Elaborates the description of the correlation observed by Snyder et al and suggests an additional explanation in an attempt to make the correlation consistent with the older theory.

(D) Reports inconsistent experimental data and describes the method Snyder et al will use to reanalyze this data.（A）

(E) Provides an example of the hypothesis proposed by Snyder et al and relates this example to caffeine’s properties.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 12:35
Archaeology as a profession faces two major problems. First, it is the poorest of the poor. Only paltry sums are available for excavating and even less is available for publishing the results and preserving the sites once excavated. Yet archaeologists deal with priceless objects every day. Second, there is the problem of illegal excavation, resulting in museum-quality pieces being sold to the highest bidder.
I would like to make an outrageous suggestion that would at one stroke provide funds for archaeology and reduce the amount of illegal digging. I would propose that scientific archeological expeditions and governmental authorities sell excavated artifacts on the open market. Such sales would provide substantial funds for the excavation and preservation of archaeological sites and the publication of results. At the same time, they would break the illegal excavator’s grip on the market, thereby decreasing the inducement to engage in illegal activities.
You might object that professionals excavate to acquire knowledge, not money. Moreover, ancient artifacts are part of our global cultural heritage, which should be available for all to appreciate, not sold to the highest bidder. I agree. Sell nothing that has unique artistic merit or scientific value. But, you might reply everything that comes out of the ground has scientific value. Here we part company. Theoretically, you may be correct in claiming that every artifact has potential scientific value. Practically, you are wrong.
I refer to （指的是）the thousands of pottery vessels and ancient lamps that are essentially duplicates of one another. In one small excavation in Cyprus, archaeologists recently uncovered 2,000 virtually indistinguishable small jugs in a single courtyard, Even precious royal seal impressions known as l’melekh handles have been found in abundance—more than 4,000 examples so far.
The basements of museums are simply not large enough to store the artifacts that are likely to be discovered in the future. There is not enough money even to catalogue the finds; as a result, they cannot be found again and become as inaccessible as if they had never been discovered. Indeed, with the help of a computer, sold artifacts could be more accessible than are the pieces stored in bulging museum basements. Prior to sale, each could be photographed and the list of the purchasers could be maintained on the computer. A purchaser could even be required to agree to return the piece if it should become needed for scientific purposes.
It would be unrealistic to suggest that illegal digging would stop if artifacts were sold on the open market. But the demand for the clandestine product would be substantially reduced. Who would want an unmarked pot when another was available whose provenance was known, and that was dated stratigraphically by the professional archaeologist who excavated it?

第一段，说考古学面临这两个问题， 1 没钱，2 非法挖掘。
第二段，就是买东西
第三段，不是每个出土的都有学术价值。
下面两段说的是， 博物馆这样的不是很值钱的文物很多，卖出去省地方， 而且通过电脑还便于查看。
最后一段，说可以一直非法挖掘。

经典的论述模式，提出问题，解决方法，为什么能够解决问题。

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to propose
(A) an alternative to museum display of artifacts
(B) a way to curb illegal digging while benefiting the archaeological profession
(C) a way to distinguish artifacts with scientific value from those that have no such value
(D) the governmental regulation of archaeological sites
(E) a new system for cataloguing duplicate artifacts
主旨题

2. The author implies that all of the following statements about duplicate artifacts are true EXCEPT:
(A) A market for such artifacts already exists.
(B) Such artifacts seldom have scientific value.
(C) There is likely to be a continuing supply of such artifacts.
(D) Museums are well supplied with examples of such artifacts.
(E) Such artifacts frequently exceed in quality those already catalogued in museum collections.
我觉A没说，但是E就更不对。

3. Which of the following is mentioned in the passage as a disadvantage of storing artifacts in museum basements?
(A) Museum officials rarely allow scholars access to such artifacts.
(B) Space that could be better used for display is taken up for storage.
(C) Artifacts discovered in one excavation often become separated from each other.
(D) Such artifacts are often damaged by variations in temperature and humidity.
(E) Such artifacts’ often remain uncatalogued and thus cannot be located once they are put in storage.
细节题

4. The author mentions the excavation in Cyprus (lines 31-34) to emphasize which of the following points?
(A) Ancient lamps and pottery vessels are less valuable, although more rare, than royal seal impressions.
(B) Artifacts that are very similar to each other present cataloguing difficulties to archaeologists.
(C) Artifacts that are not uniquely valuable, and therefore could be sold, are available in large quantities.
(D) Cyprus is the most important location for unearthing large quantities of salable artifacts.
(E) Illegal sales of duplicate artifacts are wide-spread, particularly on the island of Cyprus.


5. The author’s argument concerning the effect of the official sale of duplicate artifacts on illegal excavation is based on which of the following assumptions?
(A) Prospective purchasers would prefer to buy authenticated artifacts.
(B) The price of illegally excavated artifacts would rise.
(C) Computers could be used to trace sold artifacts.
(D) Illegal excavators would be forced to sell only duplicate artifacts.
(E) Money gained from selling authenticated artifacts could be used to investigate and prosecute illegal excavators.
逻辑题

6. The author anticipates which of the following initial objections to the adoption of his proposal?
(A) Museum officials will become unwilling to store artifacts.
(B) An oversupply of salable artifacts will result and the demand for them will fall.
(C) Artifacts that would have been displayed in public places will be sold to private collectors.
(D) Illegal excavators will have an even larger supply of artifacts for resale.
(E) Counterfeiting of artifacts will become more commonplace.

7. The author implies that which of the following would occur if duplicate artifacts were sold on the open market?
I. Illegal excavation would eventually cease completely.
II. Cyprus would become the primary source of marketable duplicate artifacts.
III. Archaeologists would be able to publish the results of their excavations more frequently than they currently do.
(A) I only
(B) III only
(C) I and II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III


Archaeology as a profession faces two major problems. First, it is the poorest of the poor. Only paltry sums are available for excavating and even less is available for publishing the results and preserving the sites once excavated. Yet archaeologists deal with priceless objects every day. Second, there is the problem of illegal excavation, resulting in museum-quality pieces being sold to the highest bidder.

I would like to make an outrageous (exceeding the limits of what is usual)suggestion that would at one stroke (at one stroke: adv.一笔, 一举) provide funds for archaeology and reduce the amount of illegal digging. I would propose that scientific archeological expeditions and governmental authorities sell excavated artifacts on the open market. Such sales would provide substantial funds for the excavation and preservation of archaeological sites and the publication of results. At the same time, they would break the illegal excavator’s grip on the market, thereby decreasing the inducement to engage in illegal activities.

You might object that professionals excavate to acquire knowledge, not money. Moreover, ancient artifacts are part of our global cultural heritage, which should be available for all to appreciate, not sold to the highest bidder. I agree. Sell nothing that has unique artistic merit or scientific value. But, you might reply everything that comes out of the ground has scientific value. Here we part company. Theoretically, you may be correct in claiming that every artifact has potential scientific value. Practically, you are wrong.

I refer to the thousands of pottery vessels and ancient lamps that are essentially duplicates of one another. In one small excavation in Cyprus, archaeologists recently uncovered 2,000 virtually indistinguishable small jugs in a single courtyard, Even precious royal seal impressions known as l’melekh handles have been found in abundance—more than 4,000 examples so far.

The basements of museums are simply not large enough to store the artifacts that are likely to be discovered in the future. There is not enough money even to catalogue the finds; as a result, they cannot be found again and become as inaccessible as if they had never been discovered. Indeed, with the help of a computer, sold artifacts could be more accessible than are the pieces stored in bulging museum basements. Prior to sale, each could be photographed and the list of the purchasers could be maintained on the computer. A purchaser could even be required to agree to return the piece if it should become needed for scientific purposes.

It would be unrealistic to suggest that illegal digging would stop if artifacts were sold on the open market. But the demand for the clandestine product would be substantially reduced. Who would want an unmarked pot when another was available whose provenance was known, and that was dated stratigraphically (stratigraphy: n.地层学, 地层中的岩石组成)by the professional archaeologist who excavated it?

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to propose

(A) an alternative to museum display of artifacts

(B) a way to curb illegal digging while benefiting the archaeological profession

(C) a way to distinguish artifacts with scientific value from those that have no such value

(D) the governmental regulation of archaeological sites（B）

(E) a new system for cataloguing duplicate artifacts

2.The author implies that all of the following statements about duplicate artifacts are true EXCEPT:

(A) A market for such artifacts already exists.

(B) Such artifacts seldom have scientific value.

(C) There is likely to be a continuing supply of such artifacts.

(D) Museums are well supplied with examples of such artifacts.（E）

(E) Such artifacts frequently exceed in quality those already catalogued in museum collections.

3.Which of the following is mentioned in the passage as a disadvantage of storing artifacts in museum basements?

(A) Museum officials rarely allow scholars access to such artifacts.

(B) Space that could be better used for display is taken up for storage.

(C) Artifacts discovered in one excavation often become separated from each other.

(D) Such artifacts are often damaged by variations in temperature and humidity.（E）

(E) Such artifacts’ often remain uncatalogued and thus cannot be located once they are put in storage.

4.The author mentions the excavation in Cyprus (lines 31-34) to emphasize which of the following points?

(A) Ancient lamps and pottery vessels are less valuable, although more rare, than royal seal impressions.

(B) Artifacts that are very similar to each other present cataloguing difficulties to archaeologists.

(C) Artifacts that are not uniquely valuable, and therefore could be sold, are available in large quantities.

(D) Cyprus is the most important location for unearthing large quantities of salable artifacts.（C）

(E) Illegal sales of duplicate artifacts are wide-spread, particularly on the island of Cyprus.

5.The author’s argument concerning the effect of the official sale of duplicate artifacts on illegal excavation is based on which of the following assumptions?

(A) Prospective purchasers would prefer to buy authenticated artifacts.

(B) The price of illegally excavated artifacts would rise.

(C) Computers could be used to trace sold artifacts.

(D) Illegal excavators would be forced to sell only duplicate artifacts.（A）

(E) Money gained from selling authenticated artifacts could be used to investigate and prosecute illegal excavators.

6.The author anticipates which of the following initial objections to the adoption of his proposal?

(A) Museum officials will become unwilling to store artifacts.

(B) An oversupply of salable artifacts will result and the demand for them will fall.

(C) Artifacts that would have been displayed in public places will be sold to private collectors.

(D) Illegal excavators will have an even larger supply of artifacts for resale.（C）

(E) Counterfeiting of artifacts will become more commonplace.

7.The author implies that which of the following would occur if duplicate artifacts were sold on the open market?

I.Illegal excavation would eventually cease completely.

II.Cyprus would become the primary source of marketable duplicate artifacts.

III.Archaeologists would be able to publish the results of their excavations more frequently than they currently do.

(A) I only

(B) III only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（B）

(E) I, II, and III

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 15:17
Federal efforts to aid minority businesses began in the 1960’s when the Small Business Administration (SBA) began making federally guaranteed loans and government-sponsored management and technical assistance available to minority business enterprises. While this program（哪个program） enabled many minority entrepreneurs to form new businesses, the results were disappointing, since managerial inexperience, unfavorable locations, and capital shortages led to high failure rates. Even years after the program was implemented, minority business receipts were not quite two percent of the national economy’s total receipts.
Recently federal policymakers have adopted an approach intended to accelerate development of the minority business sector by moving away from directly aiding small minority enterprises and toward supporting larger, growth-oriented minority firms through intermediary companies. In this approach, large corporations participate in the development of successful and stable minority businesses by making use of government-sponsored venture capital. The capital is used by a participating company to establish a Minority Enterprise Small Business Investment Company or MESBIC. The MESBIC then provides capital and guidance to minority businesses that have potential to become future suppliers or customers of the sponsoring company.
MESBIC’s are the result of the belief that providing established firms with easier access to relevant management techniques and more job-specific experience, as well as substantial amounts of capital, gives those firms a greater opportunity to develop sound business foundations than does simply making general management experience and small amounts of capital available. Further, since potential markets for the minority businesses already exist through the sponsoring companies, the minority businesses face considerably less risk in terms of location and market fluctuation. Following early financial and operating problems, sponsoring corporations began to capitalize MESBIC’s far above the legal minimum of $500,000 in order to generate sufficient income and to sustain the quality of management needed. MESBIC’s are now emerging as increasingly important financing sources for minority enterprises.
Ironically, MESBIC staffs, which usually consist of Hispanic and Black professionals, tend to approach investments in minority firms more pragmatically than do many MESBIC directors, who are usually senior managers from sponsoring corporations. The latter often still think mainly in terms of the “social responsibility approach” and thus seem to prefer deals that are riskier and less attractive than normal investment criteria would warrant. Such differences in viewpoint have produced uneasiness among many minority staff members, who feel that minority entrepreneurs and businesses should be judged by established business considerations. These staff members believe their point of view is closer to the original philosophy of MESBIC’s and they are concerned that, unless a more prudent course is followed, MESBIC directors may revert to policies likely to re-create the disappointing results of the original SBA approach.

？ 这个可是 small business administration, 那个minority business 到底翻译成什么好？我坚持自己的吧
[CGp] (usu sing 通常作单数) smaller number or part (esp of people voting or of votes cast) 少数（尤指投票者或票数）: Only a minority of British households do/does not have a car. 英国只有少数家庭没有汽车. * A small minority voted against the motion. 投票反对该动议的人占少数. * [attrib 作定语] a minority vote, opinion, point of view, etc, ie one cast, held, etc by a smaller number of people 少数人的票﹑ 意见﹑ 观点等.

第一段 政府帮助中小企业，但是失败了。失败原因是，缺少管理经验，地点不好，资金短缺。
第二段，政府采用新的方法， 让MESBIC提供资金和支持给中小企业。
第三段，MESBIC 成立的依据：这样一个established company 可以提供更好的管理，资金支持；中小企业的市场也得到了保障。
第四段，MESBIC 的staff 比自己老板要更加的谨慎。

错误，6 8
对于 8 我保留意见，我觉得我选的可对了。

1. Which of the following best states the central idea of the passage?
(A) The use of MESBIC’s for aiding minority entrepreneurs seems to have greater potential for success than does the original SBA approach.
(B) There is a crucial difference in point of view between the staff and directors of some MESBIC’s.
(C) After initial problems with management and marketing, minority businesses have begun to expand at a steady rate.
(D) Minority entrepreneurs wishing to form new businesses now have several equally successful federal programs on which to rely.
(E) For the first time since 1960, large corporations are making significant contributions to the development of minority businesses.

2. According to the passage, the MESBIC approach differs from the SBA approach in that MESBIC’s
(A) seek federal contracts to provide markets for minority businesses
(B) encourage minority businesses to provide markets for other minority businesses
(C) attempt to maintain a specified rate of growth in the minority business sector
(D) rely on the participation of large corporations to finance minority businesses
(E) select minority businesses on the basis of their location
我觉得哪个答案都不好，觉得 大公司 substantial fiance support 是M成立的依据之一中一点。

3. Which of the following does the author cite to support the conclusion that the results of the SBA program were disappointing?
(A) The small number of new minority enterprises formed as a result of the program
(B) The small number of minority enterprises that took advantage of the management and technical assistance offered under the program
(C) The small percentage of the nation’s business receipts earned by minority enterprises following the programs, implementation
(D) The small percentage of recipient minority enterprises that were able to repay federally guaranteed loans made under the program
(E) The small number of minority enterprises that chose to participate in the program
同义改写

4. Which of the following statements about the SBA program can be inferred from the passage?
(A) The maximum term for loans made to recipient businesses was 15 years.
(B) Business loans were considered to be more useful to recipient businesses than was management and technical assistance.
(C) The anticipated failure rate for recipient businesses was significantly lower than the rate that actually resulted.
(D) Recipient businesses were encouraged to relocate to areas more favorable for business development.
(E) The capitalization needs of recipient businesses were assessed and then provided for adequately.
to supply a business with money so that it can operate


5. Based on information in the passage, which of the following would be indicative of the pragmatism of MESBIC staff members?
I. A reluctance to invest in minority businesses that show marginal expectations of return on the investments
II. A desire to invest in minority businesses that produce goods and services likely to be of use to the sponsoring company
III. A belief that the minority business sector is best served by investing primarily in newly established businesses
(A) I only
(B) III only
(C) I and II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II and III
这里我没有找到director那种责任的说法
dealing with problems in a sensible, practical way instead of strictly following a set of ideas
→dogmatic


6. The author refers to the “financial and operating problems” (line 38) encountered by MESBIC’s primarily in order to
(A) broaden the scope of the discussion to include the legal considerations of funding MESBIC’S through sponsoring companies
(B) call attention to the fact that MESBIC’s must receive adequate funding in order to function effectively
(C) show that sponsoring companies were willing to invest only $500,000 of government-sponsored venture capital in the original MESBIC’s
(D) compare SBA and MESBIC limits on minimum funding
(E) refute suggestions that MESBIC’s have been only marginally successful
开始我想选B的，但是想题目问的应该是为什么作者会提出M经历这些风险。虽然E不是文中内容，但是我觉得能解释这个问题。
我像是没有读明白following 这个词的含义

7. The author’s primary objective in the passage is to
(A) disprove the view that federal efforts to aid minority businesses have been ineffective
(B) explain how federal efforts to aid minority businesses have changed since the 1960’s
(C) establish a direct link between the federal efforts to aid minority businesses made before the 1960’s and those made in the 1980’s
(D) analyze the basis for the belief that job-specific experience is more useful to minority businesses than is general management experience
(E) argue that the “social responsibility approach” to aiding minority businesses is superior to any other approach


8. It can be inferred from the passage that the attitude of some MESBIC staff members toward the investments preferred by some MESBIC directors can best be described as
(A) defensive
(B) resigned
(C) indifferent
(D) shocked
(E) disapproving
开始的时候，出现ironically, 之后再解释为什么这么pragmatic,我觉得即使不好，但是接受了，resigned.

9. The passage provides information that would answer which of the following questions?
(A) What was the average annual amount, in dollars, of minority business receipts before the SBA strategy was implemented?
(B) What locations are considered to be unfavorable for minority businesses?
(C) What is the current success rate for minority businesses that are capitalized by MESBIC’s?
(D) How has the use of federal funding for minority businesses changed since the 1960’s?
(E) How do minority businesses apply to participate in a MESBIC program?

Federal efforts to aid minority businesses began in the 1960’s when the Small Business Administration (SBA) began making federally guaranteed loans and government-sponsored management and technical assistance available to minority business enterprises. While this program enabled many minority entrepreneurs to form new businesses, the results were disappointing, since managerial inexperience, unfavorable locations, and capital shortages led to high failure rates. Even years after the program was implemented, minority business receipts were not quite two percent of the national economy’s total receipts.

Recently federal policymakers have adopted an approach intended to accelerate development of the minority business sector by moving away from directly aiding small minority enterprises and toward supporting larger, growth-oriented minority firms through intermediary companies. In this approach, large corporations participate in the development of successful and stable minority businesses by making use of government-sponsored venture capital. The capital is used by a participating company to establish a Minority Enterprise Small Business Investment Company or MESBIC. The MESBIC then provides capital and guidance to minority businesses that have potential to become future suppliers or customers of the sponsoring company.

MESBIC’s are the result of the belief that providing established firms with easier access to relevant management techniques and more job-specific experience, as well as substantial amounts of capital, gives those firms a greater opportunity to develop sound business foundations than does simply making general management experience and small amounts of capital available. Further, since potential markets for the minority businesses already exist through the sponsoring companies, the minority businesses face considerably less risk in terms of location and market fluctuation. Following early financial and operating problems, sponsoring corporations began to capitalize MESBIC’s far above the legal minimum of $500,000 in order to generate sufficient income and to sustain the quality of management needed. MESBIC’s are now emerging as increasingly important financing sources for minority enterprises.

Ironically, MESBIC staffs, which usually consist of Hispanic and Black professionals, tend to approach investments in minority firms more pragmatically than do many MESBIC directors, who are usually senior managers from sponsoring corporations. The latter often still think mainly in terms of the “social responsibility approach” and thus seem to prefer deals that are riskier and less attractive than normal investment criteria would warrant. Such differences in viewpoint have produced uneasiness among many minority staff members, who feel that minority entrepreneurs and businesses should be judged by established business considerations. These staff members believe their point of view is closer to the original philosophy of MESBIC’s and they are concerned that, unless a more prudent course is followed, MESBIC directors may revert to (revert to: v.回复, 归还) policies likely to re-create the disappointing results of the original SBA approach.

1.Which of the following best states the central idea of the passage?

(A) The use of MESBIC’s for aiding minority entrepreneurs seems to have greater potential for success than does the original SBA approach.

(B) There is a crucial difference in point of view between the staff and directors of some MESBIC’s.

(C) After initial problems with management and marketing, minority businesses have begun to expand at a steady rate.

(D) Minority entrepreneurs wishing to form new businesses now have several equally successful federal programs on which to rely.（A）

(E) For the first time since 1960, large corporations are making significant contributions to the development of minority businesses.

2.According to the passage, the MESBIC approach differs from the SBA approach in that MESBIC’s

(A) seek federal contracts to provide markets for minority businesses

(B) encourage minority businesses to provide markets for other minority businesses

(C) attempt to maintain a specified rate of growth in the minority business sector

(D) rely on the participation of large corporations to finance minority businesses（D）

(E) select minority businesses on the basis of their location

3.Which of the following does the author cite to support the conclusion that the results of the SBA program were disappointing?

(A) The small number of new minority enterprises formed as a result of the program

(B) The small number of minority enterprises that took advantage of the management and technical assistance offered under the program

(C) The small percentage of the nation’s business receipts earned by minority enterprises following the programs, implementation

(D) The small percentage of recipient minority enterprises that were able to repay federally guaranteed loans made under the program（C）

(E) The small number of minority enterprises that chose to participate in the program

4.Which of the following statements about the SBA program can be inferred from the passage?(这种题目非常狡猾，依据好象是在第一段，其实在文章的最后一句：likely to re-create the disappointing results of the original SBA approach。已经不是一题了！也就是答案的跨度很长。)

(A) The maximum term for loans made to recipient businesses was 15 years.

(B) Business loans were considered to be more useful to recipient businesses than was management and technical assistance.

(C) The anticipated failure rate for recipient businesses was significantly lower than the rate that actually resulted.

(D) Recipient businesses were encouraged to relocate to areas more favorable for business development.（C）

(E) The capitalization needs of recipient businesses were assessed and then provided for adequately.

5.Based on information in the passage, which of the following would be indicative of the pragmatism of MESBIC staff members?

I.A reluctance to invest in minority businesses that show marginal expectations of return on the investments

II.A desire to invest in minority businesses that produce goods and services likely to be of use to the sponsoring company

III.A belief that the minority business sector is best served by investing primarily in newly established businesses

(A) I only

(B) III only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（C）

(E) I, II and III

6.The author refers to the “financial and operating problems” (line 38) encountered by MESBIC’s primarily in order to

(A) broaden the scope of the discussion to include the legal considerations of funding MESBIC’S through sponsoring companies

(B) call attention to the fact that MESBIC’s must receive adequate funding in order to function effectively

(C) show that sponsoring companies were willing to invest only $500,000 of government-sponsored venture capital in the original MESBIC’s

(D) compare SBA and MESBIC limits on minimum funding（B）

(E) refute suggestions that MESBIC’s have been only marginally successful

7.The author’s primary objective in the passage is to

(A) disprove the view that federal efforts to aid minority businesses have been ineffective

(B) explain how federal efforts to aid minority businesses have changed since the 1960’s

(C) establish a direct link between the federal efforts to aid minority businesses made before the 1960’s and those made in the 1980’s

(D) analyze the basis for the belief that job-specific experience is more useful to minority businesses than is general management experience（B）

(E) argue that the “social responsibility approach” to aiding minority businesses is superior to any other approach

8.It can be inferred from the passage that the attitude of some MESBIC staff members toward the investments preferred by some MESBIC directors can best be described as

(A) defensive

(B) resigned

(C) indifferent

(D) shocked（E）

(E) disapproving

9.The passage provides information that would answer which of the following questions?

(A) What was the average annual amount, in dollars, of minority business receipts before the SBA strategy was implemented?

(B) What locations are considered to be unfavorable for minority businesses?

(C) What is the current success rate for minority businesses that are capitalized by MESBIC’s?

(D) How has the use of federal funding for minority businesses changed since the 1960’s?（D）

(E) How do minority businesses apply to participate in a MESBIC program?

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 16:59
The majority of successful senior managers do not closely follow the classical rational model of first clarifying goals, assessing the problem, formulating options, estimating likelihoods of success, making a decision, and only then taking action to implement the decision. Rather, in their day-by-day tactical maneuvers, these senior executives rely on what is vaguely termed “intuition” to manage a network of interrelated problems that require them to deal with ambiguity, inconsistency, novelty, and surprise; and to integrate action into the process of thinking.
Generations of writers on management have recognized that some practicing managers rely heavily on intuition. In general, however, such writers display a poor grasp of what intuition is. Some see it as the opposite of rationality; others view it as an excuse for capriciousness.
Isenberg’s recent research on the cognitive processes of senior managers reveals that managers’ intuition is neither of these. Rather, senior managers use intuition in at least five distinct ways. First, they intuitively sense when a problem exists. Second, managers rely on intuition to perform well-learned behavior patterns rapidly. This intuition is not arbitrary or irrational, but is based on years of painstaking practice and hands-on experience that build skills. A third function of intuition is to synthesize isolated bits of data and practice into an integrated picture, often in an “Aha!” experience. Fourth, some managers use intuition as a check on the results of more rational analysis. Most senior executives are familiar with the formal decision analysis models and tools, and those who use such systematic methods for reaching decisions are occasionally leery of solutions suggested by these methods which run counter to their sense of the correct course of action. Finally, managers can use intuition to bypass in-depth analysis and move rapidly to engender a plausible solution. Used in this way, intuition is an almost instantaneous cognitive process in which a manager recognizes familiar patterns. One of the implications of the intuitive style of executive management is that “thinking” is inseparable from acting. Since managers often “know” what is right before they can analyze and explain it（这话怎么理解，我知道什么是对的。那分析，和解释，就是为了找出当前错在哪里了？）, they frequently act first and explain later. Analysis is inextricably tied to action in thinking/acting cycles, in which managers develop thoughts about their companies and organizations not by analyzing a problematic situation and then acting, but by acting and analyzing in close concert.
Given the great uncertainty of many of the management issues that they face, senior managers often instigate（是开始的意思，不是唆使） a course of action simply to learn more about an issue. They then use the results of the action to develop a more complete understanding of the issue. One implication of thinking/acting cycles is that action is often part of defining the problem, not just of implementing the solution.


前两段，发现问题，很多一线的经理依赖直觉做决策。
第三段，有人解释了intuition的五个作用，并认为想和做不是分家的。
第四段，最后一段，做不是执行解决方案，也可能是为了确定问题。

反复看，觉得作者想强调“做”的重要性，做和分析是统一过程，做可以确定问题。

1. According to the passage, senior managers use intuition in all of the following ways EXCEPT to
(A) speed up of the creation of a solution to a problem
(B) identify a problem
(C) bring together disparate facts
(D) stipulate clear goals
(E) evaluate possible solutions to a problem
开始想想选A的，但是后来这些人，总是这么快速做事情，还是有时间把一个目标描述清楚吗？ 还有呀, they often know what is right.

2. The passage suggests which of the following about the “writers on management” mentioned in line 12?
(A) They have criticized managers for not following the classical rational model of decision analysis.
(B) They have not based their analyses on a sufficiently large sample of actual managers.
(C) They have relied in drawing their conclusions on what managers say rather than on what managers do.
(D) They have misunderstood how managers use intuition in making business decisions.
(E) They have not acknowledged the role of intuition in managerial practice.
这题 ADE，都是和intuition 有关的。

3. Which of the following best exemplifies “an ‘Aha!’ experience” (line 28) as it is presented in the passage?
(A) A manager risks taking an action whose outcome is unpredictable to discover whether the action changes the problem at hand.
(B) A manager performs well-learned and familiar behavior patterns in creative and uncharacteristic ways to solve a problem.
(C) A manager suddenly connects seemingly unrelated facts and experiences to create a pattern relevant to the problem at hand.
(D) A manager rapidly identifies the methodology used to compile data yielded by systematic analysis.
(E) A manager swiftly decides which of several sets of tactics to implement in order to deal with the contingencies suggested by a problem.


4. According to the passage, the classical model of decision analysis includes all of the following EXCEPT
(A) evaluation of a problem
(B) creation of possible solutions to a problem
(C) establishment of clear goals to be reached by the decision
(D) action undertaken in order to discover more information about a problem
(E) comparison of the probable effects of different solutions to a problem


5. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following would most probably be one major difference in behavior between Manager X, who uses intuition to reach decisions, and Manager Y, who uses only formal decision analysis?
(A) Manager X analyzes first and then acts; Manager Y does not.
(B) Manager X checks possible solutions to a problem by systematic analysis; Manager Y does not.
(C) Manager X takes action in order to arrive at the solution to a problem; Manager Y does not.
(D) Manager Y draws on years of hands-on experience in creating a solution to a problem; Manager X does not.
(E) Manger Y depends on day-to-day tactical maneuvering; manager X does not.


6. It can be inferred from the passage that “thinking/acting cycles” (line 45) in managerial practice would be likely to result in which of the following?
I. A manager analyzes a network of problems and then acts on the basis of that analysis.
II. A manager gathers data by acting and observing the effects of action.
III. A manager takes action without being able to articulate reasons for that particular action.
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III


7. The passage provides support for which of the following statements?
(A) Managers who rely on intuition are more successful than those who rely on formal decision analysis.
(B) Managers cannot justify their intuitive decisions.
(C) Managers’ intuition works contrary to their rational and analytical skills.
(D) Logical analysis of a problem increases the number of possible solutions.
(E) Intuition enables managers to employ their practical experience more efficiently.


8. Which of the following best describes the organization of the first paragraph of the passage?
(A) An assertion is made and a specific supporting example is given.
(B) A conventional model is dismissed and an alternative introduced.
(C) The results of recent research are introduced and summarized.
(D) Two opposing points of view are presented and evaluated.
(E) A widely accepted definition is presented and qualified.

The majority of successful senior managers do not closely follow the classical rational model of first clarifying goals, assessing the problem, formulating options, estimating likelihoods of success, making a decision, and only then taking action to implement the decision. Rather, in their day-by-day (day-by-day: adj.每天的day-to-day: adj.日常的, 逐日的)tactical maneuvers, these senior executives rely on what is vaguely termed “intuition” to manage a network of interrelated problems that require them to deal with ambiguity, inconsistency, novelty, and surprise; and to integrate action into the process of thinking.

Generations of writers on management have recognized that some practicing managers rely heavily on intuition. In general, however, such writers display a poor grasp of what intuition is. Some see it as the opposite of rationality; others view it as an excuse for capriciousness.

Isenberg’s recent research on the cognitive processes of senior managers reveals that managers’ intuition is neither of these. Rather, senior managers use intuition in at least five distinct ways. First, they intuitively sense when a problem exists. Second, managers rely on intuition to perform well-learned behavior patterns rapidly. This intuition is not arbitrary or irrational, but is based on years of painstaking practice and hands-on experience that build skills. A third function of intuition is to synthesize isolated bits of data and practice into an integrated picture, often in an “Aha!” experience. Fourth, some managers use intuition as a check on the results of more rational analysis. Most senior executives are familiar with the formal decision analysis models and tools, and those who use such systematic methods for reaching decisions are occasionally leery (leery: SUSPICIOUS, WARY often used with of) of solutions suggested by these methods which run counter to (run counter to: v.违反, 背道而驰) their sense of the correct course of action. Finally, managers can use intuition to bypass in-depth analysis and move rapidly to engender a plausible solution. Used in this way, intuition is an almost instantaneous cognitive process in which a manager recognizes familiar patterns. One of the implications of the intuitive style of executive management is that “thinking” is inseparable from acting. Since managers often “know” what is right before they can analyze and explain it, they frequently act first and explain later. Analysis is inextricably tied to action in thinking/acting cycles, in which managers develop thoughts about their companies and organizations not by analyzing a problematic situation and then acting, but by acting and analyzing in close concert.

Given the great uncertainty of many of the management issues that they face, senior managers often instigate a course of action simply to learn more about an issue. They then use the results of the action to develop a more complete understanding of the issue. One implication of thinking/acting cycles is that action is often part of defining the problem, not just of implementing the solution.

1.According to the passage, senior managers use intuition in all of the following ways EXCEPT to

(A) speed up of the creation of a solution to a problem

(B) identify a problem

(C) bring together disparate facts

(D) stipulate clear goals（D）

(E) evaluate possible solutions to a problem

2.The passage suggests which of the following about the “writers on management” mentioned in line 12?

(A) They have criticized managers for not following the classical rational model of decision analysis.

(B) They have not based their analyses on a sufficiently large sample of actual managers.

(C) They have relied in drawing their conclusions on what managers say rather than on what managers do.

(D) They have misunderstood how managers use intuition in making business decisions.（D）

(E) They have not acknowledged the role of intuition in managerial practice.

3.Which of the following best exemplifies “an ‘Aha!’ experience” (line 28) as it is presented in the passage?

(A) A manager risks taking an action whose outcome is unpredictable to discover whether the action changes the problem at hand.

(B) A manager performs well-learned and familiar behavior patterns in creative and uncharacteristic ways to solve a problem.

(C) A manager suddenly connects seemingly unrelated facts and experiences to create a pattern relevant to the problem at hand.

(D) A manager rapidly identifies the methodology used to compile data yielded by systematic analysis.（C）

(E) A manager swiftly decides which of several sets of tactics to implement in order to deal with the contingencies suggested by a problem.

4.According to the passage, the classical model of decision analysis includes all of the following EXCEPT

(A) evaluation of a problem

(B) creation of possible solutions to a problem

(C) establishment of clear goals to be reached by the decision

(D) action undertaken in order to discover more information about a problem（D）

(E) comparison of the probable effects of different solutions to a problem

5.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following would most probably be one major difference in behavior between Manager X, who uses intuition to reach decisions, and Manager Y, who uses only formal decision analysis?

(A) Manager X analyzes first and then acts; Manager Y does not.

(B) Manager X checks possible solutions to a problem by systematic analysis; Manager Y does not.

(C) Manager X takes action in order to arrive at the solution to a problem; Manager Y does not.

(D) Manager Y draws on years of hands-on experience in creating a solution to a problem; Manager X does not.（C）

(E) Manger Y depends on day-to-day tactical maneuvering; manager X does not.

6.It can be inferred from the passage that “thinking/acting cycles” (line 45) in managerial practice would be likely to result in which of the following?

I.A manager analyzes a network of problems and then acts on the basis of that analysis.

II.A manager gathers data by acting and observing the effects of action.

III.A manager takes action without being able to articulate reasons for that particular action.

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（D）

(E) I, II, and III

7.The passage provides support for which of the following statements?

(A) Managers who rely on intuition are more successful than those who rely on formal decision analysis.

(B) Managers cannot justify their intuitive decisions.

(C) Managers’ intuition works contrary to their rational and analytical skills.

(D) Logical analysis of a problem increases the number of possible solutions.（E）

(E) Intuition enables managers to employ their practical experience more efficiently.

8.Which of the following best describes the organization of the first paragraph of the passage?

(A) An assertion is made and a specific supporting example is given.

(B) A conventional model is dismissed and an alternative introduced.

(C) The results of recent research are introduced and summarized.

(D) Two opposing points of view are presented and evaluated.（B）

(E) A widely accepted definition is presented and qualified.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 17:57
Nearly a century ago, biologists found that if they separated an invertebrate animal embryo into two parts at an early stage of its life, it would survive and develop as two normal embryos. This led them to believe that the cells in the early embryo are undetermined in the sense that each cell has the potential to develop in a variety of different ways. Later biologists found that the situation was not so simple. It matters in which plane the embryo is cut. If it is cut in a plane different from the one used by the early investigators, it will not form two whole embryos.
A debate arose over what exactly was happening. Which embryo cells are determined, just when do they become irreversibly committed to their fates, and what are the “morphogenetic determinants” that tell a cell what to become? But the debate could not be resolved because no one was able to ask the crucial questions in a form in which they could be pursued productively. Recent discoveries in molecular biology, however, have opened up prospects for a resolution of the debate. Now investigators think they know at least some of the molecules that act as morphogenetic determinants in early development. They have been able to show that, in a sense, cell determination begins even before an egg is fertilized.
Studying sea urchins, biologist Paul Gross found that an unfertilized egg contains substances that function as morphogenetic determinants. They are located in the cytoplasm of the egg cell; i.e., in that part of the cell’s protoplasm that lies outside of the nucleus. In the unfertilized egg, the substances are inactive and are not distributed homogeneously. When the egg is fertilized, the substances become active and, presumably, govern the behavior of the genes they interact with. Since the substances are unevenly distributed in the egg, when the fertilized egg divides, the resulting cells are different from the start and so can be qualitatively different in their own gene activity.
The substances that Gross studied are maternal messenger RNA’s—products of certain of the maternal genes. He and other biologists studying a wide variety of organisms have found that these particular RNA’s direct, in large part, the synthesis of histones, a class of proteins that bind to DNA. Once synthesized, the histones move into the cell nucleus, where section of DNA wrap around them to form a structure that resembles beads, or knots, on a string. The beads are DNA segments wrapped around the histones; the string is the intervening DNA. And it is the structure of these beaded DNA strings that guide the fate of the cells in which they are located.

第一段说，胚胎分割方式的不同，有可能不是形成两个相同的胚胎。
第二段，细胞的命运在受惊的时候就被决定了。
第三段，说有东西，受惊后，就开始活跃，影响自己周边的基因，所以解释了为什么不同的分割方式会有不同的结果。
第四段，进一步解释到底是个什么东西决定着，细胞最后的命运。 RNA 生产 H， H和D生成链，球，结。这个DNA链决定着细胞最后的命运。

类比题终于做对一个。

错误，2

1. The passage is most probably directed at which kind of audience?
(A) State legislators deciding about funding levels for a state-funded biological laboratory
(B) Scientists specializing in molecular genetics
(C) Readers of an alumni newsletter published by the college that Paul Gross attended
(D) Marine biologists studying the processes that give rise to new species
(E) Undergraduate biology majors in a molecular biology course
我不知道怎么分BE，但是我假想scientist 会更加专业一些。等等，做完第三题再回来看，胚胎学，分子生物学，生物学是不同的概念。这里是有胚胎的问题引出分子生物学的知识。

2. It can be inferred from the passage that the morphogenetic determinants present in the early embryo are
(A) located in the nucleus of the embryo cells
(B) evenly distributed unless the embryo is not developing normally
(C) inactive until the embryo cells become irreversibly committed to their final function
(D) identical to those that were already present in the unfertilized egg
(E) present in larger quantities than is necessary for the development of a single individual
这个答案从何而来的呀。 我也知道D是有问题的，受惊前和受精后是很不一样的。
好的，开始自己，早起胚胎分割，是可以培育出相同的个体。所以，这个Morphogenetic determinant应该是很多的。

3. The main topic of the passage is
(A) the early development of embryos of lower marine organisms
(B) the main contribution of modern embryology to molecular biology
(C) the role of molecular biology in disproving older theories of embryonic development
(D) cell determination as an issue in the study of embryonic development
(E) scientific dogma as a factor in the recent debate over the value of molecular biology
这样，BD 我就可区分了

4. According to the passage, when biologists believed that the cells in the early embryo were undetermined, they made which of the following mistakes?
(A) They did not attempt to replicate the original experiment of separating an embryo into two parts.
(B) They did not realize that there was a connection between the issue of cell determination and the outcome of the separation experiment.
(C) They assumed that the results of experiments on embryos did not depend on the particular animal species used for such experiments.
(D) They assumed that it was crucial to perform the separation experiment at an early stage in the embryo’s life.
(E) They assumed that different ways of separating an embryo into two parts would be equivalent as far as the fate of the two parts was concerned.


5. It can be inferred from the passage that the initial production of histones after an egg is fertilized takes place
(A) in the cytoplasm
(B) in the maternal genes
(C) throughout the protoplasm
(D) in the beaded portions of the DNA strings
(E) in certain sections of the cell nucleus
我哭，这么多生物单词，跟着感觉走，A

6. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is dependent on the fertilization of an egg?
(A) Copying of maternal genes to produce maternal messenger RNA’s
(B) Synthesis of proteins called histones
(C) Division of a cell into its nucleus and the cytoplasm
(D) Determination of the egg cell’s potential for division
(E) Generation of all of a cell’s morphogenetic determinants
这题 和上题，都是最后两段的融合。

7. According to the passage, the morphogenetic determinants present in the unfertilized egg cell are which of the following?
(A) Proteins bound to the nucleus
(B) Histones
(C) Maternal messenger RNA’s
(D) Cytoplasm
(E) Nonbeaded intervening DNA

8. The passage suggests that which of the following plays a role in determining whether an embryo separated into two parts will develop as two normal embryos?
I. The stage in the embryo’s life at which the separation occurs
II. The instrument with which the separations is accomplished
III. The plane in which the cut is made that separates the embryo
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II, and III
这个和指导没有什么关系

9. Which of the following circumstances is most comparable to the impasse biologists encountered in trying to resolve the debate about cell determination (lines 12-18)?
(A) The problems faced by a literary scholar who wishes to use original source materials that are written in an unfamiliar foreign language
(B) The situation of a mathematician who in preparing a proof of a theorem for publication detects a reasoning error in the proof
(C) The difficulties of a space engineer who has to design equipment to function in an environment in which it cannot first be tested
(D) The predicament of a linguist trying to develop a theory of language acquisition when knowledge of the structure of language itself is rudimentary at best
(E) The dilemma confronting a foundation when the funds available to it are  sufficient to support one of two equally deserving scientific projects but not both
类比题，类比题Nearly a century ago, biologists found that if they separated an invertebrate animal embryo into two parts at an early stage of its life, it would survive and develop as two normal embryos. This led them to believe that the cells in the early embryo are undetermined in the sense that each cell has the potential to develop in a variety of different ways. Later biologists found that the situation was not so simple. It matters in which plane the embryo is cut. If it is cut in a plane different from the one used by the early investigators, it will not form two whole embryos.

A debate arose over what exactly was happening. Which embryo cells are determined, just when do they become irreversibly committed to their fates, and what are the “morphogenetic determinants” that tell a cell what to become? But the debate could not be resolved because no one was able to ask the crucial questions in a form in which they could be pursued productively. Recent discoveries in molecular biology, however, have opened up prospects for a resolution of the debate. Now investigators think they know at least some of the molecules that act as morphogenetic determinants in early development. They have been able to show that, in a sense, cell determination begins even before an egg is fertilized.

Studying sea urchins (any of numerous echinoderms (class Echinoidea) that are usually enclosed in thin brittle globular tests covered with movable spines海胆), biologist Paul Gross found that an unfertilized egg contains substances that function as morphogenetic determinants. They are located in the cytoplasm of the egg cell; i.e., in that part of the cell’s protoplasm that lies outside of the nucleus. In the unfertilized egg, the substances are inactive and are not distributed homogeneously. When the egg is fertilized, the substances become active and, presumably, govern the behavior of the genes they interact with. Since the substances are unevenly distributed in the egg, when the fertilized egg divides, the resulting cells are different from the start and so can be qualitatively different in their own gene activity.

The substances that Gross studied are maternal messenger RNA’s—products of certain of the maternal genes. He and other biologists studying a wide variety of organisms have found that these particular RNA’s direct, in large part, the synthesis of histones, a class of proteins that bind to DNA. Once synthesized, the histones move into the cell nucleus, where section of DNA wrap around them to form a structure that resembles beads, or knots, on a string. The beads are DNA segments wrapped around the histones; the string is the intervening DNA. And it is the structure of these beaded DNA strings that guide the fate of the cells in which they are located.

1.The passage is most probably directed at which kind of audience?

(A) State legislators deciding about funding levels for a state-funded biological laboratory

(B) Scientists specializing in molecular genetics

(C) Readers of an alumni newsletter published by the college that Paul Gross attended

(D) Marine biologists studying the processes that give rise to new species（E）

(E) Undergraduate biology majors in a molecular biology course

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the morphogenetic determinants present in the early embryo are

(A) located in the nucleus of the embryo cells

(B) evenly distributed unless the embryo is not developing normally

(C) inactive until the embryo cells become irreversibly committed to their final function

(D) identical to those that were already present in the unfertilized egg（E）

(E) present in larger quantities than is necessary for the development of a single individual

3.The main topic of the passage is

(A) the early development of embryos of lower marine organisms

(B) the main contribution of modern embryology to molecular biology

(C) the role of molecular biology in disproving older theories of embryonic development

(D) cell determination as an issue in the study of embryonic development（D）

(E) scientific dogma as a factor in the recent debate over the value of molecular biology

4.According to the passage, when biologists believed that the cells in the early embryo were undetermined, they made which of the following mistakes?

(A) They did not attempt to replicate the original experiment of separating an embryo into two parts.

(B) They did not realize that there was a connection between the issue of cell determination and the outcome of the separation experiment.

(C) They assumed that the results of experiments on embryos did not depend on the particular animal species used for such experiments.

(D) They assumed that it was crucial to perform the separation experiment at an early stage in the embryo’s life.（E）

(E) They assumed that different ways of separating an embryo into two parts would be equivalent as far as the fate of the two parts was concerned.

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the initial production of histones after an egg is fertilized takes place

(A) in the cytoplasm

(B) in the maternal genes

(C) throughout the protoplasm

(D) in the beaded portions of the DNA strings（A）

(E) in certain sections of the cell nucleus

6.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is dependent on the fertilization of an egg?

(A) Copying of maternal genes to produce maternal messenger RNA’s

(B) Synthesis of proteins called histones

(C) Division of a cell into its nucleus and the cytoplasm

(D) Determination of the egg cell’s potential for division（B）

(E) Generation of all of a cell’s morphogenetic determinants

7.According to the passage, the morphogenetic determinants present in the unfertilized egg cell are which of the following?

(A) Proteins bound to the nucleus

(B) Histones

(C) Maternal messenger RNA’s

(D) Cytoplasm（C）

(E) Nonbeaded intervening DNA

8.The passage suggests that which of the following plays a role in determining whether an embryo separated into two parts will develop as two normal embryos?

I.The stage in the embryo’s life at which the separation occurs

II.The instrument with which the separations is accomplished

III.The plane in which the cut is made that separates the embryo

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) I and III only（D）

(E) I, II, and III

9.Which of the following circumstances is most comparable to the impasse biologists encountered in trying to resolve the debate about cell determination (lines 12-18)?

(A) The problems faced by a literary scholar who wishes to use original source materials that are written in an unfamiliar foreign language

(B) The situation of a mathematician who in preparing a proof of a theorem for publication detects a reasoning error in the proof

(C) The difficulties of a space engineer who has to design equipment to function in an environment in which it cannot first be tested

(D) The predicament of a linguist trying to develop a theory of language acquisition when knowledge of the structure of language itself is rudimentary at best（D）

(E) The dilemma confronting a foundation when the funds available to it are sufficient to support one of two equally deserving scientific projects but not both






Nearly a century ago, biologists found that if they separated an invertebrate animal embryo into two parts at an early stage of its life, it would survive and develop as two normal embryos. This led them to believe that the cells in the early embryo are undetermined in the sense that each cell has the potential to develop in a variety of different ways. Later biologists found that the situation was not so simple. It matters in which plane the embryo is cut. If it is cut in a plane different from the one used by the early investigators, it will not form two whole embryos.

A debate arose over what exactly was happening. Which embryo cells are determined, just when do they become irreversibly committed to their fates, and what are the “morphogenetic determinants” that tell a cell what to become? But the debate could not be resolved because no one was able to ask the crucial questions in a form in which they could be pursued productively. Recent discoveries in molecular biology, however, have opened up prospects for a resolution of the debate. Now investigators think they know at least some of the molecules that act as morphogenetic determinants in early development. They have been able to show that, in a sense, cell determination begins even before an egg is fertilized.

Studying sea urchins (any of numerous echinoderms (class Echinoidea) that are usually enclosed in thin brittle globular tests covered with movable spines海胆), biologist Paul Gross found that an unfertilized egg contains substances that function as morphogenetic determinants. They are located in the cytoplasm of the egg cell; i.e., in that part of the cell’s protoplasm that lies outside of the nucleus. In the unfertilized egg, the substances are inactive and are not distributed homogeneously. When the egg is fertilized, the substances become active and, presumably, govern the behavior of the genes they interact with. Since the substances are unevenly distributed in the egg, when the fertilized egg divides, the resulting cells are different from the start and so can be qualitatively different in their own gene activity.

The substances that Gross studied are maternal messenger RNA’s—products of certain of the maternal genes. He and other biologists studying a wide variety of organisms have found that these particular RNA’s direct, in large part, the synthesis of histones, a class of proteins that bind to DNA. Once synthesized, the histones move into the cell nucleus, where section of DNA wrap around them to form a structure that resembles beads, or knots, on a string. The beads are DNA segments wrapped around the histones; the string is the intervening DNA. And it is the structure of these beaded DNA strings that guide the fate of the cells in which they are located.

1.The passage is most probably directed at which kind of audience?

(A) State legislators deciding about funding levels for a state-funded biological laboratory

(B) Scientists specializing in molecular genetics

(C) Readers of an alumni newsletter published by the college that Paul Gross attended

(D) Marine biologists studying the processes that give rise to new species（E）

(E) Undergraduate biology majors in a molecular biology course

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the morphogenetic determinants present in the early embryo are

(A) located in the nucleus of the embryo cells

(B) evenly distributed unless the embryo is not developing normally

(C) inactive until the embryo cells become irreversibly committed to their final function

(D) identical to those that were already present in the unfertilized egg（E）

(E) present in larger quantities than is necessary for the development of a single individual

3.The main topic of the passage is

(A) the early development of embryos of lower marine organisms

(B) the main contribution of modern embryology to molecular biology

(C) the role of molecular biology in disproving older theories of embryonic development

(D) cell determination as an issue in the study of embryonic development（D）

(E) scientific dogma as a factor in the recent debate over the value of molecular biology

4.According to the passage, when biologists believed that the cells in the early embryo were undetermined, they made which of the following mistakes?

(A) They did not attempt to replicate the original experiment of separating an embryo into two parts.

(B) They did not realize that there was a connection between the issue of cell determination and the outcome of the separation experiment.

(C) They assumed that the results of experiments on embryos did not depend on the particular animal species used for such experiments.

(D) They assumed that it was crucial to perform the separation experiment at an early stage in the embryo’s life.（E）

(E) They assumed that different ways of separating an embryo into two parts would be equivalent as far as the fate of the two parts was concerned.

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the initial production of histones after an egg is fertilized takes place

(A) in the cytoplasm

(B) in the maternal genes

(C) throughout the protoplasm

(D) in the beaded portions of the DNA strings（A）

(E) in certain sections of the cell nucleus

6.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is dependent on the fertilization of an egg?

(A) Copying of maternal genes to produce maternal messenger RNA’s

(B) Synthesis of proteins called histones

(C) Division of a cell into its nucleus and the cytoplasm

(D) Determination of the egg cell’s potential for division（B）

(E) Generation of all of a cell’s morphogenetic determinants

7.According to the passage, the morphogenetic determinants present in the unfertilized egg cell are which of the following?

(A) Proteins bound to the nucleus

(B) Histones

(C) Maternal messenger RNA’s

(D) Cytoplasm（C）

(E) Nonbeaded intervening DNA

8.The passage suggests that which of the following plays a role in determining whether an embryo separated into two parts will develop as two normal embryos?

I.The stage in the embryo’s life at which the separation occurs

II.The instrument with which the separations is accomplished

III.The plane in which the cut is made that separates the embryo

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) I and III only（D）

(E) I, II, and III

9.Which of the following circumstances is most comparable to the impasse biologists encountered in trying to resolve the debate about cell determination (lines 12-18)?

(A) The problems faced by a literary scholar who wishes to use original source materials that are written in an unfamiliar foreign language

(B) The situation of a mathematician who in preparing a proof of a theorem for publication detects a reasoning error in the proof

(C) The difficulties of a space engineer who has to design equipment to function in an environment in which it cannot first be tested

(D) The predicament of a linguist trying to develop a theory of language acquisition when knowledge of the structure of language itself is rudimentary at best（D）

(E) The dilemma confronting a foundation when the funds available to it are sufficient to support one of two equally deserving scientific projects but not both

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 19:13
In the two decades between 1910 and 1930, over ten percent of the Black population of the United States left the South, where the preponderance of the Black population had been located, and migrated to northern states, with the largest number moving, it is claimed, between 1916 and 1918. It has been frequently assumed, but not proved, that the majority of the migrants in whathas come to be called the Great Migration came from rural areas and were motivated by two concurrent factors: the collapse of the cotton industry following the boll weevil infestation, which began in 1898, and increased demand in the North for labor following the cessation of European immigration caused by the outbreak of the First World War in 1914. This assumption has led to the conclusion that the migrants’ subsequent lack of economic mobility in the North is tied to rural background, a background that implies unfamiliarity with urban living and a lack of industrial skills.
But the question of who actually left the South has never been rigorously investigated. Although numerous investigations document an exodus from rural southern areas to southern cities prior to the Great Migration, no one has considered whether the same migrants then moved on to northern cities. In 1910 over 600,000 Black workers, or ten percent of the Black work force, reported themselves to be engaged in “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits,” the federal census category roughly encompassing the entire industrial sector. The Great Migration could easily have been made up entirely of this group and their families. It is perhaps surprising to argue that an employed population could be enticed to move, but an explanation lies in the labor conditions then prevalent in the South.
About thirty-five percent of the urban Black population in the South was engaged in skilled trades. Some were from the old artisan class of slavery—blacksmiths, masons, carpenters—which had had a monopoly of certain trades, but they were gradually being pushed out by competition, mechanization, and obsolescence. The remaining sixty-five percent, more recently urbanized, worked in newly developed industries—tobacco, lumber, coal and iron manufacture, and railroads. Wages in the South, however, were low, and Black workers were aware, through labor recruiters and the Black press, that they could earn more even as unskilled workers in the North than they could as artisans in the South. After the boll weevil infestation, urban Black workers faced competition from the continuing influx of both Black and White rural workers, who were driven to undercut the wages formerly paid for industrial jobs. Thus, a move north would be seen as advantageous to a group that was already urbanized and steadily employed, and the easy conclusion tying their subsequent economic problems in the North to their rural background comes into question.

economic mobility: 工作转换能力。
mobility: the ability to move easily from one job, area, or social class to another 不仅仅只空间上的移动。
rigorously investigated 仔细调查。

第一段，1910-1930年，美国黑人开始从南部到北部的大迁徙。这个迁徙，有人认为是，这些人主要是农村人，迁徙的原因是：南方有虫灾；2北方因为欧洲的移民的减少（一战）对劳动力的渴望。这个解释会推出：这些人不好找工作是因为他们是农村人，不能适应城市的生活，没有工厂需要的技术。
第二段 作者认为大迁徙应该是被雇佣的黑人。
第三段，农业灾害，进程农民要求的工资更低；北方工资很高，所以，有稳定工作的，有技术的南部黑人开始了迁徙。

错误 5

1. The author indicates explicitly that which of the following records has been a source of information in her investigation?
(A) United States Immigration Service reports from 1914 to 1930
(B) Payrolls of southern manufacturing firms between 1910 and 1930
(C) The volume of cotton exports between 1898 and 1910
(D) The federal census of 1910
(E) Advertisements of labor recruiters appearing in southern newspapers after 1910
细节题，文中说那些有技术的黑人的工作很广的时候，出现了census, 时间也是正确的。

2. In the passage, the author anticipates which of the following as a possible objection to her argument?
(A) It is uncertain how many people actually migrated during the Great Migration.
(B) The eventual economic status of the Great Migration migrants has not been adequately traced.
(C) It is not likely that people with steady jobs would have reason to move to another area of the country.
(D) It is not true that the term “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits” actually encompasses the entire industrial sector.
(E) Of the Black workers living in southern cities, only those in a small number of trades were threatened by obsolescence.
第二段最有一句，在提出自己观点的时候，前面对态度的表达。

3. According to the passage, which of the following is true of wages in southern cities in 1910?
(A) They were being pushed lower as a result of increased competition.
(B) They had begun t to rise so that southern industry could attract rural workers.
(C) They had increased for skilled workers but decreased for unskilled workers.
(D) They had increased in large southern cities but decreased in small southern cities.
(E) They had increased in newly developed industries but decreased in the older trades.
因为，受灾农民进城了。

4. The author cites each of the following as possible influences in a Black worker’s decision to migrate north in the Great Migration EXCEPT
(A) wage levels in northern cities
(B) labor recruiters
(C) competition from rural workers
(D) voting rights in northern states
(E) the Black press
主要原因就是两个，有两个是信息来源

5. It can be inferred from the passage that the “easy conclusion” mentioned in line 53 is based on which of the following assumptions?
(A) People who migrate from rural areas to large cities usually do so for economic reasons.
(B) Most people who leave rural areas to take jobs in cities return to rural areas as soon as it is financially possible for them to do so.
(C) People with rural backgrounds are less likely to succeed economically in cities than are those with urban backgrounds.
(D) Most people who were once skilled workers are not willing to work as unskilled workers.
(E) People who migrate from their birthplaces to other regions of country seldom undertake a second migration.
我还是搞明白逻辑链猜错的。错误的逻辑链应该是这样： 1 参加大迁徙是农民；2 农民不好找工作；所以在迁徙后他们经济很困难。
正确的逻辑链是： 参加迁徙的是有技术的工人，但是迁徙后他们经济上很困难。

6. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) support an alternative to an accepted methodology
(B) present evidence that resolves a contradiction
(C) introduce a recently discovered source of information
(D) challenge a widely accepted explanation
(E) argue that a discarded theory deserves new attention


7. According to information in the passage, which of the following is a correct sequence of groups of workers, from highest paid to lowest paid, in the period between 1910 and 1930?
(A) Artisans in the North; artisans in the South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South
(B) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South
(C) Artisans in the North; unskilled workers in the North; artisans in the South
(D) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North; unskilled rural workers in the South
(E) Artisans in the North and South, unskilled rural workers in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North and South

8. The material in the passage would be most relevant to a long discussion of which of the following topics?
(A) The reasons for the subsequent economic difficulties of those who participated in the Great Migration
(B) The effect of migration on the regional economies of the United States following the First World War
(C) The transition from a rural to an urban existence for those who migrated in the Great Migration
(D) The transformation of the agricultural South following the boll weevil infestation
(E) The disappearance of the artisan class in the United States as a consequence of mechanization in the early twentieth century
自己联想，觉得先确定到底是谁参与了大迁徙，之后就是为什么迁徙后这些人不好挣钱呢。这个问题，第一段的时候也提出过。

In the two decades between 1910 and 1930, over ten percent of the Black population of the United States left the South, where the preponderance of the Black population had been located, and migrated to northern states, with the largest number moving, it is claimed, between 1916 and 1918. It has been frequently assumed, but not proved, that the majority of the migrants in what has come to be called the Great Migration came from rural areas and were motivated by two concurrent factors: the collapse of the cotton industry following the boll weevil (boll weevil: n. 棉籽象鼻虫) infestation, which began in 1898, and increased demand in the North for labor following the cessation of European immigration caused by the outbreak of the First World War in 1914. This assumption has led to the conclusion that the migrants’ subsequent lack of economic mobility in the North is tied to rural background, a background that implies unfamiliarity with urban living and a lack of industrial skills.

But the question of who actually left the South has never been rigorously investigated. Although numerous investigations document an exodus from rural southern areas to southern cities prior to the Great Migration, no one has considered whether the same migrants then moved on to northern cities. In 1910 over 600,000 Black workers, or ten percent of the Black work force, reported themselves to be engaged in “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits,” the federal census category roughly encompassing the entire industrial sector. The Great Migration could easily have been made up entirely of this group and their families. It is perhaps surprising to argue that an employed population could be enticed to move, but an explanation lies in the labor conditions then prevalent in the South.

About thirty-five percent of the urban Black population in the South was engaged in skilled trades. Some were from the old artisan class of slavery—blacksmiths, masons, carpenters—which had had a monopoly of certain trades, but they were gradually being pushed out by competition, mechanization, and obsolescence. The remaining sixty-five percent, more recently urbanized, worked in newly developed industries—tobacco, lumber, coal and iron manufacture, and railroads. Wages in the South, however, were low, and Black workers were aware, through labor recruiters and the Black press, that they could earn more even as unskilled workers in the North than they could as artisans in the South. After the boll weevil infestation, urban Black workers faced competition from the continuing influx of both Black and White rural workers, who were driven to undercut the wages formerly paid for industrial jobs. Thus, a move north would be seen as advantageous to a group that was already urbanized and steadily employed, and the easy conclusion tying their subsequent economic problems in the North to their rural background comes into question.

1.The author indicates explicitly that which of the following records has been a source of information in her investigation?

(A) United States Immigration Service reports from 1914 to 1930

(B) Payrolls of southern manufacturing firms between 1910 and 1930

(C) The volume of cotton exports between 1898 and 1910

(D) The federal census of 1910（D）

(E) Advertisements of labor recruiters appearing in southern newspapers after 1910

2.In the passage, the author anticipates which of the following as a possible objection to her argument?

(A) It is uncertain how many people actually migrated during the Great Migration.

(B) The eventual economic status of the Great Migration migrants has not been adequately traced.

(C) It is not likely that people with steady jobs would have reason to move to another area of the country.

(D) It is not true that the term “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits” actually encompasses the entire industrial sector.（C）

(E) Of the Black workers living in southern cities, only those in a small number of trades were threatened by obsolescence.

3.According to the passage, which of the following is true of wages in southern cities in 1910?

(A) They were being pushed lower as a result of increased competition.

(B) They had begun t to rise so that southern industry could attract rural workers.

(C) They had increased for skilled workers but decreased for unskilled workers.

(D) They had increased in large southern cities but decreased in small southern cities.（A）

(E) They had increased in newly developed industries but decreased in the older trades.

4.The author cites each of the following as possible influences in a Black worker’s decision to migrate north in the Great Migration EXCEPT

(A) wage levels in northern cities

(B) labor recruiters

(C) competition from rural workers

(D) voting rights in northern states（D）

(E) the Black press

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the “easy conclusion” mentioned in line 53 is based on which of the following assumptions?

(A) People who migrate from rural areas to large cities usually do so for economic reasons.

(B) Most people who leave rural areas to take jobs in cities return to rural areas as soon as it is financially possible for them to do so.

(C) People with rural backgrounds are less likely to succeed economically in cities than are those with urban backgrounds.

(D) Most people who were once skilled workers are not willing to work as unskilled workers.（C）

(E) People who migrate from their birthplaces to other regions of country seldom undertake a second migration.

6.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) support an alternative to an accepted methodology

(B) present evidence that resolves a contradiction

(C) introduce a recently discovered source of information

(D) challenge a widely accepted explanation（D）

(E) argue that a discarded theory deserves new attention

7.According to information in the passage, which of the following is a correct sequence of groups of workers, from highest paid to lowest paid, in the period between 1910 and 1930?

(A) Artisans in the North; artisans in the South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South

(B) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South

(C) Artisans in the North; unskilled workers in the North; artisans in the South

(D) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North; unskilled rural workers in the South（C）

(E) Artisans in the North and South, unskilled rural workers in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North and South

8.The material in the passage would be most relevant to a long discussion of which of the following topics?

(A) The reasons for the subsequent economic difficulties of those who participated in the Great Migration

(B) The effect of migration on the regional economies of the United States following the First World War

(C) The transition from a rural to an urban existence for those who migrated in the Great Migration

(D) The transformation of the agricultural South following the boll weevil infestation（A）

(E) The disappearance of the artisan class in the United States as a consequence of mechanization in the early twentieth century



In the two decades between 1910 and 1930, over ten percent of the Black population of the United States left the South, where the preponderance of the Black population had been located, and migrated to northern states, with the largest number moving, it is claimed, between 1916 and 1918. It has been frequently assumed, but not proved, that the majority of the migrants in what has come to be called the Great Migration came from rural areas and were motivated by two concurrent factors: the collapse of the cotton industry following the boll weevil (boll weevil: n. 棉籽象鼻虫) infestation, which began in 1898, and increased demand in the North for labor following the cessation of European immigration caused by the outbreak of the First World War in 1914. This assumption has led to the conclusion that the migrants’ subsequent lack of economic mobility in the North is tied to rural background, a background that implies unfamiliarity with urban living and a lack of industrial skills.

But the question of who actually left the South has never been rigorously investigated. Although numerous investigations document an exodus from rural southern areas to southern cities prior to the Great Migration, no one has considered whether the same migrants then moved on to northern cities. In 1910 over 600,000 Black workers, or ten percent of the Black work force, reported themselves to be engaged in “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits,” the federal census category roughly encompassing the entire industrial sector. The Great Migration could easily have been made up entirely of this group and their families. It is perhaps surprising to argue that an employed population could be enticed to move, but an explanation lies in the labor conditions then prevalent in the South.

About thirty-five percent of the urban Black population in the South was engaged in skilled trades. Some were from the old artisan class of slavery—blacksmiths, masons, carpenters—which had had a monopoly of certain trades, but they were gradually being pushed out by competition, mechanization, and obsolescence. The remaining sixty-five percent, more recently urbanized, worked in newly developed industries—tobacco, lumber, coal and iron manufacture, and railroads. Wages in the South, however, were low, and Black workers were aware, through labor recruiters and the Black press, that they could earn more even as unskilled workers in the North than they could as artisans in the South. After the boll weevil infestation, urban Black workers faced competition from the continuing influx of both Black and White rural workers, who were driven to undercut the wages formerly paid for industrial jobs. Thus, a move north would be seen as advantageous to a group that was already urbanized and steadily employed, and the easy conclusion tying their subsequent economic problems in the North to their rural background comes into question.

1.The author indicates explicitly that which of the following records has been a source of information in her investigation?

(A) United States Immigration Service reports from 1914 to 1930

(B) Payrolls of southern manufacturing firms between 1910 and 1930

(C) The volume of cotton exports between 1898 and 1910

(D) The federal census of 1910（D）

(E) Advertisements of labor recruiters appearing in southern newspapers after 1910

2.In the passage, the author anticipates which of the following as a possible objection to her argument?

(A) It is uncertain how many people actually migrated during the Great Migration.

(B) The eventual economic status of the Great Migration migrants has not been adequately traced.

(C) It is not likely that people with steady jobs would have reason to move to another area of the country.

(D) It is not true that the term “manufacturing and mechanical pursuits” actually encompasses the entire industrial sector.（C）

(E) Of the Black workers living in southern cities, only those in a small number of trades were threatened by obsolescence.

3.According to the passage, which of the following is true of wages in southern cities in 1910?

(A) They were being pushed lower as a result of increased competition.

(B) They had begun t to rise so that southern industry could attract rural workers.

(C) They had increased for skilled workers but decreased for unskilled workers.

(D) They had increased in large southern cities but decreased in small southern cities.（A）

(E) They had increased in newly developed industries but decreased in the older trades.

4.The author cites each of the following as possible influences in a Black worker’s decision to migrate north in the Great Migration EXCEPT

(A) wage levels in northern cities

(B) labor recruiters

(C) competition from rural workers

(D) voting rights in northern states（D）

(E) the Black press

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the “easy conclusion” mentioned in line 53 is based on which of the following assumptions?

(A) People who migrate from rural areas to large cities usually do so for economic reasons.

(B) Most people who leave rural areas to take jobs in cities return to rural areas as soon as it is financially possible for them to do so.

(C) People with rural backgrounds are less likely to succeed economically in cities than are those with urban backgrounds.

(D) Most people who were once skilled workers are not willing to work as unskilled workers.（C）

(E) People who migrate from their birthplaces to other regions of country seldom undertake a second migration.

6.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) support an alternative to an accepted methodology

(B) present evidence that resolves a contradiction

(C) introduce a recently discovered source of information

(D) challenge a widely accepted explanation（D）

(E) argue that a discarded theory deserves new attention

7.According to information in the passage, which of the following is a correct sequence of groups of workers, from highest paid to lowest paid, in the period between 1910 and 1930?

(A) Artisans in the North; artisans in the South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South

(B) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled workers in the North; unskilled workers in the South

(C) Artisans in the North; unskilled workers in the North; artisans in the South

(D) Artisans in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North; unskilled rural workers in the South（C）

(E) Artisans in the North and South, unskilled rural workers in the North and South; unskilled urban workers in the North and South

8.The material in the passage would be most relevant to a long discussion of which of the following topics?

(A) The reasons for the subsequent economic difficulties of those who participated in the Great Migration

(B) The effect of migration on the regional economies of the United States following the First World War

(C) The transition from a rural to an urban existence for those who migrated in the Great Migration

(D) The transformation of the agricultural South following the boll weevil infestation（A）

(E) The disappearance of the artisan class in the United States as a consequence of mechanization in the early twentieth century

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 19:14
今天 最后一篇，加油。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-18 20:19
In 1896 a Georgia couple suing for damages in the accidental death of their two year old was told that since the child had made no real economic contribution to the family, there was no liability for damages. In contrast, less than a century later, in 1979, the parents of a three-year-old sued in New York for accidental-death damages and won an award of $750,000.
The transformation in social values implicit in juxtaposing these two incidents is the subject of Viviana Zelizer’s excellent book, Pricing the Priceless Child. During the nineteenth century, she argues, the concept of the “useful” child who contributed to the family economy gave way gradually to the present-day notion of the “useless” child who, though producing no income for, and indeed extremely costly to, its parents, is yet considered emotionally “priceless.”Well established among segments of the middle and upper classes by the mid-1800’s, this new view of childhood spread throughout society in the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth centuries as reformers introduced child-labor regulations and compulsory education laws predicated in part on the assumption that a child’s emotional value made child labor taboo.
For Zelizer the origins of this transformation were many and complex. The gradual erosion of children’s productive value in a maturing industrial economy, the decline in birth and death rates, especially in child mortality, and the development of the companionate family (a family in which members were united by explicit bonds of love rather than duty) were all factors critical in changing the assessment of children’s worth. Yet “expulsion of children from the ‘cash nexus,’ although clearly shaped by profound changes in the economic, occupational, and family structures,” Zelizer maintains, “was also part of a cultural process ‘of sacrelization’ of children’s lives.” Protecting children from the crass business world became enormously important for late-nineteenth-century middle-class Americans, she suggests; this sacralization was a way of resisting what they perceived as the relentless corruption of human values by the marketplace.
In stressing the cultural determinants of a child’s worth, Zelizer takes issue with practitioners of the new “sociological economics,” who have analyzed such traditionally sociological topics as crime, marriage, education, and health solely in terms of their economic determinants. Allowing only a small role for cultural forces in the form of individual “preferences,” these sociologists tend to view all human behaviors as directed primarily by the principle of maximizing economic gain. Zelizer is highly critical of this approach, and emphasizes instead the opposite phenomenon: the power of social values to transform price. As children became more valuable in emotional terms, she argues, their “exchange” or “surrender” value on the market, that is, the conversion of their intangible worth into cash terms, became much greater.

第一个表黑，我要是遇到这个理由，别人用这个理由和我说，我非要疯了。
我不能再花了，再花整段都是蓝的了。最后一句问题很大。
take issue with sb： 与sb争论
surrender value Surrender value the amount the policyholder will get from the life insurance company if he decides to exit the policy before maturity.


第一段 用两个事实做对比。
第二段，Z书中说，社会价值观改变，从孩子的有用，到孩子情感价值。
第三段，Z提到，真的把孩子从这种有用论（就是孩子是不是创造价值来决定意外死亡时受不受赔偿），是将孩子神圣化。
第四段，Z 与社会经济化的论战，Z认为正是社会价值观转变，使得孩子在感情上变得是无价的，才使得孩子的“交换价值” 和“surrender value”变得很高。

错误 3 4

1. It can be inferred from the passage that accidental-death damage awards in America during the nineteenth century tended to be based principally on the
(A) earnings of the person at time of death
(B) wealth of the party causing the death
(C) degree of culpability of the party causing the death
(D) amount of money that had been spent on the person killed
(E) amount of suffering endured by the family of the person killed
我觉得都有问题，A 在死亡时挣到钱数？是死亡那年， 还是死亡时的几个月

2. It can be inferred from the passage that in the early 1800’s children were generally regarded by their families as individuals who
(A) needed enormous amounts of security and affection
(B) required constant supervision while working
(C) were important to the economic well-being of a family
(D) were unsuited to spending long hours in school
(E) were financial burdens assumed for the good of society


3. Which of the following alternative explanations of the change in the cash value of children would be most likely to be put forward by sociological economists as they are described in the passage?
(A) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because parents began to increase their emotional investment in the upbringing of their children.
(B) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because their expected earnings over the course of a lifetime increased greatly.
(C) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because the spread of humanitarian ideals resulted in a wholesale reappraisal of the worth of an individual.
(D) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because compulsory education laws reduced the supply, and thus raised the costs, of available child labor.
(E) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because of changes in the way negligence law assessed damages in accidental death cases.
BD都想，但是我觉得D更像没有人性的学经济的人说的话，他们是机器人吗？
D的逻辑是有漏洞的，法律已经禁止不能打童工了，要求教育了。B是一定能推出来的。

4. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) review the literature in a new academic sub-field
(B) present the central thesis of a recent book
(C) contrast two approaches to analyzing historical change
(D) refute a traditional explanation of a social phenomenon
(E) encourage further work on a neglected historical topic
嗯，写一本说，这本书的主要观点是什么，这个观点反对什么。不是主要为了反对一个观点。主要反对一个观点，就是这个反对观点是什么，反对理由是什么。这样的论述顺序。
但是这个文章论述顺序是，先说两个对比强烈的事实，之后reconcile the difference, 之后再说作者反对某个学派的观点。


5. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following statements was true of American families over the course of the nineteenth century?
(A) The average size of families grew considerably.
(B) The percentage of families involved in industrial work declined dramatically.
(C) Family members became more emotionally bonded to one another.
(D) Family members spent an increasing amount of time working with each other.
(E) Family members became more economically dependent on each other.
那个括号很好揭示了这个问题

6. Zelizer refers to all of the following as important influences in changing the assessment of children’s worth EXCEPT changes in
(A) the mortality rate
(B) the nature of industry
(C) the nature of the family
(D) attitudes toward reform movements
(E) attitudes toward the marketplace
这个好难选呀，BD 不管了attitude 不能两个都对。

7. Which of the following would be most consistent with the practices of sociological economics as these practices are described in the passage?
(A) Arguing that most health-care professionals enter the field because they believe it to be the most socially useful of any occupation
(B) Arguing that most college students choose majors that they believe will lead to the most highly paid jobs available to them
(C) Arguing that most decisions about marriage and divorce are based on rational assessments of the likelihood that each partner will remain committed to the relationship
(D) Analyzing changes in the number of people enrolled in colleges and universities as a function of changes in the economic health of these institutions
(E) Analyzing changes in the ages at which people get married as a function of a change in the average number of years that young people have lived away from their parents

In 1896 a Georgia couple suing for (sue for: v.控告) damages in the accidental death of their two year old was told that since the child had made no real economic contribution to the family, there was no liability for damages. In contrast, less than a century later, in 1979, the parents of a three-year-old sued in New York for accidental-death damages and won an award of $750,000.

The transformation in social values implicit in juxtaposing these two incidents is the subject of Viviana Zelizer’s excellent book, Pricing the Priceless Child. During the nineteenth century, she argues, the concept of the “useful” child who contributed to the family economy gave way gradually to the present-day notion of the “useless” child who, though producing no income for, and indeed extremely costly to, its parents, is yet considered emotionally “priceless.” Well established among segments of the middle and upper classes by the mid-1800’s, this new view of childhood spread throughout society in the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth centuries as reformers introduced child-labor regulations and compulsory education (compulsory education: n.义务教育) laws predicated in part on the assumption that a child’s emotional value made child labor taboo.

For Zelizer the origins of this transformation were many and complex. The gradual erosion of children’s productive value in a maturing industrial economy, the decline in birth and death rates, especially in child mortality, and the development of the companionate family (a family in which members were united by explicit bonds of love rather than duty) were all factors critical in changing the assessment of children’s worth. Yet “expulsion of children from the ‘cash nexus (cash nexus: 金钱关系, 现金(交易)关系),’ although clearly shaped by profound changes in the economic, occupational, and family structures,” Zelizer maintains, “was also part of a cultural process ‘of sacrelization’ of children’s lives.” Protecting children from the crass business world became enormously important for late-nineteenth-century middle-class Americans, she suggests; this sacralization was a way of resisting what they perceived as the relentless corruption of human values by the marketplace.

In stressing the cultural determinants of a child’s worth, Zelizer takes issue with practitioners of the new “sociological economics,” who have analyzed such traditionally sociological topics as crime, marriage, education, and health solely in terms of their economic determinants. Allowing only a small role for cultural forces in the form of individual “preferences,” these sociologists tend to view all human behaviors as directed primarily by the principle of maximizing economic gain. Zelizer is highly critical of this approach, and emphasizes instead the opposite phenomenon: the power of social values to transform price. As children became more valuable in emotional terms, she argues, their “exchange” or “surrender” value on the market, that is, the conversion of their intangible worth into cash terms, became much greater.

1.It can be inferred from the passage that accidental-death damage awards in America during the nineteenth century tended to be based principally on the

(A) earnings of the person at time of death

(B) wealth of the party causing the death

(C) degree of culpability of the party causing the death

(D) amount of money that had been spent on the person killed（A）

(E) amount of suffering endured by the family of the person killed

2.It can be inferred from the passage that in the early 1800’s children were generally regarded by their families as individuals who

(A) needed enormous amounts of security and affection

(B) required constant supervision while working

(C) were important to the economic well-being of a family

(D) were unsuited to spending long hours in school（C）

(E) were financial burdens assumed for the good of society

3.Which of the following alternative explanations of the change in the cash value of children would be most likely to be put forward by sociological economists as they are described in the passage?

(A) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because parents began to increase their emotional investment in the upbringing of their children.

(B) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because their expected earnings over the course of a lifetime increased greatly.

(C) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because the spread of humanitarian ideals resulted in a wholesale reappraisal of the worth of an individual.

(D) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because compulsory education laws reduced the supply, and thus raised the costs, of available child labor.（B）

(E) The cash value of children rose during the nineteenth century because of changes in the way negligence law assessed damages in accidental death cases.

4.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) review the literature in a new academic sub-field

(B) present the central thesis of a recent book

(C) contrast two approaches to analyzing historical change

(D) refute a traditional explanation of a social phenomenon（B）

(E) encourage further work on a neglected historical topic

5.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following statements was true of American families over the course of the nineteenth century?

(A) The average size of families grew considerably.

(B) The percentage of families involved in industrial work declined dramatically.

(C) Family members became more emotionally bonded to one another.

(D) Family members spent an increasing amount of time working with each other.（C）

(E) Family members became more economically dependent on each other.

6.Zelizer refers to all of the following as important influences in changing the assessment of children’s worth EXCEPT changes in

(A) the mortality rate

(B) the nature of industry

(C) the nature of the family

(D) attitudes toward reform movements（D）

(E) attitudes toward the marketplace

7.Which of the following would be most consistent with the practices of sociological economics as these practices are described in the passage?

(A) Arguing that most health-care professionals enter the field because they believe it to be the most socially useful of any occupation

(B) Arguing that most college students choose majors that they believe will lead to the most highly paid jobs available to them

(C) Arguing that most decisions about marriage and divorce are based on rational assessments of the likelihood that each partner will remain committed to the relationship

(D) Analyzing changes in the number of people enrolled in colleges and universities as a function of changes in the economic health of these institutions（B）

(E) Analyzing changes in the ages at which people get married as a function of a change in the average number of years that young people have lived away from their parents

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 09:35
做一天， 之后晚上失眠，之后怎么办？荒着？ 还是接着做吧？即使头昏昏的。再说了，读第4篇和失眠的状况差不多.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 13:20
重点篇
Prior to 1975, union efforts to organize public-sector clerical workers, most of whom are women, were somewhat limited. The factors favoring unionization drives seem to have been either the presence of large numbers of workers, as in New York City, to make it worth the effort, or the concentration of small numbers in one or two locations, such as a hospital, to make it relatively easy. Receptivity to unionization on the workers’ part was also a consideration, but when there were large numbers involved or the clerical workers were the only unorganized group in a jurisdiction, the multi-occupational unions would often try to organize them regardless of the workers’ initial receptivity. The strategic reasoning was based, first, on the concern that politicians and administrators might play off unionized against non-unionized workers, and, second, on the conviction that a fully unionized public work force meant power, both at the bargaining table and in the legislature. In localities where clerical workers were few in number, were scattered in several workplaces, and expressed no interest in being organized, unions more often than not ignored them in the pre-1975 period.
But since the mid-1970’s, a different strategy has emerged. In 1977, 34 percent of government clerical workers were represented by a labor organization, compared with 46 percent of government professionals, 44 percent of government blue-collar workers, and 41 percent of government service workers. Since then, however, the biggest increases in public-sector unionization have been among clerical workers. Between 1977 and 1980, the number of unionized government workers in blue-collar and service occupations increased only about 1.5 percent, while in the white-collar occupations the increase was 20 percent and among clerical workers in particular, the increase was 22 percent.
What accounts for this upsurge in unionization among clerical workers? First, more women have entered the work force in the past few years, and more of them plan to remain working until retirement age. Consequently, they are probably more concerned than their predecessors were about job security and economic benefits. Also, the women’s movement has succeeded in legitimizing the economic and political activism of women on their own behalf, thereby producing a more positive attitude toward unions. The absence of any comparable increase in unionization among private-sector clerical workers, however, identifies the primary catalyst—the structural change in the multi-occupational public-sector unions themselves. Over the past twenty years, the occupational distribution in these unions has been steadily shifting from predominantly blue-collar to predominantly white-collar. Because there are far more women in white-collar jobs, an increase in the proportion of female members has accompanied the occupational shift and has altered union policy-making in favor of organizing women and addressing women’s issues.

没了
我读半天，没有读出来，clerical workers 和 women of clerical workers 这两个问题的不同。
错误 1 2 4 7 8
重点 7


1. According to the passage, the public-sector workers who were most likely to belong to unions in 1977 were
(A) professionals
(B) managers
(C) clerical workers
(D) service workers
(E) blue-collar workers
细节题 这里是数字比较 注意具体年份

2. The author cites union efforts to achieve a fully unionized work force (line 13-19) in order to account for why
(A) politicians might try to oppose public-sector union organizing
(B) public-sector unions have recently focused on organizing women
(C) early organizing efforts often focused on areas where there were large numbers of workers
(D) union efforts with regard to public-sector clerical workers increased dramatically after 1975
(E) unions sometimes tried to organize workers regardless of the workers’ initial interest in unionization
文章逻辑很好解答这个问题
这里是解释为什么unionization disregard the workers' initial interest.


3. The author’s claim that, since the mid-1970’s, a new strategy has emerged in the unionization of public-sector clerical workers (line 23) would be strengthened if the author
(A) described more fully the attitudes of clerical workers toward labor unions
(B) compared the organizing strategies employed by private-sector unions with those of public-sector unions
(C) explained why politicians and administrators sometimes oppose unionization of clerical workers
(D) indicated that the number of unionized public-sector clerical workers was increasing even before the mid-1970’s
(E) showed that the factors that favored unionization drives among these workers prior to 1975 have decreased in importance
推理题 其他有利因素下降，但是这个因素的存在，使得unionization 比例上升。

4. According to the passage, in the period prior to 1975, each of the following considerations helped determine whether a union would attempt to organize a certain group of clerical workers EXCEPT
(A) the number of clerical workers in that group
(B) the number of women among the clerical workers in that group
(C) whether the clerical workers in that area were concentrated in one workplace or scattered over several workplaces
(D) the degree to which the clerical workers in that group were interested in unionization
(E) whether all the other workers in the same jurisdiction as that group of clerical workers were unionized
第一段 就是解释为什么要unionization这里
BE 比较，开始的是后没有分很清楚 women of clerical workers. 但是，当只有clerical workers were ununionized 的时候，问题就出现了。

5. The author states that which of the following is a consequence of the women’s movement of recent years?
(A) An increase in the number of women entering the work force
(B) A structural change in multi-occupational public-sector unions
(C) A more positive attitude on the part of women toward unions
(D) An increase in the proportion of clerical workers that are women
(E) An increase in the number of women in administrative positions
细节题

6. The main concern of the passage is to
(A) advocate particular strategies for future efforts to organize certain workers into labor unions
(B) explain differences in the unionized proportions of various groups of public-sector workers
(C) evaluate the effectiveness of certain kinds of labor unions that represent public-sector workers
(D) analyzed and explain an increase in unionization among a certain category of workers
(E) describe and distinguish strategies appropriate to organizing different categories of workers
主旨题

7. The author implies that if the increase in the number of women in the work force and the impact of the women’s movement were the main causes of the rise in unionization of public-sector clerical workers, then
(A) more women would hold administrative positions in unions
(B) more women who hold political offices would have positive attitudes toward labor unions
(C) there would be an equivalent rise in unionization of private-sector clerical workers
(D) unions would have shown more interest than they have in organizing women
(E) the increase in the number of unionized public-sector clerical workers would have been greater than it has been
我没有突出implie这个意思，但是 我知道D项解释了这换转变的意味着什么
the women of clerical wokers 这里我读错了。

8. The author suggests that it would be disadvantageous to a union if
(A) many workers in the locality were not unionized
(B) the union contributed to political campaigns
(C) the union included only public-sector workers
(D) the union included workers from several jurisdictions
(E) the union included members from only a few occupations
这点在unionization 不顾一些职位员工自己意愿的时候，说的很清楚，有两点原因。为什么不是C，我又看了一下，公共部门某些职位的工会化程度高，没有私营部门的工会会，是一个催化剂，从而使得工会更加注意组织妇女，和解决妇女问题。所以，缺少私营部门不是一个确定。A 觉得在政治领域，不是看人多少，而是看包含多少群体。
还真选A呀， 真看人多少，只有少数几个职位的工人组织的工会，在1975年前的时候，也是在运作，当时就是没有clerical workers 的假如。

9. The author implies that, in comparison with working women today, women working in the years prior to the mid-1970’s showed a greater tendency to
(A) prefer smaller workplaces
(B) express a positive attitude toward labor unions
(C) maximize job security and economic benefits
(D) side with administrators in labor disputes
(E) quit working prior of retirement age
还是最后一段，解释为什么有这么多妇女公职假如工会。

1.According to the passage, the public-sector workers who were most likely to belong to unions in 1977 were

(A) professionals

(B) managers

(C) clerical workers

(D) service workers（A）

(E) blue-collar workers

2.The author cites union efforts to achieve a fully unionized work force (line 13-19) in order to account for why

(A) politicians might try to oppose public-sector union organizing

(B) public-sector unions have recently focused on organizing women

(C) early organizing efforts often focused on areas where there were large numbers of workers

(D) union efforts with regard to public-sector clerical workers increased dramatically after 1975（E）

(E) unions sometimes tried to organize workers regardless of the workers’ initial interest in unionization

3.The author’s claim that, since the mid-1970’s, a new strategy has emerged in the unionization of public-sector clerical workers (line 23) would be strengthened if the author

(A) described more fully the attitudes of clerical workers toward labor unions

(B) compared the organizing strategies employed by private-sector unions with those of public-sector unions

(C) explained why politicians and administrators sometimes oppose unionization of clerical workers

(D) indicated that the number of unionized public-sector clerical workers was increasing even before the mid-1970’s（E）

(E) showed that the factors that favored unionization drives among these workers prior to 1975 have decreased in importance

4.According to the passage, in the period prior to 1975, each of the following considerations helped determine whether a union would attempt to organize a certain group of clerical workers EXCEPT

(A) the number of clerical workers in that group

(B) the number of women among the clerical workers in that group

(C) whether the clerical workers in that area were concentrated in one workplace or scattered over several workplaces

(D) the degree to which the clerical workers in that group were interested in unionization（B）

(E) whether all the other workers in the same jurisdiction as that group of clerical workers were unionized

5.The author states that which of the following is a consequence of the women’s movement of recent years?

(A) An increase in the number of women entering the work force

(B) A structural change in multi-occupational public-sector unions

(C) A more positive attitude on the part of women toward unions

(D) An increase in the proportion of clerical workers that are women（C）

(E) An increase in the number of women in administrative positions

6.The main concern of the passage is to

(A) advocate particular strategies for future efforts to organize certain workers into labor unions

(B) explain differences in the unionized proportions of various groups of public-sector workers

(C) evaluate the effectiveness of certain kinds of labor unions that represent public-sector workers

(D) analyzed and explain an increase in unionization among a certain category of workers（D）

(E) describe and distinguish strategies appropriate to organizing different categories of workers

7.The author implies that if the increase in the number of women in the work force and the impact of the women’s movement were the main causes of the rise in unionization of public-sector clerical workers, then

(A) more women would hold administrative positions in unions

(B) more women who hold political offices would have positive attitudes toward labor unions

(C) there would be an equivalent rise in unionization of private-sector clerical workers

(D) unions would have shown more interest than they have in organizing women（C）

(E) the increase in the number of unionized public-sector clerical workers would have been greater than it has been

8.The author suggests that it would be disadvantageous to a union if

(A) many workers in the locality were not unionized

(B) the union contributed to political campaigns

(C) the union included only public-sector workers

(D) the union included workers from several jurisdictions（A）

(E) the union included members from only a few occupations

9.The author implies that, in comparison with working women today, women working in the years prior to the mid-1970’s showed a greater tendency to

(A) prefer smaller workplaces

(B) express a positive attitude toward labor unions

(C) maximize job security and economic benefits

(D) side with administrators in labor disputes（E）

(E) quit working prior of retirement age

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 13:59
Milankovitch proposed in the early twentieth century that the ice ages were caused by variations in the Earth’s orbit around the Sun. For sometime this theory was considered untestable, largely because there was no sufficiently precise chronology of the ice ages with which the orbital variations could be matched.
To establish such a chronology it is necessary to determine the relative amounts of land ice that existed at various times in the Earth’s past. A recent discovery makes such a determination possible: relative land-ice volume for a given period can be deduced from the ratio of two oxygen isotopes, 16 and 18, found in ocean sediments. Almost all the oxygen in water is oxygen 16, but a few molecules out of every thousand incorporate the heavier isotope 18. When an ice age begins, the continental ice sheets grow, steadily reducing the amount of water evaporated from the ocean that will eventually return to it. Because heavier isotopes tend to be left behind when water evaporates from the ocean surfaces, the remaining ocean water becomes progressively enriched in oxygen 18. The degree of enrichment can be determined by analyzing ocean sediments of the period, because these sediments are composed of calcium carbonate shells of marine organisms, shells that were constructed with oxygen atoms drawn from the surrounding ocean.The higher the ratio of oxygen 18 to oxygen 16 in a sedimentary specimen, the more land ice there was when the sediment was laid down.
As an indicator of shifts in the Earth’s climate, the isotope record has two advantages. First, it is a global record: there is remarkably little variation in isotope ratios in sedimentary specimens taken from different continental locations. Second, it is a more continuous record than that taken from rocks on land. Because of these advantages, sedimentary evidence can be dated with sufficient accuracy by radiometric methods to establish a precise chronology of the ice ages. The dated isotope record shows that the fluctuations in global ice volume over the past several hundred thousand years have a pattern: an ice age occurs roughly once every 100,000 years. These data have established a strong connection between variations in the Earth’s orbit and the periodicity of the ice ages.
However, it is important to note that other factors, such as volcanic particulates or variations in the amount of sunlight received by the Earth, could potentially have affected the climate. The advantage of the Milankovitch theory is that it is testable: changes in the Earth’s orbit can be calculated and dated by applying Newton’s laws of gravity to progressively earlier configurations of the bodies in the solar system. Yet the lack of information about other possible factors affecting global climate does not make them unimportant.（开始没有确定them是谁）

reducing the amount of water evaporated from the ocean that will eventually return to it. 看这个句子，觉得这个It还奇怪怎么就能指代海洋了。 还有that从句，和evaportatd phrase 是并列修饰成分，修饰water
没有人觉得，这个对氧18的描述和冰川之间的关系是错的吗？ 冰川变厚，减少水的蒸发。因为氧18比氧16重，所以蒸发的时候，会留下氧18. 这样，我的得到结论却是，冰川时，水蒸发少，就是有更多杨16留下。这样氧18比氧16越低。

第一段 M提出利益理论： 冰川是有地球绕太阳的轨道发生变化引起的，但是这个理论缺乏冰川编年史支持。
第二段 我的推理和文章拧着。
第三段，沉积物有两个好处：1. 全世界都是一样的，2时间上是连续的。这些数据支持M的理论
第四段 可能还有其他原因导致了并长期。但是相关信息的缺乏不能说明这些信息不重要。

1. In the passage, the author is primarily interested in
(A) suggesting an alternative to an outdated research method
(B) introducing a new research method that calls an accepted theory into question
(C) emphasizing the instability of data gathered from the application of a new scientific method
(D) presenting a theory and describing a new method to test that theory
(E) initiating a debate about a widely accepted theory


2. The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about the Milankovitch theory?
(A) It is the only possible explanation for the ice ages.
(B) It is too limited to provide a plausible explanation for the ice ages, despite recent research findings.
(C) It cannot be tested and confirmed until further research on volcanic activity is done.
(D) It is one plausible explanation, though not the only one, for the ice ages.
(E) It is not a plausible explanation for the ice ages, although it has opened up promising possibilities for future research.


3. It can be inferred from the passage that the isotope record taken from ocean sediments would be less useful to researchers if which of the following were true?
(A) It indicated that lighter isotopes of oxygen predominated at certain times.
(B) It had far more gaps in its sequence than the record taken from rocks on land.
(C) It indicated that climate shifts did not occur every 100,000 years.
(D) It indicated that the ratios of oxygen 16 and oxygen 18 in ocean water were not consistent with those found in fresh water.
(E) It stretched back for only a million years.


4. According to the passage, which of the following is true of the ratios of oxygen isotopes in ocean sediments?
(A) They indicate that sediments found during an ice age contain more calcium carbonate than sediments formed at other times.
(B) They are less reliable than the evidence from rocks on land in determining the volume of land ice.
(C) They can be used to deduce the relative volume of land ice that was present when the sediment was laid down.
(D) They are more unpredictable during an ice age than in other climatic conditions.
(E) They can be used to determine atmospheric conditions at various times in the past.


5. It can be inferred from the passage that precipitation formed from evaporated ocean water has
(A) the same isotopic ratio as ocean water
(B) less oxygen 18 than does ocean water
(C) less oxygen 18 than has the ice contained in continental ice sheets
(D) a different isotopic composition than has precipitation formed from water on land
(E) more oxygen 16 than has precipitation formed from fresh water


6. According to the passage, which of the following is (are) true of the ice ages?
I. The last ice age occurred about 25,000 years ago.
II. Ice ages have lasted about 10,000 years for at least the last several hundred thousand years.
III. Ice ages have occurred about every 100,000 years for at least the last several hundred thousand years.
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) III only
(D) I and only
(E) I, II and III


7. It can be inferred from the passage that calcium carbonate shells
(A) are not as susceptible to deterioration as rocks
(B) are less common in sediments formed during an ice age
(C) are found only in areas that were once covered by land ice
(D) contain radioactive material that can be used to determine a sediment’s isotopic composition
(E) reflect the isotopic composition of the water at the time the shells were formed


8. The purpose of the last paragraph of the passage is to
(A) offer a note of caution
(B) introduce new evidence
(C) present two recent discoveries
(D) summarize material in the preceding paragraphs
(E) offer two explanations for a phenomenon


9. According to the passage, one advantage of studying the isotope record of ocean sediments is that it
(A) corresponds with the record of ice volume taken from rocks on land
(B) shows little variation in isotope ratios when samples are taken from different continental locations
(C) corresponds with predictions already made by climatologists and experts in other fields
(D) confirms the record of ice volume initially established by analyzing variations in volcanic emissions
(E) provides data that can be used to substantiate records concerning variations in the amount of sunlight received by the Earth

Milankovitch proposed in the early twentieth century that the ice ages were caused by variations in the Earth’s orbit around the Sun. For sometime this theory was considered untestable, largely because there was no sufficiently precise chronology of the ice ages with which the orbital variations could be matched.

To establish such a chronology it is necessary to determine the relative amounts of land ice that existed at various times in the Earth’s past. A recent discovery makes such a determination possible: relative land-ice volume for a given period can be deduced from the ratio of two oxygen isotopes, 16 and 18, found in ocean sediments. Almost all the oxygen in water is oxygen 16, but a few molecules out of every thousand incorporate the heavier isotope 18. When an ice age begins, the continental ice sheets grow, steadily reducing the amount of water evaporated from the ocean that will eventually return to it. Because heavier isotopes tend to be left behind when water evaporates from the ocean surfaces, the remaining ocean water becomes progressively enriched in oxygen 18. The degree of enrichment can be determined by analyzing ocean sediments of the period, because these sediments are composed of calcium carbonate (calcium carbonate: n.[化]碳酸钙) shells of marine organisms, shells that were constructed with oxygen atoms drawn from the surrounding ocean. The higher the ratio of oxygen 18 to oxygen 16 in a sedimentary specimen, the more land ice there was when the sediment was laid down.

As an indicator of shifts in the Earth’s climate, the isotope record has two advantages. First, it is a global record: there is remarkably little variation in isotope ratios in sedimentary specimens taken from different continental locations. Second, it is a more continuous record than that taken from rocks on land. Because of these advantages, sedimentary evidence can be dated with sufficient accuracy by radiometric methods to establish a precise chronology of the ice ages. The dated isotope record shows that the fluctuations in global ice volume over the past several hundred thousand years have a pattern: an ice age occurs roughly once every 100,000 years. These data have established a strong connection between variations in the Earth’s orbit and the periodicity of the ice ages.

However, it is important to note that other factors, such as volcanic particulates or variations in the amount of sunlight received by the Earth, could potentially have affected the climate. The advantage of the Milankovitch theory is that it is testable: changes in the Earth’s orbit can be calculated and dated by applying Newton’s laws of gravity to progressively earlier configurations of the bodies in the solar system. Yet the lack of information about other possible factors affecting global climate does not make them unimportant.

1.In the passage, the author is primarily interested in

(A) suggesting an alternative to an outdated research method

(B) introducing a new research method that calls an accepted theory into question

(C) emphasizing the instability of data gathered from the application of a new scientific method

(D) presenting a theory and describing a new method to test that theory（D）

(E) initiating a debate about a widely accepted theory

2.The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about the Milankovitch theory?

(A) It is the only possible explanation for the ice ages.

(B) It is too limited to provide a plausible explanation for the ice ages, despite recent research findings.

(C) It cannot be tested and confirmed until further research on volcanic activity is done.

(D) It is one plausible explanation, though not the only one, for the ice ages.（D）

(E) It is not a plausible explanation for the ice ages, although it has opened up promising possibilities for future research.

3.It can be inferred from the passage that the isotope record taken from ocean sediments would be less useful to researchers if which of the following were true?

(A) It indicated that lighter isotopes of oxygen predominated at certain times.

(B) It had far more gaps in its sequence than the record taken from rocks on land.

(C) It indicated that climate shifts did not occur every 100,000 years.

(D) It indicated that the ratios of oxygen 16 and oxygen 18 in ocean water were not consistent with those found in fresh water.（B）

(E) It stretched back for only a million years.

4.According to the passage, which of the following is true of the ratios of oxygen isotopes in ocean sediments?

(A) They indicate that sediments found during an ice age contain more calcium carbonate than sediments formed at other times.

(B) They are less reliable than the evidence from rocks on land in determining the volume of land ice.

(C) They can be used to deduce the relative volume of land ice that was present when the sediment was laid down.

(D) They are more unpredictable during an ice age than in other climatic conditions.（C）

(E) They can be used to determine atmospheric conditions at various times in the past.

5.It can be inferred from the passage that precipitation formed from evaporated ocean water has

(A) the same isotopic ratio as ocean water

(B) less oxygen 18 than does ocean water

(C) less oxygen 18 than has the ice contained in continental ice sheets

(D) a different isotopic composition than has precipitation formed from water on land（B）

(E) more oxygen 16 than has precipitation formed from fresh water

6.According to the passage, which of the following is (are) true of the ice ages?

I.The last ice age occurred about 25,000 years ago.

II.Ice ages have lasted about 10,000 years for at least the last several hundred thousand years.

III.Ice ages have occurred about every 100,000 years for at least the last several hundred thousand years.

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) III only

(D) I and only（C）

(E) I, II and III

7.It can be inferred from the passage that calcium carbonate shells

(A) are not as susceptible to deterioration as rocks

(B) are less common in sediments formed during an ice age

(C) are found only in areas that were once covered by land ice

(D) contain radioactive material that can be used to determine a sediment’s isotopic composition（E）

(E) reflect the isotopic composition of the water at the time the shells were formed

8.The purpose of the last paragraph of the passage is to

(A) offer a note of caution

(B) introduce new evidence

(C) present two recent discoveries

(D) summarize material in the preceding paragraphs（A）

(E) offer two explanations for a phenomenon

9.According to the passage, one advantage of studying the isotope record of ocean sediments is that it

(A) corresponds with the record of ice volume taken from rocks on land

(B) shows little variation in isotope ratios when samples are taken from different continental locations

(C) corresponds with predictions already made by climatologists and experts in other fields

(D) confirms the record of ice volume initially established by analyzing variations in volcanic emissions（B）

(E) provides data that can be used to substantiate records concerning variations in the amount of sunlight received by the Earth

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 14:43
In contrast to traditional analyses of minority business, the sociological analysis contends that minority business ownership is a group-level phenomenon, in that it is largely dependent upon social-group resources for its development. Specifically, this analysis indicates that support networks play a critical role in starting and maintaining minority business enterprises by providing owners with a range of assistance, from the informal encouragement of family members and friends to dependable sources of labor and clientele from the owner’s ethnic group.Such self-help networks, which encourage and support ethnic minority entrepreneurs, consist of “primary” institutions, those closest to the individual in shaping his or her behavior and beliefs. They are characterized by the face-to-face association and cooperation of persons united by ties of mutual concern. They form an intermediate social level between the individual and larger “secondary” institutions based on impersonal relationships. Primary institutions comprising the support network include kinship, peer, and neighborhood or community subgroups.
A major function of self-help networks is financial support. Most scholars agree that minority business owners have depended primarily on family funds and ethnic community resources for investment capital. Personal savings have been accumulated, often through frugal living habits that require sacrifices by the entire family and are thus a product of long-term family financial behavior. Additional loans and gifts from relatives, forthcoming because of group obligation rather than narrow investment calculation, have supplemented personal savings. Individual entrepreneurs do not necessarily rely on their kin because they cannot obtain financial backing from commercial resources. They may actually avoid banks because they assume that commercial institutions either cannot comprehend the special needs of minority enterprise or charge unreasonably high interest rates.
Within the larger ethnic community, rotating credit associations have been used to raise capital. These associations are informal clubs of friends and other trusted members of the ethnic group who make regular contributions to a fund that is given to each contributor in rotation. One author estimates that 40 percent of New York Chinatown firms established during 1900-1950 utilized such associations as their initial source of capital. However, recent immigrants and third or fourth generations of older groups now employ rotating credit associations only occasionally to raise investment funds. Some groups, like Black Americans, found other means of financial support for their entrepreneurial efforts. The first Black-operated banks were created in the late nineteenth century as depositories for dues collected from fraternal or lodge groups, which themselves had sprung from Black churches. Black banks made limited investments in other Black enterprises. Irish immigrants in American cities organized many building and loan associations to provide capital for home construction and purchase. They, in turn, provided work for many Irish home-building contractor firms. Other ethnic and minority groups followed similar practices in founding ethnic-directed financial institutions.

第一段 中小企业是一个群体现象， primary instituttions.
第二段，这种自救网主要是
第三段，这种群体主要是 资金帮助。

错误 4 6


1. Based on the information in the passage, it would be LEAST likely for which of the following persons to be part of a self-help network?
(A) The entrepreneur’s childhood friend
(B) The entrepreneur’s aunt
(C) The entrepreneur’s religious leader
(D) The entrepreneur’s neighbor
(E) The entrepreneur’s banker


2. Which of the following illustrates the working of a self-help support network, as such networks are described in the passage?
(A) A public high school offers courses in book-keeping and accounting as part of its open-enrollment adult education program.
(B) The local government in a small city sets up a program that helps teen-agers find summer jobs.
(C) A major commercial bank offers low-interest loans to experienced individuals who hope to establish their own businesses.
(D) A neighborhood-based fraternal organization develops a program of on-the-job training for its members and their friends.
(E) A community college offers country residents training programs that can lead to certification in a variety of technical trades.


3. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about rotating credit associations?
(A) They were developed exclusively by Chinese immigrants.
(B) They accounted for a significant portion of the investment capital used by Chinese immigrants in New York in the early twentieth century.
(C) Third-generation members of an immigrant group who started businesses in the 1920’s would have been unlikely to rely on them.
(D) They were frequently joint endeavors by members of two or three different ethnic groups.
(E) Recent immigrants still frequently turn to rotating credit associations instead of banks for investment capital.


4. The passage best supports which of the following statements?
(A) A minority entrepreneur who had no assistance from family members would not be able to start a business.
(B) Self-help networks have been effective in helping entrepreneurs primarily in the last 50 years.
(C) Minority groups have developed a range of alternatives to standard financing of business ventures.
(D) The financial institutions founded by various ethnic groups owe their success to their unique formal organization.
(E) Successful minority-owned businesses succeed primarily because of the personal strengths of their founders.
时间问题，我发现我对英文中数字很不敏感

5. Which of the following best describes the organization of the second paragraph?
(A) An argument is delineated, followed by a counter-argument.
(B) An assertion is made and several examples are provided to illustrate it.
(C) A situation is described and its historical background is then outlined.
(D) An example of a phenomenon is given and is then used as a basis for general conclusions.
(E) A group of parallel incidents is described and the distinctions among the incidents are then clarified.


6. According to the passage, once a minority-owned business is established, self-help networks contribute which of the following to that business?
(A) Information regarding possible expansion of the business into nearby communities
(B) Encouragement of a business climate that is nearly free of direct competition
(C) Opportunities for the business owner to reinvest profits in other minority-owned businesses
(D) Contact with people who are likely to be customers of the new business
(E) Contact with minority entrepreneurs who are members of other ethnic groups


7. It can be inferred from the passage that traditional analyses of minority business would be LEAST likely to do which of the following?
(A) Examine businesses primarily in their social contexts
(B) Focus on current, rather than historical, examples of business enterprises
(C) Stress common experiences of individual entrepreneurs in starting businesses
(D) Focus on the maintenance of businesses, rather than means of starting them
(E) Focus on the role of individual entrepreneurs in starting a business

8. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the Irish building and loan associations mentioned in the last paragraph?
(A) They were started by third- or fourth-generation immigrants.
(B) They originated as offshoots of church-related groups.
(C) They frequently helped Irish entrepreneurs to finance business not connected with construction.
(D) They contributed to the employment of many Irish construction workers.
(E) They provided assistance for construction businesses owned by members of other ethnic groups.

In contrast to traditional analyses of minority business, the sociological analysis contends that minority business ownership is a group-level phenomenon, in that it is largely dependent upon social-group resources for its development. Specifically, this analysis indicates that support networks play a critical role in starting and maintaining minority business enterprises by providing owners with a range of assistance, from the informal encouragement of family members and friends to dependable sources of labor and clientele from the owner’s ethnic group (ethnic group: n.同种同文化之民族). Such self-help networks, which encourage and support ethnic minority entrepreneurs, consist of “primary” institutions, those closest to the individual in shaping his or her behavior and beliefs. They are characterized by the face-to-face association and cooperation of persons united by ties of mutual concern. They form an intermediate social level between the individual and larger “secondary” institutions based on impersonal relationships. Primary institutions comprising the support network include kinship, peer, and neighborhood or community subgroups.

A major function of self-help networks is financial support. Most scholars agree that minority business owners have depended primarily on family funds and ethnic community resources for investment capital. Personal savings have been accumulated, often through frugal living habits that require sacrifices by the entire family and are thus a product of long-term family financial behavior. Additional loans and gifts from relatives, forthcoming because of group obligation rather than narrow investment calculation, have supplemented personal savings. Individual entrepreneurs do not necessarily rely on their kin because they cannot obtain financial backing from commercial resources. They may actually avoid banks because they assume that commercial institutions either cannot comprehend the special needs of minority enterprise or charge unreasonably high interest rates.

Within the larger ethnic community, rotating credit associations have been used to raise capital. These associations are informal clubs of friends and other trusted members of the ethnic group who make regular contributions to a fund that is given to each contributor in rotation. One author estimates that 40 percent of New York Chinatown firms established during 1900-1950 utilized such associations as their initial source of capital. However, recent immigrants and third or fourth generations of older groups now employ rotating credit associations only occasionally to raise investment funds. Some groups, like Black Americans, found other means of financial support for their entrepreneurial efforts. The first Black-operated banks were created in the late nineteenth century as depositories (depository: n.存放处) for dues (due: n. [复]应付款) collected from fraternal or lodge groups, which themselves had sprung from Black churches. Black banks made limited investments in other Black enterprises. Irish immigrants in American cities organized many building and loan associations to provide capital for home construction and purchase. They, in turn, provided work for many Irish home-building contractor firms. Other ethnic and minority groups followed similar practices in founding ethnic-directed financial institutions.

1.Based on the information in the passage, it would be LEAST likely for which of the following persons to be part of a self-help network?

(A) The entrepreneur’s childhood friend

(B) The entrepreneur’s aunt

(C) The entrepreneur’s religious leader

(D) The entrepreneur’s neighbor（E）

(E) The entrepreneur’s banker

2.Which of the following illustrates the working of a self-help support network, as such networks are described in the passage?

(A) A public high school offers courses in book-keeping and accounting as part of its open-enrollment adult education program.

(B) The local government in a small city sets up a program that helps teen-agers find summer jobs.

(C) A major commercial bank offers low-interest loans to experienced individuals who hope to establish their own businesses.

(D) A neighborhood-based fraternal organization develops a program of on-the-job (on-the-job: adj.在职的)training for its members and their friends.（D）

(E) A community college offers country residents training programs that can lead to certification in a variety of technical trades.

3.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about rotating credit associations?

(A) They were developed exclusively by Chinese immigrants.

(B) They accounted for a significant portion of the investment capital used by Chinese immigrants in New York in the early twentieth century.

(C) Third-generation members of an immigrant group who started businesses in the 1920’s would have been unlikely to rely on them.

(D) They were frequently joint endeavors by members of two or three different ethnic groups.（B）

(E) Recent immigrants still frequently turn to rotating credit associations instead of banks for investment capital.

4.The passage best supports which of the following statements?

(A) A minority entrepreneur who had no assistance from family members would not be able to start a business.

(B) Self-help networks have been effective in helping entrepreneurs primarily in the last 50 years.

(C) Minority groups have developed a range of alternatives to standard financing of business ventures.

(D) The financial institutions founded by various ethnic groups owe their success to their unique formal organization.（C）

(E) Successful minority-owned businesses succeed primarily because of the personal strengths of their founders.

5.Which of the following best describes the organization of the second paragraph?

(A) An argument is delineated, followed by a counter-argument.

(B) An assertion is made and several examples are provided to illustrate it.

(C) A situation is described and its historical background is then outlined.

(D) An example of a phenomenon is given and is then used as a basis for general conclusions.（B）

(E) A group of parallel incidents is described and the distinctions among the incidents are then clarified.

6.According to the passage, once a minority-owned business is established, self-help networks contribute which of the following to that business?

(A) Information regarding possible expansion of the business into nearby communities

(B) Encouragement of a business climate that is nearly free of direct competition

(C) Opportunities for the business owner to reinvest profits in other minority-owned businesses

(D) Contact with people who are likely to be customers of the new business（D）

(E) Contact with minority entrepreneurs who are members of other ethnic groups

7.It can be inferred from the passage that traditional analyses of minority business would be LEAST likely to do which of the following?

(A) Examine businesses primarily in their social contexts

(B) Focus on current, rather than historical, examples of business enterprises

(C) Stress common experiences of individual entrepreneurs in starting businesses

(D) Focus on the maintenance of businesses, rather than means of starting them（A）

(E) Focus on the role of individual entrepreneurs in starting a business

8.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the Irish building and loan associations mentioned in the last paragraph?

(A) They were started by third- or fourth-generation immigrants.

(B) They originated as offshoots of church-related groups.

(C) They frequently helped Irish entrepreneurs to finance business not connected with construction.

(D) They contributed to the employment of many Irish construction workers.（D）

(E) They provided assistance for construction businesses owned by members of other ethnic groups.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 15:30
Species interdependence in nature confers many benefits on the species involved, but it can also become a point of weakness when one species involved in the relationship is affected by a catastrophe. Thus, flowering plant species dependent on insect pollination, as opposed to self-pollination or wind pollination, could be endangered when the population of insect-pollinators is depleted by the use of pesticides.
In the forests of New Brunswick, for example, various pesticides have been sprayed in the past 25 years in efforts to control the spruce budworm, an economically significant pest. Scientists have now investigated the effects of the spraying of Matacil, one of the anti-budworm agents that is least toxic to insect-pollinators. They studied Matacil’s effects on insect mortality in a wide variety of wild insect species and on plant fecundity, expressed as the percentage of the total flowers on an individual plant that actually developed fruit and bore seeds. They found that the most pronounced mortality after the spraying of Matacil occurred among the smaller bees and one family of flies, insects that were all important pollinators of numerous species of plants growing beneath the tree canopy of forests. The fecundity of plants in one common indigenous species, the red-osier dogwood, was significantly reduced in the sprayed areas as compared to that of plants in control plots where Matacil was not sprayed. This species is highly dependent on the insect-pollinators most vulnerable to Matacil. The creeping dogwood, a species similar to the red-osier dogwood, but which is pollinated by large bees, such as bumblebees, showed no significant decline in fecundity. Since large bees are not affected by the spraying of Matacil, these results add weight to the argument that spraying where the pollinators are sensitive to the pesticide used decreases plant fecundity.
The question of whether the decrease in plant fecundity caused by the spraying of pesticides actually causes a decline in the overall population of flowering plant species still remains unanswered. Plant species dependent solely on seeds for survival or dispersal are obviously more vulnerable to any decrease in plant fecundity that occurs, whatever its cause. If, on the other hand, vegetative growth and dispersal (by means of shoots or runners) are available as alternative reproductive strategies for a species, then decreases in plant fecundity may be of little consequence. The fecundity effects described here are likely to have the most profound impact on plant species with all four of the following characteristics: a short life span, a narrow geographic range, an incapacity for vegetative propagation, and a dependence on a small number of insect-pollinator species. Perhaps we should give special attention to the conservation of such plant species since they lack key factors in their defenses against the environmental disruption caused by pesticide use.

这篇讲得是species interdependence
第一段， 说spraying decrease plant fecudity.
第二段， 影响生育率，是不是会应影响这些植物的总体数量？只通过种子传播一定会受到影响。

错误 1256
重点1

1. Which of the following best summarizes the main point of the passage?
(A) Species interdependence is a point of weakness for some plants, but is generally beneficial to insects involved in pollination.
(B) Efforts to control the spruce budworm have had deleterious effects on the red-osier dogwood.
(C) The used of pesticides may be endangering certain plant species dependent on insects for pollination.
(D) The spraying of pesticides can reduce the fecundity of a plant species, but probably does not affect its overall population stability.
(E) Plant species lacking key factors in their defenses against human environmental disruption will probably become extinct.


2. According to the author, a flowering plant species whose fecundity has declined due to pesticide spraying may not experience an overall population decline if the plant species can do which of the following?
(A) Reproduce itself by means of shoots and runners.
(B) Survive to the end of the growing season.
(C) Survive in harsh climates.
(D) Respond to the fecundity decline by producing more flowers.
(E) Attract large insects as pollinators.


3. The passage suggests that the lack of an observed decline in the fecundity of the creeping dogwood strengthens the researchers conclusions regarding pesticide use because the
(A) creeping dogwood is a species that does not resemble other forest plants
(B) creeping dogwood is a species pollinated by a broader range of insect species than are most dogwood species
(C) creeping dogwood grows primarily in regions that were not sprayed with pesticide, and so served as a control for the experiment
(D) creeping dogwood is similar to the red-osier dogwood, but its insect pollinators are known to be insensitive to the pesticide used in the study
(E) geographical range of the creeping dogwood is similar to that of the red-osier dogwood, but the latter species relies less on seeds for reproduction


4. The passage suggests that which of the following is true of the forest regions in New Brunswick sprayed with most anti-budworm pesticides other than Matacil?
(A) The fecundity of some flowering plants in those regions may have decreased to an even greater degree than in the regions where Matacil is used.
(B) Insect mortality in those regions occurs mostly among the larger species of insects, such as bumblebees.
(C) The number of seeds produced by common plant species in those regions is probably comparable to the number produced where Matacil is sprayed.
(D) Many more plant species have become extinct in those regions than in the regions where Matacil is used.
(E) The spruce budworm is under better control in those regions than in the regions where Matacil is sprayed.


5. It can be inferred that which of the following is true of plant fecundity as it is defined in the passage?
(A) A plant’s fecundity decreases as the percentage of unpollinated flowers on the plant increases.
(B) A plant’s fecundity decreases as the number of flowers produced by the plant decreases.
(C) A plant’s fecundity increases as the number of flowers produced by the plant increases.
(D) A plant’s fecundity is usually low if the plant relies on a small number of insect species for pollination.
(E) A plant’s fecundity is high if the plant can reproduce quickly by means of vegetative growth as well as by the production of seeds.
文章说的是，采用presiticide 这样一些植物可能物种总量可能会受影响。

6. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following plant species would be LEAST likely to experience a decrease in fecundity as a result of the spraying of a pesticide not directly toxic to plants?
(A) A flowering tree pollinated by only a few insect species
(B) A kind of insect-pollinated vine producing few flowers
(C) A wind-pollinated flowering tree that is short-lived
(D) A flowering shrub pollinated by a large number of insect species
(E) A type of wildflower typically pollinated by larger insects


7. Which of the following assumptions most probably underlies the author’s tentative recommendation in lines 51-54?
(A) Human activities that result in environmental disruption should be abandoned.
(B) The use of pesticides is likely to continue into the future.
(C) It is economically beneficial to preserve endangered plant species.
(D) Preventing the endangerment of a species is less costly than trying to save an already endangered one.
(E) Conservation efforts aimed at preserving a few well-chosen species are more cost-effective than are broader-based efforts to improve the environment.



Species interdependence in nature confers many benefits on the species involved, but it can also become a point of weakness when one species involved in the relationship is affected by a catastrophe. Thus, flowering plant species dependent on insect pollination, as opposed to self-pollination or wind pollination, could be endangered when the population of insect-pollinators is depleted by the use of pesticides.

In the forests of New Brunswick, for example, various pesticides have been sprayed in the past 25 years in efforts to control the spruce budworm, an economically significant pest. Scientists have now investigated the effects of the spraying of Matacil, one of the anti-budworm agents that is least toxic to insect-pollinators. They studied Matacil’s effects on insect mortality in a wide variety of wild insect species and on plant fecundity, expressed as the percentage of the total flowers on an individual plant that actually developed fruit and bore seeds. They found that the most pronounced mortality after the spraying of Matacil occurred among the smaller bees and one family of flies, insects that were all important pollinators of numerous species of plants growing beneath the tree canopy of forests. The fecundity of plants in one common indigenous species, the red-osier dogwood, was significantly reduced in the sprayed areas as compared to that of plants in control plots where Matacil was not sprayed. This species is highly dependent on the insect-pollinators most vulnerable to Matacil. The creeping dogwood, a species similar to the red-osier dogwood, but which is pollinated by large bees, such as bumblebees, showed no significant decline in fecundity. Since large bees are not affected by the spraying of Matacil, these results add weight to the argument that spraying where the pollinators are sensitive to the pesticide used decreases plant fecundity.

The question of whether the decrease in plant fecundity caused by the spraying of pesticides actually causes a decline in the overall population of flowering plant species still remains unanswered. Plant species dependent solely on seeds for survival or dispersal are obviously more vulnerable to any decrease in plant fecundity that occurs, whatever its cause. If, on the other hand, vegetative growth and dispersal (by means of shoots or runners) are available as alternative reproductive strategies for a species, then decreases in plant fecundity may be of little consequence. The fecundity effects described here are likely to have the most profound impact on plant species with all four of the following characteristics: a short life span, a narrow geographic range, an incapacity for vegetative propagation, and a dependence on a small number of insect-pollinator species. Perhaps we should give special attention to the conservation of such plant species since they lack key factors in their defenses against the environmental disruption caused by pesticide use.

1.Which of the following best summarizes the main point of the passage?

(A) Species interdependence is a point of weakness for some plants, but is generally beneficial to insects involved in pollination.

(B) Efforts to control the spruce budworm have had deleterious effects on the red-osier dogwood.

(C) The used of pesticides may be endangering certain plant species dependent on insects for pollination.

(D) The spraying of pesticides can reduce the fecundity of a plant species, but probably does not affect its overall population stability.（C）

(E) Plant species lacking key factors in their defenses against human environmental disruption will probably become extinct.

2.According to the author, a flowering plant species whose fecundity has declined due to pesticide spraying may not experience an overall population decline if the plant species can do which of the following?

(A) Reproduce itself by means of shoots and runners.

(B) Survive to the end of the growing season.

(C) Survive in harsh climates.

(D) Respond to the fecundity decline by producing more flowers.（A）

(E) Attract large insects as pollinators.

3.The passage suggests that the lack of an observed decline in the fecundity of the creeping dogwood strengthens the researchers conclusions regarding pesticide use because the

(A) creeping dogwood is a species that does not resemble other forest plants

(B) creeping dogwood is a species pollinated by a broader range of insect species than are most dogwood species

(C) creeping dogwood grows primarily in regions that were not sprayed with pesticide, and so served as a control for the experiment

(D) creeping dogwood is similar to the red-osier dogwood, but its insect pollinators are known to be insensitive to the pesticide used in the study（D）

(E) geographical range of the creeping dogwood is similar to that of the red-osier dogwood, but the latter species relies less on seeds for reproduction

4.The passage suggests that which of the following is true of the forest regions in New Brunswick sprayed with most anti-budworm pesticides other than Matacil?

(A) The fecundity of some flowering plants in those regions may have decreased to an even greater degree than in the regions where Matacil is used.

(B) Insect mortality in those regions occurs mostly among the larger species of insects, such as bumblebees.

(C) The number of seeds produced by common plant species in those regions is probably comparable to the number produced where Matacil is sprayed.

(D) Many more plant species have become extinct in those regions than in the regions where Matacil is used.（A）

(E) The spruce budworm is under better control in those regions than in the regions where Matacil is sprayed.

5.It can be inferred that which of the following is true of plant fecundity as it is defined in the passage?

(A) A plant’s fecundity decreases as the percentage of unpollinated flowers on the plant increases.

(B) A plant’s fecundity decreases as the number of flowers produced by the plant decreases.

(C) A plant’s fecundity increases as the number of flowers produced by the plant increases.

(D) A plant’s fecundity is usually low if the plant relies on a small number of insect species for pollination.（A）

(E) A plant’s fecundity is high if the plant can reproduce quickly by means of vegetative growth as well as by the production of seeds.

6.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following plant species would be LEAST likely to experience a decrease in fecundity as a result of the spraying of a pesticide not directly toxic to plants?

(A) A flowering tree pollinated by only a few insect species

(B) A kind of insect-pollinated vine producing few flowers

(C) A wind-pollinated flowering tree that is short-lived

(D) A flowering shrub pollinated by a large number of insect species（C）

(E) A type of wildflower typically pollinated by larger insects

7.Which of the following assumptions most probably underlies the author’s tentative recommendation in lines 51-54?

(A) Human activities that result in environmental disruption should be abandoned.

(B) The use of pesticides is likely to continue into the future.

(C) It is economically beneficial to preserve endangered plant species.

(D) Preventing the endangerment of a species is less costly than trying to save an already endangered one.（B）

(E) Conservation efforts aimed at preserving a few well-chosen species are more cost-effective than are broader-based efforts to improve the environment.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 16:02
Bernard Bailyn has recently reinterpreted the early history of the United States by applying new social research findings on the experiences of European migrants. In his reinterpretation, migration becomes the organizing principle for rewriting the history of preindustrial North America. His approach rests on four separate propositions.
The first of these asserts that residents of early modern England moved regularly about their countryside; migrating to the New World was simply a “natural spillover.” Although at first the colonies held little positive attraction for the English—they would rather have stayed home—by the eighteenth century people increasingly migrated to America because they regarded it as the land of opportunity. Secondly, Bailyn holds that, contrary to the notion that used to flourish in America history textbooks, there was never a typical New World community. For example, the economic and demographic character of early New England towns varied considerably.
Bailyn’s third proposition suggests two general patterns prevailing among the many thousands of migrants: one group came as indentured servants, another came to acquire land. Surprisingly, Bailyn suggests that those who recruited indentured servants were the driving forces of transatlantic migration. These colonial entrepreneurs helped determine the social character of people who came to preindustrial North America. At first, thousands of unskilled laborers were recruited; by the 1730’s, however, American employers demanded skilled artisans.
Finally, Bailyn argues that the colonies were a half-civilized hinterland of the European culture system. He is undoubtedly correct to insist that the colonies were part of an Anglo-American empire. But to divide the empire into English core and colonial periphery, as Bailyn does, devalues the achievements of colonial culture. It is true, as Bailyn claims, that high culture in the colonies never matched that in England. But what of seventeenth-century New England, where the settlers created effective laws, built a distinguished university, and published books? Bailyn might respond that New England was exceptional. However, the ideas and institutions developed by New England Puritans had powerful effects on North American culture.
Although Bailyn goes on to apply his approach to some thousands of indentured servants who migrated just prior to the revolution, he fails to link their experience with the political development of the United States. Evidence presented in his work suggests how we might make such a connection. These indentured servants were treated as slaves for the period during which they had sold their time to American employers. It is not surprising that as soon as they served their time they passed up good wages in the cities and headed west to ensure their personal independence by acquiring land. Thus, it is in the west that a peculiarly American political culture began, among colonists who were suspicious of authority and intensely anti-aristocratic.

第二段，BB认为 现代英国人就是爱迁徙； 第二点，不存在一个典型new world community.
第三段，BB认为 取得土地的人是这次迁徙中的决定力量，他们塑造了北美人的社会性格。
第三段， BB认为北美殖民地是英国文化的半开发腹地。 作者不同意，英国是核心，殖民地是边缘。New England创造的思想和制度对北美文化产生了深远的影响。
第四段，BB没有把贫民的工作和美国政治的发展联系在一起。这些贫民做的是，努力工作，赚钱，去西部买土地。所以，独特的美国政治文化起源于西部。

我觉得这是一个summary,  I am just writing a summary of a summary of earlier American history.

1. Which of the following statements about migrants to colonial North America is supported by information in the passage?
(A) A larger percentage of migrants to colonial North America came as indentured servants than as free agents interested in acquiring land.
(B) Migrants who came to the colonies as indentured servants were more successful at making a livelihood than were farmers and artisans.
(C) Migrants to colonial North America were more successful at acquiring their own land during the eighteenth century than during the seven-tenth century.
(D) By the 1730’s, migrants already skilled in a trade were in more demand by American employers than were unskilled laborers.
(E) A significant percentage of migrants who came to the colonies to acquire land were forced to work as field hands for prosperous American farmers.
文中有说到这个

2. The author of the passage states that Bailyn failed to
(A) give sufficient emphasis to the cultural and political interdependence of the colonies and England
(B) describe carefully how migrants of different ethnic backgrounds preserved their culture in the united States
(C) take advantage of social research on the experiences of colonists who migrated to colonial North America specifically to acquire land
(D) relate the experience of the migrants to the political values that eventually shaped the character of the United States
(E) investigate the lives of Europeans before they came to colonial North America to determine more adequately their motivations for migrating
1 没有提及2 没有提及3 social research， BB用到了 4 没有提

3. Which of the following best summarizes the author’s evaluation of Bailyn’s fourth proposition?
(A) It is totally implausible.
(B) It is partially correct.
(C) It is highly admirable.
(D) It is controversial though persuasive.
(E) It is intriguing though unsubstantiated.
就是北美文化，和英国文化那里。

4. According to the passage, Bailyn and the author agree on which of the following statements about the culture of colonial New England?
(A) High culture in New England never equaled the high culture of England.
(B) The cultural achievements of colonial New England have generally been unrecognized by historians.
(C) The colonists imitated the high culture of England, and did not develop a culture that was uniquely their own.
(D) The southern colonies were greatly influenced by the high culture of New England.
(E) New England communities were able to create laws and build a university, but unable to create anything innovative in the arts.


5. According to the passage, which of the following is true of English migrants to the colonies during the eighteenth century?
(A) Most of them were farmers rather than trades people or artisans.
(B) Most of them came because they were unable to find work in England.
(C) They differed from other English people in that they were willing to travel.
(D) They expected that the colonies would offer them increased opportunity.
(E) They were generally not as educated as the people who remained in England.
细节

6. The author of the passage is primarily concerned with
(A) comparing several current interpretations of early American history
(B) suggesting that new social research on migration should lead to revisions in current interpretations of early American history
(C) providing the theoretical framework that is used by most historians in understanding early American history
(D) refuting an argument about early American history that has been proposed by social historians
(E) discussing a reinterpretation of early American history that is based on new social research on migration


7. It can be inferred from the passage that American history textbooks used to assert that
(A) many migrants to colonial North America were not successful financially
(B) more migrants came to America out of religious or political conviction that came in the hope of acquiring land
(C) New England communities were much alike in terms of their economics and demographics
(D) many migrants to colonial North America failed to maintain ties with their European relations
(E) the level of literacy in New England communities was very high


8. The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about Bailyn’s work?
(A) Bailyn underestimates the effects of Puritan thought on North American culture.
(B) Bailyn overemphasizes the economic dependence of the colonies on Great Britain.
(C) Bailyn’s description of the colonies as part of an Anglo-American empire is misleading and incorrect.
(D) Bailyn failed to test his propositions on a specific group of migrants to colonial North America.
(E) Bailyn overemphasizes the experiences of migrants to the New England colonies, and neglects the southern and the western parts of the New World

Bernard Bailyn has recently reinterpreted the early history of the United States by applying new social research findings on the experiences of European migrants. In his reinterpretation, migration becomes the organizing principle for rewriting the history of preindustrial North America. His approach rests on four separate propositions.

The first of these asserts that residents of early modern England moved regularly about their countryside; migrating to the New World was simply a “natural spillover.” Although at first the colonies held little positive attraction for the English—they would rather have stayed home—by the eighteenth century people increasingly migrated to America because they regarded it as the land of opportunity. Secondly, Bailyn holds that, contrary to the notion that used to flourish in America history textbooks, there was never a typical New World community. For example, the economic and demographic character of early New England towns varied considerably.

Bailyn’s third proposition suggests two general patterns prevailing among the many thousands of migrants: one group came as indentured servants, another came to acquire land. Surprisingly, Bailyn suggests that those who recruited indentured servants were the driving forces of transatlantic migration. These colonial entrepreneurs helped determine the social character of people who came to preindustrial North America. At first, thousands of unskilled laborers were recruited; by the 1730’s, however, American employers demanded skilled artisans.

Finally, Bailyn argues that the colonies were a half-civilized hinterland of the European culture system. He is undoubtedly correct to insist that the colonies were part of an Anglo-American empire. But to divide the empire into English core and colonial periphery, as Bailyn does, devalues the achievements of colonial culture. It is true, as Bailyn claims, that high culture in the colonies never matched that in England. But what of (what of 1: what is the situation with respect to 2: what importance can be assigned to) seventeenth-century New England, where the settlers created effective laws, built a distinguished university, and published books? Bailyn might respond that New England was exceptional. However, the ideas and institutions developed by New England Puritans had powerful effects on North American culture.

Although Bailyn goes on to apply his approach to some thousands of indentured servants who migrated just prior to the revolution, he fails to link their experience with the political development of the United States. Evidence presented in his work suggests how we might make such a connection. These indentured servants were treated as slaves for the period during which they had sold their time to American employers. It is not surprising that as soon as they served their time they passed up (pass up: 放弃；错过) good wages in the cities and headed west to ensure their personal independence by acquiring land. Thus, it is in the west that a peculiarly American political culture began, among colonists who were suspicious of authority and intensely anti-aristocratic.

1.Which of the following statements about migrants to colonial North America is supported by information in the passage?

(A) A larger percentage of migrants to colonial North America came as indentured servants than as free agents interested in acquiring land.

(B) Migrants who came to the colonies as indentured servants were more successful at making a livelihood than were farmers and artisans.

(C) Migrants to colonial North America were more successful at acquiring their own land during the eighteenth century than during the seven-tenth century.

(D) By the 1730’s, migrants already skilled in a trade were in more demand by American employers than were unskilled laborers.（D）

(E) A significant percentage of migrants who came to the colonies to acquire land were forced to work as field hands for prosperous American farmers.

2.The author of the passage states that Bailyn failed to

(A) give sufficient emphasis to the cultural and political interdependence of the colonies and England

(B) describe carefully how migrants of different ethnic backgrounds preserved their culture in the united States

(C) take advantage of social research on the experiences of colonists who migrated to colonial North America specifically to acquire land

(D) relate the experience of the migrants to the political values that eventually shaped the character of the United States（D）

(E) investigate the lives of Europeans before they came to colonial North America to determine more adequately their motivations for migrating

3.Which of the following best summarizes the author’s evaluation of Bailyn’s fourth proposition?

(A) It is totally implausible.

(B) It is partially correct.

(C) It is highly admirable.

(D) It is controversial though persuasive.（B）

(E) It is intriguing though unsubstantiated.

4.According to the passage, Bailyn and the author agree on which of the following statements about the culture of colonial New England?

(A) High culture in New England never equaled the high culture of England.

(B) The cultural achievements of colonial New England have generally been unrecognized by historians.

(C) The colonists imitated the high culture of England, and did not develop a culture that was uniquely their own.

(D) The southern colonies were greatly influenced by the high culture of New England.（A）

(E) New England communities were able to create laws and build a university, but unable to create anything innovative in the arts.

5.According to the passage, which of the following is true of English migrants to the colonies during the eighteenth century?

(A) Most of them were farmers rather than trades people or artisans.

(B) Most of them came because they were unable to find work in England.

(C) They differed from other English people in that they were willing to travel.

(D) They expected that the colonies would offer them increased opportunity.（D）

(E) They were generally not as educated as the people who remained in England.

6.The author of the passage is primarily concerned with

(A) comparing several current interpretations of early American history

(B) suggesting that new social research on migration should lead to revisions in current interpretations of early American history

(C) providing the theoretical framework that is used by most historians in understanding early American history

(D) refuting an argument about early American history that has been proposed by social historians（E）

(E) discussing a reinterpretation of early American history that is based on new social research on migration

7.It can be inferred from the passage that American history textbooks used to assert that

(A) many migrants to colonial North America were not successful financially

(B) more migrants came to America out of religious or political conviction that came in the hope of acquiring land

(C) New England communities were much alike in terms of their economics and demographics

(D) many migrants to colonial North America failed to maintain ties with their European relations（C）

(E) the level of literacy in New England communities was very high

8.The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about Bailyn’s work?

(A) Bailyn underestimates the effects of Puritan thought on North American culture.

(B) Bailyn overemphasizes the economic dependence of the colonies on Great Britain.

(C) Bailyn’s description of the colonies as part of an Anglo-American empire is misleading and incorrect.

(D) Bailyn failed to test his propositions on a specific group of migrants to colonial North America.（A）

(E) Bailyn overemphasizes the experiences of migrants to the New England colonies, and neglects the southern and the western parts of the New World.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 16:26
Many United States companies have, unfortunately, made the search for legal protection from import competition into a major line of work. Since 1980 the United States International Trade Commission (ITC) has received about 280 complaints alleging damage from imports that benefit from subsidies by foreign governments. Another 340 charge that foreign companies “dumped” their products in the United States at “less than fair value.” Even when no unfair practices are alleged, the simple claim that an industry has been injured by imports is sufficient grounds to seek relief.
Contrary to the general impression, this quest for import relief has hurt more companies than it has helped. As corporations begin to function globally, they develop an intricate web of marketing, production, and research relationships. The complexity of these relationships makes it unlikely that a system of import relief laws will meet the strategic needs of all the units under the same parent company.
Internationalization increases the danger that foreign companies will use import relief laws against the very companies the laws were designed to protect. Suppose a United States-owned company establishes an overseas plant to manufacture a product while its competitor makes the same product in the United States. If the competitor can prove injury from the imports—and that the United States company received a subsidy from a foreign government to build its plant abroad—the United States company’s products will be uncompetitive in the United States, since they would be subject to duties.
Perhaps the most brazen case occurred when the ITC investigated allegations that Canadian companies were injuring the United States salt industry by dumping rock salt, used to de-ice roads. The bizarre aspect of the complaint was that a foreign conglomerate with United States operations was crying for help against a United States company with foreign operations. The “United States” company claiming injury was a subsidiary of a Dutch conglomerate, while the “Canadian” companies included a subsidiary of a Chicago firm that was the second-largest domestic producer of rock salt.

第一段，常见的三种指控：进口有补贴；非公平价格倾销，进口伤害国内企业。
第二段，这个import relief hurt more companies than it has helped.
第三段 外国企业用这个打击本来应该保守的企业。
第四段 例子

错误 2 5


1. The passage is chiefly concerned with
(A) arguing against the increased internationalization of United States corporations
(B) warning that the application of laws affecting trade frequently has unintended consequences
(C) demonstrating that foreign-based firms receive more subsidies from their governments than United States firms receive from the United States government
(D) advocating the use of trade restrictions for “dumped” products but not for other imports
(E) recommending a uniform method for handling claims of unfair trade practices


2. It can be inferred from the passage that the minimal basis for a complaint to the International Trade Commission is which of the following?
(A) A foreign competitor has received a subsidy from a foreign government.
(B) A foreign competitor has substantially increased the volume of products shipped to the United States.
(C) A foreign competitor is selling products in the United States at less than fair market value.
(D) The company requesting import relief has been injured by the sale of imports in the United States.
(E) The company requesting import relief has been barred from exporting products to the country of its foreign competitor.
注意BD的表达，

3. The last paragraph performs which of the following functions in the passage?
(A) It summarizes the discussion thus far and suggests additional areas of research.
(B) It presents a recommendation based on the evidence presented earlier.
(C) It discusses an exceptional case in which the results expected by the author of the passage were not obtained.
(D) It introduces an additional area of concern not mentioned earlier.
(E) It cites a specific case that illustrates a problem presented more generally in the previous paragraph.


4. The passage warns of which of the following dangers?
(A) Companies in the United States may receive no protection from imports unless they actively seek protection from import competition.
(B) Companies that seek legal protection from import competition may incur legal costs that far exceed any possible gain.
(C) Companies that are United States-owned but operate internationally may not be eligible for protection from import competition under the laws of the countries in which their plants operate.
(D) Companies that are not United States-owned may seek legal protection from import competition under United States import relief laws.
(E) Companies in the United States that import raw materials may have to pay duties on those materials.


5. The passage suggests that which of the following is most likely to be true of United States trade laws?
(A) They will eliminate the practice of “dumping” products in the United States.
(B) They will enable manufacturers in the United States to compete more profitably outside the United States.
(C) They will affect United States trade with Canada more negatively than trade with other nations.
(D) Those that help one unit within a parent company will not necessarily help other units in the company.
(E) Those that are applied to international companies will accomplish their intended result.
关于加拿大的企业那个指控，应该不会对加拿大和美国贸易问题造成影响。


6. It can be inferred from the passage that the author believes which of the following about the complaint mentioned in the last paragraph?
(A) The ITC acted unfairly toward the complainant in its investigation.
(B) The complaint violated the intent of import relief laws.
(C) The response of the ITC to the complaint provided suitable relief from unfair trade practices to the complainant.
(D) The ITC did not have access to appropriate information concerning the case.
(E) Each of the companies involved in the complaint acted in its own best interest.


7. According to the passage, companies have the general impression that International Trade Commission import relief practices have
(A) caused unpredictable fluctuations in volumes of imports and exports
(B) achieved their desired effect only under unusual circumstances
(C) actually helped companies that have requested import relief
(D) been opposed by the business community
(E) had less impact on international companies than the business community expected


8. According to the passage, the International Trade Commission is involved in which of the following?
(A) Investigating allegations of unfair import competition
(B) Granting subsidies to companies in the United States that have been injured by import competition
(C) Recommending legislation to ensure fair
(D) Identifying international corporations that wish to build plants in the United States
(E) Assisting corporations in the United States that wish to compete globally

Many United States companies have, unfortunately, made the search for legal protection from import competition into a major line of work. Since 1980 the United States International Trade Commission (ITC) has received about 280 complaints alleging damage from imports that benefit from subsidies by foreign governments. Another 340 charge that foreign companies “dumped” their products in the United States at “less than fair value.” Even when no unfair practices are alleged, the simple claim that an industry has been injured by imports is sufficient grounds to seek relief.

Contrary to the general impression, this quest for import relief has hurt more companies than it has helped. As corporations begin to function globally, they develop an intricate web of marketing, production, and research relationships. The complexity of these relationships makes it unlikely that a system of import relief laws will meet the strategic needs of all the units under the same parent company.

Internationalization increases the danger that foreign companies will use import relief laws against the very companies the laws were designed to protect. Suppose a United States-owned company establishes an overseas plant to manufacture a product while its competitor makes the same product in the United States. If the competitor can prove injury from the imports—and that the United States company received a subsidy from a foreign government to build its plant abroad—the United States company’s products will be uncompetitive in the United States, since they would be subject to duties.

Perhaps the most brazen (marked by contemptuous boldness)case occurred when the ITC investigated allegations that Canadian companies were injuring the United States salt industry by dumping rock salt (rock salt: n.岩盐，石盐), used to de-ice roads. The bizarre aspect of the complaint was that a foreign conglomerate with United States operations was crying for (cry for: v.吵着要, 恳求) help against a United States company with foreign operations. The “United States” company claiming injury was a subsidiary of a Dutch conglomerate, while the “Canadian” companies included a subsidiary of a Chicago firm that was the second-largest domestic producer of rock salt.

1.The passage is chiefly concerned with

(A) arguing against the increased internationalization of United States corporations

(B) warning that the application of laws affecting trade frequently has unintended consequences

(C) demonstrating that foreign-based firms receive more subsidies from their governments than United States firms receive from the United States government

(D) advocating the use of trade restrictions for “dumped” products but not for other imports（B）

(E) recommending a uniform method for handling claims of unfair trade practices

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the minimal basis for a complaint to the International Trade Commission is which of the following?

(A) A foreign competitor has received a subsidy from a foreign government.

(B) A foreign competitor has substantially increased the volume of products shipped to the United States.

(C) A foreign competitor is selling products in the United States at less than fair market value.

(D) The company requesting import relief has been injured by the sale of imports in the United States.（D）

(E) The company requesting import relief has been barred from exporting products to the country of its foreign competitor.

3.The last paragraph performs which of the following functions in the passage?

(A) It summarizes the discussion thus far and suggests additional areas of research.

(B) It presents a recommendation based on the evidence presented earlier.

(C) It discusses an exceptional case in which the results expected by the author of the passage were not obtained.

(D) It introduces an additional area of concern not mentioned earlier.（E）

(E) It cites a specific case that illustrates a problem presented more generally in the previous paragraph.

4.The passage warns of which of the following dangers?

(A) Companies in the United States may receive no protection from imports unless they actively seek protection from import competition.

(B) Companies that seek legal protection from import competition may incur legal costs that far exceed any possible gain.

(C) Companies that are United States-owned but operate internationally may not be eligible for protection from import competition under the laws of the countries in which their plants operate.

(D) Companies that are not United States-owned may seek legal protection from import competition under United States import relief laws.（D）

(E) Companies in the United States that import raw materials may have to pay duties on those materials.

5.The passage suggests that which of the following is most likely to be true of United States trade laws?

(A) They will eliminate the practice of “dumping” products in the United States.

(B) They will enable manufacturers in the United States to compete more profitably outside the United States.

(C) They will affect United States trade with Canada more negatively than trade with other nations.

(D) Those that help one unit within a parent company will not necessarily help other units in the company.（D）

(E) Those that are applied to international companies will accomplish their intended result.

6.It can be inferred from the passage that the author believes which of the following about the complaint mentioned in the last paragraph?

(A) The ITC acted unfairly toward the complainant in its investigation.

(B) The complaint violated the intent of import relief laws.

(C) The response of the ITC to the complaint provided suitable relief from unfair trade practices to the complainant.

(D) The ITC did not have access to appropriate information concerning the case.（B）

(E) Each of the companies involved in the complaint acted in its own best interest.

7.According to the passage, companies have the general impression that International Trade Commission import relief practices have（答案在第二段第一句话）

(A) caused unpredictable fluctuations in volumes of imports and exports

(B) achieved their desired effect only under unusual circumstances

(C) actually helped companies that have requested import relief

(D) been opposed by the business community（C）

(E) had less impact on international companies than the business community expected

8.According to the passage, the International Trade Commission is involved in which of the following?

(A) Investigating allegations of unfair import competition

(B) Granting subsidies to companies in the United States that have been injured by import competition

(C) Recommending legislation to ensure fair

(D) Identifying international corporations that wish to build plants in the United States（A）

(E) Assisting corporations in the United States that wish to compete globally




Many United States companies have, unfortunately, made the search for legal protection from import competition into a major line of work. Since 1980 the United States International Trade Commission (ITC) has received about 280 complaints alleging damage from imports that benefit from subsidies by foreign governments. Another 340 charge that foreign companies “dumped” their products in the United States at “less than fair value.” Even when no unfair practices are alleged, the simple claim that an industry has been injured by imports is sufficient grounds to seek relief.

Contrary to the general impression, this quest for import relief has hurt more companies than it has helped. As corporations begin to function globally, they develop an intricate web of marketing, production, and research relationships. The complexity of these relationships makes it unlikely that a system of import relief laws will meet the strategic needs of all the units under the same parent company.

Internationalization increases the danger that foreign companies will use import relief laws against the very companies the laws were designed to protect. Suppose a United States-owned company establishes an overseas plant to manufacture a product while its competitor makes the same product in the United States. If the competitor can prove injury from the imports—and that the United States company received a subsidy from a foreign government to build its plant abroad—the United States company’s products will be uncompetitive in the United States, since they would be subject to duties.

Perhaps the most brazen (marked by contemptuous boldness)case occurred when the ITC investigated allegations that Canadian companies were injuring the United States salt industry by dumping rock salt (rock salt: n.岩盐，石盐), used to de-ice roads. The bizarre aspect of the complaint was that a foreign conglomerate with United States operations was crying for (cry for: v.吵着要, 恳求) help against a United States company with foreign operations. The “United States” company claiming injury was a subsidiary of a Dutch conglomerate, while the “Canadian” companies included a subsidiary of a Chicago firm that was the second-largest domestic producer of rock salt.

1.The passage is chiefly concerned with

(A) arguing against the increased internationalization of United States corporations

(B) warning that the application of laws affecting trade frequently has unintended consequences

(C) demonstrating that foreign-based firms receive more subsidies from their governments than United States firms receive from the United States government

(D) advocating the use of trade restrictions for “dumped” products but not for other imports（B）

(E) recommending a uniform method for handling claims of unfair trade practices

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the minimal basis for a complaint to the International Trade Commission is which of the following?

(A) A foreign competitor has received a subsidy from a foreign government.

(B) A foreign competitor has substantially increased the volume of products shipped to the United States.

(C) A foreign competitor is selling products in the United States at less than fair market value.

(D) The company requesting import relief has been injured by the sale of imports in the United States.（D）

(E) The company requesting import relief has been barred from exporting products to the country of its foreign competitor.

3.The last paragraph performs which of the following functions in the passage?

(A) It summarizes the discussion thus far and suggests additional areas of research.

(B) It presents a recommendation based on the evidence presented earlier.

(C) It discusses an exceptional case in which the results expected by the author of the passage were not obtained.

(D) It introduces an additional area of concern not mentioned earlier.（E）

(E) It cites a specific case that illustrates a problem presented more generally in the previous paragraph.

4.The passage warns of which of the following dangers?

(A) Companies in the United States may receive no protection from imports unless they actively seek protection from import competition.

(B) Companies that seek legal protection from import competition may incur legal costs that far exceed any possible gain.

(C) Companies that are United States-owned but operate internationally may not be eligible for protection from import competition under the laws of the countries in which their plants operate.

(D) Companies that are not United States-owned may seek legal protection from import competition under United States import relief laws.（D）

(E) Companies in the United States that import raw materials may have to pay duties on those materials.

5.The passage suggests that which of the following is most likely to be true of United States trade laws?

(A) They will eliminate the practice of “dumping” products in the United States.

(B) They will enable manufacturers in the United States to compete more profitably outside the United States.

(C) They will affect United States trade with Canada more negatively than trade with other nations.

(D) Those that help one unit within a parent company will not necessarily help other units in the company.（D）

(E) Those that are applied to international companies will accomplish their intended result.

6.It can be inferred from the passage that the author believes which of the following about the complaint mentioned in the last paragraph?

(A) The ITC acted unfairly toward the complainant in its investigation.

(B) The complaint violated the intent of import relief laws.

(C) The response of the ITC to the complaint provided suitable relief from unfair trade practices to the complainant.

(D) The ITC did not have access to appropriate information concerning the case.（B）

(E) Each of the companies involved in the complaint acted in its own best interest.

7.According to the passage, companies have the general impression that International Trade Commission import relief practices have（答案在第二段第一句话）

(A) caused unpredictable fluctuations in volumes of imports and exports

(B) achieved their desired effect only under unusual circumstances

(C) actually helped companies that have requested import relief

(D) been opposed by the business community（C）

(E) had less impact on international companies than the business community expected

8.According to the passage, the International Trade Commission is involved in which of the following?

(A) Investigating allegations of unfair import competition

(B) Granting subsidies to companies in the United States that have been injured by import competition

(C) Recommending legislation to ensure fair

(D) Identifying international corporations that wish to build plants in the United States（A）

(E) Assisting corporations in the United States that wish to compete globally

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 18:38
All of the cells in a particular plant start out with the same complement of genes. How then can these cells differentiate and form structures as different as roots, stems, leaves, and fruits? The answer is that only a small subset of the genes in a particular kind of cell are expressed, or turned on, at a given time. This is accomplished by a complex system of chemical messengers that in plants include hormones and other regulatory molecules. Five major hormones have been identified: auxin, abscisic acid, cytokinin, ethylene, and gibberellin. Studies of plants have now identified a new class of regulatory molecules called oligosaccharins.
Unlike the oligosaccharins, the five well-known plant hormones are pleiotropic rather than specific; that is, each has more than one effect on the growth and development of plants. The five has so many simultaneous effects that they are not very useful in artificially controlling the growth of crops. Auxin, for instance, stimulates the rate of cell elongation, causes shoots to grow up and roots to grow down, and inhibits the growth of lateral shoots. Auxin also causes the plant to develop a vascular system, to form lateral roots, and to produce ethylene.
The pleiotropy of the five well-studied plant hormones is somewhat analogous to that of certain hormones in animal. For example, hormones from the hypothalamus in the brain stimulate the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland to synthesize and release many different hormones, one of which stimulates the release of hormones from the adrenal cortex. These hormones have specific effects on target organs all over the body. One hormone stimulates the thyroid gland, for example, another the ovarian follicle cells, and so forth. In other words, there is a hierarchy of hormones. Such a hierarchy may also exist in plants. Oligosaccharins are fragments of the cell wall released by enzymes: different enzymes release different oligosaccharins. There are indications that pleiotropic plant hormones may actually function by activating the enzymes that release these other, more specific chemical messengers from the cell wall.

这篇文章我想起了，动物胚胎那篇。
第一段，说为什么植物中的细胞基因是相同，但是有的cell就是树干，有个就是果实呢？这个是有特定细胞的中的一小步基因组成的。并且要完成这个转变，需要hormone 以及regulatory molecule来完成。
             话锋一转，说发现一种新的regulatory molecules.
第二段，hormone多用是多种，多样的
第三段，hormones是有等级的。
第四段， hormone 产生酶，酶生产细胞壁上的不同Oli

错误 6

1. According to the passage, the five well-known plant hormones are not useful in controlling the growth of crops because
(A) it is not known exactly what functions the hormones perform
(B) each hormone has various effects on plants
(C) none of the hormones can function without the others
(D) each hormone has different effects on different kinds of plants
(E) each hormone works on only a small subset of a cell’s genes at any particular time

2. The passage suggests that the place of hypothalamic hormones in the hormonal hierarchies of animals is similar to the place of which of the following in plants?
(A) Plant cell walls
(B) The complement of genes in each plant cell
(C) A subset of a plant cell’s gene complement
(D) The five major hormones
(E) The oligosaccharins


3. The passage suggests that which of the following is a function likely to be performed by an oligosaccharin?
(A) To stimulate a particular plant cell to become part of a plant’s root system
(B) To stimulate the walls of a particular cell to produce other oligosaccharins
(C) To activate enzymes that release specific chemical messengers from plant cell walls
(D) To duplicate the gene complement in a particular plant cell
(E) To produce multiple effects on a particular subsystem of plant cells
第一段

4. The author mentions specific effects that auxin has on plant development in order to illustrate the
(A) point that some of the effects of plant hormones can be harmful
(B) way in which hormones are produced by plants
(C) hierarchical nature of the functioning of plant hormones
(D) differences among the best-known plant hormones
(E) concept of pleiotropy as it is exhibited by plant hormones


5. According to the passage, which of the following best describes a function performed by oligosaccharins?
(A) Regulating the daily functioning of a plant’s cells
(B) Interacting with one another to produce different chemicals
(C) Releasing specific chemical messengers from a plant’s cell walls
(D) Producing the hormones that cause plant cells to differentiate to perform different functions
(E) Influencing the development of a plant’s cells by controlling the expression of the cells’ genes
我有些吃不准，

6. The passage suggests that, unlike the pleiotropic hormones, oligosaccharins could be used effectively to
(A) trace the passage of chemicals through the walls of cells
(B) pinpoint functions of other plant hormones
(C) artificially control specific aspects of the development of crops
(D) alter the complement of genes in the cells of plants
(E) alter the effects of the five major hormones on plant development
Unlike the oligosaccharins, the five well-known plant hormones are pleiotropic

Th e passage does not explicitly state how oligosaccharins could be used, but a use can be inferred. Th e second paragraph establishes that the pleiotropic hormones are not useful in artificially controlling crop growth because of their multiple, diverse eff ects. Oligosaccharins are contrasted with the hormones because they have specific eff ects. Th us it is reasonable to infer that oligosaccharins might be used to control specific aspects of crop growth.

这个变态逻辑还真是纠结，其实还有一部原文说 5 hormone不能用来被人控制。这部分加上，这个逻辑链才成立。 不会忽视 逻辑连词，unlike, although.


7. The author discusses animal hormones primarily in order to
(A) introduce the idea of a hierarchy of hormones
(B) explain the effects that auxin has on plant cells
(C) contrast the functioning of plant hormones and animals hormones
(D) illustrate the way in which particular hormones affect animals
(E) explain the distinction between hormones and regulatory molecules

All of the cells in a particular plant start out (start out: 开始, 着手) with the same complement of genes. How then can these cells differentiate and form structures as different as roots, stems, leaves, and fruits? The answer is that only a small subset of the genes in a particular kind of cell are expressed, or turned on, at a given time. This is accomplished by a complex system of chemical messengers that in plants include hormones and other regulatory molecules. Five major hormones have been identified: auxin, abscisic acid (abscisic acid: [生化]脱落酸), cytokinin, ethylene, and gibberellin. Studies of plants have now identified a new class of regulatory molecules called oligosaccharins.

Unlike the oligosaccharins, the five well-known plant hormones are pleiotropic rather than specific; that is, each has more than one effect on the growth and development of plants. The five has so many simultaneous effects that they are not very useful in artificially controlling the growth of crops. Auxin, for instance, stimulates the rate of cell elongation, causes shoots to grow up and roots to grow down, and inhibits the growth of lateral shoots. Auxin also causes the plant to develop a vascular system, to form lateral roots, and to produce ethylene.

The pleiotropy of the five well-studied plant hormones is somewhat analogous to that of certain hormones in animal. For example, hormones from the hypothalamus in the brain stimulate the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland (pituitary gland: n.[解]脑下垂体) to synthesize and release many different hormones, one of which stimulates the release of hormones from the adrenal cortex (adrenal cortex: 肾上腺皮质). These hormones have specific effects on target organs all over the body. One hormone stimulates the thyroid gland, for example, another the ovarian follicle (ovarian follicle: 卵泡) cells, and so forth. In other words, there is a hierarchy of hormones. Such a hierarchy may also exist in plants. Oligosaccharins are fragments of the cell wall released by enzymes: different enzymes release different oligosaccharins. There are indications that pleiotropic plant hormones may actually function by activating the enzymes that release these other, more specific chemical messengers from the cell wall.

1.According to the passage, the five well-known plant hormones are not useful in controlling the growth of crops because

(A) it is not known exactly what functions the hormones perform

(B) each hormone has various effects on plants

(C) none of the hormones can function without the others

(D) each hormone has different effects on different kinds of plants（B）

(E) each hormone works on only a small subset of a cell’s genes at any particular time

2.The passage suggests that the place of hypothalamic hormones in the hormonal hierarchies of animals is similar to the place of which of the following in plants?

(A) Plant cell walls

(B) The complement of genes in each plant cell

(C) A subset of a plant cell’s gene complement

(D) The five major hormones（D）

(E) The oligosaccharins

3.The passage suggests that which of the following is a function likely to be performed by an oligosaccharin?

(A) To stimulate a particular plant cell to become part of a plant’s root system

(B) To stimulate the walls of a particular cell to produce other oligosaccharins

(C) To activate enzymes that release specific chemical messengers from plant cell walls

(D) To duplicate the gene complement in a particular plant cell（A）

(E) To produce multiple effects on a particular subsystem of plant cells

4.The author mentions specific effects that auxin has on plant development in order to illustrate the

(A) point that some of the effects of plant hormones can be harmful

(B) way in which hormones are produced by plants

(C) hierarchical nature of the functioning of plant hormones

(D) differences among the best-known plant hormones（E）

(E) concept of pleiotropy as it is exhibited by plant hormones

5.According to the passage, which of the following best describes a function performed by oligosaccharins?

(A) Regulating the daily functioning of a plant’s cells

(B) Interacting with one another to produce different chemicals

(C) Releasing specific chemical messengers from a plant’s cell walls

(D) Producing the hormones that cause plant cells to differentiate to perform different functions（E）

(E) Influencing the development of a plant’s cells by controlling the expression of the cells’ genes

6.The passage suggests that, unlike the pleiotropic hormones, oligosaccharins could be used effectively to

(A) trace the passage of chemicals through the walls of cells

(B) pinpoint functions of other plant hormones

(C) artificially control specific aspects of the development of crops

(D) alter the complement of genes in the cells of plants（C）

(E) alter the effects of the five major hormones on plant development

7.The author discusses animal hormones primarily in order to

(A) introduce the idea of a hierarchy of hormones

(B) explain the effects that auxin has on plant cells

(C) contrast the functioning of plant hormones and animals hormones

(D) illustrate the way in which particular hormones affect animals（A）

(E) explain the distinction between hormones and regulatory molecules



All of the cells in a particular plant start out (start out: 开始, 着手) with the same complement of genes. How then can these cells differentiate and form structures as different as roots, stems, leaves, and fruits? The answer is that only a small subset of the genes in a particular kind of cell are expressed, or turned on, at a given time. This is accomplished by a complex system of chemical messengers that in plants include hormones and other regulatory molecules. Five major hormones have been identified: auxin, abscisic acid (abscisic acid: [生化]脱落酸), cytokinin, ethylene, and gibberellin. Studies of plants have now identified a new class of regulatory molecules called oligosaccharins.

Unlike the oligosaccharins, the five well-known plant hormones are pleiotropic rather than specific; that is, each has more than one effect on the growth and development of plants. The five has so many simultaneous effects that they are not very useful in artificially controlling the growth of crops. Auxin, for instance, stimulates the rate of cell elongation, causes shoots to grow up and roots to grow down, and inhibits the growth of lateral shoots. Auxin also causes the plant to develop a vascular system, to form lateral roots, and to produce ethylene.

The pleiotropy of the five well-studied plant hormones is somewhat analogous to that of certain hormones in animal. For example, hormones from the hypothalamus in the brain stimulate the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland (pituitary gland: n.[解]脑下垂体) to synthesize and release many different hormones, one of which stimulates the release of hormones from the adrenal cortex (adrenal cortex: 肾上腺皮质). These hormones have specific effects on target organs all over the body. One hormone stimulates the thyroid gland, for example, another the ovarian follicle (ovarian follicle: 卵泡) cells, and so forth. In other words, there is a hierarchy of hormones. Such a hierarchy may also exist in plants. Oligosaccharins are fragments of the cell wall released by enzymes: different enzymes release different oligosaccharins. There are indications that pleiotropic plant hormones may actually function by activating the enzymes that release these other, more specific chemical messengers from the cell wall.

1.According to the passage, the five well-known plant hormones are not useful in controlling the growth of crops because

(A) it is not known exactly what functions the hormones perform

(B) each hormone has various effects on plants

(C) none of the hormones can function without the others

(D) each hormone has different effects on different kinds of plants（B）

(E) each hormone works on only a small subset of a cell’s genes at any particular time

2.The passage suggests that the place of hypothalamic hormones in the hormonal hierarchies of animals is similar to the place of which of the following in plants?

(A) Plant cell walls

(B) The complement of genes in each plant cell

(C) A subset of a plant cell’s gene complement

(D) The five major hormones（D）

(E) The oligosaccharins

3.The passage suggests that which of the following is a function likely to be performed by an oligosaccharin?

(A) To stimulate a particular plant cell to become part of a plant’s root system

(B) To stimulate the walls of a particular cell to produce other oligosaccharins

(C) To activate enzymes that release specific chemical messengers from plant cell walls

(D) To duplicate the gene complement in a particular plant cell（A）

(E) To produce multiple effects on a particular subsystem of plant cells

4.The author mentions specific effects that auxin has on plant development in order to illustrate the

(A) point that some of the effects of plant hormones can be harmful

(B) way in which hormones are produced by plants

(C) hierarchical nature of the functioning of plant hormones

(D) differences among the best-known plant hormones（E）

(E) concept of pleiotropy as it is exhibited by plant hormones

5.According to the passage, which of the following best describes a function performed by oligosaccharins?

(A) Regulating the daily functioning of a plant’s cells

(B) Interacting with one another to produce different chemicals

(C) Releasing specific chemical messengers from a plant’s cell walls

(D) Producing the hormones that cause plant cells to differentiate to perform different functions（E）

(E) Influencing the development of a plant’s cells by controlling the expression of the cells’ genes

6.The passage suggests that, unlike the pleiotropic hormones, oligosaccharins could be used effectively to

(A) trace the passage of chemicals through the walls of cells

(B) pinpoint functions of other plant hormones

(C) artificially control specific aspects of the development of crops

(D) alter the complement of genes in the cells of plants（C）

(E) alter the effects of the five major hormones on plant development

7.The author discusses animal hormones primarily in order to

(A) introduce the idea of a hierarchy of hormones

(B) explain the effects that auxin has on plant cells

(C) contrast the functioning of plant hormones and animals hormones

(D) illustrate the way in which particular hormones affect animals（A）

(E) explain the distinction between hormones and regulatory molecules

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 19:14
任务完成了。呵呵。真是，失眠不是让脑袋痛，只是会让手反应有些迟钝。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-19 21:38
1. Juxtapose v contrast juxtaposition of ideas/civilizations.文化间对比，思想间的对比。
2. Notion=conception=idea=belief.
3.segments of the middle and upper classes.
4. Mortaility
5. take issue with practioners of the new sociological economics.
  to disagree or argue with someone about something
6. surrender value: the amount the policeholder will get from the life insurance company if he decides to exit the police before maturity.
7 somewhat= more than little but not very
8 receptivity to

这里放一下：
self discipline 配的形容词是more, 而不是highly,  比如， You should have more self discipline and control?
2. 还有个一个词，这些天经常看到 address the problems.  address

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 11:49
In 1977 the prestigious Ewha Women’s University in Seoul, Korea, announced the opening of the first women’s studies program in Asia. Few academic programs have ever received such public attention. In broadcast debates, critics dismissed the program as a betrayal of national identity, an imitation of Western ideas, and a distraction from the real task of national unification and economic development. Even supporters underestimated the program; they thought it would be merely another of the many Western ideas that had already proved useful in Asian culture, akin to airlines, electricity, and the assembly line. The founders of the program, however, realized that neither view was correct. They had some reservations about the applicability of Western feminist theories to the role of women in Asia and felt that such theories should be closely examined. Their approach has thus far yielded important critiques of Western theory, informed by the special experience of Asian women.
For instance, like the Western feminist critique of the Freudian model of the human psyche, the Korean critique finds Freudian theory culture-bound, but in ways different from those cited by Western theorists. The Korean theorists claim that Freudian theory assumes the universality of the Western nuclear, male-headed family and focuses on the personality formation of the individual, independent of society. An analysis based on such assumptions could be valid for a highly competitive, individualistic society. In the Freudian family drama, family members are assumed to be engaged in a Darwinian struggle against each other—father against son and sibling against sibling. Such a concept projects the competitive model of Western society onto human personalities. But in the Asian concept of personality there is no ideal attached to individualism or to the independent self. The Western model of personality development does not explain major characteristics of the Korean personality, which is social and group-centered. The “self” is a social being defined by and acting in a group, and the well-being of both men and women is determined by the equilibrium of the group, not by individual self-assertion. The ideal is one of interdependency.
In such a context, what is recognized as “dependency” in Western psychiatric terms is not, in Korean terms, an admission of weakness or failure. All this bears directly on the Asian perception of men’s and women’s psychology because men are also “dependent.” In Korean culture, men cry and otherwise easily show their emotions, something that might be considered a betrayal of masculinity in Western culture. In the kinship-based society of Korea, four generations may live in the same house, which means that people can be sons and daughters all their lives, whereas in Western culture, the roles of husband and son, wife and daughter, are often incompatible.

好大罪状呀，很有现在中国网上的调调。

第一段，Ewha university 成立一个项目，得到很多批评，即便支持者也认为这个项目不是和成功。但是，这个项目主要的工作却是用亚洲女性的经验评论西方理论。
第二段，以 Freud model 这个西方理论为例子，说明西方理论是有自身文化相关的。
第三段，我不知道这段主要是做什么的？？？ 从韩国文化方面解释 dependency，和四世同堂。

第二段，

我想 这篇文章的结构，应该是想说，西方的理论不能在亚洲没有多少适用性，因为理论是cultural bunded. 接下来就应该说，西方的文化环境是什么样的， 亚洲，比如韩国，的文化环境是什么样子的。韩国的环境是，interdependence, all members of a family are living in one house. people will carry mutil role for theri family.

再写一遍，文章总体构架，一个大学成立一个women studies program. 他们很怀疑西方女性理论是不是能用到亚洲女性上，认为需要仔细检验。之后举了一个这个项目的具体工作。

错误 1 3 4

1. Which of the following best summarizes the content of the passage?
(A) A critique of a particular women’s studies program
(B) A report of work in social theory done by a particular women’s studies program
(C) An assessment of the strengths and weaknesses of a particular women’s studies program
(D) An analysis of the philosophy underlying women’s studies programs
(E) An abbreviated history of Korean women’s studies programs


2. It can be inferred from the passage that Korean scholars in the field of women’s studies undertook an analysis of Freudian theory as a response to which of the following?
(A) Attacks by critics of the Ewha women’s studies program
(B) The superficiality of earlier critiques of Freudian theory
(C) The popularity of Freud in Korean psychiatric circles
(D) Their desire to encourage Korean scholars to adopt the Freudian model
(E) Their assessment of the relevance and limitations of Western feminist theory with respect to Korean culture


3. Which of the following conclusions about the introduction of Western ideas to Korean society can be supported by information contained in the passage?
(A) Except for technological innovations, few Western ideas have been successfully transplanted into Korean society.
(B) The introduction of Western ideas to Korean society is viewed by some Koreans as a challenge to Korean identity.
(C) The development of the Korean economy depends heavily on the development of new academic programs modeled after Western programs.
(D) The extent to which Western ideas must be adapted for acceptance by Korean society is minimal.
(E) The introduction of Western ideas to Korean society accelerated after 1977.
A 想还是有人承认西方文化可以像西方技术一样对韩国有用的。

4. It can be inferred from the passage that the broadcast media in Korea considered the establishment of the Ewha women’s studies program
(A) praiseworthy
(B) insignificant
(C) newsworthy
(D) imitative
(E) incomprehensible
我看没有人支持，选。 我又错在中西语境上了，无法理解一个人，潜台词，中文说的这个件事很荒唐，但是英语里就是这个事情不能被理解。

5. It can be inferred from the passage that the position taken by some of the supporters of the Ewha women’s studies program was problematic to the founders of the program because those supporters
(A) assumed that the program would be based on the uncritical adoption of Western theory
(B) failed to show concern for the issues of national unification and economic development
(C) were unfamiliar with Western feminist theory
(D) were not themselves scholars in the field of women’s studies
(E) accepted the universality of Freudian theory
我差点就选E了，但是注意 of  ，这样范围就小了。这里主要说的是所有西方理论。

6. Which of the following statements is most consistent with the view of personality development held by the Ewha women’s studies group?
(A) Personality development occurs in identifiable stages, beginning with dependency in childhood and ending with independence in adulthood.
(B) Any theory of personality development, in order to be valid, must be universal.
(C) Personality development is influenced by the characteristics of the society in which a person lives.
(D) Personality development is hindered if a person is not permitted to be independent.
(E) No theory of personality development can account for the differences between Korean and Western culture.


7. Which of the following statements about the Western feminist critique of Freudian theory can be supported by information contained in the passage?
(A) It recognizes the influence of Western culture on Freudian theory.
(B) It was written after 1977.
(C) It acknowledges the universality of the nuclear, male-headed family.
(D) It challenges Freud’s analysis of the role of daughters in Western society.
(E) It fails to address the issue of competitiveness in Western society.
注意这个表黑的地方，回去再读，我发现，我原来是错很多的。

8. According to the passage, critics of the Ewha women’s studies program cited the program as a threat to which of the following?
I. National identity
II. National unification
III. Economic development
IV. Family integrity
(A) I only
(B) I and II only
(C) I, II, and III only
(D) II, III, and IV only
(E) I, II, III, and IV
没有家庭的团结这条

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 13:28
In choosing a method for determining climatic conditions that existed in the past, paleoclimatologists invoke four principal criteria. First, the material—rocks, lakes, vegetation, etc.—on which the method relies must be widespread enough to provide plenty of information, since analysis of material that is rarely encountered will not permit correlation with other regions or with other periods of geological history. Second, in the process of formation, the material must have received an environmental signal that reflects a change in climate and that can be deciphered by modern physical or chemical means. Third, at least some of the material must have retained the signal unaffected by subsequent changes in the environment. Fourth, it must be possible to determine the time at which the inferred climatic conditions held. This last criterion is more easily met in dating marine sediments, because dating of only a small number of layers in a marine sequence allows the age of other layers to be estimated fairly reliably by extrapolation and interpolation. By contrast, because sedimentation is much less continuous in continental regions, estimating the age of a continental bed from the known ages of beds above and below is more risky.
One very old method used in the investigation of past climatic conditions involves the measurement of water levels in ancient lakes. In temperate regions, there are enough lakes for correlations between them to give us a reliable picture. In arid and semiarid regions, on the other hand, the small number of lakes and the great distances between them reduce the possibilities for correlation. Moreover, since lake levels are controlled by rates of evaporation as well as by precipitation, the interpretation of such levels is ambiguous. For instance, the fact that lake levels in the semiarid southwestern United States appear to have been higher during the last ice age than they are now was at one time attributed to increased precipitation. On the basis of snow-line elevations, however, it has been concluded that the climate then was not necessarily wetter than it is now, but rather that both summers and winters were cooler, resulting in reduced evaporation.
Another problematic method is to reconstruct former climates on the basis of pollen profiles. The type of vegetation in a specific region is determined by identifying and counting the various pollen grains found there. Although the relationship between vegetation and climate is not as direct as the relationship between climate and lake levels, the method often works well in the temperate zones. In arid and semiarid regions in which there is not much vegetation, however, small changes in one or a few plant types can change the picture dramatically, making accurate correlations between neighboring areas difficult to obtain.

第一段，测量古代的气候需要四个条件： 1 该物质要常见，2 该物质要能接受环境信息，3 能保证这个环境信不会被以后的变换影响，4 能记录时间。
第二段，提到一种古老的方法，——测量古老湖泊的水线。但是这个有两个问题，1 温带，湖泊多，但是干旱，半干旱地区湖泊就少；2 水线不仅受蒸发的影响，还有到降水的影响。
第三段，另外一种方法是，pollen profiles， 就是找一个特定地区的花粉种类。这个方法在温带好用，但是在干旱， 很半干旱地区，一部分植物的小量变化就引起环境很大变化。

这个怎么错这么多呀。 1 3 5 6

1. Which of the following statements about the difference between marine and continental sedimentation is supported by information in the passage?
(A) Data provided by dating marine sedimentation is more consistent with researchers’ findings in other disciplines than is data provided by dating continental sedimentation.
(B) It is easier to estimate the age of a layer in a sequence of continental sedimentation than it is to estimate the age of a layer in a sequence of marine sedimentation.
(C) Marine sedimentation is much less widespread than continental sedimentation.
(D) Researchers are more often forcedto rely on extrapolation when dating a layer of marine sedimentation than when dating a layer of continental sedimentation.
(E) Marine sedimentation is much more continuous than is continental sedimentation.
该死，DE 这两个， 注意看同义改写。D
我怎么竟敢丢丢西瓜的事情，我就只看 to rely ...,和原本比对了，没有注意什么forced


2. Which of the following statements best describes the organization of the passage as a whole?
(A) The author describes a method for determining past climatic conditions and then offers specific examples of situations in which it has been used.
(B) The author discusses the method of dating marine and continental sequences and then explains how dating is more difficult with lake levels than with pollen profiles.
(C) The author describes the common requirements of methods for determining past climatic conditions and then discusses examples of such methods.
(D) The author describes various ways of choosing a material for determining past climatic conditions and then discusses how two such methods have yielded contradictory data.
(E) The author describes how methods for determining past climatic conditions were first developed and then describes two of the earliest known methods.


3. It can be inferred from the passage that paleoclimatologists have concluded which of the following on the basis of their study of snow-line elevations in the southwestern United States?
(A) There is usually more precipitation during an ice age because of increased amounts of evaporation.
(B) There was less precipitation during the last ice age than there is today.
(C) Lake levels in the semiarid southwestern United States were lower during the last ice age than they are today.
(D) During the last ice age, cooler weather led to lower lake levels than paleoclimatologists had previously assumed.
(E) The high lake levels during the last ice age may have been a result of less evaporation rather than more precipitation.
细节题
总之，这里没有好好看文章

4. Which of the following would be the most likely topic for a paragraph that logically continues the passage?
(A) The kinds of plants normally found in arid regions
(B) The effect of variation in lake levels on pollen distribution
(C) The material best suited to preserving signals of climatic changes
(D) Other criteria invoked by paleoclimatologists when choosing a method to determine past climatic conditions
(E) A third method for investigating past climatic conditions
说了两个不好用的方法了，肯定要说一个好用的方法了。

5. The author discusses lake levels in the southwestern United States in order to
(A) illustrate the mechanics of the relationship between lake level, evaporation, and precipitation
(B) provide an example of the uncertainty involved in interpreting lake levels
(C) prove that there are not enough ancient lakes with which to make accurate correlations
(D) explain the effects of increased rates of evaporation on levels of precipitation
(E) suggest that snow-line elevations are invariably more accurate than lake levels in determining rates of precipitation at various points in the past
在measure the water level 这个方法第二点不足中有。

6. It can be inferred from the passage that an environmental signal found in geological material would not be useful to paleoclimatologists if it
(A) had to be interpreted by modern chemical means
(B) reflected a change in climate rather than a long-term climatic condition
(C) was incorporated into a material as the material was forming
(D) also reflected subsequent environmental changes
(E) was contained in a continental rather than a marine sequence
BD 中， 我选B。 对于D， 我觉得material 可以反映后续的环境变化，但是这些环境变化， 不能和在一起，不能分开，这样就不知道某个时点是什么环境。
基于，对the third crtieria 的理解，反正我错了。


7. According to the passage, the material used to determine past climatic conditions must be widespread for which of the following reasons?
I. Paleoclimatologists need to make comparisons between periods of geological history.
II. Paleoclimatologists need to compare materials that have supported a wide variety of vegetation.
III. Paleoclimatologists need to make comparisons with data collected in other regions.
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) I and III only
(E) II and III only
时间，空间了。

8. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the study of past climates in arid and semiarid regions?
(A) It is sometimes more difficult to determine past climatic conditions in arid and semiarid regions than in temperate regions.
(B) Although in the past more research has been done on temperate regions, paleoclimatologists have recently turned their attention to arid and semiarid regions.
(C) Although more information about past climates can be gathered in arid and semiarid than in temperate regions, dating this information is more difficult.
(D) It is difficult to study the climatic history of arid and semiarid regions because their climates have tended to vary more than those of temperate regions.
(E) The study of past climates in arid and semiarid regions has been neglected because temperate regions support a greater variety of plant and animal life.
看看那两个不好的方法，都是在干旱，半干旱地方没辙的。

In choosing a method for determining climatic conditions that existed in the past, paleoclimatologists invoke four principal criteria. First, the material—rocks, lakes, vegetation, etc.—on which the method relies must be widespread enough to provide plenty of information, since analysis of material that is rarely encountered will not permit correlation with other regions or with other periods of geological history. Second, in the process of formation, the material must have received an environmental signal that reflects a change in climate and that can be deciphered by modern physical or chemical means. Third, at least some of the material must have retained the signal unaffected by subsequent changes in the environment. Fourth, it must be possible to determine the time at which the inferred climatic conditions held. This last criterion is more easily met in dating marine sediments, because dating of only a small number of layers in a marine sequence allows the age of other layers to be estimated fairly reliably by extrapolation and interpolation. By contrast, because sedimentation is much less continuous in continental regions, estimating the age of a continental bed from the known ages of beds above and below is more risky.

One very old method used in the investigation of past climatic conditions involves the measurement of water levels in ancient lakes. In temperate regions, there are enough lakes for correlations between them to give us a reliable picture. In arid and semiarid regions, on the other hand, the small number of lakes and the great distances between them reduce the possibilities for correlation. Moreover, since lake levels are controlled by rates of evaporation as well as by precipitation, the interpretation of such levels is ambiguous. For instance, the fact that lake levels in the semiarid southwestern United States appear to have been higher during the last ice age than they are now was at one time attributed to increased precipitation. On the basis of snow-line elevations, however, it has been concluded that the climate then was not necessarily wetter than it is now, but rather that both summers and winters were cooler, resulting in reduced evaporation.

Another problematic method is to reconstruct former climates on the basis of pollen profiles. The type of vegetation in a specific region is determined by identifying and counting the various pollen grains found there. Although the relationship between vegetation and climate is not as direct as the relationship between climate and lake levels, the method often works well in the temperate zones. In arid and semiarid regions in which there is not much vegetation, however, small changes in one or a few plant types can change the picture dramatically, making accurate correlations between neighboring areas difficult to obtain.

1.Which of the following statements about the difference between marine and continental sedimentation is supported by information in the passage?

(A) Data provided by dating marine sedimentation is more consistent with researchers’ findings in other disciplines than is data provided by dating continental sedimentation.

(B) It is easier to estimate the age of a layer in a sequence of continental sedimentation than it is to estimate the age of a layer in a sequence of marine sedimentation.

(C) Marine sedimentation is much less widespread than continental sedimentation.

(D) Researchers are more often forced to rely on extrapolation when dating a layer of marine sedimentation than when dating a layer of continental sedimentation.（E）

(E) Marine sedimentation is much more continuous than is continental sedimentation.

2.Which of the following statements best describes the organization of the passage as a whole?

(A) The author describes a method for determining past climatic conditions and then offers specific examples of situations in which it has been used.

(B) The author discusses the method of dating marine and continental sequences and then explains how dating is more difficult with lake levels than with pollen profiles.

(C) The author describes the common requirements of methods for determining past climatic conditions and then discusses examples of such methods.

(D) The author describes various ways of choosing a material for determining past climatic conditions and then discusses how two such methods have yielded contradictory data.（C）

(E) The author describes how methods for determining past climatic conditions were first developed and then describes two of the earliest known methods.

3.It can be inferred from the passage that paleoclimatologists have concluded which of the following on the basis of their study of snow-line elevations in the southwestern United States?

(A) There is usually more precipitation during an ice age because of increased amounts of evaporation.

(B) There was less precipitation during the last ice age than there is today.

(C) Lake levels in the semiarid southwestern United States were lower during the last ice age than they are today.

(D) During the last ice age, cooler weather led to lower lake levels than paleoclimatologists had previously assumed.（E）

(E) The high lake levels during the last ice age may have been a result of less evaporation rather than more precipitation.

4.Which of the following would be the most likely topic for a paragraph that logically continues the passage?

(A) The kinds of plants normally found in arid regions

(B) The effect of variation in lake levels on pollen distribution

(C) The material best suited to preserving signals of climatic changes

(D) Other criteria invoked by paleoclimatologists when choosing a method to determine past climatic conditions（E）

(E) A third method for investigating past climatic conditions

5.The author discusses lake levels in the southwestern United States in order to

(A) illustrate the mechanics of the relationship between lake level, evaporation, and precipitation

(B) provide an example of the uncertainty involved in interpreting lake levels

(C) prove that there are not enough ancient lakes with which to make accurate correlations

(D) explain the effects of increased rates of evaporation on levels of precipitation（B）

(E) suggest that snow-line elevations are invariably more accurate than lake levels in determining rates of precipitation at various points in the past

6.It can be inferred from the passage that an environmental signal found in geological material would not be useful to paleoclimatologists if it

(A) had to be interpreted by modern chemical means

(B) reflected a change in climate rather than a long-term climatic condition

(C) was incorporated into a material as the material was forming

(D) also reflected subsequent environmental changes（D）

(E) was contained in a continental rather than a marine sequence

7.According to the passage, the material used to determine past climatic conditions must be widespread for which of the following reasons?

I.Paleoclimatologists need to make comparisons between periods of geological history.

II.Paleoclimatologists need to compare materials that have supported a wide variety of vegetation.

III.Paleoclimatologists need to make comparisons with data collected in other regions.

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) I and III only（D）

(E) II and III only

8.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the study of past climates in arid and semiarid regions?

(A) It is sometimes more difficult to determine past climatic conditions in arid and semiarid regions than in temperate regions.

(B) Although in the past more research has been done on temperate regions, paleoclimatologists have recently turned their attention to arid and semiarid regions.

(C) Although more information about past climates can be gathered in arid and semiarid than in temperate regions, dating this information is more difficult.

(D) It is difficult to study the climatic history of arid and semiarid regions because their climates have tended to vary more than those of temperate regions.（A）

(E) The study of past climates in arid and semiarid regions has been neglected because temperate regions support a greater variety of plant and animal life.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 14:04
Since the late 1970’s, in the face of a severe loss of market share in dozens of industries, manufacturers in the United States have been trying to improve productivity—and therefore enhance their international competitiveness—through cost-cutting programs. (Cost-cutting here is defined as raising labor output while holding the amount of labor constant.) However, from 1978 through 1982, productivity—the value of goods manufactured divided by the amount of labor input—did not improve; and while the results were better in the business upturn of the three years following, they ran 25 percent lower than productivity improvements during earlier, post-1945 upturns. At the same time, it became clear that the harder manufactures worked to implement cost-cutting, the more they lost their competitive edge.
With this paradox in mind, I recently visited 25 companies; it became clear to me that the cost-cutting approach to increasing productivity is fundamentally flawed. Manufacturing regularly observes a “40, 40, 20” rule. Roughly 40 percent of any manufacturing-based competitive advantage derives from long-term changes in manufacturing structure (decisions about the number, size, location, and capacity of facilities) and in approaches to materials. Another 40 percent comes from major changes in equipment and process technology. The final 20 percent rests on implementing conventional cost-cutting. This rule does not imply that cost-cutting should not be tried. The well-known tools of this approach—including simplifying jobs and retraining employees to work smarter, not harder—do produce results. But the tools quickly reach the limits of what they can contribute.
Another problem is that the cost-cutting approach hinders innovation and discourages creative people. As Abernathy’s study of automobile manufacturers has shown, an industry can easily become prisoner of its own investments in cost-cutting techniques, reducing its ability to develop new products. And managers under pressure to maximize cost-cutting will resist innovation because they know that more fundamental changes in processes or systems will wreak havoc with the results on which they are measured. Production managers have always seen their job as one of minimizing costs and maximizing output. This dimension of performance has until recently sufficed as a basis of evaluation, but it has created a penny-pinching, mechanistic culture in most factories that has kept away creative managers.
Every company I know that has freed itself from the paradox has done so, in part, by developing and implementing a manufacturing strategy. Such a strategy focuses on the manufacturing structure and on equipment and process technology. In one company a manufacturing strategy that allowed different areas of the factory to specialize in different markets replaced the conventional cost-cutting approach; within three years the company regained its competitive advantage. Together with such strategies, successful companies are also encouraging managers to focus on a wider set of objectives besides cutting costs. There is hope for manufacturing, but it clearly rests on a different way of managing.

这篇文章讲得是 the relation between productivity and cost cutting, 可能这两个根本没有关系。没有关系也是一种关系。

第一段，实施 cost cutting 以来，出现了两个问题；1.productiivty 不高；2.越实施，越没有竞争力。
第二段，作者认为cost cutting 有可以提高生产率，但是这个方法很快就会达到上限。
第三段，cost cutting 阻止创新
第四段  作者观察，有公司通过战略的变换regain the advantage.

错误 3

1. The author of the passage is primarily concerned with
(A) summarizing a thesis
(B) recommending a different approach
(C) comparing points of view
(D) making a series of predictions
(E) describing a number of paradoxes
我觉得从文章最后一句话看， 作者还是想解决美国制造业怎么获得竞争力这个问题。


2. It can be inferred from the passage that the manufacturers mentioned in line 2 expected that the measures they implemented would
(A) encourage innovation
(B) keep labor output constant
(C) increase their competitive advantage
(D) permit business upturns to be more easily predicted
(E) cause managers to focus on a wider set of objectives
advantage= productivity.

3. The primary function of the first paragraph of the passage is to
(A) outline in brief the author’s argument
(B) anticipate challenges to the prescriptions that follow
(C) clarify some disputed definitions of economic terms
(D) summarize a number of long-accepted explanations
(E) present a historical context for the author’s observations
第一段就是提出问题 A 我想我读错了，A 的意思是简单解释作者argument，我不知道什么argument. 但是，第一段没有一点作者自己的观点，所以A是错的。正确选项让我知道老外是怎么理解context的。
E


4. The author refers to Abernathy’s study (line 36) most probably in order to
(A) qualify an observation about one rule governing manufacturing
(B) address possible objections to a recommendation about improving manufacturing competitiveness
(C) support an earlier assertion about one method of increasing productivity
(D) suggest the centrality in the United States economy of a particular manufacturing industry
(E) given an example of research that has questioned the wisdom of revising a manufacturing strategy
这次我是答案不好看懂，AC之间

5. The author’s attitude toward the culture in most factories is best described as
(A) cautious
(B) critical
(C) disinterested
(D) respectful
(E) adulatory


6. In the passage, the author includes all of the following EXCEPT
(A) personal observation
(B) a business principle
(C) a definition of productivity
(D) an example of a successful company
(E) an illustration of a process technology


7. The author suggests that implementing conventional cost-cutting as a way of increasing manufacturing competitiveness is a strategy that is
(A) flawed and ruinous
(B) shortsighted and difficult to sustain
(C) popular and easily accomplished
(D) useful but inadequate
(E) misunderstood but promising
在第二段，有这个描述。

Since the late 1970’s, in the face of a severe loss of market share (market share: 市场份额, 市场占有率) in dozens of industries, manufacturers in the United States have been trying to improve productivity—and therefore enhance their international competitiveness—through cost-cutting programs. (Cost-cutting here is defined as raising labor output while holding the amount of labor constant.) However, from 1978 through 1982, productivity—the value of goods manufactured divided by the amount of labor input—did not improve; and while the results were better in the business upturn of the three years following, they ran 25 percent lower than productivity improvements during earlier, post-1945 upturns. At the same time, it became clear that the harder manufactures worked to implement cost-cutting, the more they lost their competitive edge.

With this paradox in mind, I recently visited 25 companies; it became clear to me that the cost-cutting approach to increasing productivity is fundamentally flawed. Manufacturing regularly observes a “40, 40, 20” rule. Roughly 40 percent of any manufacturing-based competitive advantage derives from long-term changes in manufacturing structure (decisions about the number, size, location, and capacity of facilities) and in approaches to materials. Another 40 percent comes from major changes in equipment and process technology. The final 20 percent rests on implementing conventional cost-cutting. This rule does not imply that cost-cutting should not be tried. The well-known tools of this approach—including simplifying jobs and retraining employees to work smarter, not harder—do produce results. But the tools quickly reach the limits of what they can contribute.

Another problem is that the cost-cutting approach hinders innovation and discourages creative people. As Abernathy’s study of automobile manufacturers has shown, an industry can easily become prisoner of its own investments in cost-cutting techniques, reducing its ability to develop new products. And managers under pressure to maximize cost-cutting will resist innovation because they know that more fundamental changes in processes or systems will wreak (BRING ABOUT, CAUSE “wreak havoc”) havoc with the results on which they are measured. Production managers have always seen their job as one of minimizing costs and maximizing output. This dimension of performance has until recently sufficed as a basis of evaluation, but it has created a penny-pinching (FRUGALITY, PARSIMONY), mechanistic culture in most factories that has kept away creative managers.

Every company I know that has freed itself from the paradox has done so, in part, by developing and implementing a manufacturing strategy. Such a strategy focuses on the manufacturing structure and on equipment and process technology. In one company a manufacturing strategy that allowed different areas of the factory to specialize in different markets replaced the conventional cost-cutting approach; within three years the company regained its competitive advantage. Together with such strategies, successful companies are also encouraging managers to focus on a wider set of objectives besides cutting costs. There is hope for manufacturing, but it clearly rests on a different way of managing.

1.The author of the passage is primarily concerned with

(A) summarizing a thesis

(B) recommending a different approach

(C) comparing points of view

(D) making a series of predictions（B）

(E) describing a number of paradoxes

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the manufacturers mentioned in line 2 expected that the measures they implemented would

(A) encourage innovation

(B) keep labor output constant

(C) increase their competitive advantage

(D) permit business upturns to be more easily predicted（C）

(E) cause managers to focus on a wider set of objectives

3.The primary function of the first paragraph of the passage is to

(A) outline in brief the author’s argument

(B) anticipate challenges to the prescriptions that follow

(C) clarify some disputed definitions of economic terms

(D) summarize a number of long-accepted explanations（E）

(E) present a historical context for the author’s observations

4.The author refers to Abernathy’s study (line 36) most probably in order to

(A) qualify an observation about one rule governing manufacturing

(B) address possible objections to a recommendation about improving manufacturing competitiveness

(C) support an earlier assertion about one method of increasing productivity

(D) suggest the centrality in the United States economy of a particular manufacturing industry（C）

(E) given an example of research that has questioned the wisdom of revising a manufacturing strategy

5.The author’s attitude toward the culture in most factories is best described as

(A) cautious

(B) critical

(C) disinterested

(D) respectful（B）

(E) adulatory

6.In the passage, the author includes all of the following EXCEPT

(A) personal observation

(B) a business principle

(C) a definition of productivity

(D) an example of a successful company（E）

(E) an illustration of a process technology

7.The author suggests that implementing conventional cost-cutting as a way of increasing manufacturing competitiveness is a strategy that is

(A) flawed and ruinous

(B) shortsighted and difficult to sustain

(C) popular and easily accomplished

(D) useful but inadequate（D）

(E) misunderstood but promising

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 14:55
The settlement of the United States has occupied traditional historians since 1893 when Frederick Jackson Turner developed his Frontier Thesis, a thesis that explained American development in terms of westward expansion. From the perspective of women’s history, Turner’s exclusively masculine assumptions constitute a major drawback: his defenders and critics alike have reconstructed men’s, not women’s, lives on the frontier. However, precisely because of this masculine orientation, revising the Frontier Thesis by focusing on women’s experience introduces new themes into women’s history—woman as lawmaker and entrepreneur—and, consequently, new interpretations of women’s relationship to capital, labor, and statute.
Turner claimed that the frontier produced the individualism that is the hallmark of American culture, and that this individualism in turn promoted democratic institutions and economic equality. He argued for the frontier as an agent of social change. Most novelists and historians writing in the early to midtwentieth century who considered women in the West, when they considered women at all, fell under Turner’s spell. In their works these authors tended to glorify women’s contributions to frontier life. Western women, in Turnerian tradition, were a fiercely independent, capable, and durable lot, free from the constraints binding their eastern sisters. This interpretation implied that the West provided a congenial environment where women could aspire to their own goals, free from constrictive stereotypes and sexist attitudes. In Turnerian terminology, the frontier had furnished “a gate of escape from the bondage of the past.”
By the middle of the twentieth century, the Frontier Thesis fell into disfavor among historians. Later, Reactionist writers took the view that frontier women were lonely, displaced persons in a hostile milieu that intensified the worst aspects of gender relations. The renaissance of the feminist movement during the 1970’s led to the Stasist school, which sidestepped the good bad dichotomy and argued that frontier women lived lives similar to the live of women in the East. In one now-standard text, Faragher demonstrated the persistence of the “cult of true womanhood” and the illusionaryquality of change on the westward journey. Recently the Stasist position has been revised but not entirely discounted by new research.

The settlement of the United States has occupied traditional historians 我对这样的话怎么这么难理解呢？这话是不是说，traditional historians 主要关注的领域就是the settlement of the united states.
总之，老外总是很喜欢研究migeration, 中国人太爱扎根了。
exclusive 到底什么意思，仅仅，只有的意思。

关键词，西进历史进程中的女性

第一段，FKT 纯男性视角解读frontier， 促成了从女性角度解释这个西部进程
第二段， 很多人从女性角度解释一个历史进程的时候，也没有逃脱Tuner的一些基本观点。
第三段，其他三种对西进历史进程的女性的解释。

错误 6

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) provide a framework within which the history of women in nineteenth-century America can be organized
(B) discuss divergent interpretations of women’s experience on the western frontier
(C) introduce a new hypothesis about women’s experience in nineteenth-century America
(D) advocate an empirical approach to women’s experience on the western frontier
(E) resolve ambiguities in several theories about women’s experience on the western frontier
主旨题

2. Which of the following can be inferred about the novelists and historians mentioned in lines 19-20?
(A) They misunderstood the powerful influence of constrictive stereotypes on women in the East.
(B) They assumed that the frontier had offered more opportunities to women than had the East.
(C) They included accurate information about women’s experiences on the frontier.
(D) They underestimated the endurance and fortitude of frontier women.
(E) They agreed with some of Turner’s assumptions about frontier women, but disagreed with other assumptions that he made.


3. Which of the following, if true, would provide additional evidence for the Stasists’ argument as it is described in the passage?
(A) Frontier women relied on smaller support groups of relatives and friends in the West than they had in the East.
(B) The urban frontier in the West offered more occupational opportunity than the agricultural frontier offered.
(C) Women participated more fully in the economic decisions of the family group in the West than they had in the East.
(D) Western women received financial compensation for labor that was comparable to what women received in the East.
(E) Western women did not have an effect on divorce laws, but lawmakers in the West were more responsive to women’s concerns than lawmakers in the East were.
找 说西部和东部女人一样的言论

4. According to the passage, Turner makes which of the following connections in his Frontier Thesis?
I. A connection between American individualism and economic equality
II. A connection between geographical expansion and social change
III. A connection between social change and financial prosperity
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) III only
(D) I and II only
(E) I, II and III
第二段，前面表黑的。

5. It can be inferred that which of the following statements is consistent with the Reactionist position as it is described in the passage?
(A) Continuity, not change, marked women’s lives as they moved from East to West.
(B) Women’s experience on the North American frontier has not received enough attention from modern historians.
(C) Despite its rigors, the frontier offered women opportunities that had not been available in the East.
(D) Gender relations were more difficult for women in the West than they were in the East.
(E) Women on the North American frontier adopted new roles while at the same time reaffirming traditional roles.
西部女人更差

6. Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?
(A) A current interpretation of a phenomenon is described and then ways in which it was developed are discussed.
(B) Three theories are presented and then a new hypothesis that discounts those theories is described.
(C) An important theory and its effects are discussed and then ways in which it has been revised are described.
(D) A controversial theory is discussed and then viewpoints both for and against it are described.
(E) A phenomenon is described and then theories concerning its correctness are discussed.
这个文是时间顺序说的
这个还真难找，看数字吧
BC 我只能说 最后一个解释没有entirely discount S  school.
这个选C  我还是表示对文章结构看不懂。

7. Which of the following is true of the Stasist School as it is described in the passage?
(A) It provides new interpretations of women’s relationship to work and the law.
(B) It resolves some of the ambiguities inherent in Turnerian and Reactionist thought.
(C) It has recently been discounted by new research gathered on women’s experience.
(D) It avoids extreme positions taken by other writers on women’s history.
(E) It was the first school of thought to suggest substantial revisions to the Frontier Thesis.


The settlement of the United States has occupied (occupy: to engage the attention or energies of)traditional historians since 1893 when Frederick Jackson Turner developed his Frontier Thesis, a thesis that explained American development in terms of westward expansion. From the perspective of women’s history, Turner’s exclusively masculine assumptions constitute a major drawback: his defenders and critics alike have reconstructed men’s, not women’s, lives on the frontier. However, precisely because of this masculine orientation, revising the Frontier Thesis by focusing on women’s experience introduces new themes into women’s history—woman as lawmaker and entrepreneur—and, consequently, new interpretations of women’s relationship to capital, labor, and statute.

Turner claimed that the frontier produced the individualism that is the hallmark of American culture, and that this individualism in turn promoted democratic institutions and economic equality. He argued for the frontier as an agent of social change. Most novelists and historians writing in the early to midtwentieth century who considered women in the West, when they considered women at all, fell under Turner’s spell (a strong compelling influence or attraction). In their works these authors tended to glorify women’s contributions to frontier life. Western women, in Turnerian tradition, were a fiercely independent, capable, and durable lot (a number of associated persons: SET), free from (free from: adv.没有...的) the constraints binding their eastern sisters. This interpretation implied that the West provided a congenial environment where women could aspire to their own goals, free from constrictive stereotypes and sexist (sexist: n.男性至上主义者) attitudes. In Turnerian terminology, the frontier had furnished “a gate of escape from the bondage of the past.”

By the middle of the twentieth century, the Frontier Thesisfell into (fall into: v.落入, 陷于(混乱,错误等)) disfavor among historians. Later, Reactionist writers took the view that frontier women were lonely, displaced persons in a hostile milieu that intensified the worst aspects of gender relations. The renaissance of the feminist movement during the 1970’s led to the Stasist school, which sidestepped the good bad dichotomy and argued that frontier women lived lives similar to the live of women in the East. In one now-standard text, Faragher demonstrated the persistence of the “cult of true womanhood” and the illusionary quality of change on the westward journey. Recently the Stasist position has been revised but not entirely discounted by new research.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) provide a framework within which the history of women in nineteenth-century America can be organized

(B) discuss divergent interpretations of women’s experience on the western frontier

(C) introduce a new hypothesis about women’s experience in nineteenth-century America

(D) advocate an empirical approach to women’s experience on the western frontier（B）

(E) resolve ambiguities in several theories about women’s experience on the western frontier

2.Which of the following can be inferred about the novelists and historians mentioned in lines 19-20?

(A) They misunderstood the powerful influence of constrictive stereotypes on women in the East.

(B) They assumed that the frontier had offered more opportunities to women than had the East.

(C) They included accurate information about women’s experiences on the frontier.

(D) They underestimated the endurance and fortitude of frontier women.（B）

(E) They agreed with some of Turner’s assumptions about frontier women, but disagreed with other assumptions that he made.

3.Which of the following, if true, would provide additional evidence for the Stasists’ argument as it is described in the passage?

(A) Frontier women relied on smaller support groups of relatives and friends in the West than they had in the East.

(B) The urban frontier in the West offered more occupational opportunity than the agricultural frontier offered.

(C) Women participated more fully in the economic decisions of the family group in the West than they had in the East.

(D) Western women received financial compensation for labor that was comparable to what women received in the East.（D）

(E) Western women did not have an effect on divorce laws, but lawmakers in the West were more responsive to women’s concerns than lawmakers in the East were.

4.According to the passage, Turner makes which of the following connections in his Frontier Thesis?

I.A connection between American individualism and economic equality

II.A connection between geographical expansion and social change

III.A connection between social change and financial prosperity

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) III only

(D) I and II only（D）

(E) I, II and III

5.It can be inferred that which of the following statements is consistent with the Reactionist position as it is described in the passage?

(A) Continuity, not change, marked women’s lives as they moved from East to West.

(B) Women’s experience on the North American frontier has not received enough attention from modern historians.

(C) Despite its rigors, the frontier offered women opportunities that had not been available in the East.

(D) Gender relations were more difficult for women in the West than they were in the East.（D）

(E) Women on the North American frontier adopted new roles while at the same time reaffirming traditional roles.

6.Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?

(A) A current interpretation of a phenomenon is described and then ways in which it was developed are discussed.

(B) Three theories are presented and then a new hypothesis that discounts those theories is described.

(C) An important theory and its effects are discussed and then ways in which it has been revised are described.

(D) A controversial theory is discussed and then viewpoints both for and against it are described.（C）

(E) A phenomenon is described and then theories concerning its correctness are discussed.

7.Which of the following is true of the Stasist School as it is described in the passage?

(A) It provides new interpretations of women’s relationship to work and the law.

(B) It resolves some of the ambiguities inherent in Turnerian and Reactionist thought.

(C) It has recently been discounted by new research gathered on women’s experience.

(D) It avoids extreme positions taken by other writers on women’s history.（D）

(E) It was the first school of thought to suggest substantial revisions to the Frontier Thesis.



The settlement of the United States has occupied (occupy: to engage the attention or energies of)traditional historians since 1893 when Frederick Jackson Turner developed his Frontier Thesis, a thesis that explained American development in terms of westward expansion. From the perspective of women’s history, Turner’s exclusively masculine assumptions constitute a major drawback: his defenders and critics alike have reconstructed men’s, not women’s, lives on the frontier. However, precisely because of this masculine orientation, revising the Frontier Thesis by focusing on women’s experience introduces new themes into women’s history—woman as lawmaker and entrepreneur—and, consequently, new interpretations of women’s relationship to capital, labor, and statute.

Turner claimed that the frontier produced the individualism that is the hallmark of American culture, and that this individualism in turn promoted democratic institutions and economic equality. He argued for the frontier as an agent of social change. Most novelists and historians writing in the early to midtwentieth century who considered women in the West, when they considered women at all, fell under Turner’s spell (a strong compelling influence or attraction). In their works these authors tended to glorify women’s contributions to frontier life. Western women, in Turnerian tradition, were a fiercely independent, capable, and durable lot (a number of associated persons: SET), free from (free from: adv.没有...的) the constraints binding their eastern sisters. This interpretation implied that the West provided a congenial environment where women could aspire to their own goals, free from constrictive stereotypes and sexist (sexist: n.男性至上主义者) attitudes. In Turnerian terminology, the frontier had furnished “a gate of escape from the bondage of the past.”

By the middle of the twentieth century, the Frontier Thesisfell into (fall into: v.落入, 陷于(混乱,错误等)) disfavor among historians. Later, Reactionist writers took the view that frontier women were lonely, displaced persons in a hostile milieu that intensified the worst aspects of gender relations. The renaissance of the feminist movement during the 1970’s led to the Stasist school, which sidestepped the good bad dichotomy and argued that frontier women lived lives similar to the live of women in the East. In one now-standard text, Faragher demonstrated the persistence of the “cult of true womanhood” and the illusionary quality of change on the westward journey. Recently the Stasist position has been revised but not entirely discounted by new research.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) provide a framework within which the history of women in nineteenth-century America can be organized

(B) discuss divergent interpretations of women’s experience on the western frontier

(C) introduce a new hypothesis about women’s experience in nineteenth-century America

(D) advocate an empirical approach to women’s experience on the western frontier（B）

(E) resolve ambiguities in several theories about women’s experience on the western frontier

2.Which of the following can be inferred about the novelists and historians mentioned in lines 19-20?

(A) They misunderstood the powerful influence of constrictive stereotypes on women in the East.

(B) They assumed that the frontier had offered more opportunities to women than had the East.

(C) They included accurate information about women’s experiences on the frontier.

(D) They underestimated the endurance and fortitude of frontier women.（B）

(E) They agreed with some of Turner’s assumptions about frontier women, but disagreed with other assumptions that he made.

3.Which of the following, if true, would provide additional evidence for the Stasists’ argument as it is described in the passage?

(A) Frontier women relied on smaller support groups of relatives and friends in the West than they had in the East.

(B) The urban frontier in the West offered more occupational opportunity than the agricultural frontier offered.

(C) Women participated more fully in the economic decisions of the family group in the West than they had in the East.

(D) Western women received financial compensation for labor that was comparable to what women received in the East.（D）

(E) Western women did not have an effect on divorce laws, but lawmakers in the West were more responsive to women’s concerns than lawmakers in the East were.

4.According to the passage, Turner makes which of the following connections in his Frontier Thesis?

I.A connection between American individualism and economic equality

II.A connection between geographical expansion and social change

III.A connection between social change and financial prosperity

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) III only

(D) I and II only（D）

(E) I, II and III

5.It can be inferred that which of the following statements is consistent with the Reactionist position as it is described in the passage?

(A) Continuity, not change, marked women’s lives as they moved from East to West.

(B) Women’s experience on the North American frontier has not received enough attention from modern historians.

(C) Despite its rigors, the frontier offered women opportunities that had not been available in the East.

(D) Gender relations were more difficult for women in the West than they were in the East.（D）

(E) Women on the North American frontier adopted new roles while at the same time reaffirming traditional roles.

6.Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?

(A) A current interpretation of a phenomenon is described and then ways in which it was developed are discussed.

(B) Three theories are presented and then a new hypothesis that discounts those theories is described.

(C) An important theory and its effects are discussed and then ways in which it has been revised are described.

(D) A controversial theory is discussed and then viewpoints both for and against it are described.（C）

(E) A phenomenon is described and then theories concerning its correctness are discussed.

7.Which of the following is true of the Stasist School as it is described in the passage?

(A) It provides new interpretations of women’s relationship to work and the law.

(B) It resolves some of the ambiguities inherent in Turnerian and Reactionist thought.

(C) It has recently been discounted by new research gathered on women’s experience.

(D) It avoids extreme positions taken by other writers on women’s history.（D）

(E) It was the first school of thought to suggest substantial revisions to the Frontier Thesis.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 15:19
Studies of the Weddell seal in the laboratory have described the physiological mechanisms that allow the seal to cope with the extreme oxygen deprivation that occurs during its longest dives, which can extend 500 meters below the ocean’s surface and last for over 70 minutes. Recent field studies, however, suggest that during more typical dives in the wild, this seal’s physiological behavior is different.
In the laboratory, when the seal dives below the surface of the water and stops breathing, its heart beats more slowly, requiring less oxygen, and its arteries become constricted, ensuring that the seal’s blood remains concentrated near those organs most crucial to its ability to navigate underwater. The seal essentially shuts off the flow of blood to other organs, which either stop functioning until the seal surfaces or switch to an anaerobic (oxygen-independent) metabolism. The latter results in the production of large amounts of lactic acid which can adversely affect the pH of the seal’s blood, but since the anaerobic metabolism occurs only in those tissues which have been isolated from the seal’s blood supply, the lactic acid is released into the seal’s blood only after the seal surfaces, when the lungs, liver, and other organs quickly clear the acid from the seal’s bloodstream.
Recent field studies, however, reveal that on dives in the wild, the seal usually heads directly for its prey and returns to the surface in less than twenty minutes. The absence of high levels of lactic acid in the seal’s blood after such dives suggests that during them, the seal’s organs do not resort to the anaerobic metabolism observed in the laboratory, but are supplied with oxygen from the blood. The seal’s longer excursions underwater, during which it appears to be either exploring distant routes or evading a predator, do evoke the diving response seen in the laboratory. But why do the seal’s laboratory dives always evoke this response, regardless of their length or depth? Some biologists speculate that because in laboratory dives the seal is forcibly submerged, it does not know how long it will remain underwater and so prepares for the worst.

实验室的潜水和野外潜水不一样的。实验室潜水，不住要器官会在厌氧下工作，产生氨基酸。但是在野外潜水的时候，seal扑食的时候，器官没有厌氧。但是在长期潜水的时候就会有。生物学家解释说，这是因为seal觉得长期潜水情况很严峻的时候，器官才会跳到厌氧模式。

错误 6

1. The passage provides information to support which of the following generalizations?
(A) Observations of animals’ physiological behavior in the wild are not reliable unless verified by laboratory studies.
(B) It is generally less difficult to observe the physiological behavior of an animal in the wild than in the laboratory.
(C) The level of lactic acid in an animal’s blood is likely to be higher when it is searching for prey than when it is evading predators.
(D) The level of lactic acid in an animal’s blood is likely to be lowest during those periods in which it experiences oxygen deprivation.
(E) The physiological behavior of animals in a laboratory setting is not always consistent with their physiological behavior in the wild.


2. It can be inferred from the passage that by describing the Weddell seal as preparing “for the worst” (line 41), biologists mean that it
(A) prepares to remain underwater for no longer than twenty minutes
(B) exhibits physiological behavior similar to that which characterizes dives in which it heads directly for its prey
(C) exhibits physiological behavior similar to that which characterizes its longest dives in the wild
(D) begins to exhibit predatory behavior
(E) clears the lactic acid from its blood before attempting to dive
我发现有些差不多的句子中有一个一定是答案


3. The passage suggests that during laboratory dives, the pH of the Weddell seal’s blood is not adversely affected by the production of lactic acid because
(A) only those organs that are essential to the seal’s ability to navigate underwater revert to an anaerobic mechanism
(B) the seal typically reverts to an anaerobic metabolism only at the very end of the dive
(C) organs that revert to an anaerobic metabolism are temporarily isolated from the seal’s bloodstream
(D) oxygen continues to be supplied to organs that clear lactic acid from the seal’s bloodstream
(E) the seal remains submerged for only short periods of time


4. Which of the following best summarizes the main point of the passage?
(A) Recent field studies have indicated that descriptions of the physiological behavior of the Weddell seal during laboratory dives are not applicable to its most typical dives in the wild.
(B) The Weddell seal has developed a number of unique mechanisms that enable it to remain submerged at depths of up to 500 meters for up to 70 minutes.
(C) The results of recent field studies have made it necessary for biologists to revise previous perceptions of how the Weddell seal behaves physiologically during its longest dives in the wild.
(D) Biologists speculate that laboratory studies of the physiological behavior of seals during dives lasting more than twenty minutes would be more accurate if the seals were not forcibly submerged.
(E) How the Weddell seal responds to oxygen deprivation during its longest dives appears to depend on whether the seal is searching for prey or avoiding predators during such dives.


5. According to the author, which of the following is true of the laboratory studies mentioned in line 1?
(A) They fail to explain how the seal is able to tolerate the increased production of lactic acid by organs that revert to an anaerobic metabolism during its longest dives in the wild.
(B) They present an oversimplified account of mechanisms that the Weddell seal relies on during its longest dives in the wild.
(C) They provide evidence that undermines the view that the Weddell seal relies on an anaerobic metabolism during its most typical dives in the wild.
(D) They are based on the assumption that Weddell seals rarely spend more than twenty minutes underwater on a typical dive in the wild.
(E) They provide an accurate account of the physiological behavior of Weddell seals during those dives in the wild in which they are either evading predators or exploring distant routes.


6. The author cites which of the following as characteristic of the Weddell seal’s physiological behavior during dives observed in the laboratory?
I. A decrease in the rate at which the seal’s heart beats
II. A constriction of the seal’s arteries
III. A decrease in the levels of lactic acid in the seal’s blood
IV. A temporary halt in the functioning of certain organs
(A) I and III only
(B) II and IV only
(C) II and III only
(D) I, II, and IV only
(E) I, III, and IV only
没有3， 血液没有lactic acide，又怎么减少呢
忘了1

7. The passage suggests that because Weddell seals are forcibly submerged during laboratory dives, they do which of the following?
(A) Exhibit the physiological responses that are characteristic of dives in the wild that last less than twenty minutes.
(B) Exhibit the physiological responses that are characteristic of the longer dives they undertake in the wild.
(C) Cope with oxygen deprivation less effectively than they do on typical dives in the wild.
(D) Produce smaller amounts of lactic acid than they do on typical dives in the wild.
(E) Navigate less effectively than they do on typical dives in the wild.

Studies of the Weddell seal in the laboratory have described the physiological mechanisms that allow the seal to cope with the extreme oxygen deprivation that occurs during its longest dives, which can extend 500 meters below the ocean’s surface and last for over 70 minutes. Recent field studies, however, suggest that during more typical dives in the wild, this seal’s physiological behavior is different.

In the laboratory, when the seal dives below the surface of the water and stops breathing, its heart beats more slowly, requiring less oxygen, and its arteries become constricted, ensuring that the seal’s blood remains concentrated near those organs most crucial to its ability to navigate underwater. The seal essentially shuts off the flow of blood to other organs, which either stop functioning until the seal surfaces or switch to an anaerobic (oxygen-independent) metabolism. The latter results in the production of large amounts of lactic acid (lactic acid: n.乳酸) which can adversely affect the pH of the seal’s blood, but since the anaerobic metabolism occurs only in those tissues which have been isolated from the seal’s blood supply, the lactic acid is released into the seal’s blood only after the seal surfaces, when the lungs, liver, and other organs quickly clear the acid from the seal’s bloodstream.

Recent field studies, however, reveal that on dives in the wild, the seal usually heads directly for its prey and returns to the surface in less than twenty minutes. The absence of high levels of lactic acid in the seal’s blood after such dives suggests that during them, the seal’s organs do not resort to the anaerobic metabolism observed in the laboratory, but are supplied with oxygen from the blood. The seal’s longer excursions underwater, during which it appears to be either exploring distant routes or evading a predator, do evoke the diving response seen in the laboratory. But why do the seal’s laboratory dives always evoke this response, regardless of their length or depth? Some biologists speculate that because in laboratory dives the seal is forcibly submerged, it does not know how long it will remain underwater and so prepares for the worst.

1.The passage provides information to support which of the following generalizations?

(A) Observations of animals’ physiological behavior in the wild are not reliable unless verified by laboratory studies.

(B) It is generally less difficult to observe the physiological behavior of an animal in the wild than in the laboratory.

(C) The level of lactic acid in an animal’s blood is likely to be higher when it is searching for prey than when it is evading predators.

(D) The level of lactic acid in an animal’s blood is likely to be lowest during those periods in which it experiences oxygen deprivation.（E）

(E) The physiological behavior of animals in a laboratory setting is not always consistent with their physiological behavior in the wild.

2.It can be inferred from the passage that by describing the Weddell seal as preparing “for the worst” (line 41), biologists mean that it

(A) prepares to remain underwater for no longer than twenty minutes

(B) exhibits physiological behavior similar to that which characterizes dives in which it heads directly for its prey

(C) exhibits physiological behavior similar to that which characterizes its longest dives in the wild

(D) begins to exhibit predatory behavior（C）

(E) clears the lactic acid from its blood before attempting to dive

3.The passage suggests that during laboratory dives, the pH of the Weddell seal’s blood is not adversely affected by the production of lactic acid because

(A) only those organs that are essential to the seal’s ability to navigate underwater revert to an anaerobic mechanism

(B) the seal typically reverts to an anaerobic metabolism only at the very end of the dive

(C) organs that revert to an anaerobic metabolism are temporarily isolated from the seal’s bloodstream

(D) oxygen continues to be supplied to organs that clear lactic acid from the seal’s bloodstream（C）

(E) the seal remains submerged for only short periods of time

4.Which of the following best summarizes the main point of the passage?

(A) Recent field studies have indicated that descriptions of the physiological behavior of the Weddell seal during laboratory dives are not applicable to its most typical dives in the wild.

(B) The Weddell seal has developed a number of unique mechanisms that enable it to remain submerged at depths of up to 500 meters for up to 70 minutes.

(C) The results of recent field studies have made it necessary for biologists to revise previous perceptions of how the Weddell seal behaves physiologically during its longest dives in the wild.

(D) Biologists speculate that laboratory studies of the physiological behavior of seals during dives lasting more than twenty minutes would be more accurate if the seals were not forcibly submerged.（A）

(E) How the Weddell seal responds to oxygen deprivation during its longest dives appears to depend on whether the seal is searching for prey or avoiding predators during such dives.

5.According to the author, which of the following is true of the laboratory studies mentioned in line 1?（此题狡猾！）

(A) They fail to explain how the seal is able to tolerate the increased production of lactic acid by organs that revert to an anaerobic metabolism during its longest dives in the wild.

(B) They present an oversimplified account of mechanisms that the Weddell seal relies on during its longest dives in the wild.

(C) They provide evidence that undermines the view that the Weddell seal relies on an anaerobic metabolism during its most typical dives in the wild.

(D) They are based on the assumption that Weddell seals rarely spend more than twenty minutes underwater on a typical dive in the wild.（E）

(E) They provide an accurate account of the physiological behavior of Weddell seals during those dives in the wild in which they are either evading predators or exploring distant routes.

6.The author cites which of the following as characteristic of the Weddell seal’s physiological behavior during dives observed in the laboratory?

I.A decrease in the rate at which the seal’s heart beats

II.A constriction of the seal’s arteries

III.A decrease in the levels of lactic acid in the seal’s blood

IV.A temporary halt in the functioning of certain organs

(A) I and III only

(B) II and IV only

(C) II and III only

(D) I, II, and IV only（D）

(E) I, III, and IV only

7.The passage suggests that because Weddell seals are forcibly submerged during laboratory dives, they do which of the following?

(A) Exhibit the physiological responses that are characteristic of dives in the wild that last less than twenty minutes.

(B) Exhibit the physiological responses that are characteristic of the longer dives they undertake in the wild.

(C) Cope with oxygen deprivation less effectively than they do on typical dives in the wild.

(D) Produce smaller amounts of lactic acid than they do on typical dives in the wild.（B）

(E) Navigate less effectively than they do on typical dives in the wild.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 15:50
Since the early 1970’s, historians have begun to devote serious attention to the working class in the United States. Yet while we now have studies of working-class communities and culture, we know remarkably little of worklessness. When historians have paid any attention at all to unemployment, they have focused on the Great Depression of the 1930’s. The narrowness of this perspective ignores the pervasive recessions and joblessness of the previous decades, as Alexander Keyssar shows in his recent book. Examining the period 1870-1920, Keyssar concentrates on Massachusetts, where the historical materials are particularly rich（险些理解成这里物质很丰富）, and the findings applicable to other industrial areas.
The unemployment rates that Keyssar calculates appear to be relatively modest, at least by Great Depression standards: during the worst years, in the 1870’s and 1890’s, unemployment was around 15 percent. Yet Keyssar rightly understands that a better way to measure the impact of unemployment is to calculate unemployment frequencies—measuring the percentage of workers who experience any unemployment in the course of a year. Given this perspective, joblessness looms much larger.
Keyssar also scrutinizes unemployment patterns according to skill level, ethnicity, race, age, class, and gender. He finds that rates of joblessness differed primarily according to class: those in middle-class and white-collar occupations were far less likely to be unemployed. Yet the impact of unemployment on a specific class was not always the same. Even when dependent on the same trade, adjoining communities could have dramatically different unemployment rates. Keyssar uses these differential rates to help explain a phenomenon that has puzzled historians—the startlingly high rate of geographical mobility in the nineteenth-century United States. But mobility was not the dominant working-class strategy for coping with unemployment, nor was assistance from private charities or state agencies. Self-help and the help of kin got most workers through jobless spells.
While Keyssar might have spent more time developing the implications of his findings on joblessness for contemporary public policy, his study, in its thorough research and creative use of quantitative and qualitative evidence, is a model of historical analysis.

第一段，AK关注失业人士，尤其是非大萧条失业人士。
第二段，M城从失业频率看，失业情况很严重。
第三段，K用这些数据解释了为什么19世纪美国这么多迁徙。但是解决失业的主要方法，不是迁徙，不是慈善，而是亲戚的帮助。
第四段，认为K 的研究是是历史分析的标杆。

错误 2 6

1. The passage is primarily concerned with
(A) recommending a new course of investigation
(B) summarizing and assessing a study
(C) making distinctions among categories
(D) criticizing the current state of a field
(E) comparing and contrasting two methods for calculating data


2. The passage suggests that before the early 1970’s, which of the following was true of the study by historians of the working class in the United States?
(A) The study was infrequent or superficial, or both.
(B) The study was repeatedly criticized for its allegedly narrow focus.
(C) The study relied more on qualitative than quantitative evidence.
(D) The study focused more on the working-class community than on working-class culture.
(E) The study ignored working-class joblessness during the Great Depression.
自己写错选项了

3. According to the passage, which of the following is true of Keyssar’s findings concerning unemployment in Massachusetts?
(A) They tend to contradict earlier findings about such unemployment.
(B) They are possible because Massachusetts has the most easily accessible historical records.
(C) They are the first to mention the existence of high rates of geographical mobility in the nineteenth century.
(D) They are relevant to a historical understanding of the nature of unemployment in other states.
(E) They have caused historians to reconsider the role of the working class during the Great Depression.


4. According to the passage, which of the following is true of the unemployment rates mentioned in line 15?
(A) They hovered, on average, around 15 percent during the period 1870-1920.
(B) They give less than a full sense of the impact of unemployment on working-class people.
(C) They overestimate the importance of middle class and white-collar unemployment.
(D) They have been considered by many historians to underestimate the extent of working-class unemployment.
(E) They are more open to question when calculated for years other than those of peak recession.


5. Which of the following statements about the unemployment rate during the Great Depression can be inferred from the passage?
(A) It was sometimes higher than 15 percent.
(B) It has been analyzed seriously only since the early 1970’s.
(C) It can be calculated more easily than can unemployment frequency.
(D) It was never as high as the rate during the 1870’s.
(E) It has been shown by Keyssar to be lower than previously thought.


6. According to the passage, Keyssar considers which of the following to be among the important predictors of the likelihood that a particular person would be unemployed in late nineteenth-century Massachusetts?
I. The person’s class
II. Where the person lived or worked
III. The person’s age
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II, and III
开始认为不包括地点的，但是后来说到mobility可以减少失业，这样2也对。但是我选了E
这里我看粗那段第一句话了。人家是检查年龄，性别对失业的影响。但是第一句可没有承认所有因素都对失业有影响。

7. The author views Keyssar’s study with
(A) impatient disapproval
(B) wary concern
(C) polite skepticism
(D) scrupulous neutrality
(E) qualified admiration
最后一句，model

8. Which of the following, if true, would most strongly support Keyssar’s findings as they are described by the author?
(A) Boston, Massachusetts, and Quincy, Massachusetts, adjoining communities, had a higher rate of unemployment for working-class people in 1870 than in 1890.
(B) White-collar professionals such as attorneys had as much trouble as day laborers in maintaining a steady level of employment throughout the period 1870-1920.
(C) Working-class women living in Cambridge, Massachusetts, were more likely than working-class men living in Cambridge to be unemployed for some period of time during the year 1873.
(D) In the 1890’s, shoe-factory workers moved away in large numbers from Chelmsford, Massachusetts, where shoe factories were being replaced by other industries, to adjoining West Chelmsford, where the shoe industry flourished.
(E) In the late nineteenth century, workers of all classes in Massachusetts were more likely than workers of all classes in other states to move their place of residence from one location to another within the state.
迁徙

Since the early 1970’s, historians have begun to devote serious attention to the working class in the United States. Yet while we now have studies of working-class communities and culture, we know remarkably little of worklessness. When historians have paid any attention at all to unemployment, they have focused on the Great Depression of the 1930’s. The narrowness of this perspective ignores the pervasive recessions and joblessness of the previous decades, as Alexander Keyssar shows in his recent book. Examining the period 1870-1920, Keyssar concentrates on Massachusetts, where the historical materials are particularly rich, and the findings applicable to other industrial areas.

The unemployment rates that Keyssar calculates appear to be relatively modest, at least by Great Depression standards: during the worst years, in the 1870’s and 1890’s, unemployment was around 15 percent. Yet Keyssar rightly understands that a better way to measure the impact of unemployment is to calculate unemployment frequencies—measuring the percentage of workers who experience any unemployment in the course of (in the course of: adv.在...期间) a year. Given this perspective, joblessness looms much larger.

Keyssar also scrutinizes unemployment patterns according to skill level, ethnicity, race, age, class, and gender. He finds that rates of joblessness differed primarily according to class: those in middle-class and white-collar occupations were far less likely to be unemployed. Yet the impact of unemployment on a specific class was not always the same. Even when dependent on the same trade, adjoining communities could have dramatically different unemployment rates. Keyssar uses these differential rates to help explain a phenomenon that has puzzled historians—the startlingly high rate of geographical mobility in the nineteenth-century United States. But mobility was not the dominant working-class strategy for coping with unemployment, nor was assistance from private charities or state agencies. Self-help and the help of kin got most workers through jobless spells.

While Keyssar might have spent more time developing the implications of his findings on joblessness for contemporary public policy, his study, in its thorough research and creative use of quantitative and qualitative evidence, is a model of historical analysis.

1.The passage is primarily concerned with

(A) recommending a new course of investigation

(B) summarizing and assessing a study

(C) making distinctions among categories

(D) criticizing the current state of a field（B）

(E) comparing and contrasting two methods for calculating data

2.The passage suggests that before the early 1970’s, which of the following was true of the study by historians of the working class in the United States?

(A) The study was infrequent or superficial, or both.

(B) The study was repeatedly criticized for its allegedly narrow focus.

(C) The study relied more on qualitative than quantitative evidence.

(D) The study focused more on the working-class community than on working-class culture.（A）

(E) The study ignored working-class joblessness during the Great Depression.

3.According to the passage, which of the following is true of Keyssar’s findings concerning unemployment in Massachusetts?

(A) They tend to contradict earlier findings about such unemployment.

(B) They are possible because Massachusetts has the most easily accessible historical records.

(C) They are the first to mention the existence of high rates of geographical mobility in the nineteenth century.

(D) They are relevant to a historical understanding of the nature of unemployment in other states.（D）

(E) They have caused historians to reconsider the role of the working class during the Great Depression.

4.According to the passage, which of the following is true of the unemployment rates mentioned in line 15?

(A) They hovered, on average, around 15 percent during the period 1870-1920.

(B) They give less than a full sense of the impact of unemployment on working-class people.

(C) They overestimate the importance of middle class and white-collar unemployment.

(D) They have been considered by many historians to underestimate the extent of working-class unemployment.（B）

(E) They are more open to question when calculated for years other than those of peak recession.

5.Which of the following statements about the unemployment rate during the Great Depression can be inferred from the passage?

(A) It was sometimes higher than 15 percent.

(B) It has been analyzed seriously only since the early 1970’s.

(C) It can be calculated more easily than can unemployment frequency.

(D) It was never as high as the rate during the 1870’s.（A）

(E) It has been shown by Keyssar to be lower than previously thought.

6.According to the passage, Keyssar considers which of the following to be among the important predictors of the likelihood that a particular person would be unemployed in late nineteenth-century Massachusetts?

I.The person’s class

II.Where the person lived or worked

III.The person’s age

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) I and III only（C）

(E) I, II, and III

7.The author views Keyssar’s study with

(A) impatient disapproval

(B) wary concern

(C) polite skepticism

(D) scrupulous neutrality（E）

(E) qualified admiration

8.Which of the following, if true, would most strongly support Keyssar’s findings as they are described by the author?

(A) Boston, Massachusetts, and Quincy, Massachusetts, adjoining communities, had a higher rate of unemployment for working-class people in 1870 than in 1890.

(B) White-collar professionals such as attorneys had as much trouble as day laborers in maintaining a steady level of employment throughout the period 1870-1920.

(C) Working-class women living in Cambridge, Massachusetts, were more likely than working-class men living in Cambridge to be unemployed for some period of time during the year 1873.

(D) In the 1890’s, shoe-factory workers moved away in large numbers from Chelmsford, Massachusetts, where shoe factories were being replaced by other industries, to adjoining West Chelmsford, where the shoe industry flourished.（D）

(E) In the late nineteenth century, workers of all classes in Massachusetts were more likely than workers of all classes in other states to move their place of residence from one location to another within the state.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 15:59
The number of women directors appointed to corporate boards in the United States has increased dramatically, but the ratio of female to male directors remains low. Although pressure to recruit women directors, unlike that to employ women in the general work force, does not derive from legislation, it is nevertheless real.
Although small companies were the first to have women directors, large corporations currently have a higher percentage of women on their boards. When the chairs of these large corporations began recruiting women to serve on boards, they initially sought women who were chief executive officers (CEO’s) of large corporations. However, such women CEO’s are still rare. In addition, the ideal of six CEO’s (female or male) serving on the board of each of the largest corporations is realizable only if every CEO serves on six boards. This raises the specter of director over-commitment and the resultant dilution of contribution. Consequently, the chairs next sought women in business who had the equivalent of CEO experience. However, since it is only recently that large numbers of women have begun to rise in management, the chairs began to recruitwomen of high achievement outside the business world. Many such women are well known for their contributions in government, education, and the nonprofit sector. The fact that the women from these sectors who were appointed were often acquaintances of the boards’ chairs seems quite reasonable: chairs have always considered it important for directors to interact comfortably in the boardroom.
Although many successful women from outside the business world are unknown to corporate leaders, these women are particularly qualified to serve on boards because of the changing nature of corporations. Today a company’s ability to be responsive to the concerns of the community and the environment can influence that company’s growth and survival. Women are uniquely positioned to be responsive to some of these concerns. Although conditions have changed（感觉这里很神道，什么conditions? 是不是指现在公司需要更加关心社区和环保）, it should be remembered that most directors of both sexes are over fifty years old. Women of that generation were often encouraged to direct their attention toward efforts to improve the community. This fact is reflected in the career development of most of the outstandingly successful women of the generation now in their fifties, who currently serve on corporate boards: 25 percent are in education and 22 percent are in government, law, and the nonprofit sector.
One organization of women directors is helping business become more responsive to the changing needs of society by raising the level of corporate awareness about social issues, such as problems with the economy, government regulation, the aging population, and the environment. This organization also serves as a resource center of information on accomplished women who are potential candidates for corporate boards.

这里怎么这么多CEO's, 这个表示复数的意思？
等等，我有个认识误区，CEO大，还是director serving on the board大？ 怎么觉得文章暗含着 director serving on the board 大呢。

the ideal of six CEO’s (female or male)serving on the boardof each of the largest corporations is realizable only if every CEO serves on six boards
我想这两个划线的部分都是来形容CEO‘s . 再说了，我觉得这句话有问题，你让董事会的6个人都来自大公司，能通过每个CEO服务6个董事会来实现？每个CEO服务10个董事会行不行？好吧，我表示理解CEO少，只有既定一个数目，而且所有公司数目是大公司数目的6倍。

感觉这篇作者是个做人事的。不是人事，这篇像是women director 组织的advertisement.

第一段，很压力找female director.
第二段，这些female director人选： 首先，大公司的CEO’s; 其次，类似CEO这样工作的女性（注意，这次人家不强调大公司了）；再次，非盈利部门，做出杰出贡献的女性。
第三段，为什么非盈利部门的杰出女性可以做好director：1. 公司需要关心社区和环境；2 50岁以上的女性主要从事这个领域的工作。
第四段，有个women director 组织

错误 6 7 8
1. The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about achievement of the “ideal” mentioned in line 14?
(A) It has only recently become a possibility.
(B) It would be easier to meet if more CEO’s were women.
(C) It is very close to being a reality for most corporate boards.
(D) It might affect the quality of directors’ service to corporations.
(E) It would be more realizable if CEO’s had a more extensive range of business experience.
就是我表黑那句话后面跟的那句


2. According to the passage, the pressure to appoint women to corporate boards differs from the pressure to employ women in the work force in which of the following ways?
(A) Corporate boards are under less pressure because they have such a small number of openings.
(B) Corporate boards have received less pressure from stockholders, consumers, and workers within companies to include women on their boards.
(C) Corporate boards have received less pressure from the media and the public to include women on their boards.
(D) Corporations have only recently been pressured to include women on their boards.
(E) Corporations are not subject to statutory penalty for failing to include women on their boards.
这个主要是法律上的，就是表蓝那句。

3. All of the following are examples of issues that the organization described in the last paragraph would be likely to advise corporations on EXCEPT
(A) long-term inflation
(B) health and safety regulations
(C) retirement and pension programs
(D) the energy shortage
(E) how to develop new markets
总之 不会建议corporation 自己专业的

4. It can be inferred from the passage that, when seeking to appoint new members to a corporation’s board, the chair traditionally looked for candidates who
(A) had legal and governmental experience
(B) had experience dealing with community affairs
(C) could work easily with other members of the board
(D) were already involved in establishing policy for that corporation
(E) had influential connections outside the business world
文中

5. According to the passage, which of the following is true about women outside the business world who are currently serving on corporate boards?
(A) Most do not serve on more than one board.
(B) A large percentage will eventually work on the staff of corporations.
(C) Most were already known to the chairs of the board to which they were appointed.
(D) A larger percentage are from government and law than are from the nonprofit sector.
(E) Most are less than fifty years old.


6. The passage suggests that corporations of the past differ from modern corporations in which of the following ways?
(A) Corporations had greater input on government policies affecting the business community.
(B) Corporations were less responsive to the financial needs of their employees.
(C) The ability of a corporation to keep up with changing markets was not a crucial factor in its success.
(D) A corporation’s effectiveness in coping with community needs was less likely to affect its growth and prosperity.
(E) Corporations were subject to more stringent government regulations.
环保， concerns of commuity, 注意老外爱用community, 不爱用social
题干在读的仔细些，这个是 corporation of the past .

7. Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?
(A) A problem is described, and then reasons why various proposed solutions succeeded or failed are discussed.
(B) A problem is described, and then an advantage of resolving it is offered.
(C) A problem is described, and then reasons for its continuing existence are summarized.
(D) The historical origins of a problem are described, and then various measures that have successfully resolved it are discussed.
(E) The causes of a problem are described, and then its effects are discussed.
开始解释为什么要雇用非盈利组织的，接着说雇用她们有什么好处。 E 中的its= causes
问题，解决，解决方案的好处。

8. It can be inferred from the passage that factors making women uniquely valuable members of modern corporate boards would include which of the following?
I. The nature of modern corporations
II. The increased number of women CEO’s
III. The careers pursued by women currently available to serve on corporate boards
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) III only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II, and III
不要3 看那个unique出现的位置。
难道这段，是把论断放在中间了？



The number of women directors appointed to corporate boards in the United States has increased dramatically, but the ratio of female to male directors remains low. Although pressure to recruit women directors, unlike that to employ women in the general work force, does not derive from legislation, it is nevertheless real.

Although small companies were the first to have women directors, large corporations currently have a higher percentage of women on their boards. When the chairs of these large corporations began recruiting women to serve on boards, they initially sought women who were chief executive officers (CEO’s) of large corporations. However, such women CEO’s are still rare. In addition, the ideal of six CEO’s (female or male) serving on the board of each of the largest corporations is realizable only if every CEO serves on six boards. This raises the specter of director over-commitment and the resultant dilution of contribution. Consequently, the chairs next sought women in business who had the equivalent of CEO experience. However, since it is only recently that large numbers of women have begun to rise in management, the chairs began to recruit women of high achievement outside the business world. Many such women are well known for their contributions in government, education, and the nonprofit sector. The fact that the women from these sectors who were appointed were often acquaintances of the boards’ chairs seems quite reasonable: chairs have always considered it important for directors to interact (to act upon one another)comfortably in the boardroom.

Although many successful women from outside the business world are unknown to corporate leaders, these women are particularly qualified to serve on boards because of the changing nature of corporations. Today a company’s ability to be responsive to the concerns of the community and the environment can influence that company’s growth and survival. Women are uniquely positioned to be responsive to some of these concerns. Although conditions have changed, it should be remembered that most directors of both sexes are over fifty years old. Women of that generation were often encouraged to direct their attention toward efforts to improve the community. This fact is reflected in the career development (career development: 职业培训) of most of the outstandingly successful women of the generation now in their fifties, who currently serve on corporate boards: 25 percent are in education and 22 percent are in government, law, and the nonprofit sector.

One organization of women directors is helping business become more responsive to the changing needs of society by raising the level of corporate awareness about social issues, such as problems with the economy, government regulation, the aging population, and the environment. This organization also serves as a resource center of information on accomplished women who are potential candidates for corporate boards.

1.The author of the passage would be most likely to agree with which of the following statements about achievement of the “ideal” mentioned in line 14?

(A) It has only recently become a possibility.

(B) It would be easier to meet if more CEO’s were women.

(C) It is very close to being a reality for most corporate boards.

(D) It might affect the quality of directors’ service to corporations.（D）

(E) It would be more realizable if CEO’s had a more extensive range of business experience.

2.According to the passage, the pressure to appoint women to corporate boards differs from the pressure to employ women in the work force in which of the following ways?

(A) Corporate boards are under less pressure because they have such a small number of openings.

(B) Corporate boards have received less pressure from stockholders, consumers, and workers within companies to include women on their boards.

(C) Corporate boards have received less pressure from the media and the public to include women on their boards.

(D) Corporations have only recently been pressured to include women on their boards.（E）

(E) Corporations are not subject to statutory penalty for failing to include women on their boards.

3.All of the following are examples of issues that the organization described in the last paragraph would be likely to advise corporations on EXCEPT

(A) long-term inflation

(B) health and safety regulations

(C) retirement and pension programs

(D) the energy shortage（E）

(E) how to develop new markets

4.It can be inferred from the passage that, when seeking to appoint new members to a corporation’s board, the chair traditionally looked for candidates who

(A) had legal and governmental experience

(B) had experience dealing with community affairs

(C) could work easily with other members of the board

(D) were already involved in establishing policy for that corporation（C）

(E) had influential connections outside the business world

5.According to the passage, which of the following is true about women outside the business world who are currently serving on corporate boards?

(A) Most do not serve on more than one board.

(B) A large percentage will eventually work on the staff of corporations.

(C) Most were already known to the chairs of the board to which they were appointed.

(D) A larger percentage are from government and law than are from the nonprofit sector.（C）

(E) Most are less than fifty years old.

6.The passage suggests that corporations of the past differ from modern corporations in which of the following ways?

(A) Corporations had greater input on government policies affecting the business community.

(B) Corporations were less responsive to the financial needs of their employees.

(C) The ability of a corporation to keep up with changing markets was not a crucial factor in its success.

(D) A corporation’s effectiveness in coping with community needs was less likely to affect its growth and prosperity.（D）

(E) Corporations were subject to more stringent government regulations.

7.Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?

(A) A problem is described, and then reasons why various proposed solutions succeeded or failed are discussed.

(B) A problem is described, and then an advantage of resolving it is offered.

(C) A problem is described, and then reasons for its continuing existence are summarized.

(D) The historical origins of a problem are described, and then various measures that have successfully resolved it are discussed.（B）

(E) The causes of a problem are described, and then its effects are discussed.

8.It can be inferred from the passage that factors making women uniquely valuable members of modern corporate boards would include which of the following?

I.The nature of modern corporations

II.The increased number of women CEO’s

III.The careers pursued by women currently available to serve on corporate boards

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) III only

(D) I and III only（D）

(E) I, II, and III

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 20:56
Increasingly, historians are blaming diseases imported from the Old World for the staggering disparity between the indigenous population of America in 1492—new estimates of which soar as high as 100 million, or approximately one-sixth of thehuman race（这里什么意思？死的人数这个人群的1/6）at that time—and the few million full-blooded Native Americans alive at the end of the nineteenth century. There is no doubt that chronic disease was an important factor in the precipitous decline, and it is highly probable that the greatest killer was epidemic disease, especially as manifested in virgin-soil epidemics.
Virgin-soil epidemics are those in which the populations at risk have had no previous contact with the diseases that strike them and are therefore immunologically almost defenseless. That virgin-soil epidemics were important in American history is strongly indicated by evidence that a number of dangerous maladies—smallpox, measles, malaria, yellow fever, and undoubtedly several more—were unknown in the pre-Columbian New World. The effects of their sudden introduction are demonstrated in the early chronicles of America, which contain reports of horrendous epidemics and steep population declines, confirmed in many cases by recent quantitative analyses of Spanish tribute records and other sources. The evidence provided by the documents of British and French colonies is not as definitive because the conquerors of those areas did not establish permanent settlements and begin to keep continuous records until the seventeenth century, by which time the worst epidemics had probably already taken place. Furthermore, the British tended to drive the native populations away, rather than enslaving them as the Spaniards did, so that the epidemics of British America occurred beyond the range of colonists’ direct observation.
Even so, the surviving records of North America do contain references（contain/have/bear some references to sth: be connected with sth 与某事物有关） to deadly epidemics among the indigenous population. In 1616-1619 an epidemic, possibly of bubonic or pneumonic plague, swept coastal New England, killing as many as nine out of ten. During the 1630’s smallpox, the disease most fatal to the Native American people, eliminated half the population of the Huron and Iroquois confederations. In the 1820’s fever devastated the people of the Columbia River area, killing eight out of ten of them.
Unfortunately, the documentation of these and other epidemics is slight and frequently unreliable, and it is necessary to supplement what little we do know with evidence from recent epidemics among Native Americans. For example, in 1952 an outbreak of measles among the Native American inhabitants of Ungava Bay, Quebec, affected 99 percent of the population and killed 7 percent, even though some had the benefit of modern medicine. Cases such as this demonstrate that even diseases that are not normally fatal can have devastating consequences when they strike an immunologically defenseless community.

我糊涂了，到底是什么造成了the staggering disparity. 真是搞，NND， disparity 是人数， 1492年的时候，100M，现在few million. 我好迟钝。

第一段，chronic disease ，还是 virgin-soil epidemics都是来自the old world.
第二段， VSE可以得到历史资料的证实。但是英国，法国殖民地的这样的记录比西班牙的少。
第三段，资料显示这些流行病杀死很多人
第四段， 但是这样的资料很少，需要通过现在native American的流行病资料来补充。

错误 3

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) refute a common misconception
(B) provide support for a hypothesis
(C) analyze an argument
(D) suggest a solution to a dilemma
(E) reconcile opposing viewpoints


2. According to the passage, virgin-soil epidemics can be distinguished from other catastrophic outbreaks of disease in that virgin-soil epidemics
(A) recur more frequently than other chronic diseases
(B) affect a minimum of one-half of a given population
(C) involve populations with no prior exposure to a disease
(D) usually involve a number of interacting diseases
(E) are less responsive to medical treatment than are other diseases


3. According to the passage, the British colonists were unlike the Spanish colonists in that the British colonists
(A) collected tribute from the native population
(B) kept records from a very early date
(C) drove Native Americans off the land
(D) were unable to provide medical care against epidemic disease
(E) enslaved the native populations in America
the land， 是哪里？整个美洲大陆？这个选项好阴险. 我怎么又这样，题干是British，不是Spanish。

4. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage concerning Spanish tribute records?
(A) They mention only epidemics of smallpox.
(B) They were instituted in 1492.
(C) They were being kept prior to the seventeenth century.
(D) They provide quantitative and qualitative evidence about Native American populations.
(E) They prove that certain diseases were unknown in the pre-Columbian New World.
记录笔英法早

5. The author implies which of the following about measles?
(A) It is not usually a fatal disease.
(B) It ceased to be a problem by the seventeenth century.
(C) It is the disease most commonly involved in virgin-soil epidemics.
(D) It was not a significant problem in Spanish colonies.
(E) It affects only those who are immunologically defenseless against it.
开始我怎么注意病的名字

6. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the Native American inhabitants of Ungava Bay?
(A) They were almost all killed by the 1952 epidemic.
(B) They were immunologically defenseless against measles.
(C) They were the last native people to be struck by a virgin-soil epidemic.
(D) They did not come into frequent contact with white Americans until the twentieth century.
(E) They had been inoculated against measles.


7. The author mentions the 1952 measles outbreak most probably in order to
(A) demonstrate the impact of modern medicine on epidemic disease
(B) corroborate the documentary evidence of epidemic disease in colonial America
(C) refute allegations of unreliability made against the historical record of colonial America
(D) advocate new research into the continuing problem of epidemic disease
(E) challenge assumptions about how the statistical evidence of epidemics should be interpreted


8. Which of the following, if newly discovered, would most seriously weaken the author’s argument concerning the importance of virgin-soil epidemics in the depopulation of Native Americans?
(A) Evidence setting the pre-Columbian population of the New World at only 80 million
(B) Spanish tribute records showing periodic population fluctuations
(C) Documents detailing sophisticated Native American medical procedures
(D) Fossils indicating Native American contact with smallpox prior to 1492
(E) Remains of French settlements dating back to the sixteenth century


Increasingly, historians are blaming diseases imported from the Old World for the staggering disparity between the indigenous population of America in 1492—new estimates of which soar as high as 100 million, or approximately one-sixth of the human race at that time—and the few million full-blooded (full-blooded: adj.多血性的, 纯血统的, 精神旺盛的)Native Americans alive at the end of the nineteenth century. There is no doubt that chronic disease was an important factor in the precipitous decline, and it is highly probable that the greatest killer was epidemic disease (epidemic disease: 流行病), especially as manifested in virgin-soil epidemics.

Virgin-soil epidemics are those in which the populations at risk have had no previous contact with the diseases that strike them and are therefore immunologically almost defenseless. That virgin-soil epidemics were important in American history is strongly indicated by evidence that a number of dangerous maladies—smallpox, measles, malaria, yellow fever, and undoubtedly several more—were unknown in the pre-Columbian New World. The effects of their sudden introduction are demonstrated in the early chronicles of America, which contain reports of horrendous epidemics and steep population declines, confirmed in many cases by recent quantitative analyses of Spanish tribute records and other sources. The evidence provided by the documents of British and French colonies is not as definitive because the conquerors of those areas did not establish permanent settlements and begin to keep continuous records until the seventeenth century, by which time the worst epidemics had probably already taken place. Furthermore, the British tended to drive the native populations away, rather than enslaving them as the Spaniards did, so that the epidemics of British America occurred beyond the range of colonists’ direct observation.

Even so, the surviving records of North America do contain references to deadly epidemics among the indigenous population. In 1616-1619 an epidemic, possibly of bubonic or pneumonic plague, swept coastal New England, killing as many as nine out of ten. During the 1630’s smallpox, the disease most fatal to the Native American people, eliminated half the population of the Huron and Iroquois confederations. In the 1820’s fever devastated the people of the Columbia River area, killing eight out of ten of them.

Unfortunately, the documentation of these and other epidemics is slight and frequently unreliable, and it is necessary to supplement what little we do know with evidence from recent epidemics among Native Americans. For example, in 1952 an outbreak of measles among the Native American inhabitants of Ungava Bay, Quebec, affected 99 percent of the population and killed 7 percent, even though some had the benefit of modern medicine. Cases such as this demonstrate that even diseases that are not normally fatal can have devastating consequences when they strike an immunologically defenseless community.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) refute a common misconception

(B) provide support for a hypothesis

(C) analyze an argument

(D) suggest a solution to a dilemma（B）

(E) reconcile opposing viewpoints

2.According to the passage, virgin-soil epidemics can be distinguished from other catastrophic outbreaks of disease in that virgin-soil epidemics

(A) recur more frequently than other chronic diseases

(B) affect a minimum of one-half of a given population

(C) involve populations with no prior exposure to a disease

(D) usually involve a number of interacting diseases（C）

(E) are less responsive to medical treatment than are other diseases

3.According to the passage, the British colonists were unlike the Spanish colonists in that the British colonists

(A) collected tribute from the native population

(B) kept records from a very early date

(C) drove Native Americans off the land

(D) were unable to provide medical care against epidemic disease（C）

(E) enslaved the native populations in America

4.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage concerning Spanish tribute records?

(A) They mention only epidemics of smallpox.

(B) They were instituted in 1492.

(C) They were being kept prior to the seventeenth century.

(D) They provide quantitative and qualitative evidence about Native American populations.（C）

(E) They prove that certain diseases were unknown in the pre-Columbian New World.

5.The author implies which of the following about measles?

(A) It is not usually a fatal disease.

(B) It ceased to be a problem by the seventeenth century.

(C) It is the disease most commonly involved in virgin-soil epidemics.

(D) It was not a significant problem in Spanish colonies.（A）

(E) It affects only those who are immunologically defenseless against it.

6.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the Native American inhabitants of Ungava Bay?

(A) They were almost all killed by the 1952 epidemic.

(B) They were immunologically defenseless against measles.

(C) They were the last native people to be struck by a virgin-soil epidemic.

(D) They did not come into frequent contact with white Americans until the twentieth century.（B）

(E) They had been inoculated against measles.

7.The author mentions the 1952 measles outbreak most probably in order to

(A) demonstrate the impact of modern medicine on epidemic disease

(B) corroborate the documentary evidence of epidemic disease in colonial America

(C) refute allegations of unreliability made against the historical record of colonial America

(D) advocate new research into the continuing problem of epidemic disease（B）

(E) challenge assumptions about how the statistical evidence of epidemics should be interpreted

8.Which of the following, if newly discovered, would most seriously weaken the author’s argument concerning the importance of virgin-soil epidemics in the depopulation of Native Americans?

(A) Evidence setting the pre-Columbian population of the New World at only 80 million

(B) Spanish tribute records showing periodic population fluctuations

(C) Documents detailing sophisticated Native American medical procedures

(D) Fossils indicating Native American contact with smallpox prior to 1492（D）

(E) Remains of French settlements dating back to the sixteenth century

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 20:58
明天 不这样做了。整篇下来，写总结。

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-20 21:48
TANTALISING hints of change have seeped out of North Korea in recent weeks. Not least, the callow Kim Jong Un has confounded Pyongyang-watchers who had predicted that he would slavishly follow his late father’s recipe for keeping an iron grip on power. The 20-something inherited the family dictatorship when Kim Jong Il died of a heart attack in December. The late Kim ran the state as a mafia racket, earning hard currency from drugs, counterfeiting and illicit-arms sales while using his nuclear-weapons programme to blackmail the rest of the world for aid. He diverted lavish resources to the army and to a tiny elite, and he ground nearly everyone else under his platform heel, dispatching perceived enemies to his prison camps in their hundreds of thousands.
In tone, the young Mr Kim has quickly signalled change from his father’s paranoid（这个词出现第二次了，不相信人的） rule, and with unexpected verve. Last month he fired the army’s senior general, a hardliner, while a civilian was hastily promoted. One reading is that Mr Kim is retreating from his father’s “military-first” stance.
His public appearances are also different. He is often seen laughing with those around him. Where Kim Jong Il’s consorts were kept out of sight, a stylish young woman has recently appeared by the Great Successor’s side. Last month the couple graced the front row of a debut concert for the all-girl Moranbong Band, whose miniskirts, Disney cameos and foreign tunes (“My Way”) all broke new ground, for North Korea if nowhere else. In public speeches (Kim Jong Il’s were dubbed over by emotional commentary), Mr Kim says the years of belt-tightening are over. He calls for fresh economic thinking.


Better heir, same song


Does this amount to much? The question matters because if the young Kim really is his country’s Gorbachev(这个人在西方人看来是个hero), then the West should seize every opportunity to help him go further. If it is merely another charade（我做你猜这种游戏）, then more pressure needs to be applied to the world’s ugliest regime. So far there seems to be room for (very) limited encouragement. And the main hopes should be focused on opening up the country’s economy rather than looking for political change.
The politics has changed in tone, but it still fits the Kim mould. Most obviously the gulag remains; so do the shoot-to-kill orders for North Koreans fleeing to China. And all those smiles and visits to kindergartens and funfairs also fit a pattern—not of the father but the grandfather. Kim Il Sung, the dynasty’s brutal founder, had himself depicted in his propaganda as the country’s parent-in-chief, tucking children into bed. The imagery of state-sponsored infantilism persists: North Koreans are a pure, innocent race historically abused by outside powers—Japan, America and even China. They need a caring, protective leader. Kim Jong Un even looks uncannily like his grandfather. The fact that North Koreans were so much better off in the cold-war days (when China and the Soviet Union vied to provide aid) sadly reinforces the nostalgia: the people in Mr Kim’s broken country earn less, eat less and use less electricity than they did 25 years ago.
Yet this misery explains why the hints of change on the economic front may yet lead to something. The economy appears to be becoming both more open (though not yet to South Korea, see article) and less monolithic. Visitors increasingly report how parts of the state are vying with each other for investment—especially Chinese cash. One rumour is that Mr Kim fired the general because the army itself was diving too enthusiastically into business. This counts as competition, of sorts.
In the past economic reform has come to nothing. A decade ago, after the famine, price controls and rationing were scrapped, mainly because nothing was left to ration. Soon the controls were reimposed. In 2009 a currency “reform” amounted to a confiscation of hard-won savings, rendering North Koreans even more dependent on the state. Violent political control has always trumped all (seearticle). North Korea has too often taken foreign money with no intention of returning it.
So there is every reason to remain suspicious. But by encouraging trade and teaching North Koreans the very basics of a market economy, what is there to lose? A few cronies will get richer. But other North Koreans will be a little less impoverished, and that bit better prepared for the day when the vile Kim dynasty goes.


Changing from his father: trust people, retreat from military first police and become more open in the popular culture and economic thinking.  But， Author still does not believe North Korean wil carry out real economic reform and hold that even the basic economic education for the North Korean people will not lead to something bad.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 11:20
A bug’s life

One way to think of the microbiome is as an additional human organ, albeit a rather peculiar one. It weighs as much as many organs (about a kilogram, or a bit more than two pounds). And although it is not a distinct structure in the way that a heart or a liver is distinct, an organ does not have to have form and shape to be real. The immune system, for example, consists of cells scattered all around the body but it has the salient feature of an organ, namely that it is an organised system of cells.
The microbiome, too, is organised. Biology recognises about 100 large groups of bacteria, known as phyla, that each have a different repertoire of biochemical capabilities（不是轮值剧目的是意思，是所有的行为方式，所有的能力的意思。）. Human microbiomes are dominated by just four of these phyla: the Actinobacteria, Bacteroidetes, Firmicutes and Proteobacteria. Clearly, living inside a human being is a specialised existence that is appropriate only to certain types of bug.
Specialised; but not monotonous. Just as ecosystems such as forests, grasslands and coral reefs differ from place to place, so it is with microbiomes. Those of children in Malawi and rural Venezuela, for instance, contain more riboflavin-producing bugs than do those of North Americans. They are also better at extracting nutrition from mother’s milk because they turn out lots of an enzyme known as glycoside hydrolase. This converts carbohydrates called glycans, of which milk has many, into usable sugars.
That detail is significant. Glycans are indigestible by any enzyme encoded in the 23,000 human genes. Only bacterial enzymes can do the job. Yet natural selection has stuffed milk full of them—a nice example of co-evolution at work.
This early nutritional role, moreover, is magnified throughout life. Like the glycans in milk, a lot of carbohydrates would be indigestible if all the digestive system had to work with were the enzymes that it makes for itself. The far larger genome of the microbiome has correspondingly greater capabilities, and complex carbohydrates are no match for it. They are relentlessly chewed up and their remains spat out as small fatty-acid molecules, particularly formic acid, acetic acid and butyric acid, that can pass through the gut wall into the bloodstream—whence they are fed into biochemical pathways that either liberate energy from them (10-15% of the energy used by an average adult is generated this way) or lay them down as fat.

我发现，我就怕老外做比喻，原来情况我还不明白，再来一个比喻，就更晕了。不过这篇真的有很GMAT文章的味道。
我最近读着，读着就不知道什么it，they 是谁了。 估计，要看manhattan 语法相关的东西了。

我忘了文章开头说的什么东西。enzymes与消化这里。There are many carbohydrates that digestive system itself can not digest. These material absorptions need the help from bug. And Natural selection has stuffed milk with indigestible mutriations- a nice examplek of co-evolution at work.

The fat of the land


This role in nutrition points to one way in which an off-kilter microbiome can affect its host: what feeds a body can also overfeed or underfeed it. One of the first analyses of such an effect was Jeffrey Gordon’s work on bacteria and obesity. In 2006 Dr Gordon, who works at the Washington University School of Medicine, in St Louis, Missouri, published a study that looked at the mixture of bacteria in the guts of fat and thin Americans. Fat people, he discovered, had more Firmicutes and fewer Bacteroidetes than thin ones. And if dieting made a fat person thin, his bacterial flora changed to match.
Experiments on mice suggest this is not just a question of the bacteria responding to altered circumstances. They actually assist the process of slimming by suppressing production of a hormone that facilitates the storage of fat, and of an enzyme that stops fat being burned. This may help explain an otherwise weird observation from agriculture, which is that adding antibiotics to cattle feed helps fatten beasts up—though cattle treated in this way put on muscle mass as well as fat.
Having shown that gut bacteria are involved in obesity, Dr Gordon wondered if the converse was true. In a study he conducted in Malawi, he revealed at a meeting last year, he found that it is. Having the wrong sort of bacteria can cause malnutrition, too.
To show this, he and his team looked at 317 pairs of twins (some fraternal, some identical). In 43% of these pairs, both members were well nourished. In 7% both were malnourished. Crucially, though, in 50% of them one twin was well nourished and one malnourished.

Dr. G  discovered that Fat peopel have more F and less Bacteria.
Then, He confirmed that Bacteria were not respond to the changes, such as changing dietes. The real role for bacteris is to suppress the porduction of one hormone that will help to store the fat and of one enzyme that will prevent fat burning.
Third, Dr, G also thought bacteria will cause people malnourished.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 11:53
Until recently most astronomers believed that the space between the galaxies in our universe was a near-perfect vacuum. This orthodox view of the universe is now being challenged by astronomers who believe that a heavy “rain” of gas is falling into many galaxies from the supposedly empty space around them. The gas apparently condenses into a collection of small stars, each a little larger than the planet Jupiter. These stars vastly outnumber the other stars in a given galaxy. The amount of “intergalactic rainfall” into some of these galaxies has been enough to double their mass in the time since they formed. Scientists have begun to suspect that this intergalactic gas is probably a mixture of gases left over from the “big bang” when the galaxies were formed and gas was forced out of galaxies by supernova explosions.
It is well known that when gas is cooled at a constant pressure its volume decreases. Thus, the physicist Fabian reasoned that as intergalactic gas cools, the cooler gas shrinks inward toward the center of the galaxy. Meanwhile its place is taken by hotter intergalactic gas from farther out on the edge of the galaxy, which cools as it is compressed and flows into the galaxy. The net result is a continuous flow of gas, starting as hot gases in intergalactic space and ending as a drizzle of cool gas called a “cooling flow,” falling into the central galaxy.
A fairly heretical idea in the 1970’s,the cooling-flow theory gained support when Fabian observed a cluster of galaxies in the constellation Perseus and found the central galaxy, NGC 1275, to be a strange-looking object with irregular, thin strands of gas radiating from it. According to previous speculation, these strands were gases that had been blown out by an explosion in the galaxy. Fabian, however, disagreed. Because the strands of gas radiating from NGC 1275 are visible in optical photographs, Fabian suggested that such strands consisted not of gas blown out of the galaxy but of cooling flows of gas streaming inward. He noted that the wavelengths of the radiation emitted by a gas would changes as the gas cooled, so that as the gas flowed into the galaxy and became cooler, it would emit not x-rays, but visible light, like that which was captured in the photographs. Fabian’s hypothesis was supported by Canizares’ determination in 1982 that most of the gas in the Perseus cluster was at a temperature of 80 million degrees Kelvin, whereas the gas immediately surrounding NGC 1275 (the subject of the photographs) was at one-tenth this temperature.

说这样一种现象，星级间的气体become cooler, it will move toward to the center of the galaxy. These rianfall have put some planets doubled their mass.

错误 1

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) illustrate a hypothesis about the origin of galaxies
(B) provide evidence to dispute an accepted theory about the evolution of galaxies
(C) summarize the state of and prospects for research in intergalactic astronomy
(D) report new data on the origins of intergalactic gas
(E) reconcile opposing views on the formation of intergalactic gas
我怎么觉得没有答案是对的。 第二题出现 orthodox 我就知道我这里错了。
但是这篇文章真是将evolution of galaxies. 好吧，接受

2. The author uses the phrase “orthodox view of the universe” (line 3) to refer to the belief that
(A) the space between the galaxies is devoid of matter
(B) the space between galaxies is occupied by stars that cannot be detected by optical photographs
(C) galaxies have decreased in mass by half since their formation
(D) galaxies contain stars, each the size of Jupiter, which form clusters
(E) galaxies are being penetrated by gas forced out of other galaxies by supernova explosions



3. It can be inferred from the passage that, if Fabian is correct, gas in the peripheral regions of a galaxy cluster
(A) streams outward into intergalactic space
(B) is hotter than gas in the central regions of the galaxy
(C) is composed primarily of gas left over from the big bang
(D) results in the creation of unusually large stars
(E) expands to increase the size of the galaxy


4. The author of the passage probably mentions Canizares’ determination in order to
(A) clarify an ambiguity in Fabian’s research findings
(B) illustrate a generalization about the temperature of gas in a galaxy cluster
(C) introduce a new argument in support of the orthodox view of galaxies
(D) provide support for Fabian’s assertions about the Perseus galaxies
(E) provide an alternate point of view concerning the movement of gas within a galaxy cluster


5. According to the passage, Fabian believes that gas flowing into a central galaxy has which of the following characteristics?
(A) It is one-tenth hotter than it was in the outer regions of the galaxy cluster.
(B) It emits radiation with wavelengths that change as the gas moves toward the center of the galaxy.
(C) The total amount of radiation emitted diminishes as the gas cools.
(D) It loses 90 percent of its energy as it moves to the center of the galaxy.
(E) It condenses at a rate much slower than the rate of decrease in temperature as the gas flows inward.


6. According to the passage, Fabian’s theory makes use of which of the following principles?
(A) Gas emanating from an explosion will be hotter the more distant it is from the origin.
(B) The wavelength of radiation emitted by a gas as it cools remains constant.
(C) If pressure remains constant, the volume of a gas will decrease as it is cooled.
(D) The volume of a gas will increase as the pressure increases.
(E) As gas cools, its density decreases.
开始选A，但是后来看到CD在一起纠结，就C

7. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is true of Fabian’s theory?
(A) It did not receive approval until Canizares’ work was published.
(B) It was not widely accepted in the 1970’s.
(C) It did not receive support initially because technology was not available to confirm its tenets.
(D) It supports earlier speculation that intergalactic gas was largely the result of explosions outside the galaxy.
(E) It was widely challenged until x-ray evidence of gas temperatures in NGC 1275 had been presented.
再回看，这个理论没有被接受。大家接受的是，中心温度低。

Until recently most astronomers believed that the space between the galaxies in our universe was a near-perfect vacuum. This orthodox view of the universe is now being challenged by astronomers who believe that a heavy “rain” of gas is falling into many galaxies from the supposedly empty space around them. The gas apparently condenses into a collection of small stars, each a little larger than the planet Jupiter. These stars vastly outnumber the other stars in a given galaxy. The amount of “intergalactic rainfall” into some of these galaxies has been enough to double their mass in the time since they formed. Scientists have begun to suspect that this intergalactic gas is probably a mixture of gases left over from the “big bang” when the galaxies were formed and gas was forced out of galaxies by supernova explosions.

It is well known that when gas is cooled at a constant pressure its volume decreases. Thus, the physicist Fabian reasoned that as intergalactic gas cools, the cooler gas shrinks inward toward the center of the galaxy. Meanwhile its place is taken by hotter intergalactic gas from farther out on the edge of the galaxy, which cools as it is compressed and flows into the galaxy. The net result is a continuous flow of gas, starting as hot gases in intergalactic space and ending as a drizzle of cool gas called a “cooling flow,” falling into the central galaxy.

A fairly heretical idea in the 1970’s, the cooling-flow theory gained support when Fabian observed a cluster of galaxies in the constellation Perseus and found the central galaxy, NGC 1275, to be a strange-looking object with irregular, thin strands of gas radiating from it. According to previous speculation, these strands were gases that had been blown out by an explosion in the galaxy. Fabian, however, disagreed. Because the strands of gas radiating from NGC 1275 are visible in optical photographs, Fabian suggested that such strands consisted not of gas blown out of the galaxy but of cooling flows of gas streaming inward. He noted that the wavelengths of the radiation emitted by a gas would changes as the gas cooled, so that as the gas flowed into the galaxy and became cooler, it would emit not x-rays, but visible light, like that which was captured in the photographs. Fabian’s hypothesis was supported by Canizares’ determination in 1982 that most of the gas in the Perseus cluster was at a temperature of 80 million degrees Kelvin, whereas the gas immediately surrounding NGC 1275 (the subject of the photographs) was at one-tenth this temperature.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) illustrate a hypothesis about the origin of galaxies

(B) provide evidence to dispute an accepted theory about the evolution of galaxies

(C) summarize the state of and prospects for research in intergalactic astronomy

(D) report new data on the origins of intergalactic gas（B）

(E) reconcile opposing views on the formation of intergalactic gas

2.The author uses the phrase “orthodox view of the universe” (line 3) to refer to the belief that

(A) the space between the galaxies is devoid of matter

(B) the space between galaxies is occupied by stars that cannot be detected by optical photographs

(C) galaxies have decreased in mass by half since their formation

(D) galaxies contain stars, each the size of Jupiter, which form clusters（A）

(E) galaxies are being penetrated by gas forced out of other galaxies by supernova explosions

3.It can be inferred from the passage that, if Fabian is correct, gas in the peripheral regions of a galaxy cluster

(A) streams outward into intergalactic space

(B) is hotter than gas in the central regions of the galaxy

(C) is composed primarily of gas left over from the big bang

(D) results in the creation of unusually large stars（B）

(E) expands to increase the size of the galaxy

4.The author of the passage probably mentions Canizares’ determination in order to

(A) clarify an ambiguity in Fabian’s research findings

(B) illustrate a generalization about the temperature of gas in a galaxy cluster

(C) introduce a new argument in support of the orthodox view of galaxies

(D) provide support for Fabian’s assertions about the Perseus galaxies（D）

(E) provide an alternate point of view concerning the movement of gas within a galaxy cluster

5.According to the passage, Fabian believes that gas flowing into a central galaxy has which of the following characteristics?

(A) It is one-tenth hotter than it was in the outer regions of the galaxy cluster.

(B) It emits radiation with wavelengths that change as the gas moves toward the center of the galaxy.

(C) The total amount of radiation emitted diminishes as the gas cools.

(D) It loses 90 percent of its energy as it moves to the center of the galaxy.（B）

(E) It condenses at a rate much slower than the rate of decrease in temperature as the gas flows inward.

6.According to the passage, Fabian’s theory makes use of which of the following principles?

(A) Gas emanating from an explosion will be hotter the more distant it is from the origin.

(B) The wavelength of radiation emitted by a gas as it cools remains constant.

(C) If pressure remains constant, the volume of a gas will decrease as it is cooled.

(D) The volume of a gas will increase as the pressure increases.（C）

(E) As gas cools, its density decreases.

7.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is true of Fabian’s theory?

(A) It did not receive approval until Canizares’ work was published.

(B) It was not widely accepted in the 1970’s.

(C) It did not receive support initially because technology was not available to confirm its tenets.

(D) It supports earlier speculation that intergalactic gas was largely the result of explosions outside the galaxy.（B）

(E) It was widely challenged until x-ray evidence of gas temperatures in NGC 1275 had been presented.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 12:34
Kazuko Nakane’s history of the early Japanese immigrants to central California’s Pajaro Valley focuses on the development of farming communities there from 1890 to 1940. The Issei (first-generation immigrants) were brought into the Pajaro Valley to raise sugar beets. Like Issei laborers in American cities, Japanese men in rural areas sought employment via the “boss” system. The system comprised three elements: immigrant wage laborers; Issei boardinghouses where laborers stayed; and labor contractors, who gathered workers for a particular job and then negotiated a contract between workers and employer. This same system was originally utilized by the Chinese laborers who had preceded the Japanese. A related institution was the “labor club,” which provided job information and negotiated employment contracts and other legal matters, such as the rental of land, for Issei who chose to belong and paid an annual fee to the cooperative for membership.
When the local sugar beet industry collapsed in 1902, the Issei began to lease land from the valley’s strawberry farmers. The Japanese provided the labor and the crop was divided between laborers and landowners. The Issei thus moved quickly from wage-labor employment to sharecropping agreements. A limited amount of economic progress was made as some Issei were able to rent or buy farmland directly, while others joined together to form farming corporations. As the Issei began to operate farms, they began to marry and start families, forming an established Japanese American community. Unfortunately, the Issei’s efforts to attain agricultural independence were hampered by government restrictions, such as the Alien Land Law of 1913. But immigrants could circumvent such exclusionary laws by leasing or purchasing land in their American-born children’s names.
Nakane’s case study of one rural Japanese American community provides valuable information about the lives and experiences of the Issei. It is, however, too particularistic. This limitation derives from Nakane’s methodology—that of oral history—which cannot substitute for a broader theoretical or comparative perspective. Future research might well consider two issues raised by her study: were the Issei of the Pajaro Valley similar to or different from Issei in urban settings, and what variations existed between rural Japanese American communities?

我的天， 又是migration.

这篇文章，也是对综述，先说这个N的研究都是什么，之后就是缺陷，以及进一步研究需要主要什么问题。

总结KN的研究， 1890年的日本人在Pajaro valley的时候，只是租土地。他们找工作有两个途径，一个 boss system, 一个labour club，但是这个是要交钱的。之后，日本人变得有钱了。出现了分化，一部分人自己租土地或买土地。但是另外一部分人却自己合伙做什么东西。之后，就是日本人变得经济能力越来越强，并通过自己孩子规避美国法律不让他们买土地这样事情。

这个分化是，是种经济上的进步，从出卖劳动，到合伙经营。但是合伙经营应该是主要形式。

总结第二段，Issei 从emploee变成了sharecropping agreements. 虽然，有些人开始租地或买地，但是等多人却是做farming corpoorations.

错误 1 4 7

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) defend a controversial hypothesis presented in a history of early Japanese immigrants to California
(B) dismiss a history of an early Japanese settlement in California as narrow and ill constructed
(C) summarize and critique a history of an early Japanese settlement in California
(D) compare a history of one Japanese American community with studies of Japanese settlements throughout California
(E) examine the differences between Japanese and Chinese immigrants to central California in the 1890’s
真的是这样，就是看明白文章，你选项却看不懂。
B 项主要是强调全文主要工作是dismiss, 也看到dismiss 主要是最后一段的内容。
Summarize and critique吧
我为什么会选错，还是因为我觉得 一说到history 就是一个客观的东西。但是文章很明显说的是一个人对这段历史的看法。但是，老外就是同意这样也是a  history, 注意 这个冠词 a.

2. Which of the following best describes a “labor club,” as defined in the passage?
(A) An organization to which Issei were compelled to belong if they sought employment in the Pajaro Valley
(B) An association whose members included labor contractors and landowning “bosses”
(C) A type of farming corporation set up by Issei who had resided in the Pajaro Valley for some time
(D) A cooperative association whose members were dues-paying Japanese laborers
(E) A social organization to which Japanese laborers and their families belonged


3. Based on information in the passage, which of the following statements concerning the Alien Land Law of 1913 is most accurate?
(A) It excluded American-born citizens of Japanese ancestry from landownership.
(B) It sought to restrict the number of foreign immigrants to California.
(C) It successfully prevented Issei from ever purchasing farmland.
(D) It was applicable to first-generation immigrants but not to their American-born children.
(E) It was passed under pressure from the Pajaro Valley’s strawberry farmers.


4. Several Issei families join together to purchase a strawberry field and the necessary farming equipment. Such a situation best exemplifies which of the following, as it is described in the passage?
(A) A typical sharecropping agreement
(B) A farming corporation
(C) A “labor club”
(D) The “boss” system
(E) Circumvention of the Alien Land Law
题干比文章好懂

5. The passage suggests that which of the following was an indirect consequence of the collapse of the sugar beet industry in the Pajaro Valley?
(A) The Issei formed a permanent, family-based community.
(B) Boardinghouses were built to accommodate the Issei.
(C) The Issei began to lease land in their children’s names.
(D) The Issei adopted a labor contract system similar to that used by Chinese immigrants.
(E) The Issei suffered a massive dislocation caused by unemployment.
不会是C的，C是美国法律造成的

6. The author of the passage would most likely agree that which of the following, if it had been included in Nakane’s study, would best remedy the particularistic nature of that study?
(A) A statistical table comparing per capita income of Issei wage laborers and sharecroppers in the Pajaro Valley
(B) A statistical table showing per capita income of Issei in the Pajaro Valley from 1890 to 1940
(C) A statistical table showing rates of farm ownership by Japanese Americans in four central California counties from 1890 to 1940
(D) A discussion of original company documents dealing with the Pajaro Valley sugar beet industry at the turn of the century
(E) Transcripts of interviews conducted with members of the Pajaro Valley Japanese American community who were born in the 1920’s and 1930’s


7. It can be inferred from the passage that, when the Issei began to lease land from the Valley’s strawberry farmers, the Issei most probably did which of the following?
(A) They used profits made from selling the strawberry crop to hire other Issei.
(B) They negotiated such agricultural contracts using the “boss” system.
(C) They paid for the use of the land with a share of the strawberry crop.
(D) They earned higher wages than when they raised sugar beets.
(E) They violated the Alien Land Law.

Kazuko Nakane’s history of the early Japanese immigrants to central California’s Pajaro Valley focuses on the development of farming communities there from 1890 to 1940. The Issei (first-generation immigrants) were brought into the Pajaro Valley to raise sugar beets. Like Issei laborers in American cities, Japanese men in rural areas sought employment via the “boss” system. The system comprised three elements: immigrant wage laborers; Issei boardinghouses (boardinghouse: n.寄宿公寓)where laborers stayed; and labor contractors, who gathered workers for a particular job and then negotiated a contract between workers and employer. This same system was originally utilized by the Chinese laborers who had preceded the Japanese. A related institution was the “labor club,” which provided job information and negotiated employment contracts and other legal matters, such as the rental of land, for Issei who chose to belong and paid an annual fee to the cooperative for membership.

When the local sugar beet industry collapsed in 1902, the Issei began to lease land from the valley’s strawberry farmers. The Japanese provided the labor and the crop was divided between laborers and landowners. The Issei thus moved quickly from wage-labor employment to sharecropping (sharecrop: v.作佃农耕种) agreements. A limited amount of economic progress was made as some Issei were able to rent or buy farmland directly, while others joined together to form farming corporations. As the Issei began to operate farms, they began to marry and start families, forming an established Japanese American community. Unfortunately, the Issei’s efforts to attain agricultural independence were hampered by government restrictions, such as the Alien Land Law of 1913. But immigrants could circumvent such exclusionary laws by leasing or purchasing land in their American-born children’s names.

Nakane’s case study (case study: n.个案研究) of one rural Japanese American community provides valuable information about the lives and experiences of the Issei. It is, however, too particularistic (particularism: a tendency to explain complex social phenomena in terms of a single causative factor). This limitation derives from Nakane’s methodology—that of oral history—which cannot substitute for a broader theoretical or comparative perspective. Future research might well consider two issues raised by her study: were the Issei of the Pajaro Valley similar to or different from Issei in urban settings, and what variations existed between rural Japanese American communities?

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) defend a controversial hypothesis presented in a history of early Japanese immigrants to California

(B) dismiss a history of an early Japanese settlement in California as narrow and ill constructed

(C) summarize and critique a history of an early Japanese settlement in California

(D) compare a history of one Japanese American community with studies of Japanese settlements throughout California（C）

(E) examine the differences between Japanese and Chinese immigrants to central California in the 1890’s

2.Which of the following best describes a “labor club,” as defined in the passage?

(A) An organization to which Issei were compelled to belong if they sought employment in the Pajaro Valley

(B) An association whose members included labor contractors and landowning “bosses”

(C) A type of farming corporation set up by Issei who had resided in the Pajaro Valley for some time

(D) A cooperative association whose members were dues-paying Japanese laborers（D）

(E) A social organization to which Japanese laborers and their families belonged

3.Based on information in the passage, which of the following statements concerning the Alien Land Law of 1913 is most accurate?

(A) It excluded American-born citizens of Japanese ancestry from landownership.

(B) It sought to restrict the number of foreign immigrants to California.

(C) It successfully prevented Issei from ever purchasing farmland.

(D) It was applicable to first-generation immigrants but not to their American-born children.（D）

(E) It was passed under pressure from the Pajaro Valley’s strawberry farmers.

4.Several Issei families join together to purchase a strawberry field and the necessary farming equipment. Such a situation best exemplifies which of the following, as it is described in the passage?

(A) A typical sharecropping agreement

(B) A farming corporation

(C) A “labor club”

(D) The “boss” system（B）

(E) Circumvention of the Alien Land Law

5.The passage suggests that which of the following was an indirect consequence of the collapse of the sugar beet industry in the Pajaro Valley?

(A) The Issei formed a permanent, family-based community.

(B) Boardinghouses were built to accommodate the Issei.

(C) The Issei began to lease land in their children’s names.

(D) The Issei adopted a labor contract system similar to that used by Chinese immigrants.（A）

(E) The Issei suffered a massive dislocation caused by unemployment.

6.The author of the passage would most likely agree that which of the following, if it had been included in Nakane’s study, would best remedy the particularistic nature of that study?

(A) A statistical table comparing per capita income of Issei wage laborers and sharecroppers in the Pajaro Valley

(B) A statistical table showing per capita income of Issei in the Pajaro Valley from 1890 to 1940

(C) A statistical table showing rates of farm ownership by Japanese Americans in four central California counties from 1890 to 1940

(D) A discussion of original company documents dealing with the Pajaro Valley sugar beet industry at the turn of the century（C）

(E) Transcripts of interviews conducted with members of the Pajaro Valley Japanese American community who were born in the 1920’s and 1930’s

7.It can be inferred from the passage that, when the Issei began to lease land from the Valley’s strawberry farmers, the Issei most probably did which of the following?

(A) They used profits made from selling the strawberry crop to hire other Issei.

(B) They negotiated such agricultural contracts using the “boss” system.

(C) They paid for the use of the land with a share of the strawberry crop.

(D) They earned higher wages than when they raised sugar beets.（C）

(E) They violated the Alien Land Law.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 14:59
第 34 篇没有看懂

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 15:34
It can be argued that much consumer dissatisfaction with marketing strategies arises from an inability to aim advertising at only the likely buyers of a given product.
There are three groups of consumers who are affected by the marketing process. First, there is the market segment—people who need the commodity in question. Second, there is the program target—people in the market segment with the “best fit” characteristics for a specific product. Lots of people may need trousers, but only a few qualify as likely buyers of very expensive designer trousers. Finally, there is the program audience―all people who are actually exposed to the marketing program without regard to whether they need or want the product.
These three groups are rarely identical. An exception occurs occasionally in cases where customers for a particular industrial product may be few and easily identifiable. Such customers, all sharing a particular need, are likely to form a meaningful target, for example, all companies with a particular application of the product in question, such as high-speed fillers of bottles at breweries. In such circumstances, direct selling (marketing that reaches only the program target) is likely to be economically justified, and highly specialized trade media exist to expose members of the program target—and only members of the program target—to the marketing program.
Most consumer-goods markets are significantly different. Typically, there are many rather than few potential customers. Each represents a relatively small percentage of potential sales. Rarely do members of a particular market segment group themselves neatly into a meaningful program target. There are substantial differences among consumers with similar demographic characteristics. Even with all the past decade’s advances in information technology, direct selling of consumer goods is rare, and mass marketing—a marketing approach that aims at a wide audience—remains the only economically feasible mode. Unfortunately, there are few media that allow the marketer to direct a marketing program exclusively to the program target. Inevitably, people get exposed to a great deal of marketing for products in which they have no interest and so they become annoyed.

这个文章结构： 提出一个观点，之后解释基于这个观点的行为是行不通的

这个观点是： 消费者对商业营销不满意是因为，这些营销没针对自己应该针对的消费人群。
但是现实，人们的消费都是有这个这样或那样的差异的，很难做到文章三种消费者都是同一群体，又 没有一家媒体可以深入到特定的人群。

错误 2 6 7


1. The passage suggests which of the following about highly specialized trade media?
(A) They should be used only when direct selling is not economically feasible.
(B) They can be used to exclude from the program audience people who are not part of the program target.
(C) They are used only for very expensive products.
(D) They are rarely used in the implementation of marketing programs for industrial products.
(E) They are used only when direct selling has not reached the appropriate market segment.

2. According to the passage, most consumer-goods markets share which of the following characteristics?
I. Customers who differ significantly from each other
II. Large numbers of potential customers
III. Customers who each represent a small percentage of potential sales
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III
substantial differences among consumers

3. The passage suggests which of the following about direct selling?
(A) It is used in the marketing of most industrial products.
(B) It is often used in cases where there is a large program target.
(C) It is not economically feasible for most marketing programs.
(D) It is used only for products for which there are many potential customers.
(E) It is less successful at directing a marketing program to the target audience than are other marketing approaches.


4. The author mentions “trousers” (lines 9 and 11) most likely in order to
(A) make a comparison between the program target and the program audience
(B) emphasize the similarities between the market segment and the program target
(C) provide an example of the way three groups of consumers are affected by a marketing program
(D) clarify the distinction between the market segment and the program target
(E) introduce the concept of the program audience


5. Which of the following best exemplifies the situation described in the last two sentences of the passage?
(A) A product suitable for women age 21-30 is marketed at meetings attended only by potential customers.
(B) A company develops a new product and must develop an advertising campaign to create a market for it.
(C) An idea for a specialized product remains unexplored because media exposure of the product to its few potential customers would be too expensive.
(D) A new product is developed and marketers collect demographic data on potential consumers before developing a specific advertising campaign.
(E) A product suitable for men age 60 and over is advertised in a magazine read by adults of all ages.


6. The passage suggests that which of the following is true about the marketing of industrial products like those discussed in the third paragraph?
(A) The market segment and program target are identical.
(B) Mass marketing is the only feasible way of advertising such products.
(C) The marketing program cannot be directed specifically to the program target.
(D) More customers would be needed to justify the expense of direct selling.
(E) The program audience would necessarily be made up of potential customers, regardless of the marketing approach that was used.
文章是 only economically feasible

7. The passage supports which of the following statements about demographic characteristics and marketing?
(A) Demographic research is of no use in determining how successful a product will be with a particular group of consumers.
(B) A program audience is usually composed of people with similar demographic characteristics.
(C) Psychological factors are more important than demographic factors in defining a market segments.
(D) Consumers with similar demographic characteristics do not necessarily form a meaningful program target.
(E) Collecting demographic data is the first step that marketers take in designing a marketing program.


8. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is true for most consumer-goods markets?
(A) The program audience is smaller than the market segment.
(B) The program audience and the market segment are usually identical.
(C) The market segment and the program target are usually identical.
(D) The program target is larger than the market segment.
(E) The program target and the program audience are not usually identical.

It can be argued that much consumer dissatisfaction with marketing strategies arises from an inability to aim advertising at only the likely buyers of a given product.

There are three groups of consumers who are affected by the marketing process. First, there is the market segment—people who need the commodity in question. Second, there is the program target—people in the market segment with the “best fit” characteristics for a specific product. Lots of people may need trousers, but only a few qualify as likely buyers of very expensive designer trousers. Finally, there is the program audience―all people who are actually exposed to the marketing program without regard to whether they need or want the product.

These three groups are rarely identical. An exception occurs occasionally in cases where customers for a particular industrial product may be few and easily identifiable. Such customers, all sharing a particular need, are likely to form a meaningful target, for example, all companies with a particular application of the product in question, such as high-speed fillers of bottles at breweries. In such circumstances, direct selling (marketing that reaches only the program target) is likely to be economically justified, and highly specialized trade media exist to expose members of the program target—and only members of the program target—to the marketing program.

Most consumer-goods markets are significantly different. Typically, there are many rather than few potential customers. Each represents a relatively small percentage of potential sales. Rarely do members of a particular market segment group themselves neatly into a meaningful program target. There are substantial differences among consumers with similar demographic characteristics. Even with all the past decade’s advances in information technology, direct selling of consumer goods is rare, and mass marketing—a marketing approach that aims at a wide audience—remains the only economically feasible mode. Unfortunately, there are few media that allow the marketer (one that deals in a market; specifically: one that promotes or sells a product or service)to direct a marketing program exclusively to the program target. Inevitably, people get exposed to a great deal of marketing for products in which they have no interest and so they become annoyed.

1.The passage suggests which of the following about highly specialized trade media?

(A) They should be used only when direct selling is not economically feasible.

(B) They can be used to exclude from the program audience people who are not part of the program target.

(C) They are used only for very expensive products.

(D) They are rarely used in the implementation of marketing programs for industrial products.（B）

(E) They are used only when direct selling has not reached the appropriate market segment.

2.According to the passage, most consumer-goods markets share which of the following characteristics?

I.Customers who differ significantly from each other

II.Large numbers of potential customers

III.Customers who each represent a small percentage of potential sales

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（E）

(E) I, II, and III

3.The passage suggests which of the following about direct selling?

(A) It is used in the marketing of most industrial products.

(B) It is often used in cases where there is a large program target.

(C) It is not economically feasible for most marketing programs.

(D) It is used only for products for which there are many potential customers.（C）

(E) It is less successful at directing a marketing program to the target audience than are other marketing approaches.

4.The author mentions “trousers” (lines 9 and 11) most likely in order to

(A) make a comparison between the program target and the program audience

(B) emphasize the similarities between the market segment and the program target

(C) provide an example of the way three groups of consumers are affected by a marketing program

(D) clarify the distinction between the market segment and the program target（D）

(E) introduce the concept of the program audience

5.Which of the following best exemplifies the situation described in the last two sentences of the passage?

(A) A product suitable for women age 21-30 is marketed at meetings attended only by potential customers.

(B) A company develops a new product and must develop an advertising campaign to create a market for it.

(C) An idea for a specialized product remains unexplored because media exposure of the product to its few potential customers would be too expensive.

(D) A new product is developed and marketers collect demographic data on potential consumers before developing a specific advertising campaign.（E）

(E) A product suitable for men age 60 and over is advertised in a magazine read by adults of all ages.

6.The passage suggests that which of the following is true about the marketing of industrial products like those discussed in the third paragraph?

(A) The market segment and program target are identical.

(B) Mass marketing is the only feasible way of advertising such products.

(C) The marketing program cannot be directed specifically to the program target.

(D) More customers would be needed to justify the expense of direct selling.（A）

(E) The program audience would necessarily be made up of potential customers, regardless of the marketing approach that was used.

7.The passage supports which of the following statements about demographic characteristics and marketing?

(A) Demographic research is of no use in determining how successful a product will be with a particular group of consumers.

(B) A program audience is usually composed of people with similar demographic characteristics.

(C) Psychological factors are more important than demographic factors in defining a market segments.

(D) Consumers with similar demographic characteristics do not necessarily form a meaningful program target.（D）

(E) Collecting demographic data is the first step that marketers take in designing a marketing program.

8.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is true for most consumer-goods markets?

(A) The program audience is smaller than the market segment.

(B) The program audience and the market segment are usually identical.

(C) The market segment and the program target are usually identical.

(D) The program target is larger than the market segment.（E）

(E) The program target and the program audience are not usually identical.



It can be argued that much consumer dissatisfaction with marketing strategies arises from an inability to aim advertising at only the likely buyers of a given product.

There are three groups of consumers who are affected by the marketing process. First, there is the market segment—people who need the commodity in question. Second, there is the program target—people in the market segment with the “best fit” characteristics for a specific product. Lots of people may need trousers, but only a few qualify as likely buyers of very expensive designer trousers. Finally, there is the program audience―all people who are actually exposed to the marketing program without regard to whether they need or want the product.

These three groups are rarely identical. An exception occurs occasionally in cases where customers for a particular industrial product may be few and easily identifiable. Such customers, all sharing a particular need, are likely to form a meaningful target, for example, all companies with a particular application of the product in question, such as high-speed fillers of bottles at breweries. In such circumstances, direct selling (marketing that reaches only the program target) is likely to be economically justified, and highly specialized trade media exist to expose members of the program target—and only members of the program target—to the marketing program.

Most consumer-goods markets are significantly different. Typically, there are many rather than few potential customers. Each represents a relatively small percentage of potential sales. Rarely do members of a particular market segment group themselves neatly into a meaningful program target. There are substantial differences among consumers with similar demographic characteristics. Even with all the past decade’s advances in information technology, direct selling of consumer goods is rare, and mass marketing—a marketing approach that aims at a wide audience—remains the only economically feasible mode. Unfortunately, there are few media that allow the marketer (one that deals in a market; specifically: one that promotes or sells a product or service)to direct a marketing program exclusively to the program target. Inevitably, people get exposed to a great deal of marketing for products in which they have no interest and so they become annoyed.

1.The passage suggests which of the following about highly specialized trade media?

(A) They should be used only when direct selling is not economically feasible.

(B) They can be used to exclude from the program audience people who are not part of the program target.

(C) They are used only for very expensive products.

(D) They are rarely used in the implementation of marketing programs for industrial products.（B）

(E) They are used only when direct selling has not reached the appropriate market segment.

2.According to the passage, most consumer-goods markets share which of the following characteristics?

I.Customers who differ significantly from each other

II.Large numbers of potential customers

III.Customers who each represent a small percentage of potential sales

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) II and III only（E）

(E) I, II, and III

3.The passage suggests which of the following about direct selling?

(A) It is used in the marketing of most industrial products.

(B) It is often used in cases where there is a large program target.

(C) It is not economically feasible for most marketing programs.

(D) It is used only for products for which there are many potential customers.（C）

(E) It is less successful at directing a marketing program to the target audience than are other marketing approaches.

4.The author mentions “trousers” (lines 9 and 11) most likely in order to

(A) make a comparison between the program target and the program audience

(B) emphasize the similarities between the market segment and the program target

(C) provide an example of the way three groups of consumers are affected by a marketing program

(D) clarify the distinction between the market segment and the program target（D）

(E) introduce the concept of the program audience

5.Which of the following best exemplifies the situation described in the last two sentences of the passage?

(A) A product suitable for women age 21-30 is marketed at meetings attended only by potential customers.

(B) A company develops a new product and must develop an advertising campaign to create a market for it.

(C) An idea for a specialized product remains unexplored because media exposure of the product to its few potential customers would be too expensive.

(D) A new product is developed and marketers collect demographic data on potential consumers before developing a specific advertising campaign.（E）

(E) A product suitable for men age 60 and over is advertised in a magazine read by adults of all ages.

6.The passage suggests that which of the following is true about the marketing of industrial products like those discussed in the third paragraph?

(A) The market segment and program target are identical.

(B) Mass marketing is the only feasible way of advertising such products.

(C) The marketing program cannot be directed specifically to the program target.

(D) More customers would be needed to justify the expense of direct selling.（A）

(E) The program audience would necessarily be made up of potential customers, regardless of the marketing approach that was used.

7.The passage supports which of the following statements about demographic characteristics and marketing?

(A) Demographic research is of no use in determining how successful a product will be with a particular group of consumers.

(B) A program audience is usually composed of people with similar demographic characteristics.

(C) Psychological factors are more important than demographic factors in defining a market segments.

(D) Consumers with similar demographic characteristics do not necessarily form a meaningful program target.（D）

(E) Collecting demographic data is the first step that marketers take in designing a marketing program.

8.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is true for most consumer-goods markets?

(A) The program audience is smaller than the market segment.

(B) The program audience and the market segment are usually identical.

(C) The market segment and the program target are usually identical.

(D) The program target is larger than the market segment.（E）

(E) The program target and the program audience are not usually identical.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 16:23
Protein synthesis begins when the gene encoding a protein is activated. The gene’s sequence of nucleotides is transcribed into a molecule of messenger RNA (mRNA), which reproduces the information contained in that sequence. Transported outside the nucleus to the cytoplasm, the mRNA is translated into the protein it encodes by an organelle known as a ribosome, which strings together amino acids in the order specified by the sequence of elements in the mRNA molecule. Since the amount of mRNA in a cell determines the amount of the corresponding protein, factors affecting the abundance of mRNA’s play a major part in the normal functioning of a cell by appropriately regulating protein synthesis. For example, an excess of certain proteins can cause cells to proliferate abnormally and become cancerous; a lack of the protein insulin results in diabetes.
Biologists once assumed that the variable rates at which cells synthesize different mRNA’s determine the quantities of mRNA’s and their corresponding proteins in a cell. However, recent investigations have shown that the concentrations of most mRNA’s correlate best, not with their synthesis rate, but rather with the equally variable rates at which cells degrade the different mRNA’s in their cytoplasm. If a cell degrades both a rapidly and a slowly synthesized mRNA slowly, both mRNA’s will accumulate to high levels.
An important example of this phenomenon is the development of red blood cells from their unspecialized parent cells in bone marrow. For red blood cells to accumulate sufficient concentrations of hemoglobin (which transports oxygen) to carry out their main function, the cells’ parent cells must simultaneously produce more of the constituent proteins of hemoglobin and less of most other proteins. To do this, the parent cells halt synthesis of non-hemoglobin mRNA’s in the nucleus and rapidly degrade copies of the non-hemoglobin mRNA’s remaining in the cytoplasm. Halting synthesis of mRNA alone would not affect the quantities of proteins synthesized by the mRNA’s still existing in the cytoplasm. Biologists now believe that most cells can regulate protein production most efficiently by varying both mRNA synthesis and degradation, as developing red cells do, rather than by just varying one or the other（又找不着指代什么了， sysnthesis and degraddation.）.

还是一段一段的来吧，不然不明白呀 。
第一个表黑 gene encodes protain

先写下我对这个gene 到protain的过程，nucleotide 的gene's sequence was transcribed into mRNA. 然后，以这个mRNA为链, 通过ribosome将amino acide 连接就是成了一个protain.

第一段，基因怎么生成protein. 关键的论点是，控制了mRNA的多寡就是控制了一个cell 是不是在健康运转。
第二段，biologists发现，决定mRNA多寡取决于the rate of cell degrading the mRNA.
第三段，以red blood cell 为例子，证明cell can efficiently regulate the production of protein by synthesis and degradation of the mRNA.

整个文章大体上在说一个，一种对mRNA 和protein之间关系的认识。

错误 4 8

1. The passage is primarily concerned with discussing the
(A) influence of mRNA concentrations on the development of red blood cells
(B) role of the synthesis and degradation of mRNA in cell functioning
(C) mechanism by which genes are transcribed into mRNA
(D) differences in mRNA concentrations in cell nuclei and in the cytoplasm
(E) way in which mRNA synthesis contributes to the onset of diabetes


2. The passage suggests that a biologist who held the view described in the first sentence of the second paragraph would most probably also have believed which of the following?
(A) The rate of degradation of specific mRNA’s has little effect on protein concentrations.
(B) The rate of degradation of specific mRNA’s should be studied intensively.
(C) The rates of synthesis and degradation for any given mRNA are normally equal.
(D) Different mRNA’s undergo degradation at widely varying rates.
(E) Most mRNA’s degrade very rapidly.


3. Which of the following best describes the relationship between the second and third paragraphs of the passage?
(A) The second paragraph presents arguments in support of a new theory and the third paragraph presents arguments against that same theory.
(B) The second paragraph describes a traditional view and the third paragraph describes the view that has replaced it on the basis of recent investigations.
(C) The third paragraph describes a specific case of a phenomenon that is described generally in the second paragraph.
(D) The third paragraph describes an investigation that was undertaken to resolve problems raised by phenomena described in the second paragraph.
(E) Both paragraphs describe in detail specific examples of the phenomenon that is introduced in the first paragraph.


4. The accumulation of concentrations of hemoglobin in red blood cells is mentioned in the passage as an example of which of the following?
(A) The effectiveness of simultaneous variation of the rates of synthesis and degradation of mRNA
(B) The role of the ribosome in enabling a parent cell to develop properly into a more specialized form
(C) The importance of activating the genes for particular proteins at the correct moment
(D) The abnormal proliferation of a protein that threatens to make the cell cancerous
(E) The kind of evidence that biologists relied on for support of a view of mRNA synthesis that is now considered obsolete


5. To begin to control a disease caused by a protein deficiency, the passage suggests that a promising experimental treatment would be to administer a drug that would reduce
(A) only the degradation rate for the mRNA of the protein involved
(B) only the synthesis rate for the mRNA of the protein involved
(C) both the synthesis and degradation rates for the mRNA of the protein involved
(D) the incidence of errors in the transcription of mRNA’s from genetic nucleotide sequences
(E) the rate of activity of ribosomes in the cytoplasm of most cells


6. According to the passage, which of the following best describes the current view on the relationship between the synthesis and the degradation of mRNA in regulating protein synthesis?
(A) Biologists have recently become convinced that the ribosome controls the rates of synthesis and degradation of mRNA.
(B) There is no consensus among biologists as to the significance of mRNA degradation in regulating protein synthesis.
(C) The concept of mRNA degradation is so new that most biologists still believe that the vital role in protein regulation belongs to mRNA synthesis.
(D) Degradation of mRNA is now considered to be the key process and mRNA synthesis is no longer believed to play a significant role.
(E) Degradation of mRNA is now considered to be as important as mRNA synthesis has been, and still is, believed to be.


7. According to the passage, which of the following can happen when protein synthesis is not appropriately regulated?
(A) Diabetes can result from errors that occur when the ribosomes translate mRNA into protein.
(B) Cancer can result from an excess of certain proteins and diabetes can result from an insulin deficiency.
(C) A deficiency of red blood cells can occur if bone marrow cells produce too much hemoglobin.
(D) Cancer can be caused by excessively rapid degradation of certain amino acids in the cytoplasm of cells.
(E) Excessive synthesis of one protein can trigger increased degradation of mRNA’s for other proteins and create severe protein imbalances.


8. The passage suggests that a biologist who detected high levels of two proteins in a certain type of cell would be likely to consider which of the following as a possible explanation?
(A) The rate of mRNA degradation for one of the proteins increases as this type of cell develops a more specialized function.
(B) The two proteins are most likely constituents of a complex substance supporting the cells’ specialized function.
(C) The cells are likely to proliferate abnormally and possibly become cancerous due to the levels of these proteins.
(D) The mRNA’s for both proteins are being degraded at a low rate in that type of cell.
(E) The mRNA’s for the two proteins are being synthesized at identical rates in that type of cell.
8 我不确定是C但是别的都是错误的，protein多，可能是 synthesis 高，也可能是degradate ，不确定性很大。
好吧，想想red blood cell 的例子，里面就是有一种protein 的含量很多
an excess of certain proteins can cause cells to proliferate abnormally
我又把这句话搬过来，看看人家说的可是cell proliferate abnormallｙ引起cancer，人家可没有说protein 很多会引起cancer .


Protein synthesis begins when the gene encoding a protein is activated. The gene’s sequence of nucleotides is transcribed into a molecule of messenger RNA (mRNA), which reproduces the information contained in that sequence. Transported outside the nucleus to the cytoplasm, the mRNA is translated into the protein it encodes by an organelle known as a ribosome, which strings together amino acids in the order specified by the sequence of elements in the mRNA molecule. Since the amount of mRNA in a cell determines the amount of the corresponding protein, factors affecting the abundance of mRNA’s play a major part in the normal functioning of a cell by appropriately regulating protein synthesis. For example, an excess of certain proteins can cause cells to proliferate abnormally and become cancerous; a lack of the protein insulin results in diabetes.

Biologists once assumed that the variable rates at which cells synthesize different mRNA’s determine the quantities of mRNA’s and their corresponding proteins in a cell. However, recent investigations have shown that the concentrations of most mRNA’s correlate best, not with their synthesis rate, but rather with the equally variable rates at which cells degrade the different mRNA’s in their cytoplasm. If a cell degrades both a rapidly and a slowly synthesized mRNA slowly, both mRNA’s will accumulate to high levels.

An important example of this phenomenon is the development of red blood cells from their unspecialized parent cells in bone marrow (bone marrow: n. 骨髓). For red blood cells to accumulate sufficient concentrations of hemoglobin (hemoglobin: n.血色素)(which transports oxygen) to carry out their main function, the cells’ parent cells must simultaneously produce more of the constituent proteins of hemoglobin and less of most other proteins. To do this, the parent cells halt synthesis of non-hemoglobin mRNA’s in the nucleus and rapidly degrade copies of the non-hemoglobin mRNA’s remaining in the cytoplasm. Halting synthesis of mRNA alone would not affect the quantities of proteins synthesized by the mRNA’s still existing in the cytoplasm. Biologists now believe that most cells can regulate protein production most efficiently by varying both mRNA synthesis and degradation, as developing red cells do, rather than by just varying one or the other.

1.The passage is primarily concerned with discussing the

(A) influence of mRNA concentrations on the development of red blood cells

(B) role of the synthesis and degradation of mRNA in cell functioning

(C) mechanism by which genes are transcribed into mRNA

(D) differences in mRNA concentrations in cell nuclei and in the cytoplasm（B）

(E) way in which mRNA synthesis contributes to the onset of diabetes

2.The passage suggests that a biologist who held the view described in the first sentence of the second paragraph would most probably also have believed which of the following?

(A) The rate of degradation of specific mRNA’s has little effect on protein concentrations.

(B) The rate of degradation of specific mRNA’s should be studied intensively.

(C) The rates of synthesis and degradation for any given mRNA are normally equal.

(D) Different mRNA’s undergo degradation at widely varying rates.（A）

(E) Most mRNA’s degrade very rapidly.

3.Which of the following best describes the relationship between the second and third paragraphs of the passage?

(A) The second paragraph presents arguments in support of a new theory and the third paragraph presents arguments against that same theory.

(B) The second paragraph describes a traditional view and the third paragraph describes the view that has replaced it on the basis of recent investigations.

(C) The third paragraph describes a specific case of a phenomenon that is described generally in the second paragraph.

(D) The third paragraph describes an investigation that was undertaken to resolve problems raised by phenomena described in the second paragraph.（C）

(E) Both paragraphs describe in detail specific examples of the phenomenon that is introduced in the first paragraph.

4.The accumulation of concentrations of hemoglobin in red blood cells is mentioned in the passage as an example of which of the following?

(A) The effectiveness of simultaneous variation of the rates of synthesis and degradation of mRNA

(B) The role of the ribosome in enabling a parent cell to develop properly into a more specialized form

(C) The importance of activating the genes for particular proteins at the correct moment

(D) The abnormal proliferation of a protein that threatens to make the cell cancerous（A）

(E) The kind of evidence that biologists relied on for support of a view of mRNA synthesis that is now considered obsolete

5.To begin to control a disease caused by a protein deficiency, the passage suggests that a promising experimental treatment would be to administer a drug that would reduce

(A) only the degradation rate for the mRNA of the protein involved

(B) only the synthesis rate for the mRNA of the protein involved

(C) both the synthesis and degradation rates for the mRNA of the protein involved

(D) the incidence of errors in the transcription of mRNA’s from genetic nucleotide sequences（A）

(E) the rate of activity of ribosomes in the cytoplasm of most cells

6.According to the passage, which of the following best describes the current view on the relationship between the synthesis and the degradation of mRNA in regulating protein synthesis?

(A) Biologists have recently become convinced that the ribosome controls the rates of synthesis and degradation of mRNA.

(B) There is no consensus among biologists as to the significance of mRNA degradation in regulating protein synthesis.

(C) The concept of mRNA degradation is so new that most biologists still believe that the vital role in protein regulation belongs to mRNA synthesis.

(D) Degradation of mRNA is now considered to be the key process and mRNA synthesis is no longer believed to play a significant role.（E）

(E) Degradation of mRNA is now considered to be as important as mRNA synthesis has been, and still is, believed to be.

7.According to the passage, which of the following can happen when protein synthesis is not appropriately regulated?

(A) Diabetes can result from errors that occur when the ribosomes translate mRNA into protein.

(B) Cancer can result from an excess of certain proteins and diabetes can result from an insulin deficiency.

(C) A deficiency of red blood cells can occur if bone marrow cells produce too much hemoglobin.

(D) Cancer can be caused by excessively rapid degradation of certain amino acids in the cytoplasm of cells.（B）

(E) Excessive synthesis of one protein can trigger increased degradation of mRNA’s for other proteins and create severe protein imbalances.

8.The passage suggests that a biologist who detected high levels of two proteins in a certain type of cell would be likely to consider which of the following as a possible explanation?

(A) The rate of mRNA degradation for one of the proteins increases as this type of cell develops a more specialized function.

(B) The two proteins are most likely constituents of a complex substance supporting the cells’ specialized function.

(C) The cells are likely to proliferate abnormally and possibly become cancerous due to the levels of these proteins.

(D) The mRNA’s for both proteins are being degraded at a low rate in that type of cell.（D）

(E) The mRNA’s for the two proteins are being synthesized at identical rates in that type of cell.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 17:00
As the economic role of multinational, global corporations expands, the international economic environment will be shaped increasingly not by governments or international institutions, but by the interaction between governments and global corporations, especially in the United States, Europe, and Japan. A significant factorin this shifting world economy is the trend toward regional trading blocs of nations, which has a potentially large effect on the evolution of the world trading system. Two examples of this trend are the United States-Canada Free Trade Agreement (FTA) and Europe 1992, the move by the European Community (EC) to dismantle impediments to the free flow of goods, services, capital, and labor among member states by the end of 1992. However, although numerous political and economic factors were operative in launching the move to integrate the EC’s markets, concern about protectionism within the EC does not appear to have been a major consideration. This is in sharp contrast to the FTA; the overwhelming reason for that bilateral initiative was fear of increasing United States protectionism(这个原因是不是很搞笑呢？). Nonetheless, although markedly different in origin and nature, both regional developments are highly significant in that they will foster integration in the two largest and richest markets of the world, as well as provoke questions about the future direction of the world trading system.

这篇文章就一段呀。
我对factor这个词还真是很犹豫。


文章开头的逻辑是 经济的全球扩张，国际经济环境就是政府和跨国公司的interaction 来决定的。而区域经济是造成目前世界经济局势的一个重要原因。尽管FTA和EC成立的原因不一样，但是他们促进了世界上最富有的两个市场的统一。同时，也提出了问题，及世界贸易体系未来该如何发展。

开始 我看不同开头的逻辑，不知道这文章说什么。现在想想，这篇excerpt 强调的是, regional trading blocs of nations 是什么，它的主要作用。


1. The primary purpose of the passage as a whole is to
(A) describe an initiative and propose its continuance
(B) chronicle a development and illustrate its inconsistencies
(C) identify a trend and suggest its importance
(D) summarize a process and question its significance
(E) report a phenomenon and outline its probable future


2. According to the passage, all of the following are elements of the shifting world economy EXCEPT
(A) an alteration in the role played by governments
(B) an increase in interaction between national governments and international regulatory institutions
(C) an increase in the formation of multinational trading alliances
(D) an increase in integration in the two richest markets of the world
(E) a fear of increasing United States protectionism
the shifting world economy 等多应该是融合，而不是过去的那种government control, 所以B

3. The passage suggests which of the following about global corporations?
(A) Their continued growth depends on the existence of a fully integrated international market.
(B) Their potential effect on the world market is a matter of ongoing concern to international institutions.
(C) They will have to assume quasi-governmental functions if current economic trends continue.
(D) They have provided a model of economic success for regional trading blocs.
(E) Their influence on world economics will continue to increase.
E 这个怎么说呢，在文章里没有。倒是看到最后一句话了吗。 Regional trading bloc provoking the questions ...
再来一句吧，regional trading blocs are one form of economic globalization. 这个东西都是经济学里面的知识了，我读着文章像是说道这个意思，但是不是很明确。
像是这样的文章都是有这么一点，总是含着一些专业性的知识。


4. According to the passage, one similarity between the FTA and Europe 1992 is that they both
(A) overcame concerns about the role of politics in the shifting world economy
(B) originated out of concern over unfair trade practices by other nations
(C) exemplify a trend toward regionalization of commercial markets
(D) place the economic needs of the trading bloc ahead of those of the member nations
(E) help to ensure the continued economic viability of the world community


5. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the European Community prior to the adoption of the Europe 1992 program?
(A) There were restrictions on commerce between the member nations.
(B) The economic policies of the member nations focused on global trading issues.
(C) There were few impediments to trade between the member nations and the United States.
(D) The flow of goods between the member nations and Canada was insignificant.
(E) Relations between multinational corporations and the governments of the member nations were strained.


6. The author discusses the FTA and Europe 1992 most likely in order to
(A) point out the similarities between two seemingly disparate trading alliances
(B) illustrate how different economic motivations produce different types of trading blocs
(C) provide contrasting examples of a trend that is influencing the world economy
(D) identify the most important characteristics of successful economic integration
(E) trace the history of regional trading blocs


7. Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?
(A) An argument is put forth and evidence for and against it given.
(B) An assertion is made and opposing evidence presented.
(C) Two hypotheses are described and shown to inconsistent with one another.
(D) A phenomenon is identified and illustrations of this phenomenon offered.
(E) A specific case of a phenomenon is discussed a generalization drawn.

As the economic role of multinational, global corporations expands, the international economic environment will be shaped increasingly not by governments or international institutions, but by the interaction between governments and global corporations, especially in the United States, Europe, and Japan. A significant factor in this shifting world economy is the trend toward regional trading blocs of nations, which has a potentially large effect on the evolution of the world trading system. Two examples of this trend are the United States-Canada Free Trade Agreement (FTA) and Europe 1992, the move by the European Community (EC) to dismantle impediments to the free flow of goods, services, capital, and labor among member states by the end of 1992. However, although numerous political and economic factors were operative in launching the move to integrate the EC’s markets, concern about protectionism within the EC does not appear to have been a major consideration. This is in sharp contrast to the FTA; the overwhelming reason for that bilateral initiative was fear of increasing United States protectionism. Nonetheless, although markedly different in origin and nature, both regional developments are highly significant in that they will foster integration in the two largest and richest markets of the world, as well as provoke questions about the future direction of the world trading system.

1.The primary purpose of the passage as a whole is to

(A) describe an initiative and propose its continuance

(B) chronicle a development and illustrate its inconsistencies

(C) identify a trend and suggest its importance

(D) summarize a process and question its significance（C）

(E) report a phenomenon and outline its probable future

2.According to the passage, all of the following are elements of the shifting world economy EXCEPT

(A) an alteration in the role played by governments

(B) an increase in interaction between national governments and international regulatory institutions

(C) an increase in the formation of multinational trading alliances

(D) an increase in integration in the two richest markets of the world（B）

(E) a fear of increasing United States protectionism

3.The passage suggests which of the following about global corporations?

(A) Their continued growth depends on the existence of a fully integrated international market.

(B) Their potential effect on the world market is a matter of ongoing concern to international institutions.

(C) They will have to assume quasi-governmental functions if current economic trends continue.

(D) They have provided a model of economic success for regional trading blocs.（E）

(E) Their influence on world economics will continue to increase.

4.According to the passage, one similarity between the FTA and Europe 1992 is that they both

(A) overcame concerns about the role of politics in the shifting world economy

(B) originated out of concern over unfair trade practices by other nations

(C) exemplify a trend toward regionalization of commercial markets

(D) place the economic needs of the trading bloc ahead of those of the member nations（C）

(E) help to ensure the continued economic viability of the world community

5.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the European Community prior to the adoption of the Europe 1992 program?

(A) There were restrictions on commerce between the member nations.

(B) The economic policies of the member nations focused on global trading issues.

(C) There were few impediments to trade between the member nations and the United States.

(D) The flow of goods between the member nations and Canada was insignificant.（A）

(E) Relations between multinational corporations and the governments of the member nations were strained.

6.The author discusses the FTA and Europe 1992 most likely in order to

(A) point out the similarities between two seemingly disparate trading alliances

(B) illustrate how different economic motivations produce different types of trading blocs

(C) provide contrasting examples of a trend that is influencing the world economy

(D) identify the most important characteristics of successful economic integration（C）

(E) trace the history of regional trading blocs

7.Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?

(A) An argument is put forth and evidence for and against it given.

(B) An assertion is made and opposing evidence presented.

(C) Two hypotheses are described and shown to inconsistent with one another.

(D) A phenomenon is identified and illustrations of this phenomenon offered.（D）
(E) A specific case of a phenomenon is discussed a generalization drawn.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 17:35
In Forces of Production, David Noble examines the transformation of the machine-tool industry as the industry moved from reliance on skilled artisans to automation. Noble writes from a Marxist perspective, and his central argument is that management, in its decisions to automate, conspired against labor: the power that the skilled machinists wielded in the industry was intolerable to management. Noble fails to substantiate this claim, although(刚才就是看丢了整个逻辑链就错了)his argument is impressive when he applies the Marxist concept of “de-skilling”—the use of technology to replace skilled labor—to the automation of the machine-tool industry. In automating, the industry moved to computer-based, digitized “numerical-control” (N/C) technology, rather than to artisan-generated “record-playback” (R/P) technology.
Although both systems reduced reliance on skilled labor, Noble clearly prefers R/P, with its inherent acknowledgment of workers’ skills: unlike N/C, its programs were produced not by engineers at their computers, but by skilled machinists, who recorded their own movements to “teach” machines to duplicate those movements. However, Noble’s only evidence of conspiracy is that, although the two approaches were roughly equal in technical merit, management chose N/C. From this he concludes that automation is undertaken not because efficiency demands it or scientific advances allow it, but because it is a tool in the ceaseless war of capitalists against labor.

force of production,

第一段，Noble 认为管理正在谋害工人。他用De-skilling 解释automation of the machine-tool industry让人印象深刻。
第二段，Noble 认为，因为管理者选择NC，没有选择RC，所以他们就是在谋害，所以这种自动化过程就是资本家对付劳动者的一种武器。

错误 5 6
6 不明白是什么意思，题干都没有懂。。

1. The author of the passage is primarily concerned with
(A) reexamining a political position and defending its validity
(B) examining a management decision and defending its necessity
(C) analyzing a scholarly study and pointing out a central weakness
(D) explaining a trend in automation and warning about its dangers
(E) chronicling the history of an industry and criticizing its development


2. According to information in the passage, the term “de-skilling” refers to the
(A) loss of skills to industry when skilled workers are replaced by unskilled laborers
(B) substitution of mechanized processes for labor formerly performed by skilled workers
(C) labor theory that automation is technologically comparable to skilled labor
(D) process by which skilled machinists “teach” machines to perform certain tasks
(E) exclusion of skilled workers from participation in the development of automated technology


3. Which of the following best characterizes the function of the second paragraph of the passage?
(A) It develops a topic introduced in the first paragraph.
(B) It provides evidence to refute a claim presented in the first paragraph.
(C) It gives examples of a phenomenon mentioned in the first paragraph.
(D) It presents a generalization about examples given in the first paragraph.
(E) It suggests two possible solutions to a problem presented in the first paragraph.


4. The passage suggests which of the following about N/C automation in the machine-tool industry?
(A) It displaced fewer skilled workers than R/P automation did.
(B) It could have been implemented either by experienced machinists or by computer engineers.
(C) It was designed without the active involvement skilled machinists.
(D) It was more difficult to design than R/P automation was.
(E) It was technically superior to R/P automation.


5. Which of the following phrases most clearly reveals the attitude of the author of the passage toward Noble’s central argument?
(A) “conspired against” (line 6)
(B) “intolerable to management” (line 7)
(C) “impressive when he applies the Marxist concept” (line 9)
(D) “clearly prefers” (line 16)
(E) “only evidence of conspiracy” (line 21)
only 一出，表示author认为 Noble 根本没有证据能证明自己的观点。


6. The author of the passage commends Noble’s book for which of the following?
(A) Concentrating on skilled as opposed to unskilled workers in its discussion of the machine-tool industry
(B) Offering a generalization about the motives behind the machine-tool industry’s decision to automate
(C) Making an essential distinction between two kinds of technology employed in the machine-tool industry
(D) Calling into question the notion that managers conspired against labor in the automation of the machine-tool industry
(E) Applying the concept of de-skilling to the machine tool industry
这个不会 题干asks for one reason?

7. Which of the following best characterizes Forces of Production as it is described in the passage?
(A) A comparison of two interpretations of how a particular industry evolved
(B) An examination of the origin of a particular concept in industrial economics
(C) A study that points out the weakness of a particular interpretation of an industrial phenomenon
(D) A history of a particular industry from an ideological point of view
(E) An attempt to relate an industrial phenomenon in one industry to a similar phenomenon in another industry
我今天是对history 这个词的意思发生根本改观了。对了呀。

In Forces of Production, David Noble examines the transformation of the machine-tool industry as the industry moved from reliance on skilled artisans to automation. Noble writes from a Marxist perspective, and his central argument is that management, in its decisions to automate, conspired against labor: the power that the skilled machinists wielded in the industry was intolerable to management. Noble fails to substantiate this claim, although his argument is impressive when he applies the Marxist concept of “de-skilling”—the use of technology to replace skilled labor—to the automation of the machine-tool industry. In automating, the industry moved to computer-based, digitized “numerical-control” (N/C) technology, rather than to artisan-generated “record-playback” (R/P) technology.

Although both systems reduced reliance on skilled labor, Noble clearly prefers R/P, with its inherent acknowledgment of workers’ skills: unlike N/C, its programs were produced not by engineers at their computers, but by skilled machinists, who recorded their own movements to “teach” machines to duplicate those movements. However, Noble’s only evidence of conspiracy is that, although the two approaches were roughly equal in technical merit, management chose N/C. From this he concludes that automation is undertaken not because efficiency demands it or scientific advances allow it, but because it is a tool in the ceaseless war of capitalists against labor.

1.The author of the passage is primarily concerned with

(A) reexamining a political position and defending its validity

(B) examining a management decision and defending its necessity

(C) analyzing a scholarly study and pointing out a central weakness

(D) explaining a trend in automation and warning about its dangers（C）

(E) chronicling the history of an industry and criticizing its development

2.According to information in the passage, the term “de-skilling” refers to the

(A) loss of skills to industry when skilled workers are replaced by unskilled laborers

(B) substitution of mechanized processes for labor formerly performed by skilled workers

(C) labor theory that automation is technologically comparable to skilled labor

(D) process by which skilled machinists “teach” machines to perform certain tasks（B）

(E) exclusion of skilled workers from participation in the development of automated technology

3.Which of the following best characterizes the function of the second paragraph of the passage?

(A) It develops a topic introduced in the first paragraph.

(B) It provides evidence to refute a claim presented in the first paragraph.

(C) It gives examples of a phenomenon mentioned in the first paragraph.

(D) It presents a generalization about examples given in the first paragraph.（A）

(E) It suggests two possible solutions to a problem presented in the first paragraph.

4.The passage suggests which of the following about N/C automation in the machine-tool industry?

(A) It displaced fewer skilled workers than R/P automation did.

(B) It could have been implemented either by experienced machinists or by computer engineers.

(C) It was designed without the active involvement skilled machinists.

(D) It was more difficult to design than R/P automation was.（C）

(E) It was technically superior to R/P automation.

5.Which of the following phrases most clearly reveals the attitude of the author of the passage toward Noble’s central argument?

(A) “conspired against” (line 6)

(B) “intolerable to management” (line 7)

(C) “impressive when he applies the Marxist concept” (line 9)

(D) “clearly prefers” (line 16)（E）

(E) “only evidence of conspiracy” (line 21)

6.The author of the passage commends Noble’s book for which of the following?（Q我觉得应该是D）

(A) Concentrating on skilled as opposed to unskilled workers in its discussion of the machine-tool industry

(B) Offering a generalization about the motives behind the machine-tool industry’s decision to automate

(C) Making an essential distinction between two kinds of technology employed in the machine-tool industry

(D) Calling into question the notion that managers conspired against labor in the automation of the machine-tool industry（E）

(E) Applying the concept of de-skilling to the machine tool industry

7.Which of the following best characterizes Forces of Production as it is described in the passage?

(A) A comparison of two interpretations of how a particular industry evolved

(B) An examination of the origin of a particular concept in industrial economics

(C) A study that points out the weakness of a particular interpretation of an industrial phenomenon

(D) A history of a particular industry from an ideological point of view（D）

(E) An attempt to relate an industrial phenomenon in one industry to a similar phenomenon in another industry

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 18:32
The sensation of pain cannot accurately be described as “located” at the point of an injury, or, for that matter（并且）, in any one place in the nerves or brain. Rather, pain signals—and pain relief—are delivered through a highly complex interacting circuitry.
When a cell is injured, a rush of prostaglandins sensitizes nerve endings at the injury. Prostaglandins are chemicals produced in and released from virtually all mammalian cells when they are injured: these are the only pain signals that do not originate in the nervous system. Aspirin and other similar drugs (such as indomethacin and ibuprofen) keep prostaglandins from being made by interfering with an enzyme known as prostaglandin synthetase, or cyclooxygenase. The drugs’ effectiveness against pain is proportional to their success in blocking this enzyme at the site of injury.
From nerve endings at the injury, pain signals move to nerves feeding into the spinal cord. The long, tubular membranes of nerve cells carry electrical impulses. When electrical impulses get to the spinal cord, a pain-signaling chemical known as substance P is released there. Substance P then excites nearby neurons to send impulses to the brain. Local anesthetics such as novocaine and xylocaine work by blocking the electrical transmission along nerves in a particular area. They inhibit the flow of sodium ions through the membranes, making the nerves electrically quiescent; thus no pain signals are sent to the spinal cord or to the brain.
Recent discoveries in the study of pain have involved the brain itself—the supervising organ that notices pain signals and that sends messages down to the spinal cord to regulate incoming pain traffic. Endorphins—the brain’s own morphine—are a class of small peptides that help to block pain signals within the brain itself. The presence of endorphins may also help to explain differences in response to pain signals, since individuals seem to differ in their ability to produce endorphins. It now appears that a number of techniques for blocking chronic pain—such as acupuncture and electrical stimulation of the central brain stem—involve the release of endorphins in the brain and spinal cord.

第一段 痛感是通过一个复杂的回路来完成的。
第二段，细胞一受伤，就是生成Pr. Aspirin 作用机制就是生成一个enzyme，防止Pr在患处生成。
第三段， 神经信息传递过程。pain signals-nerves-electrical impulse-spinal cord-substance B-neurons-impulse-brain.
                                                                         anesthetics
第四段，endorphin 可以阻止脑内的疼痛信号。

1. The passage is primarily concerned with
(A) analyzing ways that enzymes and other chemicals influence how the body feels pain
(B) describing the presence of endorphins in the brain and discussing ways the body blocks pain within the brain itself
(C) describing how pain signals are conveyed in the body and discussing ways in which the pain signals can be blocked
(D) demonstrating that pain can be influenced by acupuncture and electrical stimulation of the central brain stem
(E) differentiating the kinds of pain that occur at different points in the body’s nervous system


2. According to the passage, which of the following is one of the first things to occur when cells are injured?
(A) The flow of electrical impulses through nerve cells at the site of the injury is broken.
(B) The production of substance P traveling through nerve cells to the brain increases.
(C) Endorphins begin to speed up the response of nerve cells at the site of the injury.
(D) A flood of prostaglandins sensitizes nerve endings at the site of the injury.
(E) Nerve cells connected to the spinal cord become electrically quiescent.


3. Of the following, which is most likely attributable to the effect of endorphins as described in the passage?
(A) After an injection of novocaine, a patient has no feeling in the area where the injection was given.
(B) After taking ibuprofen, a person with a headache gets quick relief.
(C) After receiving a local anesthetic, an injured person reports relief in the anesthetized area.
(D) After being given aspirin, a child with a badly scraped elbow feels better.
(E) After acupuncture, a patient with chronic back pain reports that the pain is much less severe.


4. It can be inferred from the passage that if the prostaglandin synthetase is only partially blocked, which of the following is likely to be true?
(A) Some endorphins will be produced, and some pain signals will be intensified.
(B) Some substance P is likely to be produced, so some pain signals will reach the brain.
(C) Some sodium ions will be blocked, so some pain signals will not reach the brain.
(D) Some prostaglandins will be produced, but production of substance P will be prevented.
(E) Some peptides in the brain will receive pain signals and begin to regulate incoming pain traffic.

The sensation of pain (sensation of pain: 痛觉) cannot accurately be described as “located” at the point of an injury, or, for that matter (for that matter: so far as that is concerned), in any one place in the nerves or brain. Rather, pain signals—and pain relief—are delivered through a highly complex interacting circuitry.

When a cell is injured, a rush of prostaglandins sensitizes nerve endings at the injury. Prostaglandins are chemicals produced in and released from virtually all mammalian cells when they are injured: these are the only pain signals that do not originate in the nervous system. Aspirin and other similar drugs (such as indomethacin and ibuprofen) keep prostaglandins from being made by interfering with an enzyme known as prostaglandin synthetase, or cyclooxygenase. The drugs’ effectiveness against pain is proportional to their success in blocking this enzyme at the site of injury.

From nerve endings at the injury, pain signals move to nerves feeding into the spinal cord (spinal cord: n.脊髓). The long, tubular membranes of nerve cells carry electrical impulses. When electrical impulses get to the spinal cord, a pain-signaling chemical known as substance P is released there. Substance P then excites nearby neurons to send impulses to the brain. Local anesthetics such as novocaine and xylocaine work by blocking the electrical transmission along nerves in a particular area. They inhibit the flow of sodium ions through the membranes, making the nerves electrically quiescent; thus no pain signals are sent to the spinal cord or to the brain.

Recent discoveries in the study of pain have involved the brain itself—the supervising organ that notices pain signals and that sends messages down to the spinal cord to regulate incoming pain traffic. Endorphins—the brain’s own morphine—are a class of small peptides that help to block pain signals within the brain itself. The presence of endorphins may also help to explain differences in response to pain signals, since individuals seem to differ in their ability to produce endorphins. It now appears that a number of techniques for blocking chronic pain—such as acupuncture and electrical stimulation of the central brain stem (brain stem: 脑干)—involve the release of endorphins in the brain and spinal cord.

1.The passage is primarily concerned with

(A) analyzing ways that enzymes and other chemicals influence how the body feels pain

(B) describing the presence of endorphins in the brain and discussing ways the body blocks pain within the brain itself

(C) describing how pain signals are conveyed in the body and discussing ways in which the pain signals can be blocked

(D) demonstrating that pain can be influenced by acupuncture and electrical stimulation of the central brain stem（C）

(E) differentiating the kinds of pain that occur at different points in the body’s nervous system

2.According to the passage, which of the following is one of the first things to occur when cells are injured?

(A) The flow of electrical impulses through nerve cells at the site of the injury is broken.

(B) The production of substance P traveling through nerve cells to the brain increases.

(C) Endorphins begin to speed up the response of nerve cells at the site of the injury.

(D) A flood of prostaglandins sensitizes nerve endings at the site of the injury.（D）

(E) Nerve cells connected to the spinal cord become electrically quiescent.

3.Of the following, which is most likely attributable to the effect of endorphins as described in the passage?

(A) After an injection of novocaine, a patient has no feeling in the area where the injection was given.

(B) After taking ibuprofen, a person with a headache gets quick relief.

(C) After receiving a local anesthetic, an injured person reports relief in the anesthetized area.

(D) After being given aspirin, a child with a badly scraped elbow feels better.（E）

(E) After acupuncture, a patient with chronic back pain reports that the pain is much less severe.

4.It can be inferred from the passage that if the prostaglandin synthetase is only partially blocked, which of the following is likely to be true?

(A) Some endorphins will be produced, and some pain signals will be intensified.

(B) Some substance P is likely to be produced, so some pain signals will reach the brain.

(C) Some sodium ions will be blocked, so some pain signals will not reach the brain.

(D) Some prostaglandins will be produced, but production of substance P will be prevented.（B）

(E) Some peptides in the brain will receive pain signals and begin to regulate incoming pain traffic.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-21 18:57
Japanese firms have achieved the highest levels of manufacturing efficiency in the world automobile industry. Some observers of Japan have assumed that Japanese firms use the same manufacturing equipment and techniques as United States firms but have benefited from the unique characteristics of Japanese employees and the Japanese culture. However, if this were true, then one would expect Japanese auto plants in the United States to perform no better than factories run by United States companies. This is not the case; Japanese-run automobile plants located in the United States and staffed by local workers have demonstrated higher levels of productivity when compared with factories owned by United States companies.
Other observers link high Japanese productivity tohigher levels of capital investment per worker. But a historical perspective leads to a different conclusion. When the two top Japanese automobile makers matched andthen doubled United States productivity levels in the mid-sixties, capital investment per employee was comparable to that of United States firms. Furthermore, by the late seventies, the amount of fixed assets required to produce one vehicle was roughly equivalent in Japan and in the United States.
Since capital investment was not higher in Japan, it had to be other factors that led to higher productivity. A more fruitful explanation may lie with Japanese production techniques. Japanese automobile producers did not simply implement conventional processes more effectively: they made critical changes in United States procedures. For instance, the mass-production philosophy of United States automakers encouraged the production of huge lots of cars in order to utilize fully expensive, component-specific equipment and to occupy fully workers who have been trained to execute one operation efficiently. Japanese automakers chose to make small-lot production feasible by introducing several departures from United States practices, including the use of flexible equipment that could be altered easily to do several different production tasks and the training of workers in multiple jobs. Automakers could schedule the production of different components or models on single machines, thereby eliminating the need to store the buffer stocks of extra components that result when specialized equipment and workers are kept constantly active.

第一段，日本汽车效率高不是因为the unique character of Janpanese employee and Janpanese culture.
第二段，否认这个高效是因为capital investment
第三段，认为日本别于美国的高效是，没有选择专业化，而是灵活生产。

错误 1 3
3 不确定

1. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) present the major steps of a process
(B) clarify an ambiguity
(C) chronicle a dispute
(D) correct misconceptions
(E) defend an accepted approach

澄清一些错误观念，注意BD的区别， a ambiguity, misconveptions. 当然是复数的了，这么多错误的想法。

2. The author suggests that if the observers of Japan mentioned in line 3 were correct, which of the following would be the case?
(A) The equipment used in Japanese automobile plants would be different from the equipment used in United States plants.
(B) Japanese workers would be trained to do several different production jobs.
(C) Culture would not have an influence on the productivity levels of workers.
(D) The workers in Japanese-run plants would have higher productivity levels regardless of where they were located.
(E) The production levels of Japanese-run plants located in the United States would be equal to those of plants run by United States companies.

3. Which of the following statements concerning the productivity levels of automakers can be inferred from the passage?
(A) Prior to the 1960’s, the productivity levels of the top Japanese automakers were exceeded by those of United States automakers.
(B) The culture of a country has a large effect on the productivity levels of its automakers.
(C) During the late 1970’s and early 1980’s, productivity levels were comparable in Japan and the United States.
(D) The greater the number of cars that are produced in a single lot, the higher a plant’s productivity level.
(E) The amount of capital investment made by automobile manufacturers in their factories determines the level of productivity.
When the two top Japanese automobile makers matched andthen doubled United States productivity levels in the mid-sixties
我是不是读错了，这句暗含的意思，美国in the mid-sixties automobile productivity 是最高的。


4. According to the passage, which of the following statements is true of Japanese automobile workers?
(A) Their productivity levels did not equal those of United States automobile workers until the late seventies.
(B) Their high efficiency levels are a direct result of cultural influences.
(C) They operate component-specific machinery.
(D) They are trained to do more than one job.
(E) They produce larger lots of cars than do workers in United States factories.


5. Which of the following best describes the organization of the first paragraph?
(A) A thesis is presented and supporting examples are provided.
(B) Opposing views are presented, classified, and then reconciled.
(C) A fact is stated, and an explanation is advanced and then refuted.
(D) A theory is proposed, considered, and then amended.
(E) An opinion is presented, qualified, and then reaffirmed.


6. It can be inferred from the passage that one problem associated with the production of huge lots of cars is which of the following?
(A) The need to manufacture flexible machinery and equipment
(B) The need to store extra components not required for immediate use
(C) The need for expensive training programs for workers, which emphasize the development of facility in several production jobs
(D) The need to alter conventional mass-production processes
(E) The need to increase the investment per vehicle in order to achieve high productivity levels


7. Which of the following statements is supported by information stated in the passage?
(A) Japanese and United States automakers differ in their approach to production processes.
(B) Japanese automakers have perfected the use of single-function equipment.
(C) Japanese automakers invest more capital per employee than do United States automakers.
(D) United States-owned factories abroad have higher production levels than do Japanese owned plants in the United States.
(E) Japanese automakers have benefited from the cultural heritage of their workers.


8. With which of the following predictive statement regarding Japanese automakers would the author most likely agree?
(A) The efficiency levels of the Japanese automakers will decline if they become less flexible in their approach to production.
(B) Japanese automakers productivity levels double during the late 1990’s.
(C) United States automakers will originate new production processes before Japanese automakers do.
(D) Japanese automakers will hire fewer workers than will United States automakers because each worker is required to perform several jobs.
(E) Japanese automakers will spend less on equipment repairs than will United States automakers because Japanese equipment can be easily altered.


Japanese firms have achieved the highest levels of manufacturing efficiency in the world automobile industry. Some observers of Japan have assumed that Japanese firms use the same manufacturing equipment and techniques as United States firms but have benefited from the unique characteristics of Japanese employees and the Japanese culture. However, if this were true, then one would expect Japanese auto plants in the United States to perform no better than factories run by United States companies. This is not the case; Japanese-run automobile plants located in the United States and staffed by local workers have demonstrated higher levels of productivity when compared with factories owned by United States companies.

Other observers link high Japanese productivity to higher levels of capital investment per worker. But a historical perspective leads to a different conclusion. When the two top Japanese automobile makers matched and then doubled United States productivity levels in the mid-sixties, capital investment per employee was comparable to that of United States firms. Furthermore, by the late seventies, the amount of fixed assets required to produce one vehicle was roughly equivalent in Japan and in the United States.

Since capital investment was not higher in Japan, it had to be other factors that led to higher productivity. A more fruitful explanation may lie with Japanese production techniques. Japanese automobile producers did not simply implement conventional processes more effectively: they made critical changes in United States procedures. For instance, the mass-production philosophy of United States automakers encouraged the production of huge lots of cars in order to utilize fully expensive, component-specific equipment and to occupy fully workers who have been trained to execute one operation efficiently. Japanese automakers chose to make small-lot production feasible by introducing several departures from United States practices, including the use of flexible equipment that could be altered easily to do several different production tasks and the training of workers in multiple jobs. Automakers could schedule the production of different components or models on single machines, thereby eliminating the need to store the buffer stocks of extra components that result when specialized equipment and workers are kept constantly active.

1.The primary purpose of the passage is to

(A) present the major steps of a process

(B) clarify an ambiguity

(C) chronicle a dispute

(D) correct misconceptions（D）

(E) defend an accepted approach

2.The author suggests that if the observers of Japan mentioned in line 3 were correct, which of the following would be the case?

(A) The equipment used in Japanese automobile plants would be different from the equipment used in United States plants.

(B) Japanese workers would be trained to do several different production jobs.

(C) Culture would not have an influence on the productivity levels of workers.

(D) The workers in Japanese-run plants would have higher productivity levels regardless of where they were located.（E）

(E) The production levels of Japanese-run plants located in the United States would be equal to those of plants run by United States companies.

3.Which of the following statements concerning the productivity levels of automakers can be inferred from the passage?

(A) Prior to the 1960’s, the productivity levels of the top Japanese automakers were exceeded by those of United States automakers.

(B) The culture of a country has a large effect on the productivity levels of its automakers.

(C) During the late 1970’s and early 1980’s, productivity levels were comparable in Japan and the United States.

(D) The greater the number of cars that are produced in a single lot, the higher a plant’s productivity level.（A）

(E) The amount of capital investment made by automobile manufacturers in their factories determines the level of productivity.

4.According to the passage, which of the following statements is true of Japanese automobile workers?

(A) Their productivity levels did not equal those of United States automobile workers until the late seventies.

(B) Their high efficiency levels are a direct result of cultural influences.

(C) They operate component-specific machinery.

(D) They are trained to do more than one job.（D）

(E) They produce larger lots of cars than do workers in United States factories.

5.Which of the following best describes the organization of the first paragraph?

(A) A thesis is presented and supporting examples are provided.

(B) Opposing views are presented, classified, and then reconciled.

(C) A fact is stated, and an explanation is advanced and then refuted.

(D) A theory is proposed, considered, and then amended.（C）

(E) An opinion is presented, qualified, and then reaffirmed.

6.It can be inferred from the passage that one problem associated with the production of huge lots of cars is which of the following?

(A) The need to manufacture flexible machinery and equipment

(B) The need to store extra components not required for immediate use

(C) The need for expensive training programs for workers, which emphasize the development of facility in several production jobs

(D) The need to alter conventional mass-production processes（B）

(E) The need to increase the investment per vehicle in order to achieve high productivity levels

7.Which of the following statements is supported by information stated in the passage?

(A) Japanese and United States automakers differ in their approach to production processes.

(B) Japanese automakers have perfected the use of single-function equipment.

(C) Japanese automakers invest more capital per employee than do United States automakers.

(D) United States-owned factories abroad have higher production levels than do Japanese owned plants in the United States.（A）

(E) Japanese automakers have benefited from the cultural heritage of their workers.

8.With which of the following predictive statement regarding Japanese automakers would the author most likely agree?

(A) The efficiency levels of the Japanese automakers will decline if they become less flexible in their approach to production.

(B) Japanese automakers productivity levels double during the late 1990’s.

(C) United States automakers will originate new production processes before Japanese automakers do.

(D) Japanese automakers will hire fewer workers than will United States automakers because each worker is required to perform several jobs.（A）

(E) Japanese automakers will spend less on equipment repairs than will United States automakers because Japanese equipment can be easily altered.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 11:25

---

作者: steven    时间: 2012-8-22 11:28
路过，LZ加油哦~

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 11:29
enen

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 14:02
It was once believed that the brain was independent of metabolic processes occurring elsewhere in the body. In recent studies, however, we have discovered that the production and release in brain neurons of the neurotransmitter serotonin (neurotransmitters are compounds that neurons use to transmit signals to other cells) depend directly on the food that the body processes.
Our first studies sought to determine whether the increase in serotonin observed in rats given a large injection of the amino acid tryptophan might also occur after rats ate meals that change tryptophan levels in the blood. We found that, immediately after the rats began to eat, parallel elevations occurred in blood tryptophan, brain tryptophan, and brain serotonin levels. These findings suggested that the production and release of serotonin in brain neurons were normally coupled with blood-tryptophan increases. In later studies we found that injecting insulin into a rat’s bloodstream also caused parallel elevations in blood and brain tryptophan levels and in serotonin levels. We then decided to see whether the secretion of the animal’s own insulin similarly affected serotonin production. We gave the rats a carbohydrate-containing meal that we knew would elicit insulin secretion. As we had hypothesized, the blood tryptophan level and the concentrations of tryptophan serotonin in the brain increased after the meal.
Surprisingly, however, when we added a large amount of protein to the meal, brain tryptophan and serotonin levels fell. Since protein contains tryptophan, why should it depress brain tryptophan levels? The answer lies in the mechanism that provides blood tryptophan to the brain cells. This same mechanism also provides the brain cells with other amino acids found in protein, such as tyrosine and Leucine. The consumption of protein increases blood concentration of the other amino acids much more（原来是在血液里溶解成氨基酸呀）, proportionately, than it does that of tryptophan. The more protein in the meal, the lower is the ratio of the resulting blood-tryptophan concentration to the concentration of competing amino acids, and the more slowly is tryptophan provided to the brain. Thus the more protein in a meal, the less serotonin subsequently produced and released.

我像是一直分不清楚 amino acid and protein。 回去找到的
先写下我对这个gene 到protain的过程，nucleotide 的gene's sequence was transcribed into mRNA. 然后，以这个mRNA为链, 通过ribosome将amino acide 连接就是成了一个protain.
amino acid 来自食物，之后才能在体内进行合成。
还有呀，食物蛋白和人体蛋白不是一个东西。资料说，食物蛋白，变成氨基酸被人体吸收，之后再合成为人体的蛋白。


第一段，大脑神经元的 neurotransmitter 的产生和食物摄取息息相关的。（看完这个，我想说考试的时候一定不要减肥，不然考不好的。）
后面两段，正是在验证我口号里面的东西。食物中的蛋白质和脑子里的neurotransmitter成反向关系。

错误 2 3

1. Which of the following titles best summarizes the contents of the passage?
(A) Neurotransmitters: Their Crucial Function in Cellular Communication
(B) Diet and Survival: An Old Relationship Reexamined
(C) The Blood Supply and the Brain: A Reciprocal Dependence
(D) Amino Acids and Neurotransmitters: The Connection Between Serotonin Levels and Tyrosine
(E) The Effects of Food Intake on the Production and Release of Serotonin: Some Recent Findings


2. According to the passage, the speed with which tryptophan is provided to the brain cells of a rat varies with the
(A) amount of protein present in a meal
(B) concentration of serotonin in the brain before a meal
(C) concentration of leucine in the blood rather than on the concentration of tyrosine in the blood after a meal
(D) concentration of tryptophan in the brain before a meal
(E) number of serotonin-containing neurons present in the brain before a meal
题干没有读懂

3. According to the passage, when the authors began their first studies, they were aware that
(A) they would eventually need to design experiments that involved feeding rats high concentrations of protein
(B) tryptophan levels in the blood were difficult to monitor with accuracy
(C) serotonin levels increased after rats were fed meals rich in tryptophan
(D) there were many neurotransmitters whose production was dependent on metabolic processes elsewhere in the body
(E) serotonin levels increased after rats were injected with a large amount of tryptophan
CE 细节比较
注意 题干问什么，the authors werer aware what ?

4. According to the passage, one reason that the authors gave rats carbohydrates was to
(A) depress the rats’ tryptophan levels
(B) prevent the rats from contracting diseases
(C) cause the rats to produce insulin
(D) demonstrate that insulin is the most important substance secreted by the body
(E) compare the effect of carbohydrates with the effect of proteins


5. According to the passage, the more protein a rat consumes, the lower will be the
(A) ratio of the rat’s blood-tryptophan concentration to the amount of serotonin produced and released in the rat’s brain
(B) ratio of the rat’s blood-tryptophan concentration to the concentration in its blood of the other amino acids contained in the protein
(C) ratio of the rat’s blood-tyrosine concentration to its blood-leucine concentration
(D) number of neurotransmitters of any kind that the rat will produce and release
(E) number of amino acids the rat’s blood will contain


6. The authors’ discussion of the “mechanism that provides blood tryptophan to the brain cells” (lines 31-32) is meant to
(A) stimulate further research studies
(B) summarize an area of scientific investigation
(C) help explain why a particular research finding was obtained
(D) provide supporting evidence for a controversial scientific theory
(E) refute the conclusions of a previously mentioned research study


7. According to the passage, an injection of insulin was most similar in its effect on rats to an injection of
(A) tyrosine
(B) leucine
(C) blood
(D) tryptophan
(E) protein


8. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following would be LEAST likely to be a potential source of aid to a patient who was not adequately producing and releasing serotonin?
(A) Meals consisting almost exclusively of protein
(B) Meals consisting almost exclusively of carbohydrates
(C) Meals that would elicit insulin secretion
(D) Meals that had very low concentrations of tyrosine
(E) Meals that had very low concentrations of leucine
多蛋白的食物

9. It can be inferred from the passage that the authors initially held which of the following hypotheses about what would happen when they fed large amounts of protein to rats?
(A) The rats’ brain serotonin levels would not decrease.
(B) The rats’ brain tryptophan levels would decrease.
(C) The rats’ tyrosine levels would increase less quickly than would their leucine levels.
(D) The rats would produce more insulin.
(E) The rats would produce neurotransmitters other than serotonin.

It was once believed that the brain was independent of metabolic processes occurring elsewhere in the body. In recent studies, however, we have discovered that the production and release in brain neurons of the neurotransmitter serotonin (serotonin: n.含于血液中的复合胺) (neurotransmitters are compounds that neurons use to transmit signals to other cells) depend directly on the food that the body processes.

Our first studies sought to determine whether the increase in serotonin observed in rats given a large injection of the amino acid tryptophan might also occur after rats ate meals that change tryptophan levels in the blood. We found that, immediately after the rats began to eat, parallel elevations occurred in blood tryptophan, brain tryptophan, and brain serotonin levels. These findings suggested that the production and release of serotonin in brain neurons were normally coupled with blood-tryptophan increases. In later studies we found that injecting insulin into a rat’s bloodstream also caused parallel elevations in blood and brain tryptophan levels and in serotonin levels. We then decided to see whether the secretion of the animal’s own insulin similarly affected serotonin production. We gave the rats a carbohydrate-containing meal that we knew would elicit insulin secretion. As we had hypothesized, the blood tryptophan level and the concentrations of tryptophan serotonin in the brain increased after the meal.

Surprisingly, however, when we added a large amount of protein to the meal, brain tryptophan and serotonin levels fell. Since protein contains tryptophan, why should it depress brain tryptophan levels? The answer lies in the mechanism that provides blood tryptophan to the brain cells. This same mechanism also provides the brain cells with other amino acids found in protein, such as tyrosine and Leucine. The consumption of protein increases blood concentration of the other amino acids much more, proportionately, than it does that of tryptophan. The more protein in the meal, the lower is the ratio of the resulting blood-tryptophan concentration to the concentration of competing amino acids, and the more slowly is tryptophan provided to the brain. Thus the more protein in a meal, the less serotonin subsequently produced and released.

1.Which of the following titles best summarizes the contents of the passage?

(A) Neurotransmitters: Their Crucial Function in Cellular Communication

(B) Diet and Survival: An Old Relationship Reexamined

(C) The Blood Supply and the Brain: A Reciprocal Dependence

(D) Amino Acids and Neurotransmitters: The Connection Between Serotonin Levels and Tyrosine（E）

(E) The Effects of Food Intake on the Production and Release of Serotonin: Some Recent Findings

2.According to the passage, the speed with which tryptophan is provided to the brain cells of a rat varies with the

(A) amount of protein present in a meal

(B) concentration of serotonin in the brain before a meal

(C) concentration of leucine in the blood rather than on the concentration of tyrosine in the blood after a meal

(D) concentration of tryptophan in the brain before a meal（A）

(E) number of serotonin-containing neurons present in the brain before a meal

3.According to the passage, when the authors began their first studies, they were aware that

(A) they would eventually need to design experiments that involved feeding rats high concentrations of protein

(B) tryptophan levels in the blood were difficult to monitor with accuracy

(C) serotonin levels increased after rats were fed meals rich in tryptophan

(D) there were many neurotransmitters whose production was dependent on metabolic processes elsewhere in the body（E）

(E) serotonin levels increased after rats were injected with a large amount of tryptophan

4.According to the passage, one reason that the authors gave rats carbohydrates was to

(A) depress the rats’ tryptophan levels

(B) prevent the rats from contracting diseases

(C) cause the rats to produce insulin

(D) demonstrate that insulin is the most important substance secreted by the body（C）

(E) compare the effect of carbohydrates with the effect of proteins

5.According to the passage, the more protein a rat consumes, the lower will be the

(A) ratio of the rat’s blood-tryptophan concentration to the amount of serotonin produced and released in the rat’s brain

(B) ratio of the rat’s blood-tryptophan concentration to the concentration in its blood of the other amino acids contained in the protein

(C) ratio of the rat’s blood-tyrosine concentration to its blood-leucine concentration

(D) number of neurotransmitters of any kind that the rat will produce and release（B）

(E) number of amino acids the rat’s blood will contain

6.The authors’ discussion of the “mechanism that provides blood tryptophan to the brain cells” (lines 31-32) is meant to

(A) stimulate further research studies

(B) summarize an area of scientific investigation

(C) help explain why a particular research finding was obtained

(D) provide supporting evidence for a controversial scientific theory（C）

(E) refute the conclusions of a previously mentioned research study

7.According to the passage, an injection of insulin was most similar in its effect on rats to an injection of

(A) tyrosine

(B) leucine

(C) blood

(D) tryptophan（D）

(E) protein

8.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following would be LEAST likely to be a potential source of aid to a patient who was not adequately producing and releasing serotonin?

(A) Meals consisting almost exclusively of protein

(B) Meals consisting almost exclusively of carbohydrates

(C) Meals that would elicit insulin secretion

(D) Meals that had very low concentrations of tyrosine（A）

(E) Meals that had very low concentrations of leucine

9.It can be inferred from the passage that the authors initially held which of the following hypotheses about what would happen when they fed large amounts of protein to rats?

(A) The rats’ brain serotonin levels would not decrease.

(B) The rats’ brain tryptophan levels would decrease.

(C) The rats’ tyrosine levels would increase less quickly than would their leucine levels.

(D) The rats would produce more insulin.（A）

(E) The rats would produce neurotransmitters other than serotonin.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 15:55
Historians sometimes forget that history is continually being made and experienced before it is studied, interpreted, and read. These latter activities have their own history, of course, which may impinge in unexpected ways on public events. It is difficult to predict when“new pasts” will overturn established historical interpretations and change the course of history.
In the fall of 1954, for example, C. Vann Woodward delivered a lecture series at the University of Virginia which challenged the prevailing dogma concerning the history, continuity, and uniformity of racial segregation in the South. He argued that the Jim Crow laws of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries not only codified traditional practice but also were a determined effort to erase the considerable progress made by Black people during and after Reconstruction in the 1870’s. This revisionist view of Jim Crow legislation grew in part from the research that Woodward had done for the NAACP legal campaign during its preparation for Brown v. Board of Education. The Supreme Court had issued its ruling in this epochal desegregation case a few months before Woodward’s lectures.
The lectures were soon published as a book, The Strange Career of Jim Crow. Ten years later, in a preface to the second revised edition, Woodward confessed with ironic modesty that the first edition “had begun to suffer under some of the handicaps that might be expected in a history of the American Revolution published in 1776.”That was a bit like hearing Thomas Paine apologize for the timing of his pamphlet Common Sense, which had a comparable impact. Although Common Sense also had a mass readership, Paine had intended to reach and inspire: he was not a historian, and thus not concerned with accuracy or the dangers of historical anachronism. Yet, like Paine, Woodward had an unerring sense of the revolutionary moment, and of how historical evidence could undermine the mythological tradition that was crushing the dreams of new social possibilities. Martin Luther King, Jr., testified to the profound effect of The Strange Career of Jim Crow on the civil rights movement by praising the book and quoting it frequently.

histroy 了， 我有些不能讲第一段，和后面的内容放在一起理解。第一段想表达是是不是，历史是连续的。在解释历史的时候，你不能割裂的解释。这种割裂的解释会对公共造成很坏的影响。这样的话，Woodward在它书中对Jim Crow laws 的指控就是在割裂历史，没有结合1776年的美国历史。woodward自己创造了一个 mythological tradition, and this mythological tration was crushing the dreams of new social possiblilities.

Jim crow laws 是支持segregation的

第一段， 解释历史也有自己的历史，会对历史本身产生影响
第二段，Woodward认为 Jim Crow laws 抹杀了黑人在Reconstruction中取得的进步.
后面不写了，不知道在表达什么

错误 1 2 3 5

额。。。。
这篇放弃。

1. The “new pasts” mentioned in line 6 can best be described as the
(A) occurrence of events extremely similar to past events
(B) history of the activities of studying, interpreting, and reading new historical writing
(C) change in people’s understanding of the past due to more recent historical writing
(D) overturning of established historical interpretations by politically motivated politicians
(E) difficulty of predicting when a given historical interpretation will be overturned
I am confused by the phrase "new pasts" too during my reading. And this new past is one interpration of history.

2. It can be inferred from the passage that the “prevailing dogma” (line 10) held that
(A) Jim Crow laws were passed to give legal status to well-established discriminatory practices in the South
(B) Jim Crow laws were passed to establish order and uniformity in the discriminatory practices of different southern states
(C) Jim Crow laws were passed to erase the social gains that Black people had achieved since Reconstruction
(D) the continuity of racial segregation in the South was disrupted by passage of Jim Crow laws
(E) the Jim Crow laws of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries were passed to reverse the effect of earlier Jim Crow
这个题好绕呀，知道 Wooward 反对prevailing dogma, woodward 认为那个law 是erazing the progress。 所以，就是说 prevailing dogma 是认为这个law 是肯定 progression made by the Black.
此外，还有一个问题。这个previaling dogma 和 这个law 到底什么关系。应该是这个law 体现了previaling dogma


3. Which of the following is the best example of writing that is likely to be subject to the kinds of “handicaps” referred to in line 27?
(A) A history of an auto manufacturing plant written by an employee during an auto-buying boom
(B) A critique of a statewide school-desegregation plan written by an elementary school teacher in that state
(C) A newspaper article assessing the historical importance of a United States President written shortly after the President has taken office
(D) A scientific paper describing the benefits of a certain surgical technique written by the surgeon who developed the technique
(E) Diary entries narrating the events of a battle written by a soldier who participated in the battle
天呢，找和desegregation相关的

4. The passage suggests that C. Vann Woodward and Thomas Paine were similar in all of the following ways EXCEPT:
(A) Both had works published in the midst of important historical events.
(B) Both wrote works that enjoyed widespread popularity.
(C) Both exhibited an understanding of the relevance of historical evidence to contemporary issues.
(D) The works of both had a significant effect on events following their publication.
(E) Both were able to set aside worries about historical anachronism in order to reach and inspire.
不同在于，wooodward 解读的是历史

5. The attitude of the author of the passage toward the work of C. Vann Woodward is best described as one of
(A) respectful regard
(B) qualified approbation
(C) implied skepticism
(D) pointed criticism
(E) fervent advocacy


6. Which of the following best describes the new idea expressed by C. Vann Woodward in his University of Virginia lectures in 1954?
(A) Southern racial segregation was continuous and uniform.
(B) Black people made considerable progress only after Reconstruction.
(C) Jim Crow legislation was conventional in nature.
(D) Jim Crow laws did not go as far in codifying traditional practice as they might have.
(E) Jim Crow laws did much more than merely reinforce a tradition of segregation.

Historians sometimes forget that history is continually being made and experienced before it is studied, interpreted, and read. These latter activities have their own history, of course, which may impinge in unexpected ways on public events. It is difficult to predict when “new pasts” will overturn established historical interpretations and change the course of history.

In the fall of 1954, for example, C. Vann Woodward delivered a lecture series at the University of Virginia which challenged the prevailing dogma concerning the history, continuity, and uniformity of racial segregation in the South. He argued that the Jim Crow (Jim Crow: n. 〈贬〉黑人) laws of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries not only codified traditional practice but also were a determined effort to erase the considerable progress made by Black people during and after Reconstruction in the 1870’s. This revisionist view of Jim Crow legislation grew in part from the research that Woodward had done for the NAACP legal campaign during its preparation for Brown v. Board of Education. The Supreme Court had issued its ruling in this epochal desegregation case a few months before Woodward’s lectures.

The lectures were soon published as a book, The Strange Career of Jim Crow. Ten years later, in a preface to the second revised edition, Woodward confessed with ironic modesty that the first edition “had begun to suffer under some of the handicaps that might be expected in a history of the American Revolution published in 1776.” That was a bit like hearing Thomas Paine apologize for the timing of his pamphlet Common Sense, which had a comparable impact. Although Common Sense also had a mass readership, Paine had intended to reach and inspire: he was not a historian, and thus not concerned with accuracy or the dangers of historical anachronism. Yet, like Paine, Woodward had an unerring sense of the revolutionary moment, and of how historical evidence could undermine the mythological tradition that was crushing the dreams of new social possibilities. Martin Luther King, Jr., testified to the profound effect of The StrangeCareer of Jim Crow on the civil rights movement by praising the book and quoting it frequently.

1.The “new pasts” mentioned in line 6 can best be described as the

(A) occurrence of events extremely similar to past events

(B) history of the activities of studying, interpreting, and reading new historical writing

(C) change in people’s understanding of the past due to more recent historical writing

(D) overturning of established historical interpretations by politically motivated politicians（C）

(E) difficulty of predicting when a given historical interpretation will be overturned

2.It can be inferred from the passage that the “prevailing dogma” (line 10) held that

(A) Jim Crow laws were passed to give legal status to well-established discriminatory practices in the South

(B) Jim Crow laws were passed to establish order and uniformity in the discriminatory practices of different southern states

(C) Jim Crow laws were passed to erase the social gains that Black people had achieved since Reconstruction

(D) the continuity of racial segregation in the South was disrupted by passage of Jim Crow laws（D）

(E) the Jim Crow laws of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries were passed to reverse the effect of earlier Jim Crow laws

3.Which of the following is the best example of writing that is likely to be subject to the kinds of “handicaps” referred to in line 27?

(A) A history of an auto manufacturing plant written by an employee during an auto-buying boom

(B) A critique of a statewide school-desegregation plan written by an elementary school teacher in that state

(C) A newspaper article assessing the historical importance of a United States President written shortly after the President has taken office

(D) A scientific paper describing the benefits of a certain surgical technique written by the surgeon who developed the technique（C）

(E) Diary entries narrating the events of a battle written by a soldier who participated in the battle

4.The passage suggests that C. Vann Woodward and Thomas Paine were similar in all of the following ways EXCEPT:

(A) Both had works published in the midst of important historical events.

(B) Both wrote works that enjoyed widespread popularity.

(C) Both exhibited an understanding of the relevance of historical evidence to contemporary issues.

(D) The works of both had a significant effect on events following their publication.（E）

(E) Both were able to set aside worries about historical anachronism in order to reach and inspire.

5.The attitude of the author of the passage toward the work of C. Vann Woodward is best described as one of

(A) respectful regard

(B) qualified approbation (approbation: n.官方批准, 认可, 嘉许)

(C) implied skepticism

(D) pointed criticism（B）

(E) fervent advocacy

6.Which of the following best describes the new idea expressed by C. Vann Woodward in his University of Virginia lectures in 1954?

(A) Southern racial segregation was continuous and uniform.

(B) Black people made considerable progress only after Reconstruction.

(C) Jim Crow legislation was conventional in nature.

(D) Jim Crow laws did not go as far in codifying traditional practice as they might have.（E）

(E) Jim Crow laws did much more than merely reinforce a tradition of segregation.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 16:43
Joseph Glatthaar’s Forged in Battle is not the first excellent study of Black soldiers and their White officers in the Civil War, but it uses more soldiers’ letters and diaries—including rare material from Black soldiers—and concentrates more intensely on Black-White relations in Black regiments than do any of its predecessors. Glatthaar’s title expresses his thesis: loyalty, friendship, and respect among White officers and Black soldiers were fostered by the mutual dangers they faced in combat.
Glatthaar accurately describes the government’s discriminatory treatment of Black soldiers in pay, promotion, medical care, and job assignments, appropriately emphasizing the campaign by Black soldiers and their officers to get the opportunity to fight. That chance remained limited throughout the war by army policies that kept most Black units serving in rear-echelon（末等，末等不打仗的） assignments and working in labor battalions. Thus, while their combat death rate was only one-third that of White units, their mortality rate from disease, a major killer in his war, was twice as great. Despite these obstacles, the courage and effectiveness of several Black units in combat won increasing respect from initially skeptical or hostile White soldiers. As one White officer put it, “they have fought their way into the respect of all the army.”
In trying to demonstrate the magnitude of this attitudinal change, however, Glatthaar seems to exaggerate the prewar racism of the White men who became officers in Black regiments. “Prior to the war,” he writes of these men, “virtually all of them held powerful racial prejudices.” While perhaps true of those officers who joined Black units for promotion or other self-serving motives, this statement misrepresents the attitudes of the many abolitionists who became officers in Black regiments. Having spent years fighting against the race prejudice endemic in American society, they participated eagerly in this military experiment, which they hoped would help African Americans achieve freedom and postwar civil equality. By current standards of racial egalitarianism, these men’s paternalism toward African Americans was racist. But to call their feelings “powerful racial prejudices” is to indulge in generational chauvinism—to judge past eras by present standards.

Paternalism 真不能理解成家长主义。这个在中文中潜台词就是服从，服从家长，但是，英文的中解释是 你要啥我就给你啥，但是就是不给你机会，让你担责任。这种“宠的”才是paternalism。但是人家老外自己不想做废柴呀。
when people in charge of an organization or society protect the members and give them what they need but do not allow them any freedom or responsibility

self-serving showing that you will only do something if it will gain you an advantage - used to show disapproval

第一段，JG的对内战期间的black soliders and their White offices 进行研究。He think this relationship is loyality and friendship and repect.
第二段，Black soldiers have limited opportunity to fight in the combat, but they fought their own way into the respect from White.
第三段，White officers's paternalism toward African Americans.

错误 4 5


1. The passage as a whole can best be characterized as which of the following?
(A) An evaluation of a scholarly study
(B) A description of an attitudinal change
(C) A discussion of an analytical defect
(D) An analysis of the causes of a phenomenon
(E) An argument in favor of revising a view


2. According to the author, which of the following is true of Glatthaar’s Forged in Battle compared with previous studies on the same topic?
(A) It is more reliable and presents a more complete picture of the historical events on which it concentrates than do previous studies.
(B) It uses more of a particular kind of source material and focuses more closely on a particular aspect of the topic than do previous studies.
(C) It contains some unsupported generalizations, but it rightly emphasizes a theme ignored by most previous studies.
(D) It surpasses previous studies on the same topic in that it accurately describes conditions often neglected by those studies.
(E) It makes skillful use of supporting evidence to illustrate a subtle trend that previous studies have failed to detect.
表黑的两点

3. The author implies that the title of Glatthaar’s book refers specifically to which of the following?
(A) The sense of pride and accomplishment that Black soldiers increasingly felt as a result of their Civil War experiences
(B) The civil equality that African Americans achieved after the Civil War, partly as a result of their use of organizational skills honed by combat
(C) The changes in discriminatory army policies that were made as a direct result of the performance of Black combat units during the Civil War
(D) The improved interracial relations that were formed by the races’ facing of common dangers and their waging of a common fight during the Civil War
(E) The standards of racial egalitarianism that came to be adopted as a result of White Civil War veterans’ repudiation of the previous racism


4. The passage mentions which of the following as an important theme that receives special emphasis in Glatthaar’s book?
(A) The attitudes of abolitionist officers in Black units
(B) The struggle of Black units to get combat assignments
(C) The consequences of the poor medical care received by Black soldiers
(D) The motives of officers serving in Black units
(E) The discrimination that Black soldiers faced when trying for promotions
special emphasis=exaggerate
是不是从论述内容入手，G emphasis the relathion between Black soldiers and White officers

5. The passage suggests that which of the following was true of Black units’ disease mortality rates in the Civil War?
(A) They were almost as high as the combat mortality rates of White units.
(B) They resulted in part from the relative inexperience of these units when in combat.
(C) They were especially high because of the nature of these units’ usual duty assignments.
(D) They resulted in extremely high overall casualty rates in Black combat units.
(E) They exacerbated the morale problems that were caused by the army’s discriminatory policies.
higher, 后再读，注意到bold.


6. The author of the passage quotes the White officer in lines 23-24 primarily in order to provide evidence to support the contention that
(A) virtually all White officers initially had hostile attitudes toward Black soldiers
(B) Black soldiers were often forced to defend themselves from physical attacks initiated by soldiers from White units
(C) the combat performance of Black units changed the attitudes of White soldiers toward Black soldiers
(D) White units paid especially careful attention to the performance of Black units in battle
(E) respect in the army as a whole was accorded only to those units, whether Black or White, that performed well in battle


7. Which of the following best describes the kind of error attributed to Glatthaar in lines 25-28?
(A) Insisting on an unwarranted distinction between two groups of individuals in order to render an argument concerning them internally consistent
(B) Supporting an argument in favor of a given interpretation of a situation with evidence that is not particularly relevant to the situation
(C) Presenting a distorted view of the motives of certain individuals in order to provide grounds for a negative evaluation of their actions
(D) Describing the conditions prevailing before a given event in such a way that the contrast with those prevailing after the event appears more striking than it actually is
(E) Asserting that a given event is caused by another event merely because the other event occurred before the given event occurred


8. Which of the following actions can best be described as indulging in “generational chauvinism” (lines 40-41) as that practice is defined in the passage?
(A) Condemning a present-day monarch merely because many monarchs have been tyrannical in the past.
(B) Clinging to the formal standards of politeness common in one’s youth to such a degree that any relaxation of those standards is intolerable.
(C) Questioning the accuracy of a report written by an employee merely because of the employee’s gender.
(D) Deriding the superstitions accepted as “science” in past eras without acknowledging the prevalence of irrational beliefs today.
(E) Labeling a nineteenth-century politician as “corrupt” for engaging in once-acceptable practices considered intolerable today.
类比

Joseph Glatthaar’s Forged in Battle is not the first excellent study of Black soldiers and their White officers in the Civil War, but it uses more soldiers’ letters and diaries—including rare material from Black soldiers—and concentrates more intensely on Black-White relations in Black regiments than do any of its predecessors. Glatthaar’s title expresses his thesis: loyalty, friendship, and respect among White officers and Black soldiers were fostered by the mutual dangers they faced in combat.

Glatthaar accurately describes the government’s discriminatory treatment of Black soldiers in pay, promotion, medical care, and job assignments, appropriately emphasizing the campaign by Black soldiers and their officers to get the opportunity to fight. That chance remained limited throughout the war by army policies that kept most Black units serving in rear-echelon assignments and working in labor battalions. Thus, while their combat death rate was only one-third that of White units, their mortality rate from disease, a major killer in his war, was twice as great. Despite these obstacles, the courage and effectiveness of several Black units in combat won increasing respect from initially skeptical or hostile White soldiers. As one White officer put it, “they have fought their way into the respect of all the army.”

In trying to demonstrate the magnitude of this attitudinal change, however, Glatthaar seems to exaggerate the prewar racism of the White men who became officers in Black regiments. “Prior to the war,” he writes of these men, “virtually all of them held powerful racial prejudices.” While perhaps true of those officers who joined Black units for promotion or other self-serving motives, this statement misrepresents the attitudes of the many abolitionists who became officers in Black regiments. Having spent years fighting against the race prejudice endemic in American society, they participated eagerly in this military experiment, which they hoped would help African Americans achieve freedom and postwar civil equality. By current standards of racial egalitarianism, these men’s paternalism toward African Americans was racist. But to call their feelings “powerful racial prejudices” is to indulge in generational chauvinism—to judge past eras by present standards.

1.The passage as a whole can best be characterized as which of the following?

(A) An evaluation of a scholarly study

(B) A description of an attitudinal change

(C) A discussion of an analytical defect

(D) An analysis of the causes of a phenomenon（A）

(E) An argument in favor of revising a view

2.According to the author, which of the following is true of Glatthaar’s Forged in Battle compared with previous studies on the same topic?

(A) It is more reliable and presents a more complete picture of the historical events on which it concentrates than do previous studies.

(B) It uses more of a particular kind of source material and focuses more closely on a particular aspect of the topic than do previous studies.

(C) It contains some unsupported generalizations, but it rightly emphasizes a theme ignored by most previous studies.

(D) It surpasses previous studies on the same topic in that it accurately describes conditions often neglected by those studies.（B）

(E) It makes skillful use of supporting evidence to illustrate a subtle trend that previous studies have failed to detect.

3.The author implies that the title of Glatthaar’s book refers specifically to which of the following?

(A) The sense of pride and accomplishment that Black soldiers increasingly felt as a result of their Civil War experiences

(B) The civil equality that African Americans achieved after the Civil War, partly as a result of their use of organizational skills honed by combat

(C) The changes in discriminatory army policies that were made as a direct result of the performance of Black combat units during the Civil War

(D) The improved interracial relations that were formed by the races’ facing of common dangers and their waging of a common fight during the Civil War（D）

(E) The standards of racial egalitarianism that came to be adopted as a result of White Civil War veterans’ repudiation of the previous racism

4.The passage mentions which of the following as an important theme that receives special emphasis in Glatthaar’s book?

(A) The attitudes of abolitionist officers in Black units

(B) The struggle of Black units to get combat assignments

(C) The consequences of the poor medical care received by Black soldiers

(D) The motives of officers serving in Black units（B）

(E) The discrimination that Black soldiers faced when trying for promotions

5.The passage suggests that which of the following was true of Black units’ disease mortality rates in the Civil War?

(A) They were almost as high as the combat mortality rates of White units.

(B) They resulted in part from the relative inexperience of these units when in combat.

(C) They were especially high because of the nature of these units’ usual duty assignments.

(D) They resulted in extremely high overall casualty rates in Black combat units.（C）

(E) They exacerbated the morale problems that were caused by the army’s discriminatory policies.

6.The author of the passage quotes the White officer in lines 23-24 primarily in order to provide evidence to support the contention that

(A) The attitudes of abolitionist officers in Black units

(B) The struggle of Black units to get combat assignments

(C) The consequences of the poor medical care received by Black soldiers

(D) The motives of officers serving in Black units（B）

(E) The discrimination that Black soldiers faced when trying for promotions

5.The passage suggests that which of the following was true of Black units’ disease mortality rates in the Civil War?

(A) They were almost as high as the combat mortality rates of White units.

(B) They resulted in part from the relative inexperience of these units when in combat.

(C) They were especially high because of the nature of these units’ usual duty assignments.

(D) They resulted in extremely high overall casualty rates in Black combat units.（C）

(E) They exacerbated the morale problems that were caused by the army’s discriminatory policies.

6.The author of the passage quotes the White officer in lines 23-24 primarily in order to provide evidence to support the contention that

(A) virtually all White officers initially had hostile attitudes toward Black soldiers

(B) Black soldiers were often forced to defend themselves from physical attacks initiated by soldiers from White units

(C) the combat performance of Black units changed the attitudes of White soldiers toward Black soldiers

(D) White units paid especially careful attention to the performance of Black units in battle（C）

(E) respect in the army as a whole was accorded only to those units, whether Black or White, that performed well in battle

7.Which of the following best describes the kind of error attributed to Glatthaar in [url=http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/#p40q7]lines 25-28?

(A) virtually all White officers initially had hostile attitudes toward Black soldiers

(B) Black soldiers were often forced to defend themselves from physical attacks initiated by soldiers from White units

(C) the combat performance of Black units changed the attitudes of White soldiers toward Black soldiers

(D) White units paid especially careful attention to the performance of Black units in battle（C）

(E) respect in the army as a whole was accorded only to those units, whether Black or White, that performed well in battle

7.Which of the following best describes the kind of error attributed to Glatthaar in lines 25-28?

(A) Insisting on an unwarranted distinction between two groups of individuals in order to render an argument concerning them internally consistent

(B) Supporting an argument in favor of a given interpretation of a situation with evidence that is not particularly relevant to the situation

(C) Presenting a distorted view of the motives of certain individuals in order to provide grounds for a negative evaluation of their actions

(D) Describing the conditions prevailing before a given event in such a way that the contrast with those prevailing after the event appears more striking than it actually is（D）

(E) Asserting that a given event is caused by another event merely because the other event occurred before the given event occurred

8.Which of the following actions can best be described as indulging in “generational chauvinism” ([url=http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/#p40q8]lines 40-41) as that practice is defined in the passage?

(A) Insisting on an unwarranted distinction between two groups of individuals in order to render an argument concerning them internally consistent

(B) Supporting an argument in favor of a given interpretation of a situation with evidence that is not particularly relevant to the situation

(C) Presenting a distorted view of the motives of certain individuals in order to provide grounds for a negative evaluation of their actions

(D) Describing the conditions prevailing before a given event in such a way that the contrast with those prevailing after the event appears more striking than it actually is（D）

(E) Asserting that a given event is caused by another event merely because the other event occurred before the given event occurred

8.Which of the following actions can best be described as indulging in “generational chauvinism” ([url=http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/#p40q8]lines 40-41) as that practice is defined in the passage?

(A) Condemning a present-day monarch merely because many monarchs have been tyrannical in the past.

(B) Clinging to the formal standards of politeness common in one’s youth to such a degree that any relaxation of those standards is intolerable.

(C) Questioning the accuracy of a report written by an employee merely because of the employee’s gender.

(D) Deriding the superstitions accepted as “science” in past eras without acknowledging the prevalence of irrational beliefs today.（E）

(E) Labeling a nineteenth-century politician as “corrupt” for engaging in once-acceptable practices considered intolerable today.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 17:23
It was once assumed that all living things could be divided into two fundamental and exhaustive categories. Multicellular plants and animals, as well as many unicellular organisms, are eukaryotic—their large, complex cells have a well-formed nucleus and many organelles. On the other hand, the true bacteria are prokaryotic cell, which are simple and lack a nucleus. The distinction between eukaryotes and bacteria, initially defined in terms of subcellular structures visible with a microscope, was ultimately carried to the molecular level. Here prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells have many features in common. For instance, they translate genetic information into proteins according to the same type of genetic coding. But even where the molecular processes are the same, the details in the two forms are different and characteristic of the respective forms(这里有省略). For example, the amino acid sequences of various enzymes tend to be typically prokaryotic or eukaryotic. The differences between the groups and the similarities within each group made it seem certain to most biologists that the tree of life had only two stems（这种地方，要给author 补充好的，是P和E这样分呢。）. Moreover, arguments pointing out the extent of both structural and functional differences between eukaryotes and true bacteria convinced many biologists that the precursors of the eukaryotes must have diverged from the common ancestor before the bacteria arose.
Although much of this picture has been sustained by more recent research, it seems fundamentally wrong in one respect. Among the bacteria, there are organisms that are significantly different both from the cells of eukaryotes and from the true bacteria, and it now appears that there are three stems in the tree of life. New techniques for determining the molecular sequence of the RNA of organisms have produced evolutionary information about the degree to which organisms are related, the time since they diverged from a common ancestor, and the reconstruction of ancestral versions of genes. These techniques have strongly suggested that although the true bacteria indeed form a large coherent group, certain other bacteria, the archaebacteria(古细菌), which are also prokaryotes and which resemble true bacteria, represent a distinct evolutionary branch that far antedates the common ancestor of all true bacteria.

Enzyme 也有amino acid 呀

第一段，all living 可以分成P和E，即便到了molecular level这个层次。 而且，生物学家认为E一个祖先，P一个祖先，而且E祖先出现的比P祖先早。
第二段， the tree of life has its third stem: archaebacteria

错误 5 6

1. The passage is primarily concerned with
(A) detailing the evidence that has led most biologists to replace the trichotomous picture of living organisms with a dichotomous one
(B) outlining the factors that have contributed to the current hypothesis concerning the number of basic categories of living organisms
(C) evaluating experiments that have resulted in proof that the prokaryotes are more ancient than had been expected
(D) summarizing the differences in structure and function found among true bacteria, archaebacteria, and eukaryotes
(E) formulating a hypothesis about the mechanisms of evolution that resulted in the ancestors of the prokaryotes

2. According to the passage, investigations of eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells at the molecular level supported the conclusion that
(A) most eukaryotic organisms are unicellular
(B) complex cells have well-formed nuclei
(C) prokaryotes and eukaryotes form two fundamental categories
(D) subcellular structures are visible with a microscope
(E) prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells have similar enzymes


3. According to the passage, which of the following statements about the two-category hypothesis is likely to be true?
(A) It is promising because it explains the presence of true bacteria-like organisms such as organelles in eukaryotic cells.
(B) It is promising because it explains why eukaryotic cells, unlike prokaryotic cells, tend to form multicellular organisms.
(C) It is flawed because it fails to account for the great variety among eukaryotic organisms.
(D) It is flawed because it fails to account for the similarity between prokaryotes and eukaryotes.
(E) It is flawed because it fails to recognize an important distinction among prokaryotes.


4. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following have recently been compared in order to clarify the fundamental classifications of living things?
(A) The genetic coding in true bacteria and that in other prokaryotes
(B) The organelle structures of archaebacteria, true bacteria, and eukaryotes
(C) The cellular structures of multicellular organisms and unicellular organisms
(D) The molecular sequences in eukaryotic RNA, true bacterial RNA, and archaebacterial RNA
(E) The amino acid sequences in enzymes of various eukaryotic species and those of enzymes in archaebacterial species


5. If the “new techniques” mentioned in line 31 were applied in studies of biological classifications other than bacteria, which of the following is most likely?
(A) Some of those classifications will have to be reevaluated.
(B) Many species of bacteria will be reclassified.
(C) It will be determined that there are four main categories of living things rather than three.
(D) It will be found that true bacteria are much older than eukaryotes.
(E) It will be found that there is a common ancestor of the eukaryotes, archaebacteria, and true bacteria.
evolutionary information
难道是这样想，如果new techniques 不是用在bacteria上，bilogists 就不会说 three stems in the tree of life. 这是个必要条件。
those classifications 我再次表示我不会找代词，这样的地方，我不确定。我就不愿意选。

6. According to the passage, researchers working under the two-category hypothesis were correct in thinking that
(A) prokaryotes form a coherent group
(B) the common ancestor of all living things had complex properties
(C) eukaryotes are fundamentally different from true bacteria
(D) true bacteria are just as complex as eukaryotes
(E) ancestral versions of eukaryotic genes functioned differently from their modern counterparts
AC 像是说了，P和E是在什么地方是相同的。
回去看文章，主要强调的是不同。说相同只是让步。

7. All of the following statements are supported by the passage EXCEPT:
(A) True bacteria form a distinct evolutionary group.
(B) Archaebacteria are prokaryotes that resemble true bacteria.
(C) True bacteria and eukaryotes employ similar types of genetic coding.
(D) True bacteria and eukaryotes are distinguishable at the subcellular level.
(E) Amino acid sequences of enzymes are uniform for eukaryotic and prokaryotic organisms.


8. The author’s attitude toward the view that living things are divided into three categories is best described as one of
(A) tentative acceptance
(B) mild skepticism
(C) limited denial
(D) studious criticism
(E) whole hearted endorsement
seems fundermentally wrong.

It was once assumed that all living things could be divided into two fundamental and exhaustive categories. Multicellular plants and animals, as well as many unicellular organisms, are eukaryotic—their large, complex cells have a well-formed nucleus and many organelles. On the other hand, the true bacteria are prokaryotic cell (prokaryotic cell: 原核细胞), which are simple and lack a nucleus. The distinction between eukaryotes and bacteria, initially defined in terms of subcellular structures visible with a microscope, was ultimately carried to the molecular level. Here prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells have many features in common. For instance, they translate genetic information into proteins according to the same type of genetic coding. But even where the molecular processes are the same, the details in the two forms are different and characteristic of the respective forms. For example, the amino acid sequences of various enzymes tend to be typically prokaryotic or eukaryotic. The differences between the groups and the similarities within each group made it seem certain to most biologists that the tree of life had only two stems. Moreover, arguments pointing out the extent of both structural and functional differences between eukaryotes and true bacteria convinced many biologists that the precursors of the eukaryotes must have diverged from the common ancestor before the bacteria arose.

Although much of this picture has been sustained by more recent research, it seems fundamentally wrong in one respect. Among the bacteria, there are organisms that are significantly different both from the cells of eukaryotes and from the true bacteria, and it now appears that there are three stems in the tree of life. New techniques for determining the molecular sequence of the RNA of organisms have produced evolutionary information about the degree to which organisms are related, the time since they diverged from a common ancestor, and the reconstruction of ancestral versions of genes. These techniques have strongly suggested that although the true bacteria indeed form a large coherent group, certain other bacteria, the archaebacteria (archaebacteria: [复] n.[微]原始细菌( 一种不同于细菌和动植物细胞且要求完全厌氧条件并能产生甲烷的微生物)), which are also prokaryotes and which resemble true bacteria, represent a distinct evolutionary branch that far antedates the common ancestor of all true bacteria.

1.The passage is primarily concerned with

(A) detailing the evidence that has led most biologists to replace the trichotomous picture of living organisms with a dichotomous one

(B) outlining the factors that have contributed to the current hypothesis concerning the number of basic categories of living organisms

(C) evaluating experiments that have resulted in proof that the prokaryotes are more ancient than had been expected

(D) summarizing the differences in structure and function found among true bacteria, archaebacteria, and eukaryotes（B）

(E) formulating a hypothesis about the mechanisms of evolution that resulted in the ancestors of the prokaryotes

2.According to the passage, investigations of eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells at the molecular level supported the conclusion that

(A) most eukaryotic organisms are unicellular

(B) complex cells have well-formed nuclei

(C) prokaryotes and eukaryotes form two fundamental categories

(D) subcellular structures are visible with a microscope（C）

(E) prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells have similar enzymes

3.According to the passage, which of the following statements about the two-category hypothesis is likely to be true?

(A) It is promising because it explains the presence of true bacteria-like organisms such as organelles in eukaryotic cells.

(B) It is promising because it explains why eukaryotic cells, unlike prokaryotic cells, tend to form multicellular organisms.

(C) It is flawed because it fails to account for the great variety among eukaryotic organisms.

(D) It is flawed because it fails to account for the similarity between prokaryotes and eukaryotes.（E）

(E) It is flawed because it fails to recognize an important distinction among prokaryotes.

4.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following have recently been compared in order to clarify the fundamental classifications of living things?

(A) The genetic coding in true bacteria and that in other prokaryotes

(B) The organelle structures of archaebacteria, true bacteria, and eukaryotes

(C) The cellular structures of multicellular organisms and unicellular organisms

(D) The molecular sequences in eukaryotic RNA, true bacterial RNA, and archaebacterial RNA（D）

(E) The amino acid sequences in enzymes of various eukaryotic species and those of enzymes in archaebacterial species

5.If the “new techniques” mentioned in line 31 were applied in studies of biological classifications other than bacteria, which of the following is most likely?

(A) Some of those classifications will have to be reevaluated.

(B) Many species of bacteria will be reclassified.

(C) It will be determined that there are four main categories of living things rather than three.

(D) It will be found that true bacteria are much older than eukaryotes.（A）

(E) It will be found that there is a common ancestor of the eukaryotes, archaebacteria, and true bacteria.

6.According to the passage, researchers working under the two-category hypothesis were correct in thinking that

(A) prokaryotes form a coherent group

(B) the common ancestor of all living things had complex properties

(C) eukaryotes are fundamentally different from true bacteria

(D) true bacteria are just as complex as eukaryotes（C）

(E) ancestral versions of eukaryotic genes functioned differently from their modern counterparts

7.All of the following statements are supported by the passage EXCEPT:

(A) True bacteria form a distinct evolutionary group.

(B) Archaebacteria are prokaryotes that resemble true bacteria.

(C) True bacteria and eukaryotes employ similar types of genetic coding.

(D) True bacteria and eukaryotes are distinguishable at the subcellular level.（E）

(E) Amino acid sequences of enzymes are uniform for eukaryotic and prokaryotic organisms.

8.The author’s attitude toward the view that living things are divided into three categories is best described as one of

(A) tentative acceptance

(B) mild skepticism

(C) limited denial

(D) studious criticism（A）

(E) whole hearted endorsement

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 19:21
Excess inventory, a massive problem for many businesses, has several causes, some of which are unavoidable. Overstocks may accumulate through production overruns or errors. Certain styles and colors prove unpopular. With some products—computers and software, toys, and books—last year’s models are difficult to move even at huge discounts. Occasionally the competition introduces a better product. But in many cases the public’s buying tastes simply change, leaving a manufacturer or distributor with thousands (or millions) of items that the fickle public no longer wants.
One common way to dispose of this merchandise is to sell it to a liquidator, who buys as cheaply as possible and then resells the merchandise through catalogs, discount stores, and other outlets. However, liquidators may pay less for the merchandise than it cost to make it. Another way to dispose of excess inventory is to dump it. The corporation takes a straight cost write-off on its taxes and hauls the merchandise to a landfill. Although it is hard to believe, there is a sort of convoluted logic to this approach. It is perfectly legal, requires little time or preparation on the company’s part, and solves the problem quickly. The drawback is the remote possibility of getting caught by the news media. Dumping perfectly useful products can turn into a public relations nightmare. Children living in poverty are freezing and XYZ Company has just sent 500 new snowsuits to the local dump. Parents of young children are barely getting by and QRS Company dumps 1,000 cases of disposable diapers because they have slight imperfections.
The managers of these companies are not deliberately wasteful; they are simply unaware of all their alternatives. In 1976 the Internal Revenue Service provided a tangible(切实的，真有实际好处的) incentive for businesses to contribute their products to charity. The new tax law allowed corporations to deduct the cost of the product donated plus half the difference between cost and fair market selling price, with the proviso that deductions cannot exceed twice cost. Thus, the federal government sanctions—indeed, encourages—an above-cost federal tax deduction for companies that donate inventory to charity.

昨天，我看那个功利主义学说。原来我的理解就是，这种东西很疯，没有什么价值。后来，发现成本收益分析本身就是对功利主义的应用。那个19世纪，孩子死了不赔钱，也是功利主义。同样，即便到了现在说孩子感情上是无价的，也无非是在该个赋值，还是在功利主义的框架里玩，没有发生什么本质区别。
那么这篇文章，怎么看，overstock是不是要倒掉，不给人用。同样，还是在功利主义的框架，成本收益，或是benefit and drawback。

第一段，there are many reasons causing overstock, the most important one was change of public;s buying tastes.
第二段，dumping the overstock's benefits: quickly resolve the problem and this resolution is legal; drawback, a PR nighmare.
第三段，政府鼓励这样的东西捐献，鼓励的办法是，公司可以抵扣不超过成本两倍为税基的税。（相对dumping, 还是有好处的。）

错误 2

1. The author mentions each of the following as a cause of excess inventory EXCEPT
(A) production of too much merchandise
(B) inaccurate forecasting of buyers’ preferences
(C) unrealistic pricing policies
(D) products’ rapid obsolescence
(E) availability of a better product
price

2. The passage suggests that which of the following is a kind of product that a liquidator who sells to discount stores would be unlikely to wish to acquire?
(A) Furniture
(B) Computers
(C) Kitchen equipment
(D) Baby-care products
(E) Children’s clothing
开始做题的时候，我不知道在哪里。 这个判断是 这是东西是不是很快就popular了。

3. The passage provides information that supports which of the following statements?
(A) Excess inventory results most often from insufficient market analysis by the manufacturer.
(B) Products with slight manufacturing defects may contribute to excess inventory.
(C) Few manufacturers have taken advantage of the changes in the federal tax laws.
(D) Manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are often caught and exposed by the news media.
(E) Most products available in discount stores have come from manufacturers’ excess-inventory stock.

4. The author cites the examples in lines 25-29 most probably in order to illustrate
(A) the fiscal irresponsibility of dumping as a policy for dealing with excess inventory
(B) the waste-management problems that dumping new products creates
(C) the advantages to the manufacturer of dumping as a policy
(D) alternatives to dumping explored by different companies
(E) how the news media could portray dumping to the detriment of the manufacturer’s reputation


5. By asserting that manufacturers “are simply unaware” (line 31), the author suggests which of the following?
(A) Manufacturers might donate excess inventory to charity rather than dump it if they knew about the provision in the federal tax code.
(B) The federal government has failed to provide sufficient encouragement to manufacturers to make use of advantageous tax policies.
(C) Manufacturers who choose to dump excess inventory are not aware of the possible effects on their reputation of media coverage of such dumping.
(D) The manufacturers of products disposed of by dumping are unaware of the needs of those people who would find the products useful.
(E) The manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are not familiar with the employment of liquidators to dispose of overstock.


6. The information in the passage suggests that which of the following, if true, would make donating excess inventory to charity less attractive to manufacturers than dumping?
(A) The costs of getting the inventory to the charitable destination are greater than the above-cost tax deduction.
(B) The news media give manufacturers’ charitable contributions the same amount of coverage that they give dumping.
(C) No straight-cost tax benefit can be claimed for items that are dumped.
(D) The fair-market value of an item in excess inventory is 5 times its cost.
(E) Items end up as excess inventory because of a change in the public’s preferences.


7. Information in the passage suggests that one reason manufacturers might take advantage of the tax provision mentioned in the last paragraph is that
(A) there are many kinds of products that cannot be legally dumped in a landfill
(B) liquidators often refuse to handle products with slight imperfections
(C) the law allows a deduction in excess of the cost of manufacturing the product
(D) media coverage of contributions of excess-inventory products to charity is widespread and favorable
(E) no tax deduction is available for products dumped or sold to a liquidator

Excess inventory, a massive (large in scope or degree “the feeling of frustration, of being ineffectual, is massive David Halberstam”)problem for many businesses, has several causes, some of which are unavoidable. Overstocks may accumulate through production overruns (a run in excess of the quantity ordered by a customer)or errors. Certain styles and colors prove unpopular. With some products—computers and software, toys, and books—last year’s models are difficult to move even at huge discounts. Occasionally the competition introduces a better product. But in many cases the public’s buying tastes simply change, leaving a manufacturer or distributor with thousands (or millions) of items that the fickle public no longer wants.

One common way to dispose of (dispose of: v.处理) this merchandise is to sell it to a liquidator, who buys as cheaply as possible and then resells the merchandise through catalogs, discount stores, and other outlets (an agency (as a store or dealer) through which a product is marketed “retail outlets”). However, liquidators may pay less for the merchandise than it cost to make it. Another way to dispose of excess inventory is to dump it. The corporation takes a straight cost write-off on its taxes and hauls the merchandise to a landfill. Although it is hard to believe, there is a sort of convoluted logic to this approach. It is perfectly legal, requires little time or preparation on the company’s part, and solves the problem quickly. The drawback is the remote possibility of getting caught by the news media. Dumping perfectly useful products can turn into a public relations nightmare. Children living in poverty are freezing and XYZ Company has just sent 500 new snowsuits (snowsuit: n.孩童用防雪装) to the local dump. Parents of young children are barely getting by and QRS Company dumps 1,000 cases of disposable diapers because they have slight imperfections.

The managers of these companies are not deliberately wasteful; they are simply unaware of all their alternatives. In 1976 the Internal Revenue Service provided a tangible incentive for businesses to contribute their products to charity. The new tax law allowed corporations to deduct the cost of the product donated plus half the difference between cost and fair market selling price, with the proviso that deductions cannot exceed twice cost. Thus, the federal government sanctions—indeed, encourages—an above-cost federal tax deduction for companies that donate inventory to charity.

1.The author mentions each of the following as a cause of excess inventory EXCEPT

(A) production of too much merchandise

(B) inaccurate forecasting of buyers’ preferences

(C) unrealistic pricing policies

(D) products’ rapid obsolescence（C）

(E) availability of a better product

2.The passage suggests that which of the following is a kind of product that a liquidator who sells to discount stores would be unlikely to wish to acquire?

(A) Furniture

(B) Computers

(C) Kitchen equipment

(D) Baby-care products（B）

(E) Children’s clothing

3.The passage provides information that supports which of the following statements?

(A) Excess inventory results most often from insufficient market analysis by the manufacturer.

(B) Products with slight manufacturing defects may contribute to excess inventory.

(C) Few manufacturers have taken advantage of the changes in the federal tax laws.

(D) Manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are often caught and exposed by the news media.（B）

(E) Most products available in discount stores have come from manufacturers’ excess-inventory stock.

4.The author cites the examples in lines 25-29 most probably in order to illustrate

(A) the fiscal irresponsibility of dumping as a policy for dealing with excess inventory

(B) the waste-management problems that dumping new products creates

(C) the advantages to the manufacturer of dumping as a policy

(D) alternatives to dumping explored by different companies（E）

(E) how the news media could portray dumping to the detriment of the manufacturer’s reputation

5.By asserting that manufacturers “are simply unaware” (line 31), the author suggests which of the following?

(A) Manufacturers might donate excess inventory to charity rather than dump it if they knew about the provision in the federal tax code.

(B) The federal government has failed to provide sufficient encouragement to manufacturers to make use of advantageous tax policies.

(C) Manufacturers who choose to dump excess inventory are not aware of the possible effects on their reputation of media coverage of such dumping.

(D) The manufacturers of products disposed of by dumping are unaware of the needs of those people who would find the products useful.（A）

(E) The manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are not familiar with the employment of liquidators to dispose of overstock.

6.The information in the passage suggests that which of the following, if true, would make donating excess inventory to charity less attractive to manufacturers than dumping?

(A) The costs of getting the inventory to the charitable destination are greater than the above-cost tax deduction.

(B) The news media give manufacturers’ charitable contributions the same amount of coverage that they give dumping.

(C) No straight-cost tax benefit can be claimed for items that are dumped.

(D) The fair-market value of an item in excess inventory is 5 times its cost.（A）

(E) Items end up as excess inventory because of a change in the public’s preferences.

7.Information in the passage suggests that one reason manufacturers might take advantage of the tax provision mentioned in the last paragraph is that

(A) there are many kinds of products that cannot be legally dumped in a landfill

(B) liquidators often refuse to handle products with slight imperfections

(C) the law allows a deduction in excess of the cost of manufacturing the product

(D) media coverage of contributions of excess-inventory products to charity is widespread and favorable（C）

(E) no tax deduction is available for products dumped or sold to a liquidator





Excess inventory, a massive (large in scope or degree “the feeling of frustration, of being ineffectual, is massive David Halberstam”)problem for many businesses, has several causes, some of which are unavoidable. Overstocks may accumulate through production overruns (a run in excess of the quantity ordered by a customer)or errors. Certain styles and colors prove unpopular. With some products—computers and software, toys, and books—last year’s models are difficult to move even at huge discounts. Occasionally the competition introduces a better product. But in many cases the public’s buying tastes simply change, leaving a manufacturer or distributor with thousands (or millions) of items that the fickle public no longer wants.

One common way to dispose of (dispose of: v.处理) this merchandise is to sell it to a liquidator, who buys as cheaply as possible and then resells the merchandise through catalogs, discount stores, and other outlets (an agency (as a store or dealer) through which a product is marketed “retail outlets”). However, liquidators may pay less for the merchandise than it cost to make it. Another way to dispose of excess inventory is to dump it. The corporation takes a straight cost write-off on its taxes and hauls the merchandise to a landfill. Although it is hard to believe, there is a sort of convoluted logic to this approach. It is perfectly legal, requires little time or preparation on the company’s part, and solves the problem quickly. The drawback is the remote possibility of getting caught by the news media. Dumping perfectly useful products can turn into a public relations nightmare. Children living in poverty are freezing and XYZ Company has just sent 500 new snowsuits (snowsuit: n.孩童用防雪装) to the local dump. Parents of young children are barely getting by and QRS Company dumps 1,000 cases of disposable diapers because they have slight imperfections.

The managers of these companies are not deliberately wasteful; they are simply unaware of all their alternatives. In 1976 the Internal Revenue Service provided a tangible incentive for businesses to contribute their products to charity. The new tax law allowed corporations to deduct the cost of the product donated plus half the difference between cost and fair market selling price, with the proviso that deductions cannot exceed twice cost. Thus, the federal government sanctions—indeed, encourages—an above-cost federal tax deduction for companies that donate inventory to charity.

1.The author mentions each of the following as a cause of excess inventory EXCEPT

(A) production of too much merchandise

(B) inaccurate forecasting of buyers’ preferences

(C) unrealistic pricing policies

(D) products’ rapid obsolescence（C）

(E) availability of a better product

2.The passage suggests that which of the following is a kind of product that a liquidator who sells to discount stores would be unlikely to wish to acquire?

(A) Furniture

(B) Computers

(C) Kitchen equipment

(D) Baby-care products（B）

(E) Children’s clothing

3.The passage provides information that supports which of the following statements?

(A) Excess inventory results most often from insufficient market analysis by the manufacturer.

(B) Products with slight manufacturing defects may contribute to excess inventory.

(C) Few manufacturers have taken advantage of the changes in the federal tax laws.

(D) Manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are often caught and exposed by the news media.（B）

(E) Most products available in discount stores have come from manufacturers’ excess-inventory stock.

4.The author cites the examples in lines 25-29 most probably in order to illustrate

(A) the fiscal irresponsibility of dumping as a policy for dealing with excess inventory

(B) the waste-management problems that dumping new products creates

(C) the advantages to the manufacturer of dumping as a policy

(D) alternatives to dumping explored by different companies（E）

(E) how the news media could portray dumping to the detriment of the manufacturer’s reputation

5.By asserting that manufacturers “are simply unaware” (line 31), the author suggests which of the following?

(A) Manufacturers might donate excess inventory to charity rather than dump it if they knew about the provision in the federal tax code.

(B) The federal government has failed to provide sufficient encouragement to manufacturers to make use of advantageous tax policies.

(C) Manufacturers who choose to dump excess inventory are not aware of the possible effects on their reputation of media coverage of such dumping.

(D) The manufacturers of products disposed of by dumping are unaware of the needs of those people who would find the products useful.（A）

(E) The manufacturers who dump their excess inventory are not familiar with the employment of liquidators to dispose of overstock.

6.The information in the passage suggests that which of the following, if true, would make donating excess inventory to charity less attractive to manufacturers than dumping?

(A) The costs of getting the inventory to the charitable destination are greater than the above-cost tax deduction.

(B) The news media give manufacturers’ charitable contributions the same amount of coverage that they give dumping.

(C) No straight-cost tax benefit can be claimed for items that are dumped.

(D) The fair-market value of an item in excess inventory is 5 times its cost.（A）

(E) Items end up as excess inventory because of a change in the public’s preferences.

7.Information in the passage suggests that one reason manufacturers might take advantage of the tax provision mentioned in the last paragraph is that

(A) there are many kinds of products that cannot be legally dumped in a landfill

(B) liquidators often refuse to handle products with slight imperfections

(C) the law allows a deduction in excess of the cost of manufacturing the product

(D) media coverage of contributions of excess-inventory products to charity is widespread and favorable（C）

(E) no tax deduction is available for products dumped or sold to a liquidator

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 19:35
Traditionally, the first firm to commercialize a new technology has benefited from the unique opportunity to shape product definitions, forcing followers to adapt to a standard or invest in an unproven alternative. Today, however, the largest payoffs may go to companies that lead in developing integrated approaches for successful mass production and distribution.
Producers of the Beta format for videocassette recorders (VCR’s), for example, were first to develop the VCR commercially in 1975, but producers of the rival VHS (Video Home System) format proved to be more successful at forming strategic alliances with other producers and distributors to manufacture and market their VCR format. Seeking to maintain exclusive control over VCR distribution, Beta producers were reluctant to form such alliances and eventually lost ground to VHS in the competition for the global VCR market.
Despite Beta’s substantial technological head start and the fact that VHS was neither technically better nor cheaper than Beta, developers of VHS quickly turned a slight early lead in sales into a dominant position. Strategic alignments with producers of prerecorded tapes reinforced the VHS advantage. The perception（认知） among consumers that prerecorded tapes were more available in VHS format further expanded VHS’s share of the market. By the end of the 1980’s, Beta was no longer in production.

原来，文章我怕 generalization. 现在，我就怕举例子。一到例子，就要把generalization 和 speciifics 都要看清楚。

第一段，原来最先将技术商业化的公司能获得很大利益。现在，最先做好大规模生成的公司能获得最大利益。
第二，三段，例子证明第一段结论、



1. The passage is primarily concerned with which of the following?
(A) Evaluating two competing technologies
(B) Tracing the impact of a new technology by narrating a sequence of events
(C) Reinterpreting an event from contemporary business history
(D) Illustrating a business strategy by means of a case history
(E) Proposing an innovative approach to business planning


2. According to the passage, today’s successful firms, unlike successful firms in the past, may earn the greatest profits by
(A) investing in research to produce cheaper versions of existing technology
(B) being the first to market a competing technology
(C) adapting rapidly to a technological standard previously set by a competing firm
(D) establishing technological leadership in order to shape product definitions in advance of competing firms
(E) emphasizing the development of methods for the mass production and distribution of a new technology


3. According to the passage, consumers began to develop a preference for VCR’s in the VHS format because they believed which of the following?
(A) VCR’s in the VHS format were technically better than competing-format VCR’s.
(B) VCR’s in the VHS format were less expensive than competing-format VCR’s.
(C) VHS was the first standard format for VCR’s.
(D) VHS prerecorded videotapes were more available than Beta-format tapes.
(E) VCR’s in the Beta format would soon cease to be produced.


4. The author implies that one way that VHS producers won control over the VCR market was by
(A) carefully restricting access to VCR technology
(B) giving up a slight early lead in VCR sales in order to improve long-term prospects
(C) retaining a strict monopoly on the production of prerecorded videotapes
(D) sharing control of the marketing of VHS-format VCR’s
(E) sacrificing technological superiority over Beta-format VCR’s in order to remain competitive in price


5. The alignment of producers of VHS-format VCR’s with producers of prerecorded videotapes is most similar to which of the following?
(A) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with another automobile manufacturer to adopt a standard design for automobile engines.
(B) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with an automotive glass company whereby the manufacturer agrees to purchase automobile windshields only from that one glass company.
(C) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with a petroleum company to ensure the widespread availability of the fuel required by a new type of engine developed by the manufacturer.
(D) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with its dealers to adopt a plan to improve automobile design.
(E) The alignment of an automobile dealer with an automobile rental chain to adopt a strategy for an advertising campaign to promote a new type of automobile.


6. Which of the following best describes the relation of the first paragraph to the passage as a whole?
(A) It makes a general observation to be exemplified.
(B) It outlines a process to be analyzed.
(C) It poses a question to be answered.
(D) It advances an argument to be disputed.
(E) It introduces conflicting arguments to be reconciled.


Traditionally, the first firm to commercialize a new technology has benefited from the unique opportunity to shape product definitions, forcing followers to adapt to a standard or invest in an unproven alternative. Today, however, the largest payoffs (a: PROFIT, REWARD b: RETRIBUTION) may go to companies that lead in developing integrated approaches for successful mass production and distribution.

Producers of the Beta format for videocassette recorders (VCR’s), for example, were first to develop the VCR commercially in 1975, but producers of the rival VHS (Video Home System) format proved to be more successful at forming strategic alliances with other producers and distributors to manufacture and market their VCR format. Seeking to maintain exclusive control over VCR distribution, Beta producers were reluctant to form such alliances and eventually lost ground to VHS in the competition for the global VCR market.

Despite Beta’s substantial technological head start (head start: n.领先) and the fact that VHS was neither technically better nor cheaper than Beta, developers of VHS quickly turned a slight early lead in sales into a dominant position. Strategic alignments with producers of prerecorded tapes reinforced the VHS advantage. The perception among consumers that prerecorded tapes were more available in VHS format further expanded VHS’s share of the market. By the end of the 1980’s, Beta was no longer in production.

1.The passage is primarily concerned with which of the following?

(A) Evaluating two competing technologies

(B) Tracing the impact of a new technology by narrating a sequence of events

(C) Reinterpreting an event from contemporary business history

(D) Illustrating a business strategy by means of a case history（D）

(E) Proposing an innovative approach to business planning

2.According to the passage, today’s successful firms, unlike successful firms in the past, may earn the greatest profits by

(A) investing in research to produce cheaper versions of existing technology

(B) being the first to market a competing technology

(C) adapting rapidly to a technological standard previously set by a competing firm

(D) establishing technological leadership in order to shape product definitions in advance of competing firms（E）

(E) emphasizing the development of methods for the mass production and distribution of a new technology

3.According to the passage, consumers began to develop a preference for VCR’s in the VHS format because they believed which of the following?

(A) VCR’s in the VHS format were technically better than competing-format VCR’s.

(B) VCR’s in the VHS format were less expensive than competing-format VCR’s.

(C) VHS was the first standard format for VCR’s.

(D) VHS prerecorded videotapes were more available than Beta-format tapes.（D）

(E) VCR’s in the Beta format would soon cease to be produced.

4.The author implies that one way that VHS producers won control over the VCR market was by

(A) carefully restricting access to VCR technology

(B) giving up a slight early lead in VCR sales in order to improve long-term prospects

(C) retaining a strict monopoly on the production of prerecorded videotapes

(D) sharing control of the marketing of VHS-format VCR’s（D）

(E) sacrificing technological superiority over Beta-format VCR’s in order to remain competitive in price

5.The alignment of producers of VHS-format VCR’s with producers of prerecorded videotapes is most similar to which of the following?

(A) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with another automobile manufacturer to adopt a standard design for automobile engines.

(B) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with an automotive glass company whereby (by, through, or in accordance with which) the manufacturer agrees to purchase automobile windshields only from that one glass company.

(C) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with a petroleum company to ensure the widespread availability of the fuel required by a new type of engine developed by the manufacturer.

(D) The alignment of an automobile manufacturer with its dealers to adopt a plan to improve automobile design.（C）

(E) The alignment of an automobile dealer with an automobile rental chain to adopt a strategy for an advertising campaign to promote a new type of automobile.

6.Which of the following best describes the relation of the first paragraph to the passage as a whole?

(A) It makes a general observation to be exemplified.

(B) It outlines a process to be analyzed.

(C) It poses a question to be answered.

(D) It advances an argument to be disputed.（A）

(E) It introduces conflicting arguments to be reconciled.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 20:07
Australian researchers have discovered electroreceptors (sensory organs designed to respond to electrical fields) clustered at the tip of the spiny anteater’s snout（这一句，出现了多少要背的单词）. The researchers made this discovery by exposing small areas of the snout to extremely weak electrical fields and recording the transmission of resulting nervous activity to the brain. While it is true that tactile receptors, another kind of sensory organ on the anteater’s snout, can also respond to electrical stimuli, such receptors do so only in response to electrical field strengths about 1,000 times greater than those known to excite electroreceptors.
Having discovered the electroreceptors, researchers are now investigating how anteaters utilize such a sophisticated sensory system. In one behavioral experiment, researchers successfully trained an anteater to distinguish between two troughs of water, one with a weak electrical field and the other with none. Such evidence is consistent with researchers’ hypothesis that anteaters use electroreceptors to detect electrical signals given off by prey; however, researchers as yet （包括现在，但是未来是可能的。）have been unable to detect electrical signals emanating from termite mounds, where the favorite food of anteaters live. Still, researchers have observed anteaters breaking into a nest of ants at an oblique angle and quickly locating nesting chambers. This ability quickly to locate unseen prey suggests, according to the researchers, that the anteaters were using their electroreceptors to locate the nesting chambers.


第一段，就是食蚁兽的鼻子尖很明敏，能够感知很微弱的电流。
第二段，实验也好，实际行为观察也好，食蚁兽都是用ER 来确定食物的。但是实验的结论，是同ER检测到电流，从而找到食物。

我第二段没有看明白 这篇文章就是，有些东西能验证假设，有些观察的现象不能验证。

错误 4 5

1. According to the passage, which of the following is a characteristic that distinguishes electroreceptors from tactile receptors?
(A) The manner in which electroreceptors respond to electrical stimuli
(B) The tendency of electroreceptors to be found in clusters
(C) The unusual locations in which electroreceptors are found in most species
(D) The amount of electrical stimulation required to excite electroreceptors
(E) The amount of nervous activity transmitted to the brain by electroreceptors when they are excited


2. Which of the following can be inferred about the experiment described in the first paragraph?
(A) Researchers had difficulty verifying the existence of electroreceptors in the anteater because electroreceptors respond to such a narrow range of electrical field strengths.
(B) Researchers found that the level of nervous activity in the anteater’s brain increased dramatically as the strength of the electrical stimulus was increased.
(C) Researchers found that some areas of the anteater’s snout were not sensitive to a weak electrical stimulus.
(D) Researchers found that the anteater’s tactile receptors were more easily excited by a strong electrical stimulus than were the electroreceptors.
(E) Researchers tested small areas of the anteater’s snout in order to ensure that only electroreceptors were responding to the stimulus.


3. The author of the passage most probably discusses the function of tactile receptors (lines 7-11) in order to
(A) eliminate and alternative explanation of anteaters’ response to electrical stimuli
(B) highlight a type of sensory organ that has a function identical to that of electroreceptors
(C) point out a serious complication in the research on electroreceptors in anteaters
(D) suggest that tactile receptors assist electroreceptors in the detection of electrical signals
(E) introduce a factor that was not addressed in the research on electroreceptors in anteaters


4. Which of the following can be inferred about anteaters from the behavioral experiment mentioned in the second paragraph?
(A) They are unable to distinguish between stimuli detected by their electroreceptors and stimuli detected by their tactile receptors.
(B) They are unable to distinguish between the electrical signals emanating from termite mounds and those emanating from ant nests.
(C) They can be trained to recognize consistently the presence of a particular stimulus.
(D) They react more readily to strong than to weak stimuli.
(E) They are more efficient at detecting stimuli in a controlled environment than in a natural environment.
这个推理题真是的


5. The passage suggests that the researchers mentioned in the second paragraph who observed anteaters break into a nest of ants would most likely agree with which of the following statements?
(A) The event they observed provides conclusive evidence that anteaters use their electroreceptors to locate unseen prey.
(B) The event they observed was atypical and may not reflect the usual hunting practices of anteaters.
(C) It is likely that the anteaters located the ants’ nesting chambers without the assistance of electroreceptors.
(D) Anteaters possess a very simple sensory system for use in locating prey.
(E) The speed with which the anteaters located their prey is greater than what might be expected on the basis of chance alone.
仔细把前面的话读完。

6. Which of the following, if true, would most strengthen the hypothesis mentioned in lines 17-19?
(A) Researchers are able to train anteaters to break into an underground chamber that is emitting a strong electrical signal.
(B) Researchers are able to detect a weak electrical signal emanating from the nesting chamber of an ant colony.
(C) Anteaters are observed taking increasingly longer amounts of time to locate the nesting chambers of ants.
(D) Anteaters are observed using various angles to break into nests of ants.
(E) Anteaters are observed using the same angle used with nests of ants to break into the nests of other types of prey.

Australian researchers have discovered electroreceptors (sensory organs designed to respond to electrical fields) clustered at the tip of the spiny anteater’s (spiny anteater: n. 〈动〉针鼹) snout. The researchers made this discovery by exposing small areas of the snout to extremely weak electrical fields and recording the transmission of resulting nervous activity to the brain. While it is true that tactile receptors, another kind of sensory organ on the anteater’s snout, can also respond to electrical stimuli, such receptors do so only in response to electrical field strengths about 1,000 times greater than those known to excite electroreceptors.

Having discovered the electroreceptors, researchers are now investigating how anteaters utilize such a sophisticated sensory system. In one behavioral experiment, researchers successfully trained an anteater to distinguish between two troughs of water, one with a weak electrical field and the other with none. Such evidence is consistent with researchers’ hypothesis that anteaters use electroreceptors to detect electrical signals given off by prey; however, researchers as yet have been unable to detect electrical signals emanating from termite mounds, where the favorite food of anteaters live. Still, researchers have observed anteaters breaking into a nest of ants at an oblique angle (oblique angle: 斜角(包括锐角和钝角)) and quickly locating nesting chambers. This ability quickly to locate unseen prey suggests, according to the researchers, that the anteaters were using their electroreceptors to locate the nesting chambers.

1.According to the passage, which of the following is a characteristic that distinguishes electroreceptors from tactile receptors?

(A) The manner in which electroreceptors respond to electrical stimuli

(B) The tendency of electroreceptors to be found in clusters

(C) The unusual locations in which electroreceptors are found in most species

(D) The amount of electrical stimulation required to excite electroreceptors（D）

(E) The amount of nervous activity transmitted to the brain by electroreceptors when they are excited

2.Which of the following can be inferred about the experiment described in the first paragraph?

(A) Researchers had difficulty verifying the existence of electroreceptors in the anteater because electroreceptors respond to such a narrow range of electrical field strengths.

(B) Researchers found that the level of nervous activity in the anteater’s brain increased dramatically as the strength of the electrical stimulus was increased.

(C) Researchers found that some areas of the anteater’s snout were not sensitive to a weak electrical stimulus.

(D) Researchers found that the anteater’s tactile receptors were more easily excited by a strong electrical stimulus than were the electroreceptors.（C）

(E) Researchers tested small areas of the anteater’s snout in order to ensure that only electroreceptors were responding to the stimulus.

3.The author of the passage most probably discusses the function of tactile receptors (lines 7-11) in order to

(A) eliminate and alternative explanation of anteaters’ response to electrical stimuli

(B) highlight a type of sensory organ that has a function identical to that of electroreceptors

(C) point out a serious complication in the research on electroreceptors in anteaters

(D) suggest that tactile receptors assist electroreceptors in the detection of electrical signals（A）

(E) introduce a factor that was not addressed in the research on electroreceptors in anteaters

4.Which of the following can be inferred about anteaters from the behavioral experiment mentioned in the second paragraph?

(A) They are unable to distinguish between stimuli detected by their electroreceptors and stimuli detected by their tactile receptors.

(B) They are unable to distinguish between the electrical signals emanating from termite mounds and those emanating from ant nests.

(C) They can be trained to recognize consistently the presence of a particular stimulus.

(D) They react more readily to strong than to weak stimuli.（C）

(E) They are more efficient at detecting stimuli in a controlled environment than in a natural environment.

5.The passage suggests that the researchers mentioned in the second paragraph who observed anteaters break into a nest of ants would most likely agree with which of the following statements?

(A) The event they observed provides conclusive evidence that anteaters use their electroreceptors to locate unseen prey.

(B) The event they observed was atypical and may not reflect the usual hunting practices of anteaters.

(C) It is likely that the anteaters located the ants’ nesting chambers without the assistance of electroreceptors.

(D) Anteaters possess a very simple sensory system for use in locating prey.（E）

(E) The speed with which the anteaters located their prey is greater than what might be expected on the basis of chance alone.

6.Which of the following, if true, would most strengthen the hypothesis mentioned in lines 17-19?

(A) Researchers are able to train anteaters to break into an underground chamber that is emitting a strong electrical signal.

(B) Researchers are able to detect a weak electrical signal emanating from the nesting chamber of an ant colony.

(C) Anteaters are observed taking increasingly longer amounts of time to locate the nesting chambers of ants.

(D) Anteaters are observed using various angles to break into nests of ants.（B）

(E) Anteaters are observed using the same angle used with nests of ants to break into the nests of other types of prey.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-22 21:05
When A. Philip Randolph assumed the leadership（这里的assume :start to control） of the Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters(a labour union), he began a ten-year battle to win recognition from the Pullman Company, the largest private employer of Black people in the United States and the company that controlled the railroad industry’s sleeping car and parlor service. In 1935 the Brotherhood became the first Black union recognized by a major corporation. Randolph’s efforts in the battle helped transform the attitude of Black workers toward unions and toward themselves as an identifiable group; eventually, Randolph helped to weaken organized labor’s antagonism toward Black workers.
In the Pullman contest Randolph faced formidable obstacles. The first was Black workers’ understandable skepticism toward unions, which had historically barred Black workers from membership. An additional obstacle was the union that Pullman itself had formed, which weakened support among Black workers for an independent entity.
The Brotherhood possessed a number of advantages, however, including Randolph’s own tactical abilities. In 1928 he took the bold step of threatening a strike against Pullman. Such a threat, on a national scale, under Black leadership, helped replace the stereotype of the Black worker as servant with the image of the Black worker as wage earner(我有些不能理解这样的事情，wage earner原来是一种劣势呀。). In addition, the porters’ very isolation aided the Brotherhood. Porters were scattered throughout the country, sleeping in dormitories in Black communities; their segregated life protected the union’s internal communications from interception. That the porters were a homogeneous group working for a single employer with single labor policy, thus sharing the same grievances from city to city, also strengthened the Brotherhood and encouraged racial identity and solidarity as well. But it was only in the early 1930’s that federal legislation prohibiting a company from maintaining its own unions with company money eventually allowed the Brotherhood to become recognized as the porters’ representative.
Not content with this triumph, Randolph brought the Brotherhood into the American Federation of Labor, where it became the equal of the Federation’s 105 other unions. He reasoned that as a member union, the Brotherhood would be in a better position to exert pressure on member unions that practiced race restrictions. Such restrictions were eventually found unconstitutional in 1944.

有些概念我有些混在一起，就是一个Brotherhood的black workers are the workers working for the Panllman

Brotherhood 先得到公司的承认，之后 win recognition for Federal goverment.

第一段，PR转变了black workers怎么看待union，themselves as an identifiable group，转变了其他工会对Black workers的歧视。
第二段，Randolph 遇到的两个问题：1 Black wokers’s understandable skepticism; 2 The union that Pullman itself had formed.
第三段，Brotherhood 成立的条件： 1 威胁举行strike; 2 porters' isolation; 3 the federal legislation.
第四段，Brotherhood become one Federal union.

错误 3 5

1. According to the passage, by 1935 the skepticism of Black workers toward unions was
(A) unchanged except among Black employees of railroad-related industries
(B) reinforced by the actions of the Pullman Company’s union
(C) mitigated by the efforts of Randolph
(D) weakened by the opening up of many unions to Black workers
(E) largely alleviated because of the policies of the American Federation of Labor
我就是不爱记数字，一到数字，就要回去找
1935年，Pullman已经承认了Brotherhood了


2. In using the word “understandable” (line 14), the author most clearly conveys
(A) sympathy with attempts by the Brotherhood between 1925 and 1935 to establish an independent union
(B) concern that the obstacles faced by Randolph between 1925 and 1935 were indeed formidable
(C) ambivalence about the significance of unions to most Black workers in the 1920’s
(D) appreciation of the attitude of many Black workers in the 1920’s toward unions
(E) regret at the historical attitude of unions toward Black workers


3. The passage suggests which of the following about the response of porters to the Pullman Company’s own union?
(A) Few porters ever joined this union.
(B) Some porters supported this union before 1935.
(C) Porters, more than other Pullman employees, enthusiastically supported this union.
(D) The porters’ response was most positive after 1935.
(E) The porters’ response was unaffected by the general skepticism of Black workers concerning unions.
我做的时候就在想， 这里不应该援引和题1一样的原文呀
which weakened support among Black workers for an independent entity
我就说呢，我哪里读不懂，不敢读，哪里就一定会考。这里我读的时候就是不知道啥意思。
刚才又读，觉得意思是：Pullman自己的union 削弱了Black workers 自己建一个independent entity的打算。就是说，有Black workers 是想加入Pullman union的。

4. The passage suggests that if the grievances of porters in one part of the United States had been different from those of porters in another part of the country, which of the following would have been the case?
(A) It would have been more difficult for the Pullman Company to have had a single labor policy.
(B) It would have been more difficult for the Brotherhood to control its channels of communication.
(C) It would have been more difficult for the Brotherhood to build its membership.
(D) It would have been easier for the Pullman Company’s union to attract membership.
(E) It would have been easier for the Brotherhood to threaten strikes.


5. The passage suggests that in the 1920’s a company in the United States was able to
(A) use its own funds to set up a union
(B) require its employees to join the company’s own union
(C) develop a single labor policy for all its employees with little employee dissent
(D) pressure its employees to contribute money to maintain the company’s own union
(E) use its resources to prevent the passage of federal legislation that would have facilitated the formation of independent unions
这里我猜的，
prohibiting a company from maintaining its own unions with company money
结合答案，理一下思路：Pullman20年代有工会吧。但是 30年代的立法，使得Brotherhood成了Porters' representative.那就是说，这个立法使得union脱离了公司辖制，成了全国porter的代表。
那么，2o年代，公司还是为union的成立给钱的，也正因为给钱，使得union发展不大。
我错是错在， set up a union 和maintain，我认为是不同的东西。

6. The passage supplies information concerning which of the following matters related to Randolph?
(A) The steps he took to initiate the founding of the Brotherhood
(B) His motivation for bringing the Brotherhood into the American Federation of Labor
(C) The influence he had on the passage of legislation overturning race restrictions in 1944
(D) The influence he had on the passage of legislation to bar companies from financing their own unions
(E) The success he and the Brotherhood had in influencing the policies of the other unions in the American Federation of Labor


When A. Philip Randolph assumed the leadership of the Brotherhood of Sleeping Car (sleeping car: 卧车) Porters, he began a ten-year battle to win recognition from the Pullman (Pullman: n.卧车, 普式火车(19世纪美国发明家George M.Pullman设计的豪华型列车车厢,常用为特等客车)) Company, the largest private employer of Black people in the United States and the company that controlled the railroad industry’s sleeping car (sleeping car: 卧车)and parlor (a room used primarily for conversation or the reception of guests: parlor car: n.特等豪华铁路客车) service. In 1935 the Brotherhood became the first Black union recognized by a major corporation. Randolph’s efforts in the battle helped transform the attitude of Black workers toward unions and toward themselves as an identifiable group; eventually, Randolph helped to weaken organized labor’s antagonism toward Black workers.

In the Pullman contest Randolph faced formidable obstacles. The first was Black workers’ understandable skepticism toward unions, which had historically barred Black workers from membership. An additional obstacle was the union that Pullman itself had formed, which weakened support among Black workers for an independent entity.

The Brotherhood possessed a number of advantages, however, including Randolph’s own tactical abilities. In 1928 he took the bold step of threatening a strike against Pullman. Such a threat, on a national scale, under Black leadership, helped replace the stereotype of the Black worker as servant with the image of the Black worker as wage earner (wage earner: n.靠工资为生的人, 雇佣劳动者). In addition, the porters’ very isolation aided the Brotherhood. Porters were scattered throughout the country, sleeping in dormitories in Black communities; their segregated life protected the union’s internal communications from interception. That the porters were a homogeneous group working for a single employer with single labor policy, thus sharing the same grievances from city to city, also strengthened the Brotherhood and encouraged racial identity and solidarity as well. But it was only in the early 1930’s that federal legislation prohibiting a company from maintaining its own unions with company money eventually allowed the Brotherhood to become recognized as the porters’ representative.

Not content with this triumph, Randolph brought the Brotherhood into the American Federation of Labor, where it became the equal of the Federation’s 105 other unions. He reasoned that as a member union, the Brotherhood would be in a better position to exert pressure on member unions that practiced race restrictions. Such restrictions were eventually found unconstitutional in 1944.

1.According to the passage, by 1935 the skepticism of Black workers toward unions was

(A) unchanged except among Black employees of railroad-related industries

(B) reinforced by the actions of the Pullman Company’s union

(C) mitigated by the efforts of Randolph

(D) weakened by the opening up of many unions to Black workers（C）

(E) largely alleviated because of the policies of the American Federation of Labor

2.In using the word “understandable” (line 14), the author most clearly conveys

(A) sympathy with attempts by the Brotherhood between 1925 and 1935 to establish an independent union

(B) concern that the obstacles faced by Randolph between 1925 and 1935 were indeed formidable

(C) ambivalence about the significance of unions to most Black workers in the 1920’s

(D) appreciation of the attitude of many Black workers in the 1920’s toward unions（D）

(E) regret at the historical attitude of unions toward Black workers

3.The passage suggests which of the following about the response of porters to the Pullman Company’s own union?

(A) Few porters ever joined this union.

(B) Some porters supported this union before 1935.

(C) Porters, more than other Pullman employees, enthusiastically supported this union.

(D) The porters’ response was most positive after 1935.（B）

(E) The porters’ response was unaffected by the general skepticism of Black workers concerning unions.

4.The passage suggests that if the grievances of porters in one part of the United States had been different from those of porters in another part of the country, which of the following would have been the case?

(A) It would have been more difficult for the Pullman Company to have had a single labor policy.

(B) It would have been more difficult for the Brotherhood to control its channels of communication.

(C) It would have been more difficult for the Brotherhood to build its membership.

(D) It would have been easier for the Pullman Company’s union to attract membership.（C）

(E) It would have been easier for the Brotherhood to threaten strikes.

5.The passage suggests that in the 1920’s a company in the United States was able to

(A) use its own funds to set up a union

(B) require its employees to join the company’s own union

(C) develop a single labor policy for all its employees with little employee dissent

(D) pressure its employees to contribute money to maintain the company’s own union（A）

(E) use its resources to prevent the passage of federal legislation that would have facilitated the formation of independent unions

6.The passage supplies information concerning which of the following matters related to Randolph?

(A) The steps he took to initiate the founding of the Brotherhood

(B) His motivation for bringing the Brotherhood into the American Federation of Labor

(C) The influence he had on the passage of legislation overturning race restrictions in 1944

(D) The influence he had on the passage of legislation to bar companies from financing their own unions（B）

(E) The success he and the Brotherhood had in influencing the policies of the other unions in the American Federation of Labor

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-23 10:35
今天 12篇， 明天11篇，后天10篇。我就完成任务了。

加油，

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-23 11:48
Historians of women’s labor in the United States at first largely disregarded the story of female service workers—women earning wages in occupations such as salesclerk, domestic servant, and office secretary. These historians focused instead on factory work, primarily because it seemed so different from traditional, unpaid “women’s work” in the home, and because the underlying economic forces of industrialism were presumed to be gender-blind and hence emancipatory in effect. Unfortunately, emancipation has been less profound than expected, for not even industrial wage labor has escaped continued sex segregation in the workplace.
To explain this unfinished revolution in the status of women, historians have recently begun to emphasize the way a prevailing definition of femininity often determines the kinds of work allocated to women, even when such allocation is inappropriate to new conditions. For instance, early textile-mill entrepreneurs, in justifying women’s employment in wage labor, made much of the assumption that women were by nature skillful at detailed tasks and patient in carrying out repetitive chores; the mill owners thus imported into the new industrial order hoary stereotypes associated with the homemaking activities they presumed to have been the purview of women. Because women accepted the more unattractive new industrial tasks more readily than did men, such jobs came to be regarded as female jobs. And employers, who assumed that women’s “real” aspirations were for marriage and family life, declined to pay women wages commensurate with those of men. Thus many lower-skilled, lower-paid, less secure jobs came to be perceived as “female.”
More remarkable than the origin has been the persistence of such sex segregation in twentieth-century industry. Once an occupation came to be perceived as “female.” employers showed surprisingly little interest in changing that perception, even when higher profits beckoned. And despite the urgent need of the United States during the Second World War to mobilize its human resources fully, job segregation by sex characterized even the most important war industries. Moreover, once the war ended, employers quickly returned to men most of the “male” jobs that women had been permitted to master.（这里又有倒装，天呀，这遍复习，我找到多少倒装。）

not even industrial wage labor has escaped（这里整个句子做主语） continued sex segregation in the workplace.
翻译：工资的不平等一直延续着工厂里的sex segregation.

总之，我看这篇文章，我很同意这个作者讲得。是不是我们平时认为的，"行政工作本应该不高"这样想法，也要改改呀。 我真挺喜欢这篇文章的。

第一段，历史学家开始的时候研究工厂里的女性，因为他们认为，工厂是没有性别歧视的，工厂可以解放女性。但是，这种解放， emancipation is less profound，因为工厂里存在着uneven wage， 存在着sex segregation. （注意，这个segregation，我的理解还是那么的狭隘，总觉得这个词只是用于 Black in American South, 但是你看看这里的用法，sex segregation.）
第二段，因为开始在解释女人为什么可以工作的时候，过分强调了女人愿意做detailed and repetitive works, 所以Mill owner 建立的生产流程也是这样考虑的；同时女人比男人更愿意解释这些unattractive work。最终的结果就是，解释mill owners 不愿意为女人支付和男人相当的工资。
第三段，这种sex segregation到了20世纪，更加的变本加厉。表现有三： employer 一旦认定某种工作是female的，即便自己的利润在丰厚，他也不会提高female workers的工资；二战时候，这么缺少人，job segregatio 还是很严重；三，就是战争一结束，这些老板有把原本女人也能胜任的工作给了男人。

错误 5

1. According to the passage, job segregation by sex in the United States was
(A) greatly diminished by labor mobilization during the Second World War
(B) perpetuated by those textile-mill owners who argued in favor of women’s employment in wage labor
(C) one means by which women achieved greater job security
(D) reluctantly challenged by employers except when the economic advantages were obvious
(E) a constant source of labor unrest in the young textile industry

2. According to the passage, historians of women’s labor focused on factory work as a more promising area of research than service-sector work because factory work
(A) involved the payment of higher wages
(B) required skill in detailed tasks
(C) was assumed to be less characterized by sex segregation
(D) was more readily accepted by women than by men
(E) fitted the economic dynamic of industrialism better
gender blinder and hence emanicpatory in effect这里。

3. It can be inferred from the passage that early historians of women’s labor in the United States paid little attention to women’s employment in the service sector of the economy because
(A) the extreme variety of these occupations made it very difficult to assemble meaningful statistics about them
(B) fewer women found employment in the service sector than in factory work
(C) the wages paid to workers in the service sector were much lower than those paid in the industrial sector
(D) women’s employment in the service sector tended to be much more short-term than in factory work
(E) employment in the service sector seemed to have much in common with the unpaid work associated with homemaking
2,3 两个题，都是考察一句话。

4. The passage supports which of the following statements about the early mill owners mentioned in the second paragraph?
(A) They hoped that by creating relatively unattractive “female” jobs they would discourage women from losing interest in marriage and family life.
(B) They sought to increase the size of the available labor force as a means to keep men’s wages low.
(C) They argued that women were inherently suited to do well in particular kinds of factory work.
(D) They thought that factory work bettered the condition of women by emancipating them from dependence on income earned by men.
(E) They felt guilty about disturbing the traditional division of labor in family.


5. It can be inferred from the passage that the “unfinished revolution” the author mentions in line 13 refers to the
(A) entry of women into the industrial labor market
(B) recognition that work done by women as homemakers should be compensated at rates comparable to those prevailing in the service sector of the economy
(C) development of a new definition of femininity unrelated to the economic forces of industrialism
(D) introduction of equal pay for equal work in all professions
(E) emancipation of women wage earners from gender-determined job allocation
我做题的时候，当机，不知道这里应该是什么。 后对着答案想，这个文章我开始的时候真不知道讨论的主要问题是什么。
全文，讲得都是job segregation, sex segregation. 因为这个segregation, 造成的female work wages are lower than those of male's. 文章最后一段，讲述的也是，战争期间有些工作不会让女人做，战争结束后，这些工作又还给了男人。所以，首先的问题还是 gender determined job allocation, 而不是D  equal pay for equal work。 你连工作都不让做，又怎么equal pay 呢？

6. The passage supports which of the following statements about hiring policies in the United States?
(A) After a crisis many formerly “male” jobs are reclassified as “female” jobs.
(B) Industrial employers generally prefer to hire women with previous experience as homemakers.
(C) Post-Second World War hiring policies caused women to lose many of their wartime gains in employment opportunity.
(D) Even war industries during the Second World War were reluctant to hire women for factory work.
(E) The service sector of the economy has proved more nearly gender-blind in its hiring policies than has the manufacturing sector.


7. Which of the following words best expresses the opinion of the author of the passage concerning the notion that women are more skillful than men in carrying out detailed tasks?
(A) “patient” (line 21)
(B) “repetitive” (line 21)
(C) “hoary” (line 22)
(D) “homemaking” (line 23)
(E) “purview” (line 24)


8. Which of the following best describes the relationship of the final paragraph to the passage as a whole?
(A) The central idea is reinforced by the citation of evidence drawn from twentieth-century history.
(B) The central idea is restated in such a way as to form a transition to a new topic for discussion.
(C) The central idea is restated and juxtaposed with evidence that might appear to contradict it.
(D) A partial exception to the generalizations of the central idea is dismissed as unimportant.
(E) Recent history is cited to suggest that the central idea’s validity is gradually diminishing.

Historians of women’s labor in the United States at first largely disregarded the story of female service workers—women earning wages in occupations such as salesclerk (salesclerk: n.商店里的店员), domestic servant, and office secretary. These historians focused instead on factory work, primarily because it seemed so different from traditional, unpaid “women’s work” in the home, and because the underlying economic forces of industrialism were presumed to be gender-blind and hence emancipatory in effect (in effect: in substance: VIRTUALLY “the T committee agreed to what was in effect a reduction in the hourly wage Current Biography”). Unfortunately, emancipation has been less profound than expected, for not even industrial wage labor has escaped continued sex segregation in the workplace.

To explain this unfinished revolution in the status of women, historians have recently begun to emphasize the way a prevailing definition of femininity often determines the kinds of work allocated to women, even when such allocation is inappropriate to new conditions. For instance, early textile-mill entrepreneurs, in justifying women’s employment in wage labor, made much of the assumption that women were by nature (by nature: adv.生来) skillful at detailed tasks and patient in carrying out repetitive chores; the mill owners thus imported into the new industrial order hoary stereotypes associated with the homemaking activities they presumed to have been the purview of women. Because women accepted the more unattractive new industrial tasks more readily than did men, such jobs came to be regarded as female jobs. And employers, who assumed that women’s “real” aspirations were for marriage and family life, declined to pay women wages commensurate with those of men. Thus many lower-skilled, lower-paid, less secure jobs came to be perceived as “female.”

More remarkable than the origin has been the persistence of such sex segregation in twentieth-century industry. Once an occupation came to be perceived as “female.” employers showed surprisingly little interest in changing that perception, even when higher profits beckoned. And despite the urgent need of the United States during the Second World War to mobilize its human resources fully, job segregation by sex characterized even the most important war industries. Moreover, once the war ended, employers quickly returned to men most of the “male” jobs that women had been permitted to master.

1.According to the passage, job segregation by sex in the United States was

(A) greatly diminished by labor mobilization during the Second World War

(B) perpetuated by those textile-mill owners who argued in favor of women’s employment in wage labor

(C) one means by which women achieved greater job security

(D) reluctantly challenged by employers except when the economic advantages were obvious（B）

(E) a constant source of labor unrest in the young textile industry

2.According to the passage, historians of women’s labor focused on factory work as a more promising area of research than service-sector work because factory work

(A) involved the payment of higher wages

(B) required skill in detailed tasks

(C) was assumed to be less characterized by sex segregation

(D) was more readily accepted by women than by men（C）

(E) fitted the economic dynamic of industrialism better

3.It can be inferred from the passage that early historians of women’s labor in the United States paid little attention to women’s employment in the service sector of the economy because

(A) the extreme variety of these occupations made it very difficult to assemble meaningful statistics about them

(B) fewer women found employment in the service sector than in factory work

(C) the wages paid to workers in the service sector were much lower than those paid in the industrial sector

(D) women’s employment in the service sector tended to be much more short-term than in factory work（E）

(E) employment in the service sector seemed to have much in common with the unpaid work associated with homemaking

4.The passage supports which of the following statements about the early mill owners mentioned in the second paragraph?

(A) They hoped that by creating relatively unattractive “female” jobs they would discourage women from losing interest in marriage and family life.

(B) They sought to increase the size of the available labor force as a means to keep men’s wages low.

(C) They argued that women were inherently suited to do well in particular kinds of factory work.

(D) They thought that factory work bettered the condition of women by emancipating them from dependence on income earned by men.（C）

(E) They felt guilty about disturbing the traditional division of labor in family.

5.It can be inferred from the passage that the “unfinished revolution” the author mentions in line 13 refers to the

(A) entry of women into the industrial labor market

(B) recognition that work done by women as homemakers should be compensated at rates comparable to those prevailing in the service sector of the economy

(C) development of a new definition of femininity unrelated to the economic forces of industrialism

(D) introduction of equal pay for equal work in all professions（E）

(E) emancipation of women wage earners from gender-determined job allocation

6.The passage supports which of the following statements about hiring policies in the United States?

(A) After a crisis many formerly “male” jobs are reclassified as “female” jobs.

(B) Industrial employers generally prefer to hire women with previous experience as homemakers.

(C) Post-Second World War hiring policies caused women to lose many of their wartime gains in employment opportunity.

(D) Even war industries during the Second World War were reluctant to hire women for factory work.（C）

(E) The service sector of the economy has proved more nearly gender-blind in its hiring policies than has the manufacturing sector.

7.Which of the following words best expresses the opinion of the author of the passage concerning the notion that women are more skillful than men in carrying out detailed tasks?

(A) “patient” (line 21)

(B) “repetitive” (line 21)

(C) “hoary” (line 22)

(D) “homemaking” (line 23)（C）

(E) “purview” (line 24)

8.Which of the following best describes the relationship of the final paragraph to the passage as a whole?

(A) The central idea is reinforced by the citation of evidence drawn from twentieth-century history.

(B) The central idea is restated in such a way as to form a transition to a new topic for discussion.

(C) The central idea is restated and juxtaposed with evidence that might appear to contradict it.

(D) A partial exception to the generalizations of the central idea is dismissed as unimportant.（A）

(E) Recent history is cited to suggest that the central idea’s validity is gradually diminishing.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-23 11:53
According to a recent theory, Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems were formed over two billion years agofrom magnetic fluids that originated from molten granite-like bodies deep beneath the surface of the Earth. This theory is contrary to the widely held view that the systems were deposited from metamorphic fluids, that is, from fluids that formed during the dehydration of wet sedimentary rocks.
The recently developed theory has considerable practical importance. Most of the gold deposits discovered during the original gold rushes were exposed at the Earth’s surface and were found because they had shed trails of alluvial gold that were easily traced by simple prospecting methods. Although these same methods still lead to an occasional discovery, most deposits not yet discovered have gone undetected because they are buried and have no surface expression.
The challenge in exploration is therefore to unravel the subsurface geology of an area and pinpoint the position of buried minerals. Methods widely used today include analysis of aerial images that yield a broad geological overview; geophysical techniques that provide data on the magnetic, electrical, and mineralogical properties of the rocks being investigated; and sensitive chemical tests that are able to detect the subtle chemical halos that often envelop mineralization. However, none of these high-technology methods are of any value if the sites to which they are applied have never mineralized, and to maximize the chances of discovery the explorer must therefore pay particular attention to selecting the ground formations most likely to be mineralized. Such ground selection relies to varying degrees on conceptual models, which take into account （考虑到）theoretical studies of relevant factors.
These models are constructed primarily from empirical observations of known mineral deposits and from theories of ore-forming processes. The explorer uses the models to identify those geological features that are critical to the formation of the mineralization being modeled, and then tries to select areas for exploration that exhibit as many of the critical features as possible.

Archean- age
Mineralization
Mineralization is the process of depositing minerals or naturally occuring inorganic chemicals. This may be a normal biological process which takes place during the life of an organism such as the the formation of bone tissue or egg shells. Alternatively it may a process which begins after death, the total replacement of the organic material with various minerals ie Fossilization. Frequently this involves either Calcium carbonate or Silica but many other minerals can be involved.

Minerlaization: 无机物质的自然沉积，或是有机物质的fossilization.

第一段，gold-quarta vein systems 来自岩浆。
第二段，这个发现可以帮助发现那些表面没有痕迹的金子
第三段，寻找buried  mineral 有三种方法： 航拍，地质物理技术和化学检测。但是，问题是所有这些技术，都是在找到有矿藏的地方才可以。这就需要conceptual models.
第四段，这些理论模型来自于经验观察，也来自于ore-forming 的理论。（所以，第一段的理论发现是很重要的。）



1. The author is primarily concerned with
(A) advocating a return to an older methodology
(B) explaining the importance of a recent theory
(C) enumerating differences between two widely used methods
(D) describing events leading to a discovery
(E) challenging the assumptions on which a theory is based

2. According to the passage, the widely held view of Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems is that such systems
(A) were formed from metamorphic fluids
(B) originated in molten granite-like bodies
(C) were formed from alluvial deposits
(D) generally have surface expression
(E) are not discoverable through chemical tests

3. The passage implies that which of the following steps would be the first performed by explorers who wish to maximize their chances of discovering gold?
(A) Surveying several sites known to have been formed more than two billion years ago
(B) Limiting exploration to sites known to have been formed from metamorphic fluid
(C) Using an appropriate conceptual model to select a site for further exploration
(D) Using geophysical methods to analyze rocks over a broad area
(E) Limiting exploration to sites where alluvial gold has previously been found


4. Which of the following statements about discoveries of gold deposits is supported by information in the passage?
(A) The number of gold discoveries made annually has increased between the time of the original gold rushes and the present.
(B) New discoveries of gold deposits are likely to be the result of exploration techniques designed to locate buried mineralization.
(C) It is unlikely that newly discovered gold deposits will ever yield as much as did those deposits discovered during the original gold rushes.
(D) Modern explorers are divided on the question of the utility of simple prospecting methods as a source of new discoveries of gold deposits.
(E) Models based on the theory that gold originated from magnetic fluids have already led to new discoveries of gold deposits.


5. It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is easiest to detect?
(A) A gold-quartz vein system originating in magnetic fluids
(B) A gold-quartz vein system originating in metamorphic fluids
(C) A gold deposit that is mixed with granite
(D) A gold deposit that has shed alluvial gold
(E) A gold deposit that exhibits chemical halos


6. The theory mentioned in line 1 relates to the conceptual models discussed in the passage in which of the following ways?
(A) It may furnish a valid account of ore-forming processes, and, hence, can support conceptual models that have great practical significance.
(B) It suggests that certain geological formations, long believed to be mineralized, are in fact mineralized, thus confirming current conceptual models.
(C) It suggests that there may not be enough similarity across Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems to warrant the formulation of conceptual models.
(D) It corrects existing theories about the chemical halos of gold deposits, and thus provides a basis for correcting current conceptual models.
(E) It suggests that simple prospecting methods still have a higher success rate in the discovery of gold deposits than do more modern methods.


7. According to the passage, methods of exploring for gold that are widely used today are based on which of the following facts?
(A) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are still molten.
(B) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are exposed at the surface.
(C) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are buried and have no surface expression.
(D) Only one type of gold deposit warrants exploration, since the other types of gold deposits are found in regions difficult to reach.
(E) Only one type of gold deposit warrants exploration, since the other types of gold deposits are unlikely to yield concentrated quantities of gold.


8. It can be inferred from the passage that the efficiency of model-based gold exploration depends on which of the following?
I. The closeness of the match between the geological features identified by the model as critical and the actual geological features of a given area
II. The degree to which the model chosen relies on empirical observation of known mineral deposits rather than on theories of ore-forming processes
III. The degree to which the model chosen is based on an accurate description of the events leading to mineralization
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II and III

According to a recent theory, Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems were formed over two billion years ago from magnetic fluids that originated from molten granite-like bodies deep beneath the surface of the Earth. This theory is contrary to the widely held view that the systems were deposited from metamorphic fluids, that is, from fluids that formed during the dehydration of wet sedimentary rocks.

The recently developed theory has considerable practical importance. Most of the gold deposits discovered during the original gold rushes were exposed at the Earth’s surface and were found because they had shed trails of alluvial gold (alluvial gold: 砂金) that were easily traced by simple prospecting (prospecting: n.探矿) methods. Although these same methods still lead to an occasional discovery, most deposits not yet discovered have gone undetected because they are buried and have no surface expression.

The challenge in exploration is therefore to unravel the subsurface geology of an area and pinpoint the position of buried minerals. Methods widely used today include analysis of aerial images that yield a broad geological overview; geophysical techniques that provide data on the magnetic, electrical, and mineralogical properties of the rocks being investigated; and sensitive chemical tests that are able to detect the subtle chemical halos that often envelop mineralization. However, none of these high-technology methods are of any value if the sites to which they are applied have never mineralized, and to maximize the chances of discovery the explorer must therefore pay particular attention to selecting the ground formations most likely to be mineralized. Such ground selection relies to varying degrees on conceptual models, which take into account theoretical studies of relevant factors.

These models are constructed primarily from empirical observations of known mineral deposits and from theories of ore-forming processes. The explorer uses the models to identify those geological features that are critical to the formation of the mineralization being modeled, and then tries to select areas for exploration that exhibit as many of the critical features as possible.

1.The author is primarily concerned with

(A) advocating a return to an older methodology

(B) explaining the importance of a recent theory

(C) enumerating differences between two widely used methods

(D) describing events leading to a discovery（B）

(E) challenging the assumptions on which a theory is based

2.According to the passage, the widely held view of Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems is that such systems

(A) were formed from metamorphic fluids

(B) originated in molten granite-like bodies

(C) were formed from alluvial deposits

(D) generally have surface expression（A）

(E) are not discoverable through chemical tests

3.The passage implies that which of the following steps would be the first performed by explorers who wish to maximize their chances of discovering gold?

(A) Surveying several sites known to have been formed more than two billion years ago

(B) Limiting exploration to sites known to have been formed from metamorphic fluid

(C) Using an appropriate conceptual model to select a site for further exploration

(D) Using geophysical methods to analyze rocks over a broad area（C）

(E) Limiting exploration to sites where alluvial gold has previously been found

4.Which of the following statements about discoveries of gold deposits is supported by information in the passage?

(A) The number of gold discoveries made annually has increased between the time of the original gold rushes and the present.

(B) New discoveries of gold deposits are likely to be the result of exploration techniques designed to locate buried mineralization.

(C) It is unlikely that newly discovered gold deposits will ever yield as much as did those deposits discovered during the original gold rushes.

(D) Modern explorers are divided on the question of the utility of simple prospecting methods as a source of new discoveries of gold deposits.（B）

(E) Models based on the theory that gold originated from magnetic fluids have already led to new discoveries of gold deposits.

5.It can be inferred from the passage that which of the following is easiest to detect?

(A) A gold-quartz vein system originating in magnetic fluids

(B) A gold-quartz vein system originating in metamorphic fluids

(C) A gold deposit that is mixed with granite

(D) A gold deposit that has shed alluvial gold（D）

(E) A gold deposit that exhibits chemical halos

6.The theory mentioned in line 1 relates to the conceptual models discussed in the passage in which of the following ways?

(A) It may furnish a valid account of ore-forming processes, and, hence, can support conceptual models that have great practical significance.

(B) It suggests that certain geological formations, long believed to be mineralized, are in fact mineralized, thus confirming current conceptual models.

(C) It suggests that there may not be enough similarity across Archean-age gold-quartz vein systems to warrant the formulation of conceptual models.

(D) It corrects existing theories about the chemical halos of gold deposits, and thus provides a basis for correcting current conceptual models.（A）

(E) It suggests that simple prospecting methods still have a higher success rate in the discovery of gold deposits than do more modern methods.

7.According to the passage, methods of exploring for gold that are widely used today are based on which of the following facts?

(A) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are still molten.

(B) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are exposed at the surface.

(C) Most of the Earth’s remaining gold deposits are buried and have no surface expression.

(D) Only one type of gold deposit warrants exploration, since the other types of gold deposits are found in regions difficult to reach.（C）

(E) Only one type of gold deposit warrants exploration, since the other types of gold deposits are unlikely to yield concentrated quantities of gold.

8.It can be inferred from the passage that the efficiency of model-based gold exploration depends on which of the following?

I.The closeness of the match between the geological features identified by the model as critical and the actual geological features of a given area

II.The degree to which the model chosen relies on empirical observation of known mineral deposits rather than on theories of ore-forming processes

III.The degree to which the model chosen is based on an accurate description of the events leading to mineralization

(A) I only

(B) II only

(C) I and II only

(D) I and III only（D）

(E) I, II and III

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-24 15:10
While there is no blueprint for transforming a largely（大体上了，主要是 mainly ） government-controlled economy into a free one, the experience of the United Kingdom since 1979 clearly shows one approach that works: privatization, in which state-owned industries are sold to private companies. By 1979, the total borrowings and losses of state-owned industries were running at about £3 billion a year. By selling many of these industries, the government has decreased these borrowings and losses, gained over £34 billion from the sales, and now receives tax revenues from the newly privatized companies. Along with a dramatically improved overall economy, the government has been able to repay 12.5 percent of the net national debt over a two-year period.
In fact, privatization has not only rescued individual industries and a whole economy headed for disaster, but has also raised the level of performance in every area. At British Airways and British Gas, for example, productivity per employee has risen by 20 percent. At Associated British Ports, labor disruptions common in the 1970’s and early 1980’s have now virtually disappeared. At British Telecom, there is no longer a waiting list—as there always was before privatization—to have a telephone installed.
Part of this improved productivity has come about because the employees of privatized industries were given the opportunity to buy shares in their own companies. They responded enthusiastically to the offer of shares; at British Aerospace, 89 percent of the eligible work force bought shares; at Associated British Ports, 90 percent; and at British Telecom, 92 percent. When people have a personal stake in something, they think about it, care about it, work to make it prosper. At the National Freight Consortium, the new employee-owners grew so concerned about their company’s profits that during wage negotiations they actually pressed their union to lower its wage demands.
Some economists have suggested that giving away free shares would provide a needed acceleration of the privatization process. Yet they miss Thomas Paine’s point that “what we obtain too cheap we esteem too lightly.” In order for the far-ranging benefits of individual ownership to be achieved by owners, companies, and countries, employees and other individuals must make their own decisions to buy, and they must commit some of their own resources to the choice.（我觉得这个句子就是很西方化。我的意思是说这样的话，需要一些文化背景的知识。）

what we obtain too cheap we esteem too lightly. 轻易得到的东西，我们都是不是很重视。
反正，我表示我对自由经济不是很感冒。
再补充一点，就是这个privatizaion process 全世界都没有一个方法，这个文章只是讲了一个成功的例子。


第一段，一种从政府管控经济转向free economy的一个方法：privatization. 这样，政府从卖企业上得到一笔，而且和可以从这些企业收税。一个很直接的好处是，英国政府可以可以还债了。
第二段，就是私有化其他的好处就是提升了各个方面的效率。
第三段，为什么这么有效率，是因为employees of privatized industries brought the shares in their own companies. （但是，最后一句表黑的是什么意思？这些员工疯了不成，为了公司利润，自己少要工资，难道股票这么真可以补偿工资的降低？？）
第四段，some economists 认为在私有化进程中，免费给share 可以促进私有化进程。但是作者不同意。（这段不是做题，我就理解错了）

错误 6

1. According to the passage, all of the following were benefits of privatizing state-owned industries in the United Kingdom EXCEPT:
(A) Privatized industries paid taxes to the government.
(B) The government gained revenue from selling state-owned industries.
(C) The government repaid some of its national debt.
(D) Profits from industries that were still state-owned increased.
(E) Total borrowings and losses of state-owned industries decreased.


2. According to the passage, which of the following resulted in increased productivity in companies that have been privatized?
(A) A large number of employees chose to purchase shares in their companies.
(B) Free shares were widely distributed to individual shareholders.
(C) The government ceased to regulate major industries.
(D) Unions conducted wage negotiations for employees.
(E) Employee-owners agreed to have their wages lowered.
比较AB ，注意 问题关键是 employee 持有，而不是shareholders 持有

3. It can be inferred from the passage that the author considers labor disruptions to be
(A) an inevitable problem in a weak national economy
(B) a positive sign of employee concern about a company
(C) a predictor of employee reactions to a company’s offer to sell shares to them
(D) a phenomenon found more often in state-owned industries than in private companies
(E) a deterrence to high performance levels in an industry


4. The passage supports which of the following statements about employees buying shares in their own companies?
(A) At three different companies, approximately nine out of ten of the workers were eligible to buy shares in their companies.
(B) Approximately 90% of the eligible workers at three different companies chose o buy shares in their companies.
(C) The opportunity to buy shares was discouraged by at least some labor unions.
(D) Companies that demonstrated the highest productivity were the first to allow their employees the opportunity to buy shares.
(E) Eligibility to buy shares was contingent on employees’ agreeing to increased work loads.


5. Which of the following statements is most consistent with the principle described in lines 30-32?
(A) A democratic government that decides it is inappropriate to own a particular industry has in no way abdicated its responsibilities as guardian of the public interest.
(B) The ideal way for a government to protect employee interests is to force companies to maintain their share of a competitive market without government subsidies.
(C) The failure to harness the power of self-interest is an important reason that state-owned industries perform poorly.
(D) Governments that want to implement privatization programs must try to eliminate all resistance to the free-market system.
(E) The individual shareholder will reap only a minute share of the gains from whatever sacrifices he or she makes to achieve these gains.


6. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the privatization process in the United Kingdom?
(A) It depends to a potentially dangerous degree on individual ownership of shares.
(B) It conforms in its most general outlines to Thomas Paine’s prescription for business ownership.
(C) It was originally conceived to include some giving away of free shares.
(D) It has been successful, even though privatization has failed in other countries.
(E) It is taking place more slowly than some economists suggest is necessary.
这个题，privationzation process，整个世界都没有一个blueprint，
我只能说这是我第四段没有读明白的后遗症。D不对的，文章说的世界上没有一个blueprint，但是人家没有说privatizaiont process 在其他地方没有成果。
It is taking place more slowly than some economists suggest is necessary 我自己句子分析一下，划线部分都是主语。
这个题是这样的。有些economists 认为发免费的shares 可以促进私有化进程，但是 作者明显是反对这个这个意义的，认为，what we obtains too cheep we esteem slightly. 所以，明显作者不赞成免费发share, 这样的私有化进程就会慢下来。 这个推理有些像逻辑里的取非.

7. The quotation in line 39 is most probably used to
(A) counter a position that the author of the passage believes is incorrect
(B) state a solution to a problem described in the previous sentence
(C) show how opponents of the viewpoint of the author of the passage have supported their arguments
(D) point out a paradox contained in a controversial viewpoint
(E) present a historical maxim to challenge the principle introduced in the third paragraph


While there is no blueprint (a detailed plan or program of action “a blueprint for victory”)for transforming a largely government-controlled economy into a free one, the experience of the United Kingdom since 1979 clearly shows one approach that works: privatization, in which state-owned industries are sold to private companies. By 1979, the total borrowings and losses of state-owned industries were running at about £3 billion a year. By selling many of these industries, the government has decreased these borrowings and losses, gained over £34 billion from the sales, and now receives tax revenues from the newly privatized companies. Along with a dramatically improved overall economy, the government has been able to repay 12.5 percent of the net national debt over a two-year period.

In fact, privatization has not only rescued individual industries and a whole economy headed for disaster, but has also raised the level of performance in every area. At British Airways and British Gas, for example, productivity per employee has risen by 20 percent. At Associated British Ports, labor disruptions common in the 1970’s and early 1980’s have now virtually disappeared. At British Telecom, there is no longer a waiting list—as there always was before privatization—to have a telephone installed.

Part of this improved productivity has come about (come about: v.发生, 产生, 改变方向;发生,转向) because the employees of privatized industries were given the opportunity to buy shares in their own companies. They responded enthusiastically to the offer of shares; at British Aerospace, 89 percent of the eligible work force bought shares; at Associated British Ports, 90 percent; and at British Telecom, 92 percent. When people have a personal stake in something, they think about it, care about it, work to make it prosper. At the National Freight Consortium, the new employee-owners grew so concerned about their company’s profits that during wage negotiations they actually pressed their union to lower its wage demands.

Some economists have suggested that giving away free shares would provide a needed acceleration of the privatization process. Yet they miss Thomas Paine’s point that “what we obtain too cheap we esteem too lightly.” In order for the far-ranging benefits of individual ownership to be achieved by owners, companies, and countries, employees and other individuals must make their own decisions to buy, and they must commit some of their own resources to the choice.

1.According to the passage, all of the following were benefits of privatizing state-owned industries in the United Kingdom EXCEPT:

(A) Privatized industries paid taxes to the government.

(B) The government gained revenue from selling state-owned industries.

(C) The government repaid some of its national debt.

(D) Profits from industries that were still state-owned increased.（D）

(E) Total borrowings and losses of state-owned industries decreased.

2.According to the passage, which of the following resulted in increased productivity in companies that have been privatized?

(A) A large number of employees chose to purchase shares in their companies.

(B) Free shares were widely distributed to individual shareholders.

(C) The government ceased to regulate major industries.

(D) Unions conducted wage negotiations for employees.（A）

(E) Employee-owners agreed to have their wages lowered.

3.It can be inferred from the passage that the author considers labor disruptions to be

(A) an inevitable problem in a weak national economy

(B) a positive sign of employee concern about a company

(C) a predictor of employee reactions to a company’s offer to sell shares to them

(D) a phenomenon found more often in state-owned industries than in private companies（E）

(E) a deterrence to high performance levels in an industry

4.The passage supports which of the following statements about employees buying shares in their own companies?

(A) At three different companies, approximately nine out of ten of the workers were eligible to buy shares in their companies.

(B) Approximately 90% of the eligible workers at three different companies chose o buy shares in their companies.

(C) The opportunity to buy shares was discouraged by at least some labor unions.

(D) Companies that demonstrated the highest productivity were the first to allow their employees the opportunity to buy shares.（B）

(E) Eligibility to buy shares was contingent on employees’ agreeing to increased work loads.

5.Which of the following statements is most consistent with the principle described in lines 30-32?

(A) A democratic government that decides it is inappropriate to own a particular industry has in no way abdicated its responsibilities as guardian of the public interest.

(B) The ideal way for a government to protect employee interests is to force companies to maintain their share of a competitive market without government subsidies.

(C) The failure to harness the power of self-interest is an important reason that state-owned industries perform poorly.

(D) Governments that want to implement privatization programs must try to eliminate all resistance to the free-market system.（C）

(E) The individual shareholder will reap only a minute share of the gains from whatever sacrifices he or she makes to achieve these gains.

6.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage about the privatization process in the United Kingdom?

(A) It depends to a potentially dangerous degree on individual ownership of shares.

(B) It conforms in its most general outlines to Thomas Paine’s prescription for business ownership.

(C) It was originally conceived to include some giving away of free shares.

(D) It has been successful, even though privatization has failed in other countries.（E）

(E) It is taking place more slowly than some economists suggest is necessary.

7.The quotation in line 39 is most probably used to

(A) It depends to a potentially dangerous degree on individual ownership of shares.

(B) It conforms in its most general outlines to Thomas Paine’s prescription for business ownership.

(C) It was originally conceived to include some giving away of free shares.

(D) It has been successful, even though privatization has failed in other countries.（E）

(E) It is taking place more slowly than some economists suggest is necessary.

7.The quotation in [url=http://forum.chasedream.com/GMAT_Preparation/#p45q7]line 39 is most probably used to

(A) counter a position that the author of the passage believes is incorrect

(B) state a solution to a problem described in the previous sentence

(C) show how opponents of the viewpoint of the author of the passage have supported their arguments

(D) point out a paradox contained in a controversial viewpoint（A）

(E) present a historical maxim to challenge the principle introduced in the third paragraph

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-24 15:41
Seeking a competitive advantage, some professional service firms (for example, firms providing advertising, accounting, or health care services) have considered offering unconditional guarantees of satisfaction. Such guarantees specify what clients can expect and what the firm will do if it fails to fulfill these expectations. Particularly with first-time clients, an unconditional guarantee can be an effective marketing tool if the client is very cautious, the firm’s fees are high, the negative consequences of bad service are grave, or business is difficult to obtain through referrals and word-of-mouth.
However, an unconditional guarantee can sometimes hinder marketing efforts. With its implication that failure is possible, the guarantee may, paradoxically, cause clients to doubt the service firm’s ability to deliver the promised level of service. It may conflict with a firm’s desire to appear sophisticated, or may even suggest that a firm is begging for business. In legal and health care services, it may mislead clients by suggesting that lawsuits or medical procedures will have guaranteed outcomes. Indeed, professional service firms with outstanding reputations and performance to match have little to gain from offering unconditional guarantees. And any firm that implements an unconditional guarantee without undertaking a commensurate commitment(commitment 这个词很难翻译,工作投入。) to quality of service is merely employing a potentially costly marketing gimmick.

commitment : the hard work and loyalty that someone gives to an organization, activity etc
　I was impressed by the energy and commitment shown by the players.


看见 unconditional，我想到一个很有文化的词“categorical”

第一段，就是 professional service firms 使用unconditional gurantee of satisfation 来赢的自己竞争力，特别是指针对first time customers.
第二段，unconditional guarantee of satisfaction 有些不好的暗示。工作优异的公司没有通过这个获得多少好处。因此，任何一个只保证，但是不好好干活的人都是在搞噱头。

错误 2

1. The primary function of the passage as a whole is to
(A) account for the popularity of a practice
(B) evaluate the utility of a practice
(C) demonstrate how to institute a practice
(D) weigh the ethics of using a strategy
(E) explain the reasons for pursuing a strategy
开始找refute这个味道的词，没有，就只能是evaluate.

2. All of the following are mentioned in the passage as circumstances in which professional service firms can benefit from offering an unconditional guarantee EXCEPT:
(A) The firm is having difficulty retaining its clients of long standing.
(B) The firm is having difficulty getting business through client recommendations.
(C) The firm charges substantial fees for its services.
(D) The adverse effects of poor performance by the firm are significant for the client.
(E) The client is reluctant to incur risk.
if the client is very cautious, the firm’s fees are high, the negative consequences of bad service are grave, or business is difficult to obtain through referrals and word-of-mouth.
我不爱回去看。但是我也应该注意到，这个手段主要是针对 first time customers的呀。

3. Which of the following is cited in the passage as a goal of some professional service firms in offering unconditional guarantees of satisfaction?
(A) A limit on the firm’s liability
(B) Successful competition against other firms
(C) Ability to justify fee increases
(D) Attainment of an outstanding reputation in a field
(E) Improvement in the quality of the firm’s service


4. The passage’s description of the issue raised by unconditional guarantees for health care or legal services most clearly implies that which of the following is true?
(A) The legal and medical professions have standards of practice that would be violated by attempts to fulfill such unconditional guarantees.
(B) The result of a lawsuit of medical procedure cannot necessarily be determined in advance by the professionals handling a client’s case.
(C) The dignity of the legal and medical professions is undermined by any attempts at marketing of professional services, including unconditional guarantees.
(D) Clients whose lawsuits or medical procedures have unsatisfactory outcomes cannot be adequately compensated by financial settlements alone.
(E) Predicting the monetary cost of legal or health care services is more difficult than predicting the monetary cost of other types of professional services.


5. Which of the following hypothetical situations best exemplifies the potential problem noted in the second sentence of the second paragraph (lines 14-17)?
(A) A physician’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction encourages patients to sue for malpractice if they are unhappy with the treatment they receive.
(B) A lawyer’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction makes clients suspect that the lawyer needs to find new clients quickly to increase the firm’s income.
(C) A business consultant’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction is undermined when the consultant fails to provide all of the services that are promised.
(D) An architect’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction makes clients wonder how often the architect’s buildings fail to please clients.
(E) An accountant’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction leads clients to believe that tax returns prepared by the accountant are certain to be accurate.


6. The passage most clearly implies which of the following about the professional service firms mentioned in line 22?
(A) They are unlikely to have offered unconditional guarantees of satisfaction in the past.
(B) They are usually profitable enough to be able to compensate clients according to the terms of an unconditional guarantee.
(C) They usually practice in fields in which the outcomes are predictable.
(D) Their fees are usually more affordable than those charged by other professional service firms.
(E) Their clients are usually already satisfied with the quality of service that is delivered.

Seeking a competitive advantage, some professional service firms (for example, firms providing advertising, accounting, or health care services) have considered offering unconditional guarantees of satisfaction. Such guarantees specify what clients can expect and what the firm will do if it fails to fulfill these expectations. Particularly with first-time clients, an unconditional guarantee can be an effective marketing tool if the client is very cautious, the firm’s fees are high, the negative consequences of bad service are grave, or business is difficult to obtain through referrals and word-of-mouth (orally communicated; also: generated from or reliant on oral publicity “word”of”mouth customers” “a word”of”mouth business”).

However, an unconditional guarantee can sometimes hinder marketing efforts. With its implication that failure is possible, the guarantee may, paradoxically, cause clients to doubt the service firm’s ability to deliver the promised level of service. It may conflict with a firm’s desire to appear sophisticated, or may even suggest that a firm is begging for business. In legal and health care services, it may mislead clients by suggesting that lawsuits or medical procedures will have guaranteed outcomes. Indeed, professional service firms with outstanding reputations and performance to match have little to gain from offering unconditional guarantees. And any firm that implements an unconditional guarantee without undertaking a commensurate commitment to quality of service is merely employing a potentially costly marketing gimmick.

1.The primary function of the passage as a whole is to

(A) account for the popularity of a practice

(B) evaluate the utility of a practice

(C) demonstrate how to institute a practice

(D) weigh the ethics of using a strategy（B）

(E) explain the reasons for pursuing a strategy

2.All of the following are mentioned in the passage as circumstances in which professional service firms can benefit from offering an unconditional guarantee EXCEPT:

(A) The firm is having difficulty retaining its clients of long standing.

(B) The firm is having difficulty getting business through client recommendations.

(C) The firm charges substantial fees for its services.

(D) The adverse effects of poor performance by the firm are significant for the client.（A）

(E) The client is reluctant to incur risk.

3.Which of the following is cited in the passage as a goal of some professional service firms in offering unconditional guarantees of satisfaction?

(A) A limit on the firm’s liability

(B) Successful competition against other firms

(C) Ability to justify fee increases

(D) Attainment of an outstanding reputation in a field（B）

(E) Improvement in the quality of the firm’s service

4.The passage’s description of the issue raised by unconditional guarantees for health care or legal services most clearly implies that which of the following is true?

(A) The legal and medical professions have standards of practice that would be violated by attempts to fulfill such unconditional guarantees.

(B) The result of a lawsuit of medical procedure cannot necessarily be determined in advance by the professionals handling a client’s case.

(C) The dignity of the legal and medical professions is undermined by any attempts at marketing of professional services, including unconditional guarantees.

(D) Clients whose lawsuits or medical procedures have unsatisfactory outcomes cannot be adequately compensated by financial settlements alone.（B）

(E) Predicting the monetary cost of legal or health care services is more difficult than predicting the monetary cost of other types of professional services.

5.Which of the following hypothetical situations best exemplifies the potential problem noted in the second sentence of the second paragraph (lines 14-17)?

(A) A physician’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction encourages patients to sue for malpractice if they are unhappy with the treatment they receive.

(B) A lawyer’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction makes clients suspect that the lawyer needs to find new clients quickly to increase the firm’s income.

(C) A business consultant’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction is undermined when the consultant fails to provide all of the services that are promised.

(D) An architect’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction makes clients wonder how often the architect’s buildings fail to please clients.（D）

(E) An accountant’s unconditional guarantee of satisfaction leads clients to believe that tax returns prepared by the accountant are certain to be accurate.

6.The passage most clearly implies which of the following about the professional service firms mentioned in line 22?

(A) They are unlikely to have offered unconditional guarantees of satisfaction in the past.

(B) They are usually profitable enough to be able to compensate clients according to the terms of an unconditional guarantee.

(C) They usually practice in fields in which the outcomes are predictable.

(D) Their fees are usually more affordable than those charged by other professional service firms.（E）

(E) Their clients are usually already satisfied with the quality of service that is delivered.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-24 16:09
Although genetic mutations in bacteria and viruses can lead to epidemics, some epidemics are caused by bacteria and viruses that have undergone no significant genetic change. In analyzing the latter, scientists have discovered theimportance of social and ecological factors to epidemics. Poliomyelitis, for example, emerged as an epidemic in the United States in the twentieth century; by then, modern sanitation was able to delay exposure to polio until adolescence or adulthood, at which time polio infection produced paralysis. Previously, infection had occurred during infancy, when it typically provided lifelong immunity without paralysis. Thus, the hygiene that helped prevent typhoid epidemics indirectly fostered a paralytic polio epidemic. Another example is Lyme disease, which is caused by bacteria that are transmitted by deer ticks. It occurred only sporadically during the late nineteenth century but has recently become prevalent in parts of the United States, largely due to an increase in the deer population that occurred simultaneously with the growth of the suburbs and increased outdoor recreational activities in the deer’s habitat. Similarly, an outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever became an epidemic in Asia in the 1950’s because of ecological changes that caused Aedes aegypti, the mosquito that transmits the dengue virus, to proliferate. The stage is now set(the stage is set for sth, 为。。。创作了条件) in the United States for a dengue epidemic because of the inadvertent introduction and wide dissemination of another mosquito, Aedes albopictus.


一段呀，
开始的时候，认为认为流行病是因为基因突变引起的。但是，有些流行病的流行却不是这个原因。科学家发现，social factors and ecoological factors 引起了一些epidemic.  之后例子，一个是社会因素的例子，3个ecological factors 的例子。

错误　５

1. The passage suggests that a lack of modern sanitation would make which of the following most likely to occur?
(A) An outbreak of Lyme disease
(B) An outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever
(C) An epidemic of typhoid
(D) An epidemic of paralytic polio among infants
(E) An epidemic of paralytic polio among adolescents and adults


2. According to the passage, the outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever in the 1950’s occurred for which of the following reasons?
(A) The mosquito Aedes aegypti was newly introduced into Asia.
(B) The mosquito Aedes aegypti became more numerous.
(C) The mosquito Aedes albopictus became infected with the dengue virus.
(D) Individuals who would normally acquire immunity to the dengue virus as infants were not infected until later in life.
(E) More people began to visit and inhabit areas in which mosquitoes live and breed.


3. It can be inferred from the passage that Lyme disease has become prevalent in parts of the United States because of which of the following?
(A) The inadvertent introduction of Lyme disease bacteria to the United States
(B) The inability of modern sanitation methods to eradicate Lyme disease bacteria
(C) A genetic mutation in Lyme disease bacteria that makes them more virulent
(D) The spread of Lyme disease bacteria from infected humans to noninfected humans
(E) An increase in the number of humans who encounter deer ticks


4. Which of the following can most reasonably be concluded about the mosquito Aedes albopictus on the basis of information given in the passage?
(A) It is native to the United States.
(B) It can proliferate only in Asia.
(C) It transmits the dengue virus.
(D) It caused an epidemic of dengue hemorrhagic fever in the 1950’s.
(E) It replaced Aedes aegypti in Asia when ecological changes altered Aedes aegypti’s habitat.


5. Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?
(A) A paradox is stated, discussed and left unresolved.
(B) Two opposing explanations are presented, argued, and reconciled.
(C) A theory is proposed and is then followed by descriptions of three experiments that support the theory.
(D) A generalization is stated and is then followed by three instances that support the generalization.
(E) An argument is described and is then followed by three counterexamples that refute the argument.
额。。。什么是theory? 什么是ｇｅｎａｒｌｉｚａｔｉｏｎ．

6. Which of the following, if true, would most strengthen the author’s assertion about the cause of the Lyme disease outbreak in the United States?
(A) The deer population was smaller in the late nineteenth century than in the mid-twentieth century.
(B) Interest in outdoor recreation began to grow in the late nineteenth century.
(C) In recent years the suburbs have stopped growing.
(D) Outdoor recreation enthusiasts routinely take measures to protect themselves against Lyme disease.
(E) Scientists have not yet developed a vaccine that can prevent Lyme disease.

这题 我开始想选B的。但是时点一比较，我觉得A的说服力更大。

Although genetic mutations in bacteria and viruses can lead to epidemics, some epidemics are caused by bacteria and viruses that have undergone no significant genetic change. In analyzing the latter, scientists have discovered the importance of social and ecological factors to epidemics. Poliomyelitis (poliomyelitis: n.小儿麻痹症, 急性骨髓灰白质炎), for example, emerged as an epidemic in the United States in the twentieth century; by then (by then: 到那时候), modern sanitation was able to delay exposure to polio (POLIOMYELITIS)until adolescence or adulthood, at which time polio infection produced paralysis. Previously, infection had occurred during infancy, when it typically provided lifelong immunity without paralysis. Thus, the hygiene that helped prevent typhoid epidemics indirectly fostered a paralytic polio epidemic. Another example is Lyme disease, which is caused by bacteria that are transmitted by deer ticks. It occurred only sporadically during the late nineteenth century but has recently become prevalent in parts of the United States, largely due to an increase in the deer population that occurred simultaneously with the growth of the suburbs and increased outdoor recreational activities in the deer’s habitat. Similarly, an outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever became an epidemic in Asia in the 1950’s because of ecological changes that caused Aedes aegypti, the mosquito that transmits the dengue virus, to proliferate. The stage is now set in the United States for a dengue epidemic because of the inadvertent introduction and wide dissemination of another mosquito, Aedesalbopictus.

1.The passage suggests that a lack of modern sanitation would make which of the following most likely to occur?

(A) An outbreak of Lyme disease

(B) An outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever

(C) An epidemic of typhoid

(D) An epidemic of paralytic polio among infants（C）

(E) An epidemic of paralytic polio among adolescents and adults

2.According to the passage, the outbreak of dengue hemorrhagic fever in the 1950’s occurred for which of the following reasons?

(A) The mosquito Aedes aegypti was newly introduced into Asia.

(B) The mosquito Aedes aegypti became more numerous.

(C) The mosquito Aedes albopictus became infected with the dengue virus.

(D) Individuals who would normally acquire immunity to the dengue virus as infants were not infected until later in life.（B）

(E) More people began to visit and inhabit areas in which mosquitoes live and breed.

3.It can be inferred from the passage that Lyme disease has become prevalent in parts of the United States because of which of the following?

(A) The inadvertent introduction of Lyme disease bacteria to the United States

(B) The inability of modern sanitation methods to eradicate Lyme disease bacteria

(C) A genetic mutation in Lyme disease bacteria that makes them more virulent

(D) The spread of Lyme disease bacteria from infected humans to noninfected humans（E）

(E) An increase in the number of humans who encounter deer ticks

4.Which of the following can most reasonably be concluded about the mosquito Aedes albopictus on the basis of information given in the passage?

(A) It is native to the United States.

(B) It can proliferate only in Asia.

(C) It transmits the dengue virus.

(D) It caused an epidemic of dengue hemorrhagic fever in the 1950’s.（C）

(E) It replaced Aedes aegypti in Asia when ecological changes altered Aedes aegypti’s habitat.

5.Which of the following best describes the organization of the passage?

(A) A paradox is stated, discussed and left unresolved.

(B) Two opposing explanations are presented, argued, and reconciled.

(C) A theory is proposed and is then followed by descriptions of three experiments that support the theory.

(D) A generalization is stated and is then followed by three instances that support the generalization.（D）

(E) An argument is described and is then followed by three counterexamples that refute the argument.

6.Which of the following, if true, would most strengthen the author’s assertion about the cause of the Lyme disease outbreak in the United States?

(A) The deer population was smaller in the late nineteenth century than in the mid-twentieth century.

(B) Interest in outdoor recreation began to grow in the late nineteenth century.

(C) In recent years the suburbs have stopped growing.

(D) Outdoor recreation enthusiasts routinely take measures to protect themselves against Lyme disease.（A）

(E) Scientists have not yet developed a vaccine that can prevent Lyme disease.

---

作者: 女王的肥皂    时间: 2012-8-24 17:07
Two modes of argumentation have been used on behalf of women’s emancipation in Western societies. Arguments in what could be called the “relational” feminist tradition maintain the doctrine of “equality in difference,” or equity as distinct for equality. They posit that biological distinctions between the sexes result in a necessary sexual division of labor in the family and throughout society and that women’s procreative labor is currently undervalued by society, to the disadvantage of women. By contrast, the individualist feminist traditionemphasizes individual human rights and celebrates women’s quest for personal autonomy（=independency）, while downplaying the importance of gender roles and minimizing discussion of childbearing and its attendant responsibilities.
Before the late nineteenth century, these views coexisted within the feminist movement, often within the writings of the same individual. Between 1890 and 1920, however, relational feminism, which had been the dominant strain in feminist thought, and which still predominates among European and non-Western feminists, lost ground in England and the United States. Because the concept of individual rights was already well established in the Anglo-Saxon legal and political tradition, individualist feminism came to predominate in English-speaking countries. At the same time, the goals of the two approaches began to seem increasingly irreconcilable. Individualist feminists began to advocate a totally gender-blind system with equal rights for all. Relational feminists, while agreeing that equal educational and economic opportunities outside the home should be available for all women, continued to emphasize women’s special contributions to society as homemakers and mothers; they demanded special treatment including protective legislation for women workers, state-sponsored maternity benefits, and paid compensation for housework.
Relational arguments have a major pitfall: because they underline women’s physiological and psychological distinctiveness, they are often appropriated by political adversaries and used to endorse male privilege. But the individualist approach, by attacking gender roles, denying the significance of physiological difference, and condemning existing familial institutions as hopelessly patriarchal, has often simply treated as irrelevant the family roles important to many women（倒装）. If the individualist framework, with its claim for women’s autonomy, could be harmonized with the family-oriented concerns of relational feminists, a more fruitful model for contemporary feminist politics could emerge.

Two modes of argumentation have been used on behalf of women’s emancipation in Western societies
on behalf of sth,= for sth.
“equality in difference,” or equity as distinct for equality  这个看的想哭。
注意，equal rights for all.这个是女性题材的一贯主张，不是同工同酬，而是女人有权力做和男人一样的工作。
patriarchal： ruled or controlled only by men
Paternalism
                 这两次的意思真是南辕北辙呀。

第一段，关于女性解放有两种说法：1 relational feminist tradtion 认为女性的生育能力被社会低估了；2  individualist feminist tadition 认为应鼓励女性却追求个人的独立.
第二段，Anglo-Saxon国家，Rlational 让位给了Idividial tradition. Relational 虽然承认 equal right for all, 到是还是认为女人扮演妈妈的角色，应该给予更过的帮助。
第三段，R的强调成了别人攻击的靶子，而Ｉ却忽略家庭对女性的重要作用。作者希望出现一个能整合二者的观点的出现。

错误 4

1. The author of the passage alludes to the well-established nature of the concept of individual rights in the Anglo-Saxon legal and political tradition in order to
(A) illustrate the influence of individualist feminist thought on more general intellectual trends in English history
(B) argue that feminism was already a part of the larger Anglo-Saxon intellectual tradition, even though this has often gone unnoticed by critics of women’s emancipation
(C) explain the decline in individualist thinking among feminists in non-English-speaking countries
(D) help account for an increasing shift toward individualist feminism among feminists in English-speaking countries
(E) account for the philosophical differences between individualist and relational feminists in English-speaking countries


2. The passage suggests that the author of the passage believes which of the following?
(A) The predominance of individualist feminism in English-speaking countries is a historical phenomenon, the causes of which have not yet been investigated.
(B) The individualist and relational feminist views are irreconcilable, given their theoretical differences concerning the foundations of society.
(C) A consensus concerning the direction of future feminist politics will probably soon emerge, given the awareness among feminists of the need for cooperation among women.
(D) Political adversaries of feminism often misuse arguments predicated on differences between the sexes to argue that the existing social system should be maintained.
(E) Relational feminism provides the best theoretical framework for contemporary feminist politics, but individualist feminism could contribute much toward refining and strengthening modern feminist thought.


3. It can be inferred from the passage that the individualist feminist tradition denies the validity of which of the following causal statements?
(A) A division of labor in a social group can result in increased efficiency with regard to the performance of group tasks.
(B) A division of labor in a social group causes inequities in the distribution of opportunities and benefits among group members.
(C) A division of labor on the basis of gender in a social group is necessitated by the existence of sex-linked biological differences between male and female members of the group.
(D) Culturally determined distinctions based on gender in a social group foster the existence of differing attitudes and opinions among group members.
(E) Educational programs aimed at reducing inequalities based on gender among members of a social group can result in a sense of greater well-being for all members of the group.


4. According to the passage, relational feminists and individualist feminists agree that
(A) individual human rights take precedence over most other social claims
(B) the gender-based division of labor in society should be eliminated
(C) laws guaranteeing equal treatment for all citizens regardless of gender should be passed
(D) a greater degree of social awareness concerning the importance of motherhood would be beneficial to society
(E) the same educational and economic opportunities should be available to both sexes
额。。自己总结不小心就是错的，还是找文章里的安全。
再想想，我觉得我还是不理解BE的区别。

5. According to the author, which of the following was true of feminist thought in Western societies before 1890?
(A) Individualist feminist arguments were not found in the thought or writing of non-English-speaking feminists.
(B) Individualist feminism was a strain in feminist thought, but another strain, relational feminism, predominated.
(C) Relational and individualist approaches were equally prevalent in feminist thought and writing.
(D) The predominant view among feminists held that the welfare of women was ultimately less important than the welfare of children.
(E) The predominant view among feminists held that the sexes should receive equal treatment under the law.


6. The author implies that which of the following was true of most feminist thinkers in England and the United States after 1920?
(A) They were less concerned with politics than with intellectual issues.
(B) They began to reach a broader audience and their programs began to be adopted by mainstream political parties.
(C) They called repeatedly for international cooperation among women’s groups to achieve their goals.
(D) They moderated their initial criticism of the economic systems that characterized their societies.
(E) They did not attempt to unite the two different feminist approaches in their thought.


Two modes of argumentation have been used on behalf of women’s emancipation in Western societies. Arguments in what could be called the “relational” feminist tradition maintain the doctrine of “equality in difference,” or equity as distinct for equality. They posit that biological distinctions between the sexes result in a necessary sexual division of labor (division of labor: n. 劳动力的分工) in the family and throughout society and that women’s procreative (procreative: adj.生产的, 有生殖力的) labor is currently undervalued by society, to the disadvantage of women. By contrast, the individualist feminist tradition emphasizes individual human rights and celebrates women’s quest for personal autonomy, while downplaying the importance of gender roles and minimizing discussion of childbearing and its attendant (accompanying or following as a consequence or result “problems attendant upon pollution”)responsibilities.

Before the late nineteenth century, these views coexisted within the feminist movement, often within the writings of the same individual. Between 1890 and 1920, however, relational feminism, which had been the dominant strain in feminist thought, and which still predominates among European and non-Western feminists, lost ground in England and the United States. Because the concept of individual rights was already well established in the Anglo-Saxon legal and political tradition, individualist feminism came to predominate in English-speaking countries. At the same time, the goals of the two approaches began to seem increasingly irreconcilable. Individualist feminists began to advocate a totally gender-blind system with equal rights for all. Relational feminists, while agreeing that equal educational and economic opportunities outside the home should be available for all women, continued to emphasize women’s special contributions to society as homemakers and mothers; they demanded special treatment including protective legislation for women workers, state-sponsored maternity benefits, and paid compensation for housework.

Relational arguments have a major pitfall: because they underline women’s physiological and psychological distinctiveness, they are often appropriated (to take or make use of without authority or right)by political adversaries and used to endorse male privilege. But the individualist approach, by attacking gender roles, denying the significance of physiological difference, and condemning existing familial institutions as hopelessly patriarchal, has often simply treated as irrelevant the family roles important to many women. If the individualist framework, with its claim for women’s autonomy, could be harmonized with the family-oriented concerns of relational feminists, a more fruitful model for contemporary feminist politics could emerge.

1.The author of the passage alludes to the well-established nature of the concept of individual rights in the Anglo-Saxon legal and political tradition in order to

(A) illustrate the influence of individualist feminist thought on more general intellectual trends in English history

(B) argue that feminism was already a part of the larger Anglo-Saxon intellectual tradition, even though this has often gone unnoticed by critics of women’s emancipation

(C) explain the decline in individualist thinking among feminists in non-English-speaking countries

(D) help account for an increasing shift toward individualist feminism among feminists in English-speaking countries（D）

(E) account for the philosophical differences between individualist and relational feminists in English-speaking countries

2.The passage suggests that the author of the passage believes which of the following?

(A) The predominance of individualist feminism in English-speaking countries is a historical phenomenon, the causes of which have not yet been investigated.

(B) The individualist and relational feminist views are irreconcilable, given their theoretical differences concerning the foundations of society.

(C) A consensus concerning the direction of future feminist politics will probably soon emerge, given the awareness among feminists of the need for cooperation among women.

(D) Political adversaries of feminism often misuse arguments predicated on differences between the sexes to argue that the existing social system should be maintained.（D）

(E) Relational feminism provides the best theoretical framework for contemporary feminist politics, but individualist feminism could contribute much toward refining and strengthening modern feminist thought.

3.It can be inferred from the passage that the individualist feminist tradition denies the validity of which of the following causal statements?

(A) A division of labor in a social group can result in increased efficiency with regard to the performance of group tasks.

(B) A division of labor in a social group causes inequities in the distribution of opportunities and benefits among group members.

(C) A division of labor on the basis of gender in a social group is necessitated by the existence of sex-linked biological differences between male and female members of the group.

(D) Culturally determined distinctions based on gender in a social group foster the existence of differing attitudes and opinions among group members.（C）

(E) Educational programs aimed at reducing inequalities based on gender among members of a social group can result in a sense of greater well-being for all members of the group.

4.According to the passage, relational feminists and individualist feminists agree that

(A) individual human rights take precedence over most other social claims

(B) the gender-based division of labor in society should be eliminated

(C) laws guaranteeing equal treatment for all citizens regardless of gender should be passed

(D) a greater degree of social awareness concerning the importance of motherhood would be beneficial to society（E）

(E) the same educational and economic opportunities should be available to both sexes

5.According to the author, which of the following was true of feminist thought in Western societies before 1890?

(A) Individualist feminist arguments were not found in the thought or writing of non-English-speaking feminists.

(B) Individualist feminism was a strain in feminist thought, but another strain, relational feminism, predominated.

(C) Relational and individualist approaches were equally prevalent in feminist thought and writing.

(D) The predominant view among feminists held that the welfare of women was ultimately less important than the welfare of children.（B）

(E) The predominant view among feminists held that the sexes should receive equal treatment under the law.

6.The author implies that which of the following was true of most feminist thinkers in England and the United States after 1920?

(A) They were less concerned with politics than with intellectual issues.

(B) They began to reach a broader audience and their programs began to be adopted by mainstream political parties.

(C) They called repeatedly for international cooperation among women’s groups to achieve their goals.

(D) They moderated their initial criticism of the economic systems that characterized their societies.（E）

(E) They did not attempt to unite the two different feminist approaches in their thought.

---

欢迎光临 ChaseDream (https://forum.chasedream.com/)

Powered by Discuz! X3.3